diff options
| -rw-r--r-- | .gitattributes | 3 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 7001-8.txt | 15146 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 7001-8.zip | bin | 0 -> 329830 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | LICENSE.txt | 11 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | README.md | 2 |
5 files changed, 15162 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitattributes b/.gitattributes new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6833f05 --- /dev/null +++ b/.gitattributes @@ -0,0 +1,3 @@ +* text=auto +*.txt text +*.md text diff --git a/7001-8.txt b/7001-8.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6f32ee3 --- /dev/null +++ b/7001-8.txt @@ -0,0 +1,15146 @@ +The Project Gutenberg EBook of History of the Philippine Islands Vols 1 +and 2, by Antonio de Morga + +Copyright laws are changing all over the world. Be sure to check the +copyright laws for your country before downloading or redistributing +this or any other Project Gutenberg eBook. + +This header should be the first thing seen when viewing this Project +Gutenberg file. Please do not remove it. Do not change or edit the +header without written permission. + +Please read the "legal small print," and other information about the +eBook and Project Gutenberg at the bottom of this file. Included is +important information about your specific rights and restrictions in +how the file may be used. You can also find out about how to make a +donation to Project Gutenberg, and how to get involved. + + +**Welcome To The World of Free Plain Vanilla Electronic Texts** + +**eBooks Readable By Both Humans and By Computers, Since 1971** + +*****These eBooks Were Prepared By Thousands of Volunteers!***** + + +Title: History of the Philippine Islands Vols 1 and 2 + +Author: Antonio de Morga + +Release Date: December, 2004 [EBook #7001] +[Yes, we are more than one year ahead of schedule] +[This file was first posted on February 21, 2003] + +Edition: 10 + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: Latin-1 + +*** START OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORY OF THE PHILIPPINE *** + + + + +This eBook was produced by Jeroen Hellingman + + + + + +MORGA'S PHILIPPINE ISLANDS + +VOLUME I + + +Of this work five hundred copies are issued separately from "The +Philippine Islands, 1493-1898," in fifty-five volumes. + + + + + +HISTORY OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS + +From their discovery by Magellan in 1521 to the beginning of the XVII +Century; with descriptions of Japan, China and adjacent countries, by + +Dr. ANTONIO DE MORGA + +Alcalde of Criminal Causes, in the Royal Audiencia of Nueva España, +and Counsel for the Holy Office of the Inquisition + +Completely translated into English, edited and annotated by + +E. H. BLAIR and J. A. ROBERTSON With Facsimiles + +[Separate publication from "The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898" in +which series this appears as volumes 15 and 16.] + +VOLUME I + +Cleveland, Ohio The Arthur H. Clark Company 1907 + + +COPYRIGHT 1907 + +THE ARTUR H. CLARK COMPANY + +ALL RIGHTS RESERVED + + +CONTENTS OF VOLUME I [xv of series] + +Preface + +Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas. Dr. Antonio de Morga; Mexico, 1609 + +Bibliographical Data + +Appendix A: Expedition of Thomas Candish + +Appendix B: Early years of the Dutch in the East Indies + + +ILLUSTRATIONS + +View of city of Manila; photographic facsimile of engraving in +Mallet's Description de l'univers (Paris, 1683), ii, p. 127, from +copy in Library of Congress. + +Title-page of Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, by Dr. Antonio de Morga +(Mexico, 1609); photographic facsimile from copy in Lenox Library. + +Map showing first landing-place of Legazpi in the Philippines; +photographic facsimile of original MS. map in the pilots' log-book +of the voyage, in Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla. + +View of Dutch vessels stationed in bay of Albay; from T. de Bry's +Peregrinationes, 1st ed. (Amsterdame, 1602), tome xvi, no. iv. "Voyage +faict entovr de l'univers par Sr. Olivier dv Nort"--p. 36; photographic +facsimile, from copy in Boston Public Library. + +Battle with Oliver van Noordt, near Manila, December 14, 1600; ut +supra, p. 44. + +Sinking of the Spanish flagship in battle with van Noordt; ut supra, +p. 45. + +Capture of van Noordt's admiral's ship; ut supra, p. 46. + + + +PREFACE + +In this volume is presented the first installment of Dr. Antonio +de Morga's Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas. Events here described +cover the years 1493-1603, and the history proper of the islands from +1565. Morga's work is important, as being written by a royal official +and a keen observer and participator in affairs. Consequently he +touches more on the practical everyday affairs of the islands, and in +his narrative shows forth the policies of the government, its ideals, +and its strengths and weaknesses. His book is written in the true +historic spirit, and the various threads of the history of the islands +are followed systematically. As being one of the first of published +books regarding the Philippines, it has especial value. Political, +social, and economic phases of life, both among the natives and their +conquerors, are treated. The futility of the Spanish policy in making +external expeditions, and its consequent neglect of internal affairs; +the great Chinese question; the growth of trade; communication with +Japan; missionary movements from the islands to surrounding countries; +the jealous and envious opposition of the Portuguese; the dangers of +sea-voyages: all these are portrayed vividly, yet soberly. Morga's +position in the state allowed him access to many documents, and he +seems to have been on general good terms with all classes, so that he +readily gained a knowledge of facts. The character of Morga's work +and his comprehensive treatment of the history, institutions, and +products of the Philippines, render possible and desirable the copious +annotations of this and the succeeding volume. These annotations are +contributed in part by those of Lord Stanley's translation of Morga, +and those of Rizal's reprint, while the Recopilación de leyes de +Indias furnishes a considerable number of laws. + +The book is preceded by the usual licenses and authorizations, followed +by the author's dedication and introduction. In the latter he declares +his purpose in writing his book to be that "the deeds achieved by our +Spaniards in the discovery, conquest, and conversion of the Filipinas +Islands--as well as various fortunes that they have had from time to +time in the great kingdoms and among the pagan peoples surrounding the +islands" may be known. The first seven chapters of the book treat of +"discoveries, conquests, and other events ... until the death of Don +Pedro de Acuña." The eighth chapter treats of the natives, government, +conversion, and other details. + +In rapid survey the author passes the line of demarcation of Alexander +VI, and the voyages of Magalhães and Elcano, Loaisa, Villalobos, +and others, down to the expedition of Legazpi. The salient points +of this expedition are briefly outlined, his peaceful reception +by Tupas and the natives, but their later hostility, because the +Spaniards "seized their provisions," their defeat, the Spaniards' +first settlement in Sebu, and the despatching of the advice-boat to +Nueva España to discover the return passage, and inform the viceroy of +the success of the expedition. From Sebu the conquest and settlement +is extended to other islands, and the Spanish capital is finally moved +to Manila. Events come rapidly. The conquest proceeds "by force of +arms or by the efforts of the religious who have sown the good seeds +of the gospel." Land is allotted to the conquerors, and towns are +gradually founded, and the amount of the natives' tribute is fixed. + +At Legazpi's death Guido de Lavezaris assumes his responsibilities +by virtue of a royal despatch among Legazpi's papers, and continues +the latter's plans. The pirate Limahon is defeated after having slain +Martin de Goiti. Trade with China is established "and as a consequence +has been growing ever since." The two towns of Betis and Lubao +allotted by Lavezaris to himself are taken from him later by order +of his successor, Dr. Francisco de Sande, but are restored to him by +express order of the king, together with the office of master-of-camp. + +Succeeding Lavezaris in 1575, Dr. Francisco de Sande continues "the +pacification of the islands .... especially that of the province +of Camarines." The town of Nueva Cáceres is founded, and Sande's +partially effective campaign to Borneo, and its offshoot--that of +Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa to Mindanao--undertaken. The "San +Juanillo" is despatched to Nueva España, "but it was lost at sea +and never heard of again." Sande is relieved of his governorship +by Gonzalo Ronquillo de Pefialosa, and after his residencia returns +"to Nueva España as auditor of Mexico." + +Chapter III details the events of Gonzalo Ronquillo de +Pefialosa's administration and the interim of government of Diego +Ronquillo. Events, with the greater stability constantly given the +islands, follow more quickly. Gonzalo de Peñalosa, by an agreement with +the king, is to take six hundred colonists--married and single--to +the islands, in return for which he is to be governor for life. He +establishes the town of Arevalo in Panay, builds the Chinese Parián, +endeavors, although unsuccessfully, to discover a return passage +to Nueva España, by the South Sea, and despatches "a ship to Peru +with merchandise to trade for certain goods which he said that the +Filipinas needed." He imposes the two per cent export duty on goods +to Nueva España, and the three per cent duty on Chinese merchandise, +and "although he was censured for having done this without his +Majesty's orders" they "remained in force, and continued to be imposed +thenceforward." The first expedition in aid of Tidore is sent for +the conquest of the island of Ternate, but proves a failure. Cagayan +is first pacified, and the town of Nueva Cáceres founded. Gabriel de +Rivera, after an expedition to Borneo, is sent to Spain to consult +the best interests of the islands. Domingo de Salazar receives his +appointment as bishop, and is accompanied to the islands by Antonio +Sedeño and Alonso Sanchez, the first Jesuits in the islands. In 1583 +Gonzalo de Peñalosa dies, and is succeeded by his kinsman Diego +Ronquillo. Shortly after occurs Manila's first disastrous fire, +but the city is rebuilt, although with difficulty. In consequence of +Rivera's trip to Spain, the royal Audiencia of Manila is established +with Santiago de Vera as its president and governor of the islands. + +In the fourth chapter are related the events of Santiago de Vera's +administration, and the suppression of the Audiencia. Vera reaches +the islands in 1584, whence shortly afterwards he despatches another +expedition to the Malucos which also fails. The pacification continues, +and the islands are freed from a rebellion and insurrection conspired +between Manila and Pampanga chiefs. Fortifications are built and an +artillery foundry established under the charge of natives. During +this term Candish makes his memorable voyage, passing through +some of the islands. Finally the Audiencia is suppressed, through +the representations made by Alonso Sanchez, who is sent to Spain +and Rome with authority to act for all classes of society. On his +return he brings from Rome "many relics, bulls, and letters for the +Filipinas." Through the influence of the Jesuit, Gomez Perez Dasmariñas +receives appointment as governor of the islands; and with his salary +increased to "ten thousand Castilian ducados" and with despatches for +the suppression of the Audiencia, and the establishment of regular +soldiers, he arrives at Manila in May, 1590. + +Chapter V deals with the term of Gomez Perez Dasmariñas and the +interims of Pedro de Rojas and Luis Perez Dasmariñas. The term of the +new governor is characterized by his great energy and enthusiasm. The +Manila wall and other fortifications, the building of galleys, the +regulation of trade, various pacifications, the rebuilding of Manila, +and the opening of negotiations with Japan, are all a part of his +administration, and he is the inspirer of them all. The first note +to the future expeditions to, and troubles with, Camboja and Siam is +struck by an embassy from the first country in charge of Diego Belloso +with offers of trade and friendship and requests for aid against Siam, +the latter being at the time deferred. In accordance with his great +desire to conquer Ternate, the governor fits out a great fleet in +1593, sending the advance vessels to the Pintados in care of his +son. Shortly after, leaving the city in charge of Diego Ronquillo, +although with too few troops for defense, Gomez Perez sets out to +join his son, but is assassinated by his Chinese rowers, who mutiny +and make off with the galley. After his death, the contests for his +office begin, for the dead governor had assured various people that +they would be appointed in case of his death. Especially had he done +this with Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa, a wealthy man of the Pintados, +to whom he "had shown an appointment drawn in his favor." In Manila, +Pedro de Rojas, lieutenant-assessor, is chosen governor ad interim, +but after forty days Luis Perez Dasmariñas takes the office by +virtue of an appointment regularly drawn in his favor. The return +of the troops to Manila proves an efficacious relief from fears of +a Chinese invasion. The vessels sent to Nueva España in 1593 fail +to make the voyage because of stormy weather, but the governor's +death is learned in Spain by way of India. The troubles between the +bishop and governor culminate somewhat before the latter's death, +in the departure of the former for Spain, as a result of which an +archbishopric with suffragan bishops is established in the islands, +and the Audiencia is reëstablished. The office of lieutenant-assessor +is given more weight and Morga is sent out to fill it in 1595 under +its changed title of lieutenant-governor. In the administration of +Luis Perez Dasmariñas affairs begin actively with Camboja through +the expedition despatched under Juan Xuarez Gallinato, and Blas Ruiz +de Hernan Gonzalez and Diego Belloso. The governor, completely under +the influence of the Dominicans, although against the advice of the +"majority of people in the city" sends a fleet to Camboja. Gallinato +fails to reach that country until after Blas Ruiz and Belloso have +quarreled with the Chinese there, killed the usurping Cambodian king, +Anacaparan, and thrown the country into confusion. Much to their +displeasure Gallinato refuses to continue the conquest, chides the +others harshly, and departs for Manila by way of Cochinchina. At +Cochinchina Blas Ruiz and Belloso go to the kingdom of Lao to find +the legitimate king of Camboja, Prauncar. On their arrival they find +that he has died, but partly through their efforts and those of +two Malays, the king's younger son, who still survives, is placed +on the throne. Gallinato experiences difficulty in Cochinchina, +where he endeavors to regain the standard and various other articles +from the galley of Gomez Perez that had been stolen by the Chinese, +but finally returns safely to Manila. Meanwhile Estevan Rodriguez de +Figueroa agrees to subdue Mindanao at his own expense, in return for +which he is to have its governorship for two generations. In pursuance +of this he fits out a large expedition, but shortly after reaching +the island is killed in a fight and ambush, whereupon his first +commanding officer Juan de la Xara schemes to continue the expedition, +and establishes his men in a settlement near Tampacan, called Murcia. + +The administration of Governor Francisco Tello forms the subject-matter +of chapter VI. At his arrival in 1596, news is received in the island +of the appointment of Fray Ignacio de Santibañez as archbishop, +and of two appointments for bishops. News of the death of Estevan +Rodriguez is brought to Manila, and the machinations of Juan de la +Xara to carry on the expedition independently of Manila learned. His +death shortly after arrest, while on his way to Oton to push his suit +with Rodriguez's widow, frustrates his plans. Juan Ronquillo is sent +to Mindanao and takes over the command there, but being discouraged +by the outlook advises an evacuation of the river of Mindanao and the +fortifying of La Caldera, on the Mindanao coast. However he gains a +complete victory over the combined forces of Mindanaos and Ternatans, +which causes him to send another despatch to Tello. But the latter's +reply to the first despatch having been received, in accordance with +its orders he burns his fort, and after establishing a garrison at +La Caldera, returns to Manila with the rest of his command. There +he is arrested for not awaiting Tello's second despatch, but is +liberated on producing a letter ordering him in any event to return +to Manila. Gallinato, on his return from Cochinchina is accused by +his own men of not following up the victory at Camboja, for had +he done so, "all that had been hoped in that kingdom would have +been attained." An incipient rebellion in Cagayan is checked by the +murder of its leader by his own countrymen "who had offered to do it +for a reward." In the year 1596, the remnants of Alvaro de Mendaña +de Neira's expedition that had set out from Peru to rediscover the +Solomon Islands reaches the Philippines after great sufferings from +famine and disease, and after the death of many men, among them the +commander himself. The voyage is related in detail in a letter from +the chief pilot, Pedro Fernandez de Quiros to Morga; it is full of +stirring adventure, and of keen and appreciative observation. One of +the vessels, the "San Geronymo" despatched to Nueva España in 1596, +is forced to put in at a Japanese port because of storms. There they +receive ill-treatment, and the efforts of the Franciscan missionaries +in Japan in their behalf lead to the edict sentencing them to death, +in accordance with which six Franciscans, three Jesuits, and seventeen +native helpers are crucified in 1597. Taicosama's wrath, intensified by +the accusation that the Spaniards conquered kingdoms "by first sending +their religious to the kingdom" and by entering afterward "with their +arms," is satisfied by the crucifixion of the religious and their +assistants, and the men of the "San Geronymo" are allowed to return to +Manila. The religious write a letter of farewell to Dr. Morga, in which +they inform him that Japan intends to attack the Philippines. Luis +Navarrete Fajardo is sent to Japan to demand satisfaction, but +accomplishes little. Faranda Quiemon, one of Taicosama's vassals, +a man of obscure birth, obtaining permission to make an expedition of +conquest, sets about his preparations, but owing to lack of resources +and initiative fails to complete them. Meanwhile great caution is +exercised in Manila, and the Japanese residing there are sent back +to Japan, while those coming on trading vessels are well treated but +gotten rid of as soon as possible. Cambodian affairs are again set on +foot, although against the advice of some, through the instrumentality +of Father Alonso Ximenez, a Dominican who had accompanied Gallinato +on the former expedition, but who had been left behind at Cochinchina +through his own disobedience of orders. Affairs in Mindanao and Jolo +assume a threatening aspect. One Juan Pacho, commander of La Caldera, +is killed in an incursion into Jolo with twenty of his men, and a new +commander of La Caldera is appointed until a punitive expedition can be +undertaken. In 1598 the archbishop arrives, and the Manila Audiencia +is reëstablished by royal order, and the seal received with great +pomp and ceremony. A letter received that same year by Morga from +Blas Ruiz details events in Camboja since he and Belloso went there +with Gallinato's expedition. Blas Ruiz seeks to excuse their actions +in Camboja and holds out the hope of Spanish conquest and influence +on the mainland, and asks help from the islands. As a consequence +of this letter, Luis Perez Dasmariñas secures permission to attempt +an expedition to the mainland at his own expense to aid the king of +Camboja and then to seize the kingdom of Champan, whose king was a +constant menace to all navigators throughout that region. Negotiations +with China and the granting of an open port to Spaniards called El +Pinal, are opened and secured through the efforts of Juan de Zamudio +who is sent to China for saltpeter and metals, although with great and +vindictive opposition from the Portuguese, who fear the loss of their +own trade at Macao. At El Pinal the survivors of two of Luis Perez's +three ships meet with Juan de Zamudio, after suffering great storms, +hardships, and wrecks. The same favor is extended him by the Chinese +as to Zamudio, but the Portuguese show their hostility to him also, +imprisoning the men sent by him to Macao to ask for help, and even +attempting force against him. Both Zamudio and a messenger from Luis +Perez carry news of the latter's disaster to Manila, whereupon a ship +and supplies are sent him with orders to return to Manila. Hernando +de los Rios Coronel, sent to Canton by Luis Perez to negotiate with +the Chinese, writes from that city to Dr. Morga concerning China and +the possibility, desirability, and advantages of the Chinese trade in +China instead of Manila, and the opposition of the Portuguese. China +he describes as a country "full of rivers and towns, and without +a palmo of ground left lying idle." Meanwhile the third vessel of +Luis Perez's fleet, commanded by Luis Ortiz, reaches Camboja, where +he and his companions join the Spanish, Portuguese, and Japanese +already there. This small force, which is eyed askance by the Malay +leaders and others envious of, and hostile to them on account of their +prowess and their influence with the weak king, is further increased +by Captain Juan de Mendoza Gamboa and Fray Juan Maldonado, a learned +Dominican, and their men. The former, having obtained permission to +go on a trading expedition to Siam, for which he is given letters of +embassy, is also entrusted to convey certain supplies to Don Luis +at Camboja, where he fails to find him. Maldonado is sent by his +order as a companion to Don Luis. This addition to their forces is +welcomed by the Spaniards in Camboja, and they refuse to let them +depart until hearing definite news of Luis Perez. The arrival of +a contingent of Japanese, mestizos, and one Spaniard, who had left +Japan on a piratical expedition, still further increases the force +in Camboja. The leaders Blas Ruiz, Belloso, and Maldonado treat +with the king on their own account, but not so satisfactorily as +they wish. Conflicts and quarrels arising between their forces and +the Malays, the latter finally overpower and kill the Spaniards, +Portuguese, and Japanese, except several who remain in the country +and Mendoza, Maldonado and a few men who escape in the former's +vessel. In Camboja confusion and anarchy again reign and the king is +bullied and finally killed by the Malays. The Joloans and Mindanaos +are emboldened by the final abandonment and dismantling of the fort +at La Caldera--which is decided upon by the governor against the +opinion of the Audiencia--and, joined in self-defense by the peaceful +natives of Mindanao, make an incursion against Spaniards and natives +in the Pintados in 1599, in which they take immense booty and many +captives. The next year they return with a larger force, but are +defeated by the alcalde-mayor of Arevalo, whereupon they resolve to +be revenged. In Japan the death of Taicosama encourages Geronimo de +Jesus, a Franciscan who has escaped crucifixion, to open negotiations +with his successor Daifusama. The latter, desiring trade for his +own northern province of Quanto, requests the governor of Manila, +through the religious, for commerce, and men to build ships for the +Nueva España trade which he wishes to open. He does not negotiate +concerning religion, for "the profit and benefit to be derived from +friendship and commerce with the Spaniards was more to the taste of +Daifusama than what he had heard concerning their religion." However, +the religious writes that freedom is given to evangelize throughout +Japan, although the only concession given is that the religious could +establish a house at their trading station. In October of 1600 news +reaches Manila of the coming and depredations of Oliver van Noordt's +two vessels. The description of the preparations, made by Morga, +the instructions given him by the governor, his instructions to +Juan de Alcega, and the fight and its consequences follow. In the +same year of 1600 the vessels "Santa Margarita" and "San Geronymo" +are both unable to reach Nueva España, and are wrecked--the latter +near Catanduanes, and the former in the Ladrones, where it is +rifled by the natives and the men surviving distributed through +the different villages. In 1600 the "Santo Tomas" on its way to the +islands puts in at the Ladrones, but the commander, fearing storms, +refuses to wait for the Spanish prisoners of the "Santa Margarita," +although petitioned to do so by the religious and others. Accordingly +a Franciscan, Juan Pobre, full of pity for the unfortunate men, casts +in his lot with them and voluntarily remains behind. The "San Felipe" +is wrecked eighty leguas from Manila, and its cargo taken overland to +that city. Mindanao and Jolo affairs are meanwhile given into command +of Gallinato, and although he is partially successful, the rains, +hunger, and disease work for the natives, and finally in May of 1602, +Gallinato sends to Manila for instructions. Juan de Mendoza and Fray +Juan Maldonado, after leaving Camboja proceed on their journey to +Siam, but are received there coldly by the king, and their trading +is unsatisfactory. Fearing violence they depart one night without +notifying the Siamese, taking with them certain Portuguese held in +Siam as partial prisoners, but are pursued by the Siamese who molest +them until in the open sea. From wounds received during the week's +continual conflict both Mendoza and Maldonado die, the latter first +writing to his Order and advising them "on their consciences not to +again become instruments of a return to Camboja." Troubles in Maluco +between the Dutch and natives on the one side and the Portuguese and +Spanish on the other, render it necessary to send aid several times +from Manila. In March of 1601, a letter is written by the king of +Tidore to Morga requesting aid against Ternate and the Dutch, in +response to which supplies and reënforcements are sent in 1602. + +The seventh chapter deals with events during the period of Pedro de +Acuña's administration. With his arrival in May of 1602, new life and +energy are infused in public affairs. The new governor first concerns +himself with home affairs. He constructs galleys but has to postpone +an intended visit to Pintados, in order to attend to Japan and Jolo, +and despatch the vessels to Nueva España. It is determined to open +commerce with Quanto, but to defer the matter of sending workmen to +Japan to show the Japanese how to construct ships, as that will be +detrimental. Religious of the various orders go to Japan, but are +received less warmly than Geronymo de Jesus's letter leads them to +expect. The latter pressed by Daifusama for the performance of his +promises finally asks permission to go to Manila to advocate them +in person, whence he brings back assurance of trade with Quanto. The +vessel despatched there is forced to put in at another port, but is +allowed to trade there and to return. Two vessels despatched to Nueva +España in 1602 are forced to return, putting in on the way--the first +at the Ladrones and the other at Japan. The first brings back most of +the men wrecked at the Ladrones. The second after rough treatment in +Japan finally escapes. As a result of an embassy sent to Daifusama from +this vessel chapas or writs of safety are provided to the Spaniards so +that any vessel putting into Japanese ports will be well treated in +the future. The reënforcements sent to Gallinato at Jolo serve only +to enable him to break camp and return to Manila. While Acuña is on +his way to Pintados to inspect those islands, a raiding expedition of +Moros goes as far as Luzon and Mindoro, committing many depredations, +thus compelling the governor to return, who narrowly escapes capture. A +punitive expedition of Spaniards and Indians sent in pursuit of the +Moros inflicts but slight damage. Shortly before this a fleet prepared +at Goa for the chastisement of the Malucos sets out under Andrea +Furtado de Mendoza, but is separated by storms. Some of the vessels +with the commander reach Amboina, but in so crippled and destitute +a condition that they are forced to ask help from Manila. Acuña, +although arranging independently for an expedition to Maluco, sends +a force there under Gallinato in 1603 to aid the Portuguese. Early +in that year the prelude to the Chinese troubles of that same year +is given by the coming of the Chinese mandarins to see the island of +gold, which causes many, among them the archbishop and some religious, +to counsel watchfulness. In 1603 occurs the second disastrous fire +in Manila, with a loss of over one million pesos. + +The victorious Malays in Camboja are finally driven out by a +combination of patriotic mandarins, and make the brother of their old +king sovereign, whereupon relations between Camboja and the Philippines +are again established by sending there a number of religious. In May +of 1603 two ships with reënforcements arrive at Manila, bringing +certain ecclesiastical news. The aid rendered Furtado de Mendoza +by Gallinato does not prove sufficient to subdue the Ternatans, and +Gallinato returns to Manila. The present installment of Morga ends +with the courteous letter written to Acuña by Furtado de Mendoza, +in which he renders praise to Gallinato and his men. The remainder +of the book will appear in the succeeding volume. + +The present volume ends with two appendices: the first an abstract +of Thomas Candish's circumnavigation; the second an abstract of Dutch +expeditions to the East Indies. + +THE EDITORS + +May, 1904. + + +SUCESOS DE LAS ISLAS FILIPINAS + +By Dr. Antonio de Morga. Mexico: at the shop of Geronymo Baili, +in the year 1609; printed by Cornelio Adriano Cesar. + +SOURCE: The translation is made from the Harvard copy of the original +printed work. + +TRANSLATION: This is made by Alfonso de Salvio, Norman F. Hall, +and James Alexander Robertson. + + +SVCESOS DE LAS ISLAS FILIPINAS + +DIRIGIDO + +A DON CRISTOVAL GOMEZ DE + +Sandoual y Rojas, Duque de Cea. + +POR EL DOCTOR ANTONIO DE MORGA, + +Alcaldo del Crimen, de la real Audiencia de la Nueua España, Consultor +del santo Oficio de la Inquisicion. + + +EN MEXICO. + +En casa de Geronymo Balli. Año 1609. + +Por Cornelio Adriano Cesar + + + + + +EVENTS IN THE FILIPINAS ISLANDS. + +DEDICATED + +TO DON CRISTOVAL GOMEZ DE + +Sandoval y Rojas, Duke of Cea. + +BY DOCTOR ANTONIO DE MORGA, + +Alcalde of Criminal Causes, in the Royal Audiencia of Nuevà España, +and Counsel for the holy Office of the Inquisition. + +IN MEXICO. + +At the shop of Geronymo Balli, in the year 1609. + +By Cornelio Adriano Cesar. + + + + + +EVENTS IN THE FILIPINAS ISLANDS + +By order of the most excellent Don Luis de Velasco, viceroy of this +Nueva España, and of the most illustrious and reverend Don Fray Garcia +Guerra, archbishop of Mexico, and member of his Majesty's council, +I have examined this book of the Events in the Philipinas Islands, +written by Doctor Antonio de Morga, alcalde of the court in the royal +Audiencia of Mexico. In my judgment it is entertaining, profitable, +and worthy of publication. The author has strictly obeyed the laws of +history therein, in the excellent arrangement of his work, in which +he shows his soundness of intellect and a concise style to which +few attain, together with a true exposition of the subject matter, +as it was written by one who was so fully conversant with it, during +the years that he governed those islands. I have accordingly affixed +my signature to this instrument here at the professed house of the +Society of Jesus in Mexico, on the first of April, 1609. + +JUAN SANCHEZ + +Don Luys de Velasco, knight of the Order of Sanctiago, +viceroy-lieutenant of the king our sovereign, governor and +captain-general of Nueva España, and president of the royal Audiencia +and Chancillería established therein, etc. Whereas Doctor Antonio de +Morga, alcalde of criminal causes in this royal Audiencia, informed me +that he had written a book and treatise on the Events in the Filipinas +Islands, from their earliest discoveries and conquest until the end +of the past year six hundred and seven, and requested me to grant him +permission and privilege to have it printed, to the exclusion of all +others doing the same for a certain period; and whereas I entrusted +Father Juan Sanchez, of the Society of Jesus, with the inspection +of the said book, as my proxy: therefore, I hereby grant permission +to the said Doctor Antonio de Morga, so that, for the period of the +next ten years, he, or his appointee, may freely have the said book +printed by whatever printer he pleases; and I forbid any other person +to do the same within the said time and without the said permission, +under penalty of losing--and he shall lose--the type and accessories +with which the said impression shall be made, and the same shall be +applied in equal shares to his Majesty's exchequer and to the said +Doctor Antonio de Morga. Given in Mexico, on the seventh of the month +of April, one thousand six hundred and nine. + +DON LUYS DE VELASCO + +By order of the viceroy: + +MARTIN LOPEZ GAUNA + +Don Fray Garcia Guerra, by the divine grace and that of the holy +apostolic see, archbishop of Mexico, member of his Majesty's Council, +etc. Having seen the opinion expressed by Father Juan Sanchez, of the +Society of Jesus, after he had examined the book presented to us by +Doctor Antonio de Morga, alcalde in this court and Chancillería, +entitled Events in the Filipinas Islands, their Conquest and +Conversion, for which we granted him authority; and since it is +evident, by the above-mentioned opinion, that it contains nothing +against our holy Catholic faith, or good morals, but that, on the +contrary, it is useful and profitable to all persons who may read it: +therefore we do hereby grant permission to the said Doctor Antonio de +Morga, to have the said book of the said conquest and conversion of +the Filipinas Islands printed in any of the printing establishments +of the city. Given in Mexico, on the seventh of April, one thousand +six hundred and nine. + +FRAY GARCIA, archbishop of Mexico. + +By order of his most illustrious Lordship, the archbishop of Mexico: + +DON JUAN DE PORTILLA, secretary. + +¶To Don Cristoval Gomez de Sandoval y Rojas, duke of Cea [1] + +I offer your Excellency this small work, worthy of a kind reception as +much for its faithful relation as for its freedom from artifice and +adornment. Knowing my poor resources, I began it with fear; but what +encouraged me to proceed was the fact that, if what is given were +to bear an equal proportion to the receiver, there would be no one +worthy of placing his works in your Excellency's hands; and oblivion +would await the deeds achieved in these times by our Spaniards in +the discovery, conquest, and conversion of the Filipinas Islands--as +well as various fortunes which they have had from time to time in the +great kingdoms and among the pagan peoples surrounding the islands: +for, on account of the remoteness of those regions, no account has +been given to the public which purports to treat of them from their +beginnings down to the present condition. I entreat your Excellency to +accept my good will, which is laid prostrate at your feet; and should +this short treatise not afford that pleasure, which self-love--that +infirmity of the human mind--leads me to expect, will your Excellency +deal with me, as you are wont to deal with all, and read this book +and conceal its imperfections with the exercise of your toleration +and gentleness. For you are so richly endowed with these and other +virtues--which, through the divine power, cause lofty things not to +keep aloof from humble ones; and which, in addition to your own natural +greatness, have placed your Excellency in your present office for the +good of these realms, where you reward and favor the good, and correct +and check the opposite. In such rule consists the welfare of the state; +and this made the ancient philosopher, Democritus, say that reward and +punishment were true gods. In order to enjoy this happiness, we need +not crave any bygone time, but, contenting ourselves with the present, +pray that God may preserve your Excellency to us for many years. + +DON ANTONIO DE MORGA [2] + +To the reader [3] + +The greatness of the monarchy of the Spanish kings is due to the zeal +and care with which they have defended, within their own hereditary +kingdoms, the holy Catholic faith taught by the Roman church, against +all enemies who oppose it, or seek by various errors to obscure its +truth which the kings have disseminated throughout the world. Thus, +by the mercy of God, they preserve their kingdoms and subjects in +the purity of the Christian religion, meriting thereby their glorious +title and renown of "Defenders of the Faith." Moreover, by the valor +of their indomitable hearts, and at the expense of their revenues and +possessions, they have ploughed the seas with Spanish fleets and men, +and discovered and conquered vast kingdoms in the most remote and +unknown parts of the world. They have led the inhabitants of these +regions to a knowledge of the true God, and into the fold of the +Christian church, in which those peoples now live, governed in civil +and political matters with peace and justice, under the shelter and +protection of the royal arm and power, which were wanting to them +when weighed down by blind tyrannies and barbarous cruelties, on +which the enemy of the human race had so long reared them for himself. + +For this reason the crown and scepter of España have extended +themselves wherever the sun sheds its light, from its rising to its +setting, with the glory and splendor of their power and majesty, and +the Spanish monarchs have excelled the other princes of the earth by +having gained innumerable souls for heaven, which has been España's +principal intention and its wealth. These, together with the great +riches and treasures which España enjoys, and the famous deeds and +victories which it has won, cause the whole world to magnify and +extol its lofty name and the energy and valor of its subjects, who +in accomplishing these deeds have lavished their blood. + +Having won America, the fourth part of the earth, of which the +ancients knew naught, they sailed in the course of the sun until +they discovered an archipelago of many islands in the eastern +ocean, adjacent to farther Asia, inhabited by various peoples, +and abounding in rich metals, precious stones, and pearls, and all +manner of fruit. There raising the standard of the Faith, they freed +those peoples from the yoke and power of the demon, and placed them +under the command and government of the Faith. Consequently they may +justly raise in those islands the pillars and trophies of Non plus +ultra which the famous Hercules left on the shore of the Cadiz Sea, +which were afterward cast down by the strong arm of Cárlos V, [4] +our sovereign, who surpassed Hercules in great deeds and enterprises. + +After the islands had been conquered by the sovereign light of the +holy gospel which entered therein, the heathen were baptized, the +darkness of their paganism was banished, and they changed their own for +Christian names. The islands also, losing their former name, took--with +the change of religion and the baptism of their inhabitants--that +of Filipinas Islands, in recognition of the great favors received +at the hands of his Majesty Filipo the Second, our sovereign, in +whose fortunate time and reign they were conquered, protected, and +encouraged, as a work and achievement of his royal hands. + +Their discovery, conquest, and conversion were not accomplished without +great expenditure, labor, and Spanish blood, with varying success, +and amid dangers: these things render the work more illustrious, +and furnish a spacious field of which historians may treat, for such +is their office. Certainly the subject matter is not scanty, and +contains both serious and pleasant elements sufficient to be worthy +of attention, so that it will not depreciate historians to treat of +Indian occurrences and wars, which those who have not experienced +undervalue. For the people of those regions are valiant and warlike +nations of Asia, who have been reared in continual warfare, both by +sea and by land, and who use artillery and other warlike implements, +which the necessity of defending themselves against great and powerful +neighboring kingdoms, taught them to use skilfully; and--although +somewhat imperfectly--they have gained dexterity and have completed +their education in the school of España, which recently brought war to +their gates--thus sharing the experience of other provinces of Europe, +who also had formerly been ignorant and careless of the use of arms. + +Some painstaking persons, to whom--for lack of time and means--I have +given and delivered many papers and relations which I possessed, have +planned to write this history; and I hope that they will publish it +in better shape than the fragmentary histories which we have hitherto +received from some contemporary historians. [5] + +I spent eight years in the Filipinas Islands, the best years of +my life, serving continuously as lieutenant of the governor and +captain-general, and, as soon as the royal Audiencia of Manila was +established, in the office of auditor, which I was the first to +fill. [6] And desirous that the affairs of those islands should be +known, especially those which occurred during my connection with +them, I have related these matters in a book of eight chapters, +tracing them from their origin so far as was necessary. The first +seven chapters contain an account of the discoveries, conquests, and +other events in the islands and neighboring kingdoms and provinces, +which occurred during the time of the proprietary governors [7] +until the death of Don Pedro de Acuña. The eighth and last chapter +contains a brief summary and account of the nature of these regions, +their inhabitants, the manner of governing and converting them, and +other details; moreover, it treats of the acquaintance, dealings, +and intercourse which they maintain with their neighboring islands and +pagan communities. As fearful am I for the imperfections which will be +found in this work, as I am persuaded that they deserve forgiveness, +since my design and chief intent has been to give each one his due and +to present the truth without hatred or flattery, which has been injured +in some current narratives. [8] The latter is a fault to be severely +reproved in those who relate the deeds of others, inasmuch as it was +prohibited by a penal law which Cato and Marcius, tribunes of the +Roman people, established for those who, in relating their own deeds, +overstepped the truth--although this seemed less worthy of punishment, +on account of the self-love which intervenes in such a case. + +There will not be wanting some person who will point out my oversights, +but I shall have already answered him by confessing them; and should +this not suffice to silence him, I shall stop up my ears like another +Ulysses, and--considering the haste with which I have written--endure +this inconvenience and difficulty, desiring only to please and serve +whomsoever may read it; and this will be sufficient to protect me +from greater dangers. + +Notice is given that + +In reading this history, one may find certain words--names of +provinces, towns, magistrates, arms, and vessels--which it has seemed +more suitable to write by their usual names in those regions. In +the last chapter, which contains an account of the islands and their +peculiarities, these words will be explained and defined. + + + +¶ Of the first discoveries of the eastern islands; the voyage thither +by Adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legazpi; the conquest and pacification of +the Filipinas during his governorship, and that of Guido de Labazarris, +who afterward held the office. + +¶ CHAPTER FIRST + +According to ancient and modern cosmographers, that part of the world +called Asia has adjacent to it a multitude of greater and lesser +islands, inhabited by various nations and peoples, and as rich in +precious stones, gold, silver, and other minerals, as they abound in +fruit and grain, flocks, and animals. Some of the islands yield all +kinds of spices which are carried away and distributed throughout +the world. These islands are commonly designated in their books, +descriptions, and sea-charts, as the great archipelago of San Lazaro, +and are located in the eastern ocean. Among the most famous of them +are the islands of Maluco, Céleves, Tendaya, Luzon, Mindanao, and +Borneo, which are now called the Filipinas. + +When Pope Alexander the Sixth divided the conquests of the new world +between the kings of Castilla and of Portugal, the kings agreed to +make the division by means of a line drawn across the world by the +cosmographers, so that they might continue their discoveries and +conquests, one toward the west and the other toward the east, and +pacify whatever regions each might gain within his own demarcation. + +After the crown of Portugal had conquered the city of Malaca, on +the mainland of Asia, in the kingdom of Jor [Johore]--called by +the ancients Aurea Chersonesus--a Portuguese fleet, in the year one +thousand five hundred and eleven, on hearing of neighboring islands +and especially of those of Maluco and Banda, where cloves and nutmegs +are gathered, went to discover them. After touching at Banda, they +went to Terrenate, one of the islands of Maluco, at the invitation +of its king, to defend him against his neighbor, the king of Tidore, +with whom he was at war. This was the beginning of the Portuguese +settlement in Maluco. + +Francisco Serrano, who after this discovery returned to Malaca, and +thence went to India with the purpose of going to Portugal to give +an account of the discovery, died before he had accomplished this +voyage, but not, however, without having communicated in letters to +his friend, Fernando de Magallanes, what he had seen; [9] for they +had been together at the taking of Malaca, although the latter was +then in Portugal. From this relation, Magallanes learned whatever +was necessary for the discovery and navigation of these islands. [10] + +At this time, Magallanes, who for certain reasons had entered the +service of the king of Castilla, told the emperor Cárlos V, our +sovereign, that the islands of Maluco fell within the demarcation of +the latter's crown of Castilla, and that their conquest belonged to +him, according to the concessions made by Pope Alexander; moreover, +he offered to make the expedition and navigation to the islands in +the emperor's name, by sailing through that part of the demarcation +belonging to Castilla, and by availing himself of a famous astrologer +and cosmographer, named Ruyfarelo [sic], whom he had with him. + +The emperor, moved by the importance of the undertaking, entrusted +Fernando de Magallanes with this expedition and discovery, supplying +him with the necessary ships and provisions therefor. Thus equipped, he +set sail and discovered the strait to which he gave his name. Through +this he entered the southern sea, and sailed to the islands of Tendaya +and Sebu, where he was killed by the natives of Matan, which is one of +these islands. His ships proceeded to Maluco, where the sailors fell +into disputes and contentions with the Portuguese then stationed in the +island of Terrenate. Finally, not being able to maintain themselves +there, the Castilians left Maluco in a ship, called the "Victoria," +the only remaining vessel of their fleet. As leader and captain, +they chose Juan Sebastian del Caño, who made the voyage to Castilla +by way of India, where he arrived with but few men, and informed his +Majesty of the discovery of the great archipelago, and of his voyage. + +The same enterprise was attempted at other times, and was carried +out by Juan Sebastian del Caño, Comendador Loaisa, the Saoneses, +and the bishop of Plasencia. [11] But these did not bear the fruits +expected, on account of the hardships and perils of so long a voyage, +and the opposition received by those who reached Maluco, from the +Portuguese there. + +After all these events, as it was thought that this discovery might +be made quicker and better by way of Nueva España, in the year one +thousand five hundred and forty-five, [12] a fleet, under command of +Rui Lopez de Villalobos, was sent by that route. They reached Maluco +by way of Sebu, where they quarreled with the Portuguese, and suffered +misfortunes and hardships, so that they were unable to effect the +desired end; nor could the fleet return to Nueva España whence it +had sailed, but was destroyed. Some of the surviving Castilians left +Maluco by way of Portuguese India and returned to Castilla. There they +related the occurrences of their voyage, and the quality and nature +of the islands of Maluco and of the other islands that they had seen. + +Afterward as King Don Felipe II, our sovereign, considered it +inadvisable for him to desist from that same enterprise, and being +informed by Don Luys de Velasco, viceroy of Nueva España, and by Fray +Andres de Urdaneta of the Augustinian order--who had been in Maluco +with the fleet of Comendador Loaisa, while a layman--that this voyage +might be made better and quicker by way of Nueva Españia, he entrusted +the expedition to the viceroy. Fray Andres de Urdaneta left the court +for Nueva Españia, [13] for, as he was so experienced and excellent +a cosmographer, he offered to go with the fleet and to discover the +return voyage. The viceroy equipped a fleet and its crew with the +most necessary things in Puerto de la Navidad, in the southern sea, +under charge of a worthy and reliable man, Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, +a citizen of Mexico and a native of the province of Guipuzcoa. On +account of the viceroy's death, the Audiencia which was governing in +his place completed arrangements for the despatching of Legazpi, and +gave him instructions as to his destination, with orders not to open +them until three hundred leguas at sea; for there were differences +among members of the fleet, some saying that they would better go +to Nueva Guinea, others to the Luzones, and others to Maluco. Miguel +Lopez de Legazpi left Puerto de la Navidad in the year one thousand +five hundred and sixty-four, with five ships and five hundred men, +accompanied by Fray Andres de Urdaneta and four other religious of +the Order of St. Augustine. After sailing westward for several days, +he opened his instructions, and found that he was ordered to go to +the islands of Luzones and there endeavor to pacify them and reduce +them to the obedience of his Majesty, and to make them accept the +holy Catholic faith. [14] He continued his voyage until reaching the +island of Sebu, where he anchored, induced by the convenience of a +good port and by the nature of the land. At first he was received +peacefully by the natives and by their chief Tupas; but later they +tried to kill him and his companions, for the Spaniards having seized +their provisions, the natives took up arms against the latter; but the +opposite to their expectations occurred, for the Spaniards conquered +and subdued them. Seeing what had happened in Sebu, the natives of +other neighboring islands came peacefully before the adelantado, +rendered him homage, and supplied his camp with a few provisions. The +first of the Spanish settlements was made in that port, and was called +the city of Sanctisimo Nombre de Jesus [Most holy name of Jesus], +[15] because a carved image of Jesus had been found in one of the +houses of the natives when the Spaniards conquered the latter, which +was believed to have been left there by the fleet of Magallanes. The +natives held the image in great reverence, and it wrought miracles +for them in times of need. The Spaniards placed it in the monastery +of St. Augustine, in that city. + +That same year the adelantado despatched the flagship of his fleet +to Nueva España, with the relation and news of what had happened +during the voyage, and of the settlement in Sebu. He requested men +and supplies in order to continue the pacification of the other +islands. Fray Andres de Urdaneta and his associate, Fray Andres de +Aguirre, sailed in the vessel. + +One of the ships which left Puerto de la Navidad in company with the +fleet and under command of Don Alonso de Arellano, carried as pilot +one Lope Martin, a mulatto and a good sailor, although a turbulent +fellow. When the ship neared the islands, it left the fleet and +went among them ahead of the other vessels. There they bartered +for provisions, and, without awaiting the adelantado, returned to +Nueva España by a northerly course--either because of their slight +gratification at having made the voyage to the islands, or to gain +the reward for having discovered the return passage. They soon +arrived and declared that they had seen the islands and discovered +the return voyage. They alleged various reasons for their coming, +but brought no message from the adelantado, or news of what had +happened to him. Don Alonso de Arellano was well received by the +Audiencia which was governing, where the rewarding of him and +his pilot was considered. This would have been done, had not the +adelantado's flagship arrived during this time, after having made +the same voyage. It brought an authentic account of events, of the +actual state of affairs, and of the settlement of Sebu. Moreover, they +related that Don Alonso de Arellano, without receiving any orders, +and without any necessity for it, had preceded the fleet with his +ship at the entrance of the islands, and was seen no more. They said +also that, besides those islands which had peacefully submitted to +his Majesty, there were many others, large and rich, well-inhabited, +and abounding in food and gold. They hoped to pacify and reduce +those islands with the reënforcements requested. They said that the +adelantado had named all the islands Filipinas, [16] in honor of his +Majesty. Reënforcements were immediately sent to the adelantado, +and have been sent every year, as necessity has demanded, so that +the land has been conquered and maintained. + +The adelantado heard that there were other islands near Sebu, +abounding in provisions, and accordingly sent some Spaniards thither +to reduce the natives to peace, and bring back rice for the camp. Thus +he relieved his necessity and maintained himself as well as possible +until, having gone to the island of Panay, he sent Martin de Goiti, his +master-of-camp, and other captains thence to the island of Luzon with +what men he deemed sufficient, and under the guidance of a native chief +of the latter island, called Maomat, to try to pacify it and reduce it +to the obedience of his Majesty. When they reached the bay of Manila, +they found its settlement on the seashore, near a large river, and +under the rule and protection of a chief called Rajamora. Opposite, +on the other side of the river, was another large settlement named +Tondo, which was likewise held by another chief named Rajamatanda. [17] +These settlements were fortified with palm-trees and stout arigues [18] +filled in with earth, and very many bronze culverins and other pieces +of larger bore. Martin de Goiti, having begun to treat with the chiefs +and their people concerning the peace and submission which he demanded, +found it necessary to come to blows with them. The Spaniards entered +the land by force of arms, and took it, together with the forts and +artillery, on the day of St. Potenciana, May nineteen, one thousand +five hundred and seventy-one. [19] Upon this the natives and their +chiefs made peace and rendered homage; and many others of the same +island of Luzon did the same. [20] + +When the news of the taking of Manila and of the Spanish settlement +there reached Panay, Adelantado Legazpi set in order the affairs of +Sebu and other islands which he had subdued, entrusted their natives +to the most reliable soldiers, and having taken the most necessary +precautions for the government of those provinces, which are commonly +called Bicayas de los Pintados, [21] because the natives of them have +all their bodies marked with fire, went to Manila with the remainder +of his men. He was well received there, and established afresh with +the natives and their chiefs the peace, alliance, and homage, which +had been given. On the very site of Manila, of which Rajamora made a +donation to the Spaniards for their settlement, the adelantado founded +his town and colony, on account of its strength and its situation +in a well-provisioned district, and in the midst of all the other +islands. He left it its name of Manila which it had received from +the natives. [22] Taking sufficient land for the city, the governor +established therein his seat and residence, and fortified it with +special care. He paid more attention to the above, in order to make +this new settlement the seat of government, than to the temperature, +and width of the site, which is hot and narrow from having the river +on one side of the city and the bay on the other, while at the back are +to be found large swamps and marshes, which make the place very strong. + +From this post he continued to prosecute the pacification of the +other provinces of this great island of Luzon and of surrounding +districts. Some submitted voluntarily; others were conquered by force +of arms or by the efforts of the religious, who have sown the good +seed of the holy gospel therein. Various of them have labored valiantly +in this, not only in the time and administration of Adelantado Miguel +Lopez de Legazpi, but also in that of the governors that have succeeded +him. The land was apportioned among its conquerors and colonizers. The +capitals of provinces, the ports, and the settlements of cities and +towns which had been founded, and other special encomiendas, were +assigned to the royal crown, for the necessities that arise and the +expenses of the royal exchequer. The affairs of government and the +conversion of the natives were treated as was necessary. Ships were +provided for the annual voyage to Nueva España, which return with the +usual supplies. Thus the condition of the Filipinas Islands has reached +its present known height in both spiritual and temporal matters. + +Adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, as above-said, discovered the +islands, colonized them, and made a good beginning in the work of +pacification and subjugation. He founded the city of Sanctisimo Nombre +de Jesus in the provinces of Pintados, and then the city of Manila +in the island of Luzon. In this island he conquered the province +of Ylocos, in whose settlement and port called Vigan, he founded a +Spanish colony, to which he gave the name of Villa Fernandina. [23] +He also pacified the province of Pangasinan and the island of Mindoro, +fixed the amount of tribute that the natives were to pay throughout the +islands, [24] and made many ordinances concerning their government and +conversion, until his death in the year one thousand five hundred and +seventy-four, at Manila, where his body was buried in the monastery +of St. Augustine. [25] + +At his death, there was found among his papers a sealed despatch from +the Audiencia of Mexico, which was governing when the fleet left +Nueva Españia, appointing a successor to the government, in case +of the death of the adelantado. By virtue of this despatch, Guido +de Labazarris, formerly a royal official, took the office and was +obeyed. He continued the conversion and pacification of the islands +with great wisdom, valor, and system, and governed them. + +During his term the pirate Limahon came from China, and attacked Manila +with a fleet of seventy large war-ships and many soldiers. He entered +the city, and, after killing the master-of-camp, Martin de Goiti, +with other Spaniards who were at his house, marched against the fort, +in which the Spaniards, who were but few, had taken refuge, with +the intention of seizing and subjecting the country. The Spaniards, +reinforced from Vigan by Captain Joan de Salzedo and his soldiers--for +Salzedo saw this pirate pass his coasts, and brought the reinforcement +to Manila--defended themselves so bravely that, after having killed +many of Limahon's men, they forced him to reembark, to leave the bay +in flight, and to take refuge in Pangasinan River. The Spaniards went +thither in search of him and burned his fleet. [26] For many days they +besieged this pirate on land, but he, taking flight in small boats +that he made there secretly, put to sea and abandoned the islands. + +During the government of this same Guido de Labazarris, trade and +commerce were established between Great China and Manila. Merchant +ships came every year and the governor received them kindly, and as +a consequence commerce has been growing ever since. + +This same governor apportioned all the pacified land in the island of +Luzon and surrounding islands, to the conquerors and settlers there. He +assigned to himself the towns of Betis and Lubao in the province of +Pampanga, besides others of some importance. The succeeding government +dispossessed him of these towns; but afterward his Majesty, on account +of his good services, granted them all to him, and he enjoyed them, +together with the office of master-of-camp of the islands, as long +as he lived. + + + +¶The administration of Doctor Francisco de Sande, and the events of +the Filipinas Islands during his term. + +¶CHAPTER SECOND + +When the news of the entrance and conquest of the Filipinas Islands +by Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, and of his death, reached Españia, his +Majesty appointed as governor and captain-general of the islands, +Doctor Francisco de Sande, a native of Caceres, and alcalde of the +Audiencia of Mexico. The latter journeyed thither, and took over his +government in the year one thousand five hundred and seventy-five. + +During this administration, the pacification of the islands was +continued, especially that of the province of Camarines, by Captain +Pedro Chaves, who often came to blows with the natives, until he +conquered them and received their submission. A Spanish colony +was founded there which was called the city of Caceres. Among other +enterprises, the governor made in person the expedition to the island +of Borneo with a fleet of galleys and frigates. [27] With these he +attacked and captured the enemy's fleet, which had come out to meet +him. He captured also the principal settlement, where the king of the +island had his house and residence, but after a few days he abandoned +it and returned to Manila, on account of sickness among the crews, +and his inability to support and care for the Spaniards in that +island. On the way back, and by his orders, Captain Estevan Rodriguez +de Figueroa entered the island of Jólo; he came to blows with the +natives and their chief, whom he conquered, and the latter rendered +him acknowledgment and submission in the name of his Majesty. Thence +he went to the island of Mindanao which he explored, reconnoitering +its river and chief settlements. On his way he reduced other towns and +natives of the same island, who had been pacified, to friendship and +alliance with the Spaniards. The governor despatched the ship "San +Juanillo" to Nueva España, under command of Captain Juan de Ribera, +but it was lost at sea and never heard of again. + +Doctor Sande remained until Don Gonzalo Ronquillo de Peñalosa came from +Españia as the new governor and captain-general. After his residencia +the doctor returned to Nueva España to fill the office of auditor +of Mexico. + + + +¶ Of the administration of Don Gonzalo Ronquillo de Peñalosa, and of +Diego Ronquillo, who filled the office because of the former's death. + +¶ CHAPTER THIRD + +Because of the many accounts that had reached the court of his +Majesty concerning the affairs of the Filipinas, and because of their +need of being supplied with settlers and soldiers to pacify them, +an arrangement was made with Don Gonzalo Ronquillo de Peñalosa, a +native of Arevalo, and chief alguacil of the Audiencia of Mexico, +who was residing at court, so that it might be done better and at +less cost to the royal exchequer. By this arrangement he was to be +governor of the Filipinas for life and was to take six hundred married +and single men from the kingdoms of Castilla to the Filipinas. His +Majesty granted him certain assistance and facilities for this purpose, +together with other favors as a reward for this service. + +Don Gonzalo prepared for the voyage, raised his people, and embarked +them in the port of San Lucas Barremeda, but, as the fleet left the +bar, one of his ships was wrecked. He returned in order to repair his +losses, and, although he took less than at first, he made his journey +to the mainland, and at Panama, embarked his people in the South Sea, +and set sail for the Filipinas, where he arrived and took over the +government, in the year one thousand five hundred and eighty. + +Don Gonzalo Ronquillo founded a Spanish town in the island of Panay, +in Oton, which he named Arevalo. During his term, the trade with +the Chinese increased, and he built a market-place and Parián for +them within the city, where the Chinese could bring and sell their +merchandise. He tried to discover a return passage from the islands +to Nueva España, by way of the south, for which purpose he sent his +cousin, Captain Don Juan Ronquillo del Castillo. The latter could not +effect this, for after sailing for some time, until finding himself +near Nueva Guinea, he could go no farther, on account of many severe +storms, and returned to the Filipinas. In like manner, Don Gonzalo sent +another ship, under command of Don Gonzalo Ronquillo de Vallesteros, +to Peru, with some merchandise, in order to obtain certain goods from +those provinces which he said that the Filipinas needed. This vessel +returned from Peru after the death of the governor. The latter imposed +the two per cent duty on the merchandise exported to Nueva España, +and the three per cent duty on the goods imported by the Chinese to +the Filipinas. Although he was censured for having done this without +his Majesty's orders, these duties remained in force, and continued +to be imposed thenceforward. + +During this same term, as his Majesty had succeeded to the kingdoms +of Portugal, and had ordered the governor of Manila to maintain +good relations with the chief captain of the fortress of the island +of Tidore, in Maluco, and to assist him when necessary, he sent a +fleet and soldiers thither from Manila, under command of Captain Don +Juan Ronquillo del Castillo. This he did at the request of Diego de +Azambuja, chief captain of Tidore, for the expedition and conquest +of the island of Terrenate. But after reaching Maluco, the expedition +did not succeed in its object. [28] Thenceforward supplies of men and +provisions continued to be sent from the Filipinas to the fortress +of Tidore. + +During this same administration, the province of Cagayan in the island +of Luzon, opposite China, was first pacified [29] by Captain Joan +Pablos de Carrion, who founded there a Spanish colony, which he named +Nueva Segovia. He also drove a Japanese pirate [30] from that place, +who had seized the port with some ships, and fortified himself there. + +A few days after Don Gonzalo Ronquillo had entered into the +government, he sent Captain Gabriel de Ribera with a small fleet, +consisting of one galley and several frigates, to explore the coast +and settlements of the island of Borneo, with orders to proceed +thence to the kingdom of Patan on the mainland, where pepper is +produced. The captain having coasted along and reconnoitered Borneo, +returned with his fleet to Manila, on account of the advanced season +and lack of provisions. Thence the governor sent him to España, +with authority from himself and from the islands, to confer with +his Majesty upon several matters that he desired to see carried out, +and upon others which would prove advantageous to the islands. [31] +The captain found his Majesty in Portugal, gave him a few pieces of +gold and other curiosities which he had brought for that purpose, +and stated the matters of which he had come to treat. The result was +that his Majesty, among other favors, appointed him marshal of Bonbon, +for his hardships during this voyage, and the proper resolution was +made in the matters of which he had come to treat. + +It was during the administration of Don Gonzalo Ronquillo, that the +first bishop of the Filipinas was appointed, in the person of Don Fray +Domingo de Salazar, of the Dominican order, a man of great learning and +piety. As soon as he arrived in the islands, he took upon himself the +management and jurisdiction of ecclesiastical affairs, which were at +first in charge of the Augustinian friars who had come at the time of +the conquest, and afterwards of the discalced Franciscan religious, +who had arrived at the time of the conversion. The bishop erected his +cathedral in the city of Manila, by apostolic bulls, with prebends paid +by the royal exchequer, until there should be tithes and ecclesiastical +revenues to maintain themselves. Moreover, he provided whatever else +was necessary for the service and decoration of the church, and for +the divine worship which is celebrated there with great solemnity +and display. Don Fray Domingo de Salazar took Antonio Sedeño and +Alonso Sanchez, both priests and grave members of the Society of +Jesus, with him. They were the first to establish that order in the +Filipinas, which, since that time, has been steadily growing, to the +great profit and fruit of the teaching and conversion of the natives, +consolation of the Spaniards, and the education and teaching of their +children in the studies which they pursue. + +Don Gonzalo Ronquillo was in such poor health from the day on which +he entered upon his administration, that he died in the year one +thousand five hundred and eighty-three, and his body was buried in +the monastery of St. Augustine in Manila. + +His kinsman, Diego Ronquillo, by virtue of his appointment through +a decree of his Majesty, succeeded him in the governorship; this man +continued what Don Gonzalo had commenced, especially in the assistance +for Maluco and pacification for other islands. + +During the same term of Diego Ronquillo, a fire broke out in the city +of Manila, which started at midday in the church of the convent of +St. Augustine, while the doors of the church were closed. The fire +increased so rapidly that all the city was burned in a few hours, +as it was built of wood. There was great loss of goods and property, +and some persons were in danger. The city was rebuilt with great +difficulty and labor, leaving the Spaniards very poor and needy. [32] + +The main result of the matters treated at court by Mariscal Gabriel +de Ribera was (although at that time the death of Governor Don +Gonzalo Ronquillo was unknown) to order the establishment of a +royal Audiencia in the city of Manila, whose president was to be +governor and captain-general of all the Filipinas. In view of this, +the necessary instructions were issued, and the presidency given to +Doctor Sanctiago de Vera, alcalde of the Audiencia of Mexico, and a +native of the town of Alcala de Henares. He went to the islands with +the usual reënforcements from Nueva España, taking with him the royal +seal of the Audiencia, the auditors whom his Majesty was sending, the +fiscal, and other officials and assistants of the said Audiencia. The +auditors and fiscal were Licentiates Melchior de Avalos, Pedro de +Rojas, and Gaspar de Ayala--[the latter] as fiscal. At the end of +two years, Don Antonio de Ribera went as third auditor. + + + +¶ Of the administration of Doctor Sanctiago de Vera, and of the +establishment of the Manila Audiencia, and until its suppression; +and of events during his term. + +¶ CHAPTER FOURTH + +The president and auditors arrived at the Filipinas in the month of +May, in the year 1584, while Diego Ronquillo was governing. Doctor +Sanctiago de Vera entered upon his office, and immediately established +the Audiencia. The royal seal was received and deposited with all +possible solemnity and festivity. Then they began to attend to the +affairs both of justice and of war and government, to the great profit +of the country. At this time new reënforcements were sent to Maluco +for the conquests that the chief captain of Tidore intended to make +of the island of Terrenate. Captain Pedro Sarmiento [33] went from +Manila for this purpose, and on another occasion the captain and +sargento-mayor, Juan de Moron; [34] but neither of these expeditions +met with the desired result. + +President Sanctiago de Vera also continued the pacification of +several provinces of the islands, and did many things, which +proved advantageous in every respect. He discovered a rebellion +and insurrection which the native chiefs of Manila and Pampanga had +planned against the Spaniards, and justice was done the guilty. [35] +He built with stone the fortress of Nuestra Señora de Guia [Our Lady +of Guidance], within the city of Manila on the land side, and for +its defense he caused some artillery to be founded by an old Indian, +called Pandapira, a native of the province of Panpanga. The latter +and his sons rendered this service for many years afterward, until +their deaths. + +During the administration of President Sanctiago de Vera, the +Englishman Thomas Escander, [36] entered the South Sea through +the Strait of Magallanes; on the coast of Nueva España, close to +California, he had captured the ship "Santa Ana," which was coming +from the Filipinas laden with a quantity of gold and merchandise of +great value. Thence he proceeded to the Filipinas; entering through +the province of Pintados, he came in sight of the town of Arevalo and +of the shipyard where a galleon was being built for the navigation +of the Nueva España line. Wishing to burn this vessel, he made the +attempt, but he was resisted by Manuel Lorenzo de Lemos, who was +supervising its construction. The Englishman passed on, and went +to India, whence he took his course to Inglaterra, having followed +the same route which the Englishman Francisco Draque [Francis Drake] +[37] had taken several years before. The latter had, in like manner, +passed through the Strait of Magallanes to the Peruvian coast, where +he made many prizes. + +At this time, the Audiencia and the bishop thought it advisable +that some person of sufficient and satisfactory qualities should be +sent to España, to the court of his Majesty, to give a thorough and +detailed account of the state of affairs in the Filipinas Islands, +and to request that some necessary measures might be taken concerning +them. The court was especially to be informed that, for the time being, +the Audiencia could be dispensed with, for it was a heavy burden to +all estates, because of the newness of the country. The person of +Father Alonso Sanches, of the Society of Jesus, a learned man, and one +well informed concerning the country, and very active in business, was +chosen for this purpose. Instructions were given him, and authority to +act for all estates, religious orders, and communities, as to what he +was to treat and request in España, and at the court of his Holiness +in Roma, where he was also to go. [38] This father reached Madrid, +and after having conferred with his Majesty several times respecting +those things of which he thought fit to treat and to make requests, +went to Roma, where he introduced himself as the ambassador of all +the estates of the Filipinas, and on their behalf he kissed the foot, +and visited the pontiffs who ruled during that time, after the death +of Sixtus the Fifth. Having received from them favors and indulgences +with many relics, bulls, and letters for the Filipinas, he returned to +España, where again he solicited a decision on the business which he +had left under discussion when he went to Roma. His Majesty listened +to the messages that he brought from the pontiffs, and lent him +a favorable ear concerning the affairs of the islands. In private +audiences the father made the king understand his requests, and decide +them to his own satisfaction. But as soon as the despatches reached +the Filipinas, much of their contents appeared outside the intention +and expectation of both bishop and Audiencia, and the city, citizens, +and encomenderos. They appeared even detrimental to the inhabitants +of the islands, and therefore they expressed their displeasure toward +Father Alonso Sanches, who was still in España. The father negotiated +for the suppression of the Audiencia of Manila, and the appointment +of a new governor; and in begging such an one, the same father, +because of his friendly relations with him, proposed one Gomez Perez +Dasmariñas, who had been corregidor of Leon and later of Murcia, and +who was at that time in the court, and corregidor-elect of Logroño +and Calahorra. His Majesty appointed him governor and captain-general +of the Filipinas, and increased the annual salary of his office to ten +thousand Castilian ducados. Moreover, he made him a knight of the Order +of Sanctiago, and gave him a large sum of money with which to meet the +expenses of the voyage. He was provided with the necessary despatches, +both for the exercise of his office, and for the suppression of the +Audiencia of Manila, and the establishment of a camp of four hundred +paid soldiers with their officers, at his Majesty's expense, for the +garrison and defense of the land. His Majesty ordered him to sail +immediately for Nueva España in the ships on which Viceroy Don Luis de +Velasco sailed in the year one thousand five hundred and eighty-nine, +who was going to govern that country. + +Gomez Perez Dasmariñas left Mexico as soon as possible, and with what +ships, soldiers, and captains he needed, sailed for the Filipinas, +where he arrived in the month of May, in the year one thousand five +hundred and ninety. + + + +¶ Of the administration of Gomez Perez Dasmariñas, and of Licentiate +Pedro de Rojas, who was elected by the city of Manila to act as +governor, on account of the former's death, until Don Luis Dasmariñas +was received as the successor of Gomez Perez, his father. + +¶ CHAPTER FIFTH + +As soon as Gomez Perez Dasmariñas reached the Filipinas, he was +received as governor with universal acclaim. He suppressed the +Audiencia, and the residencias of its president, auditors, fiscal, +and other officials were taken by Licentiate Herver del Coral, whom +Viceroy Don Luys de Velasco had sent for that purpose, by virtue of a +royal decree received to that effect. The new governor inaugurated his +rule by establishing the paid garrison, and by executing, with great +enthusiasm and zeal, many and various things, for which he possessed +royal orders and instructions, not shrinking from any kind of labor, +or taking any care of himself. His first labor was the walling of the +city, to which he attended so assiduously, that it was almost completed +before his death. [39] He also built a cavalier on the promontory of +Manila where the old wooden fort, which he called Sanctiago, formerly +stood, and fortified it with some artillery. He razed to the ground +the fort of Nuestra Señora de Guia, which his predecessor had built; he +built of stone the cathedral of Manila, and encouraged the inhabitants +of the city who had shortly before begun to build, to persevere in +building their houses of stone, a work which the bishop was the first +to begin in the building of his house. During his term he increased +trade with China, and regulated better the navigation of Nueva España, +and the despatch of vessels in that line. He built some galleys for +the defense of the coast, pacified the Zambales, who had revolted, +and ordered his son Don Luys Dasmariñas, of the habit of Alcantara, +to make an incursion with troops from Manila into the interior of the +island of Luzon, [40] by crossing the river Ytui and other provinces +not yet explored or seen by Spaniards, until he arrived at Cagayan. He +built also an artillery foundry in Manila, where, for want of expert +founders, but few large pieces were turned out. + +In the first year of his administration, he sent the president and +auditors of the suppressed Audiencia to España. Licentiate Pedro de +Rojas, the senior auditor, remained with the governor by order of +his Majesty, as lieutenant-assessor in matters of justice, until some +years later appointed alcalde in Mexico. + +During Gomez Perez's administration, the relations and peace existing +between the Japanese and the Spaniards of the Filipinas began to +become strained; for hitherto Japanese vessels had gone from the port +of Nangasaqui to Manila for some years, laden with their flour and +other goods, where they had been kindly received, and despatched. But +Taicosama, [41] lord of all Xapon, was incited through the efforts of +Farandaquiemon--a Japanese of low extraction, one of those who came to +Manila--to write in a barbarous and arrogant manner to the governor, +demanding submission and tribute, and threatening to come with a fleet +and troops to lay waste the country. But, between demands and replies, +several years were spent, until at last Taico died. [42] + +While Xapon was causing the governor some anxiety, the king of Camboja +sent him an embassy by the Portuguese Diego Belloso, who brought +a present of two elephants and offers of friendship and trade with +his kingdom, and implored aid against Sian--which was threatening +Camboja. The governor answered the king, and sent him a horse, with +a few emeralds and other objects, but postponed until later what +related to aid, and thanked him for his friendship. This was the +origin of the events and the expeditions made later from Manila to +the kingdoms of Sian and Camboja, on the mainland of Asia. + +From the moment that Gomez Perez received his charge in España, he had +cherished the desire to lead an expedition from Manila to conquer the +fort of Terrenate in Maluco, on account of the great importance of this +enterprise, and its outcome, in which no success had been attained on +other occasions. He was constantly making necessary arrangements for +undertaking this expedition, but so secretly that he declared it to no +one, until, in the year ninety-three, seeing that the preparations for +his intention appeared sufficient, he declared his purpose, and made +ready to set out in person, with more than nine hundred Spaniards and +two hundred sail, counting galleys, galliots, frigates, vireys, and +other craft. He left the war affairs of Manila and of the islands, with +a few troops--although insufficient for the city's defense--in charge +of Diego Ronquillo, his master-of-camp; and those of administration +and justice to Licentiate Pedro de Rojas. He also sent his son, Don +Luys Dasmariñas, forward with the rest of the fleet, as his lieutenant +in the office of captain-general, to the provinces of Pintados, whence +they were to sail; while he himself remained in Manila making his final +preparations and arming a galley of twenty-eight benches, in which he +was to sail. This galley he manned with good Chinese rowers, with pay, +[43] whom, in order to win their good will, he would not allow to be +chained, and even winked at their carrying certain weapons. About +forty Spaniards embarked on the galley, and the galley itself was +accompanied by a few frigates and smaller vessels, in which private +individuals embarked. The governor sailed from the port of Cabit, +in the month of October, one thousand five hundred and ninety-three, +for the provinces of Pintados, where they were to join the fleet which +was awaiting them there, and to proceed to Maluco. In the afternoon of +the second day of the voyage, they reached the island of Caça, [44] +twenty-four leguas from Manila, and close to the coast of the same +island of Luzon, at a place called Punta del Açufre [Sulphur Point], +where there is a strong head wind. The galley tried to round this +point by rowing, but being unable to make any headway until the wind +should drop, they anchored and spread an awning, and stayed there that +night. Some of the vessels sailing with the galley went in closer to +the shore in sight of the galley, and awaited it there. + +The governor and those who accompanied him passed the night playing +on the poop, until the end of the first watch. After the governor had +gone into his cabin to rest, the other Spaniards went also to their +quarters [45] for the same purpose, leaving the usual guards in the +midship gangway, and at the bow and stern. The Chinese rowers, who +had three days before that conspired to seize the galley whenever a +favorable opportunity presented itself--in order to avoid the labor +of rowing on this expedition, and their covetousness of the money, +jewels, and other articles of value aboard the vessel--thought that +they should not lose their opportunity. Having provided candles, and +white shirts with which to clothe themselves, and appointed chiefs +for its execution, they carried out their plan that same night, in +the last watch before dawn, when they perceived that the Spaniards +were asleep. At a signal which one of them gave they all at the same +time put on their shirts, lit their candles, and catan [46] in hand, +attacked the guards and the men who slept in the quarters [ballesteras] +and in the wales, and wounding and killing them, they seized the +galley. A few of the Spaniards escaped, some by swimming ashore, +others by means of the galley's tender, which was at the stern. When +the governor heard the noise from his cabin, thinking that the galley +was dragging and that the crew were lowering the awning and taking to +the oars, he hurried carelessly out bareheaded through the hatchway of +the cabin. Several Chinese were awaiting him there and split his head +with a catan. Thus wounded he fell down the stairs into his cabin, and +the two servants whom he kept there, carried him to his bed, where he +immediately died. The servants met the same fate from the stabs given +them through the hatch. The only surviving Spaniards in the galley +were Juan de Cuellar, the governor's secretary, and Father Montilla of +the Franciscan order, who were sleeping in the cabin amidships, and +who remained there without coming out; nor did the Chinese, thinking +that there were more Spaniards, dare to go in until next day, when +they took the two men out and later put them ashore on the coast of +Ylocos, in the same island of Luzon, in order that the natives might +allow them to take water on shore, which they badly needed. + +Although the Spaniards who were in the other vessels, close to the +land, perceived the lights and heard the noise made in the galley +from their ships, they thought that some work was being done; and when +shortly afterward, they learned what was happening from those who had +escaped by swimming, they could render no assistance and kept still, +as everything was lost, and they were few and not in sufficient force +therefor. They waited for the morning, and when it began to dawn, +they saw that the galley had already set its bastard, and was sailing, +wind astern toward China, and they were unable to pursue it. + +The galley sailed with a favorable wind all along the coast of +the island until leaving it. It took some water at Ylocos, where +the secretary and the religious were abandoned. The Chinese tried +to make for China, but not being able to fetch it, they ported in +the kingdom of Cochinchina, where the king of Tunquin seized their +cargo and two large pieces of artillery which were intended for the +expedition of Maluco, the royal standard, and all the jewels, money, +and articles of value; the galley he left to drift ashore, and the +Chinese dispersed and fled to different provinces. Governor Gomez Perez +met this unfortunate death, whereupon the expedition and enterprise +to Maluco, which the governor had undertaken, ceased also. Thus ended +his administration, after he had ruled somewhat more than three years. + +Among other despatches which Gomez Perez Dasmariñas brought from España +there was an order from his Majesty which authorized him to appoint +the person whom he thought best to succeed him in case of death, +until such time as his Majesty should appoint his successor. He +showed this order to several of the most important persons of the +island, giving each one to understand that he would be appointed, +especially to Captain Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa, an inhabitant +of Pintados, a rich man of merit, and one of the first conquerors +of the land. To him the governor showed an appointment drawn in his +favor. He made use of the captain on all occasions and had him go with +himself to Maluco. The news of the seizure of the galley was soon +known in Manila. The citizens and soldiers that had remained there, +assembled at the house of Licentiate Pedro de Rojas, to discuss +advisable measures. First of all they elected the latter governor +and captain-general. Then they sent Captain Don Juan Ronquillo del +Castillo and other captains with two frigates (for there were no other +vessels) in pursuit of the galley, a fruitless attempt, for the galley +was nowhere to be seen. The new governor also sent a message to Don +Luis Dasmariñas and to the army and fleet who were awaiting Gomez +Perez in Pintados, informing him of the latter's death and of what +had happened, as well as of his own recent election to affairs of +government. He also ordered them to return with all speed to Manila, +for the city was left almost deserted, and without the necessary +precautions for any emergency. + +The news caused great grief in the fleet. Don Luys Dasmariñas and +Captain Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa, each in his own heart, was +certain that he was to become governor, taking it for granted that +the governor had nominated him for the office. With this hope, both +of them with the best ships and crews of the fleet, set sail together +for Manila with the utmost speed. + +Licentiate Pedro de Rojas, anxious about this provision, which the +governor would leave among his papers and drawers deposited in the +monastery of St. Augustine in Manila, in the possession of Fray Diego +Muñoz, prior and commissary of the Holy Office, made the effort to +gain possession of them. Although he seized some of them, he did not +find the said provision, for the prior had anticipated him and set +aside one of the drawers, in which the provision was supposed to be +found, to await Don Luys Dasmariñas's arrival in the city. Juan de +Cuellar, who had escaped from the galley, arrived from the province +of Ylocos, and testified that an appointment for the succession to the +governorship had been made by Gomez Perez, but he did not state whom; +or among what papers the nomination could be found. Thereupon the +licentiate Pedro de Rojas and those devoted to him became more anxious. + +Forty days passed in this manner, at the end of which Don Luis +appeared in the bay near the city, accompanied by Estevan Rodriguez +and many men; and there he anchored, not choosing to enter the city, +or to disembark. He caused a search to be made for the papers kept +in St. Augustine, and among them was found the royal order and the +nomination of Don Luys Dasmariñas to succeed to the governorship. One +of his partisans announced the fact to the city magistrates, who, +changing their ideas, and notwithstanding some opposition from the +partisans of Licentiate Rojas, summoned Don Luys Dasmariñas to the +municipal house and placed him in possession of the government. The +same was done by the soldiers whom Don Luys had with him, and by the +fleet. Each day brought a new disappointment to Licentiate Rojas, +who returned to his office of lieutenant-assessor, after a rule of +forty days. + +If the death of Governor Gomez Perez Dasmariñas was an unfortunate +event, both for the loss of his person and for the loss of a so good +opportunity for the conquest of Terrenate, when all were certain of +success, the return of the fleet and the arrival of the troops in +the city was none the less a fortunate event, for, not many days +after--having anticipated their usual time for the voyage--there +arrived in Manila many Chinese ships which carried many men and +little merchandise, and seven mandarins bearing the insignia of +their office. This gave sufficient motive for suspecting that they +had heard of the departure of the fleet for Maluco and of the city's +lack of defense, and that they had therefore come on this occasion +to try to seize the country. But they desisted from the attempt +when they found the city with more troops than ever. They returned +to China without showing any other particular motive for coming, +and without either side showing that their motives were understood; +except that Governor Don Luys was watchful and on his guard. He +took the proper measures, especially those concerning the Chinese, +and their settlement and Parián. + +No ships went to Nueva España from the Filipinas that year, because +Governor Gomez Perez, before starting on the expedition to Maluco, had +sent there the vessels "San Felipe" and "San Francisco," both of which, +on account of heavy storms, had to put back, the "San Felipe" to the +port of Sebu and the "San Francisco" to Manila, and they were unable +to resail until the following year. It was suspected in Nueva España +that there were troubles in the islands because of the non-arrival +of the ships, and persons were not wanting to affirm more than had +really happened; nor was it possible at the same time--in the town +of Mexico--to ascertain whence the news had emanated. This was very +shortly known in España, by way of India, letters having been sent +to Venecia [Venice], through Persia; and immediately they set about +appointing a new governor. + +In the first year of the government of Gomez Perez Dasmariñas, the need +of an Audiencia began to be felt by many, upon their seeing all the +power vested in one man, and that there was no one to whom they could +apply for remedy for certain cases. [47] He who felt this most keenly +was Bishop Fray Domingo de Salazar, who had had certain differences +and disputes with the governor, which obliged him to start for España, +notwithstanding his advanced age. The governor readily gave him leave +for that year, and a vessel for the voyage, in order to rid himself of +him; but at the same time and with full power from himself, he sent +Fray Francisco de Ortega of the Augustinian order to court, to meet +whatever the bishop might allege and to defend his side. Both reached +España, and each spoke as his interests demanded. The chief thing +insisted upon by the bishop was a request for the reëstablishment +of the Audiencia, and the foundation of other bishoprics in the +Filipinas, besides that of Manila, as well as other things which he +thought beneficial to the spiritual and temporal welfare. In all this +he was opposed by Ortega. But the authority and piety of the bishop +were of such weight, that, although at first the cause that made him, +at his advanced age, leave his church, and travel five thousand leguas +to España, seemed trivial, afterward he was favorably received by his +Majesty and the Council and all his petitions and propositions were +considered and discussed at length, and many consultations were held +with his Majesty, in order to have a decision passed upon them. + +In the same year of ninety-three in which Gomez Perez died in the +Filipinas, the Council after consulting with his Majesty, resolved +that the office of lieutenant-assessor in judicial matters, which had +been filled by Licentiate Pedro de Roxas since the suppression of the +Audiencia, should be made more important than formerly in order to +facilitate matters; that the title of the office should thereafter be +that of lieutenant-general; and that in judicial matters the holder +of it should have authority to hear cases of appeal not exceeding +the value of one thousand Castilian ducados. Thereupon Licentiate +Pedro de Rojas was promoted to the office of alcalde of Mexico, +and Doctor Antonio de Morga was appointed by his Majesty to take the +latter's residencia, and to the office of lieutenant-general of the +Filipinas. In the course of his journey the latter arrived at Nueva +España in the beginning of the year ninety-four, and found that the +ships which, as abovesaid, had failed to come from the Filipinas, +had not arrived. Moreover the death of Gomez Perez, and the other +events that had occurred, were unknown until the arrival of Don Juan +de Velasco, in the month of November of the same year, in the galleon +"Sanctiago," which had been sent to the islands the year before by +Viceroy Don Luys de Velasco, with the necessary supplies. He brought +news of the governor's death and of the succession to the office by +the latter's son, Don Luys Dasmariñas. Men and fresh supplies for the +islands were prepared immediately and together with many passengers and +religious from España, Doctor Antonio de Morga embarked in the port of +Acapulco, in the galleons "San Felipe" and "Santiago," with everything +under his charge. He set sail March twenty-two of ninety-five, and +arrived under fair weather in the port of Cabit, June eleven of the +same year. He entered upon his office of lieutenant-general, and began +to occupy himself with his duties and the other matters in his charge. + +While Don Luys Dasmariñas was governing, the suspicions and fear +of Xapon continued, which, together with the Chinese trouble, kept +the people in continual anxiety. The governor sent his cousin, Don +Fernando de Castro, with letters and despatches to the viceroy of +Canton and to that of Chincheo, where many of the Chinese who had +seized the galley and killed Governor Gomez Perez, were thought to +be found. Supposing that they had gone there with the galley, the +governor requested the Chinese authorities to deliver the culprits +for punishment, and to restore the royal standard, artillery, and +other things which had been seized. This was not obtained, for as +the galley had gone to Cochinchina, and the Chinese had dispersed in +so many directions, it could not be effected. However, after several +days, some of the guilty Chinese were brought from Malaca to Manila, +having been captured there by the chief captain, Francisco de Silva +de Meneses. From these men more accurate information was derived +concerning what had happened in the seizure of the galley and of the +governor's death, and justice was dealt them. + +In the year ninety-four, when Don Luys was governor, a large junk came +to the Filipinas with some Cambodians and Siamese, several Chinese and +three Spaniards--one a Castilian, named Blaz Ruyz de Hernan Gonzalez, +and the other two Portuguese called Pantaleon Carnero and Antonio +Machado. While they were in the city of Chordemuco, [48] in Camboja, +with Prauncar [49] Langara, king of Camboja, the king of Sian attacked +the former king with many soldiers and elephants, conquered the land, +and seized the house and the treasures of the king, who, with his wife, +mother, sister, and his one daughter, and two sons, fled inland to +the kingdom of Lao. The king of Sian leaving some of his captains +to guard Camboja returned to his home with the rest of the army, +sending what booty he could not carry away by land, to Sian by sea +in several junks. He captured the Portuguese and Castilians whom he +found there [i.e., in Camboja], and embarked the above mentioned three +with other Cambodian slaves on board this junk, besides many goods, +and with a Siamese guard and a Chinese crew. While they were at sea, +the three Spaniards, aided by the Chinese, took possession of the +junk, and killed and imprisoned the Siamese guards. After that the +Spaniards and the Chinese came to blows as to who should have the +prize and where it was to be taken. The three Spaniards overcame the +Chinese, and killing most of them, took the junk to Manila with all +its cargo, and the vessel was adjudged to them. Liberty was granted +to the Cambodians as well as to the Chinese who had survived the fray. + +The king of Sian reached his court in the city of Odia [50] and +waited for the arrival of the junk; but seeing that it delayed longer +than was necessary, he suspected that it had been seized or lost, +and desired to send someone to bring him news of it and the reason +for the delay. Among the prisoners he had made in Camboja was the +Portuguese, Diego Belloso, who had been sent to Manila in the time +of Gomez Perez Dasmariñas by King Prauncar Langara, to request his +friendship and assistance against Sian which was then threatening him, +as abovesaid. On his return to Camboja with the governor's answer and +present, Belloso found that the Siamese had seized the country and +had occupied it. Accordingly they captured him, and the Siamese king +seized the present which he carried off with the other captures to his +country. This Diego Belloso, getting wind of the king's intention, had +word sent to the latter that, if he were to send him on this business, +he would go as far as Manila, since he knew that archipelago so well, +and find out what had happened to the junk. At the same time he said +that he would establish friendship and commerce in the king's name +with the Spaniards, and would procure many European curiosities for +him, which were to be found in Manila, especially a colored stone +large enough to serve as a hilt for the two-handed sword which the +king used--a thing which the king greatly desired on account of +a smaller one that he had found among the presents, and which he +carried before him when on his elephant. The king agreed to this and +had a junk prepared; he sent in it a Siamese who was in his service, +and all the other men necessary for the voyage, together with Diego +Belloso. He sent two elephants to the governor of Manila, and a +quantity of benzoin, ivory, and other merchandise for sale, with +the proceeds of which they were to buy the curiosities mentioned by +Belloso. Having set sail they encountered a storm, and the junk put in +at Malaca, where they learned that the other junk of the Siamese king, +for which they were looking, had been seized, and that the Spaniards +who had embarked as prisoners at Camboja, had taken it with all its +cargo to Manila, after killing the Siamese guards. + +At this news the Siamese king's servant began to look less favorably +upon the journey to Manila, and accordingly, although against Belloso's +desire, began to discharge and sell the goods in Malaca with the +intention of returning immediately to Sian. One morning this servant +of the Siamese king, Aconsi [51] by name, was found dead in the junk, +although he had retired safe and sound the night before. Thereupon +Diego Belloso became master of the situation, and after again embarking +the goods and elephants on the junk, left Malaca, and journeyed to +Manila. There he found Don Luys Dasmariñas acting as governor, because +of his father Gomez Perez's death. To him he gave the present of the +elephants, which he brought from the king, and told him what else had +been sent. The other goods and merchandise were offered for sale by +another Siamese who represented his king's service in the same junk. + +Belloso met Blas Ruys de Hernan Gonçales and his two companions in +Manila. Among them all they agreed to persuade Governor Don Luys to +send a fleet to Camboja to aid King Langara who was living in exile and +stripped of his kingdom. They alleged that it would be easy to restore +the king to power, and that at the same time the Spaniards might +gain a foothold on the mainland, where they could settle and fortify +themselves, whence would follow other important and more considerable +results. They called on the religious of the Order of St. Dominic to +support them before the governor in this plan. These easily put the +matter on such good footing--for the governor followed their advice +in everything that it was decided to prepare a fleet with as many +men as possible, under command of the captain and sargento-mayor, +Juan Xuarez Gallinato, himself in a ship of moderate size. He was +to be accompanied by two junks: one under command of Diego Belloso, +and the other under that of Blas Ruyz de Hernan Gonçalez, with one +hundred and twenty Spaniards, some Japanese and native Indians, +and all else that was necessary. + +This resolution seemed inexpedient to the majority of people in the +city, both because it took so many men away, and also, because the +success of the expedition seemed very doubtful. Admitting reports +that the country of Camboja was in the hands of the king of Sian, +who held it with sufficient forces--and nothing else was known--the +result of the expedition would be to make the king of Sian--from whom +the governor had just received presents and a friendly embassy in the +person of Belloso--their declared enemy. And without sending the king +an answer they were about to take up arms against him in favor of one +who was unknown to them, and from whom the Spaniards had received +neither pledges nor obligations. Lieutenant-general Don Antonio +de Morga and Master-of-camp Diego Ronquillo, together with other +captains and influential persons, spoke of this matter to Don Luys, +and even requested him in writing to desist from this expedition. But +although he had no reasons on his side to satisfy them, he was so +taken by the expedition, that, inasmuch as the said religious of +St. Dominic upheld him, he would not change his plans. Accordingly +he despatched the fleet to the kingdom of Camboja at the beginning +of the year ninety-six, which is generally one week's voyage. On the +other hand, he dismissed the Siamese who had accompanied Belloso, +without any definite answer to the embassy of the king of Siam, +to whom he sent in return for his presents, some products of the +country, which he thought appropriate. The Siamese, seeing that they +were being sent back to their country, were satisfied, and expected +no other result of their coming. + +A storm overtook the fleet, and the flagship which carried Juan +Xuarez Gallinato and the majority of the Spaniards, took refuge +in the strait of Sincapura near Malaca, where it remained for many +days. The other two junks which carried Diego Belloso and Blas Ruyz +with some Spaniards, Japanese, and natives of Manila, reached Camboja +with great difficulty, and Blas Ruyz, preceding Belloso, went up the +river Mecon as far as the city of Chordemuco. There they learned +that the mandarins of Camboja had united against the Siamese whom +they had conquered and driven from the kingdom; and that one of these +mandarins, Anacaparan by name, had taken possession of the country, +and was governing under the title of king, although against the will of +the others. Diego Belloso, Blas Ruyz, and those with them thought that +they had arrived in good season for the furtherance of their designs, +since confusion reigned among the Cambodians, and the Siamese were +out of the country. Expecting Gallinato and the flagship to arrive +directly, they spent several days in Chordemuco with the permission +of Anacaparan, who resided nine leguas away in Sistor. Although the +latter knew of the entry of these ships and their men, and that many +more were coming, whose intentions he knew; and although he thought +that it would not be favorable to him: yet he dissembled with them, +waiting to see what time would bring. At the same time six Chinese +ships with their merchandise arrived in Chordemuco and, while they +were discharging it, the Chinese being many and hating the Spaniards, +behaved towards them with great arrogance and insolence. This obliged +the Spaniards, for the sake of their reputation, and in order to +avenge themselves for injuries received, to take up arms against +the Chinese. This they did, killing many Chinese and seizing their +ships and all their cargo. Anacaparan took offense at this, and was +desirous for the Chinese to avenge themselves by his aid. To remedy +this evil Fray Alonso Ximenez, [52] of the Dominican order, who +accompanied the Spaniards, thought that he, together with Blas Ruys +and Diego Belloso, and about fifty Spaniards, a few Japanese, and men +from Luzon, should leave the rest to guard the ships in Chordemuco, +and should go up in small boats to Sistor, in order to obtain an +interview with Anacaparan and offer him excuses and satisfaction +for the trouble that they had had with the Chinese. And in order to +negotiate with him more easily, they made a letter of embassy in the +name of the governor of Manila, because Gallinato carried with him +the one given them by the governor. This device was of little service +to them, because Anacaparan not only did not grant them audience, +but after having seized their boats, kept them so hard pressed in a +lodging outside the city, and so threatened that he would kill them, +if they did not return the ships and what they had taken from them +to the Chinese, that the Spaniards were quite anxious to return to +Chordemuco and board their vessels for greater security. They decided +to do so as best they could. + +Their necessity, and beholding themselves in this danger, encouraged +them, one night, although at great risk, to leave their lodgings, and +find a passage where they could cross the river to the city side. They +crossed the river, arms in hand, late at night, and as silently as +possible. Finding themselves near the city, and their courage and +determination increasing, they entered the city and went as far +as the king's house. They set fire to it, to the magazines, and to +other buildings on their way, and threw the Cambodians into so great +confusion, that that night and the following morning they killed many +people, among them King Anacaparan himself. After this they thought it +unwise to advance or maintain their ground, and accordingly marched +back to their ships as orderly as possible. Meanwhile a great number +of Cambodians, with arms and several elephants, started to pursue the +Spaniards and overtook them before the latter reached their ships. The +Spaniards defended themselves valiantly, and continued their march +until embarking without the loss of a single man, while the Cambodians +returned to the city with some of their men killed and wounded. + +Diego Belloso and Bias Ruiz had hardly boarded their ships, when +Captain Gallinato entered Chordemuco with the flagship, by way of the +river. They told him all that happened with the Chinese and Cambodians +and of the favorable condition of affairs for continuing them, alleging +that, since the usurper Anacaparan was dead, many Cambodians would +immediately join the Spaniards in defense of the name and fame of +Langara their legitimate king. But, although some of the Cambodians +themselves came to visit the fleet, and assured Gallinato of the same, +of the death of Anacaparan, and of the deeds of the Spaniards in +Sistor, he appeared to give no credit to any of them, and could not +be induced to believe them, or to continue the enterprise, or even +to consider it. On the contrary he rebuked the Spaniards for what had +taken place in his absence, and after depriving them of all that they +had seized from the Chinese and Cambodians, put to sea in order to +return to Manila. Belloso and Blas Ruiz persuaded him to go at least +to Cochinchina, where the galley seized when Governor Gomez Perez was +killed was said to have been taken, and where were the royal standard +and the artillery carried aboard the galley, and for which he should +ask. They promised, while Gallinato was making these negotiations, +to go overland to the kingdom of Lao, where Langara, king of Camboja, +was living, in order to restore him to his kingdom. Captain Gallinato +consented to this, and sailed along the coast, until he entered the +bay of Cochinchina, where, although he was apparently well received +by the natives of the country, he would not disembark from his ships, +but sent Gregorio de Vargas from them to visit the king of Tunquin, +the chief king of that kingdom, and to treat with him concerning the +galley, the standard, and the artillery. While he was thus engaged, +Gallinato allowed Blas Ruyz and Diego Belloso to go ashore to endeavor +to make the journey to Lao, for he agreed easily to their request +because he thus got rid of them and left them busied in this matter, +so that they could not do him any ill turn in Manila in regard to +leaving Camboja. + +Diego Belloso and Blas Ruyz went to the king of Sinua, son of the king +of Tunquin, and begged him to help them in their journey. From him they +received all that was necessary, and were well treated and served until +they reached the city of Alanchan, [53] capital of the kingdom of Lao, +where they were kindly received by the king of the country. They found +that Prauncar Langara, king of Camboja, and his elder son and daughter +had died, and that only his son Prauncar survived, and the latter's +stepmother, grandmother, and aunts. They related the condition of +affairs in Camboja, the arrival of the Spaniards, and the death of +the usurper Anacaparan. The same news was brought by a Cambodian +from Chordemuco, who also added that since the death of Anacaparan, +his younger son Chupinanu was reigning, that the country was entirely +divided into factions, and that many upon seeing their natural and +lawful king would leave Chupinanu and would join him and obey him. + +The few difficulties for the departure having been overcome by the +arrival at this time of the mandarin Ocuña de Chu at Lanchan, in Lao +[54] from Camboja, who had been sent by order of other mandarins and +grandees of Camboja with ten praus well equipped with artillery and +weapons to fetch their lawful king, it was decided to go down to +Camboja. Prauncar, his grandmother, aunt, and stepmother--he wife +of Langara--together with Diego Belloso and Blas Ruyz, embarked +and journeyed in the said boats and praus down the rivers flowing +from Lao to Camboja. [55] There they found fresh disturbances in the +provinces. But as soon as Prauncar arrived many went over to his side, +especially two Moro Malays, Acuña La Casamana [56] and Cancona, who +were in the country with a Malay army and a quantity of artillery and +elephants. Prauncar was victorious on various occasions, and Chupinanu +with his brothers and other rebels having died in battle, became master +of almost all the provinces of his kingdom. He made Diego Belloso and +Blas Ruyz chiefs in war affairs, and they managed war matters until +they completely established Prauncar on the throne. When the war was +almost entirely ended, the king made Belloso and Blas Ruyz great chofas +[57] of his kingdom, gave them two provinces, and granted them other +favors, although not so many as they expected, or as he had promised +while still in Lao. The chief reason for this was the stepmother, +grandmother, and aunt of the king, who managed him, on account of +his youth, and of his being addicted to wine, in excess even of his +father Langara. The Moro Malay, Acuña Lacasamana, had great influence +with these women. Being envious of the valor of the Spaniards, he was +continually opposing them, and seeking their destruction, with whom, +on this account, they were always at odds. It must be understood +that this Moro held unlawful relations with the wife of Langara, +the stepmother of King Prauncar. + +Captain Gallinato's fleet remained in Cochinchina negotiating with +the king of Tunquin for the royal standard and the artillery of the +galley, as above stated, for the galley was lost upon that coast, +and this king had the rest in his possession. The latter not only did +not restore them, but entertaining Gallinato with flattering speech, +was, on the contrary, planning to take from him his ships and their +contents. Gallinato was secretly warned of this by one of the chief +women of Cochinchina, who came to the fleet to see him, after which +he kept a much more careful watch than before, and allowed no one to +go ashore. But this order was of no avail with Fray Alonso Ximenez, +one of the Dominican religious whom he had with him, and the chief +promoter of the expedition. When the latter went ashore, they seized +and kept him there. The Cochinchinese, imagining that the fleet was +off its guard, sent some fire ships against it, followed by some +galleys and warboats, in order to burn it, while many men armed with +arquebuses annoyed the Spaniards from the neighboring shore. The fleet +succeeded in getting away from the fire and put off from shore, and +resisted the enemy's ships with artillery, musketry, and arquebuses, +thus sinking some of them. After this the Spaniards waited no longer, +but leaving Fray Alonso Ximenez on shore, and two lay companions, +whom he took with him, put to sea and left the bay of Cochinchina, +and ran toward the Filipinas. + +While these things were happening in Camboja and Cochinchina, orders +had arrived from España from his Majesty to conclude an agreement +that Captain Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa had made with Gomez Perez +Dasmariñas, under which the former was to pacify and settle the island +of Mindanao at his own expense, and receive the governorship of the +island for two lives [58] and other rewards. The said agreement was +effected, after certain difficulties that arose were settled. Don +Estevan Rodriguez prepared men and ships, and what else was necessary +for the enterprise, and with some galleys, galleots, frigates, vireys, +barangays, and lapis, [59] set out with two hundred and fourteen +Spaniards for the island of Mindanao, in February of the same year, +of ninety-six. He took Captain Juan de la Xara as his master-of-camp, +and some religious of the Society of Jesus to give instruction, +as well as many natives for the service of the camp and fleet. + +He reached Mindanao River, after a good voyage, where the first +settlements, named Tancapan and Lumaguan, both hostile to the people +of Buhahayen, received him peacefully and in a friendly manner, and +joined his fleet. They were altogether about six thousand men. Without +delay they advanced about eight leguas farther up the river against +Buhahayen, the principal settlement of the island, where its greatest +chief had fortified himself on many sides. Arrived at the settlement, +the fleet cast anchor, and immediately landed a large proportion of +the troops with their arms. But before reaching the houses and fort, +and while going through some thickets [çacatal] [60] near the shore, +they encountered some of the men of Buhahayen, who were coming to +meet them with their campilans, carazas [61] and other weapons, and +who attacked them on various sides. The latter [i.e., the Spaniards +and their allies], on account of the swampiness of the place and +the denseness of the thickets [çacatal], could not act unitedly as +the occasion demanded, although the master-of-camp and the captains +that led them exerted themselves to keep the troops together and +to encourage them to face the natives. Meanwhile Governor Estevan +Rodriguez de Figueroa was watching events from his flagship, but not +being able to endure the confusion of his men, seized his weapons +and hastened ashore with three or four companions, and a servant who +carried his helmet, in order that he might be less impeded in his +movements. But as he was crossing a part of the thickets [çacatal] +where the fight was waging, a hostile Indian stepped out unseen from +one side, and dealt the governor a blow on the head with his campilan, +that stretched him on the ground badly wounded. [62] The governor's +followers cut the Mindanao to pieces and carried the governor back to +the camp. Shortly after, the master-of-camp, Juan de la Xara, withdrew +his troops to the fleet, leaving behind several Spaniards who had +fallen in the encounter. The governor did not regain consciousness, +for the wound was very severe, and died next day. The fleet after that +loss and failure left that place, and descended the river to Tampacan, +where it anchored among the friendly inhabitants and their settlements. + +The master-of-camp, Juan de la Xara, had himself chosen by the fleet +as successor in the government and enterprise. He built a fort with +arigues and palms near Tampacan, and founded a Spanish settlement to +which he gave the name of Murcia. He began to make what arrangements he +deemed best, in order to establish himself and run things independently +of, and without acknowledging the governor of Manila, without whose +intervention and assistance this enterprise could not be continued. + + + +Of the administration of Don Francisco Tello, and of the second +establishment of the Audiencia of Manila; and of occurrences during +the period of this administration. + +CHAPTER SIXTH + +Governor Don Luis Dasmariñas was awaiting news from Captain Juan +Xuarez Gallinato, and from Governor Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa +concerning the voyage which each had made at the beginning of the year +ninety-six, to Camboja and to Mindanao, when news reached Manila, +in the month of June, that two ships had entered the islands by the +channel of Espiritu Santo, and that they brought a new governor sent +from España, namely, Don Francisco Tello de Guzman, knight of the Order +of Sanctiago, a native of Sevilla, and treasurer of the India House +of Trade. He arrived at Manila in the beginning of July and entered +upon his office. It was also learned that Fray Ygnacio Sanctivañez, +of the Order of St. Francis, a native of Sanctivañez, in the province +of Burgos, had been nominated in Nueva España as archbishop of Manila, +for Bishop Fray Domingo de Salazar had died in Madrid; and that Fray +Miguel de Venavides, a native of Carrion and a religious of the Order +of St. Dominic, who had gone to España with Bishop Fray Domingo de +Salazar, had been appointed bishop of the city of Segovia in the +province of Cagayan; also that Fray Pedro de Agurto, of the Order +of St. Augustine, a native of Mexico, had been appointed in Mexico, +bishop of the city of Sanctisimo Nombre de Jesus, and that these +two bishops with another for the city of Caceres, in the province +of Camarines, who was not yet named, had been lately added to the +Filipinas and appointed as suffragans to the archbishop of Manila, +at the instance of Bishop Fray Domingo. Also it was learned that the +Audiencia which had been suppressed in Manila was to be reëstablished +there, as well as other things which the bishop had presented at court. + +Shortly after Don Francisco Tello had taken over the governorship, news +was brought of the death of Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa in Mindanao, +by Brother Gaspar Gomez of the Society of Jesus. The latter brought +the body for burial in the college of Manila, of which Don Estevan +was patron. Juan de la Xara wrote that he had charge of affairs, +that he had settled in Tampacan, that he intended to continue the +pacification and conquest of the island as should seem most advisable, +and that reënforcements of men and other things should be sent him. It +was learned that he intended to make an ill use of the government, +and would not remain dependent on, and subordinate to, the governor +of the Filipinas; and that he was depriving the heirs of Estevan +Rodriguez of what lawfully belonged to them. It was learned that, +in order to make himself safer in this respect, he was sending his +confidants to the town of Arevalo in Oton where Don Estevan had +left his wife, Doña Ana de Osseguera, and his two small daughters, +with his house and property, to persuade Doña Ana to marry him. This +resolution appeared injurious in many respects, and the attempt was +made to rectify matters. But in order not to disturb the affairs +of Mindanao, the matter was left alone for the present, until time +should show the course to be followed. And so it happened that when +Juan de la Xara left the camp and settlements of Mindanao, and came +hurriedly to Oton to negotiate his marriage in person--although the +widow of Don Estevan had never been favorable to it--Don Francisco +Tello sent men to arrest him. He was brought to Manila, where he died +while his trial was being conducted. + +After the imprisonment of Juan de La Xara, Don Francisco Tello +immediately sent Captain Toribio de Miranda to Mindanao, with orders +to take command of the camp and to govern, until some one should +agree to continue the enterprise. When he arrived at Mindanao and the +soldiers saw that Juan de La Xara's schemes had been defeated, and +that the latter was a prisoner in Manila, with no hope of returning, +they obeyed Toribio de Miranda and the orders that he brought. + +In Manila the governor was considering carefully the necessary +measures for continuing the war, since the island of Mindanao was so +near the other pacified islands, and the island itself contained some +provinces that professed peace and were apportioned as encomiendas, +and had Spanish magistrates, such as the rivers of Butuan, Dapitan, +and Caragan, so that it was desirable to pacify the whole island and +subject it to his Majesty. The royal treasury was spent and could +not bear the expense; and Estevan Rodriguez had bound himself by a +legal writ, to carry the war to entire completion at his own expense, +in accordance with the terms of his agreement. The guardian of his +children and heirs brought the matter before the court, and refused +to fulfil this obligation on account of Estevan Rodriguez's death. In +order not to lose time, for what had been commenced had to be continued +in one way or another, the governor decided to prosecute it, drawing +the necessary funds from the royal treasury, either on its own account +or on the account of Estevan Rodriguez's heirs, if such should be +according to law. The governor then searched for a person to go to +Mindanao, and selected Don Juan Ronquillo, general of the galleys. The +latter was given the necessary reënforcements of men and other things, +with which he reached Mindanao. He took command of the Spanish camp and +fleet which he found in Tampacan. He confirmed the peace and friendship +with the chiefs and people of Tampacan and Lumaguan, restored and set +in better order the Spanish settlement and fort, and began to make +preparation for the war against the people of Buhahayen. He spent +many days in making a few incursions into their land and attacks on +their forts, but without any notable result, for the enemy were many +and all good soldiers, with plenty of arquebuses [63] and artillery, +and had fortified themselves in a strong position. They had many other +fortifications inland and went from one to the other with impunity, +whenever they wished, and greatly harassed the Spaniards, who were +little used to so swampy a country. The latter found themselves short +of provisions without the possibility of getting them in the country +on account of the war, inasmuch as the camp contained many men, +both Spaniards and the native servants and boatmen, and it was not +easy at all times to come and go from one part to another in order +to provide necessities. [64] + +Meanwhile Don Juan Ronquillo, seeing that the war was advancing very +slowly and with little result, and that the camp was suffering, drew up +a report of it, and sent letters in all haste to Governor Don Francisco +Tello, informing him of the condition of affairs. He wrote that it +would be better to withdraw the camp from Mindanao River, so that +it might not perish; and that a presidio could be established on the +same island in the port of La Caldera, which could be left fortified, +in order not to abandon this enterprise entirely, and so that their +friends of Tampacan and Lumaguan might be kept hostile to the people +of Buhahayen. Meanwhile he and the rest of the camp and fleet would +return to Manila, if permitted, for which he requested the governor +to send him an order quickly. Upon the receipt of this despatch, +Governor Don Francisco Tello resolved to order Don Juan Ronquillo, +since the above was so and the camp could not be maintained, nor the +war continued advantageously, to withdraw with his whole camp from +Mindanao River. He was first to make a great effort to chastise the +enemy in Buhahayen, and then to burn the Spanish settlement and fort +and to go to La Caldera, fortify it, and leave there a sufficient +garrison with artillery, boats, and provisions for its maintenance and +service. Then he was to return to Manila with the rest of his men, +after telling their friends in Tampacan that the Spaniards would +shortly return to the river better equipped and in greater numbers. + +Silonga and other chiefs of Buhahayen were not neglecting their +defense, since, among other measures taken, they had sent a chief to +Terrenate to ask assistance against the Spaniards who had brought +war into their homes. Thereupon the king of Terrenate despatched a +numerous fleet of caracoas and other boats to Mindanao with cachils +[65] and valiant soldiers--more than one thousand fighting men in +all--and a quantity of small artillery, in order to force the Spaniards +to break camp and depart, even could they do nothing else. When the +news reached Buhahayen that this fleet was coming to their defense and +support, they made ready and prepared to attack the Spaniards, who +also having heard the same news were not careless. Consequently the +latter turned their attention more to the main fort, and reduced the +number of men in the smaller forts on Buquil River and other posts, +mouths, and arms of the same river. These served to strengthen the +garrison of the main fort and the armed galleys and other smaller +craft, in order to use the latter to resist the expected attack of +the enemy. The enemy having gallantly advanced to the very fort of +the Spaniards with all their vessels and men, attacked and stormed it +with great courage and resolution, in order to effect an entrance. The +Spaniards within resisted valiantly, and those outside in the galleys +on the river assisted them so effectively that together, with artillery +and arquebuses, and at times in close combat with swords and campilans, +they made a great slaughter and havoc among the men of Terrenate and +those of Buhahayen, who were aiding the former. They killed and wounded +a great number of them and captured almost all the caracoas and vessels +of the enemy, so that very few boats escaped and they were pursued and +burned by the Spaniards, who made many prisoners, and seized immense +booty and many weapons from the enemy. As soon as possible after this, +the Spaniards turned against the settlements and forts of Buhahayen +where some of their results were of so great moment that the enemy, +seeing themselves hard pressed and without anyone to help them, sent +messages and proposals of peace to Don Juan Ronquillo, which were +ended by their rendering recognition and homage, and the renewal +of friendship with the people of Tampacan, their ancient enemy. In +order to strengthen the friendship, they sealed it by the marriage +of the greatest chief and lord of Buhahayen with the daughter of +another chief of Tampacan, called Dongonlibor. Thereupon the war was +apparently completely ended, provisions were now to be had, and the +Spaniards with little precaution crossed and went about the country +wherever they wished. The people of Buhahayen promised to dismantle +all their forts immediately, for that was one of the conditions of +peace. Then the Spaniards returned to their fort and settlement at +Tampacan, whence Don Juan Ronquillo immediately sent despatches to +Governor Don Francisco Tello, informing him of the different turn +that the enterprise had taken. In view of the present condition he +requested the governor to issue new instructions as to his procedure, +saying that he would wait without making any change, notwithstanding +the arrival of the answer which he expected to his first report, +for conditions had now become so much better than before that the +governor's decision would be different. + +The governor had already answered Don Joan Ronquillo's first despatch, +as we have said above, when the second despatch arrived with news +of the successes in Mindanao. Suspicious of the men in the camp who +had constantly shown a desire to return to Manila, and little relish +for the hardships of war, and fearing lest they would return at the +arrival of the first order, executing that order and abandoning the +enterprise which had reached such a satisfactory stage; and thinking +that it would be unwise to abandon the river: the governor made haste +to send a second despatch immediately by various roads, ordering them +to pay no attention to his first orders, but to remain in Mindanao, and +that he would soon send them what was necessary for further operations. + +It seems that this message traveled slowly; for, the first having +arrived, they obeyed it without any further delay, and camp was +raised and the country abandoned. To their former enemy of Buhahayen +they gave as a reason that the governor of Manila had summoned them; +and to their friends of Tampacan, they said that they would leave men +in La Caldera for their security, and that assistance would be sent +them from Manila. This news caused as much sorrow and sadness to the +latter, as joy to the people of Buhahayen. Then after burning their +fort and settlement, the Spaniards embarked all their forces as soon as +possible, left the river, and went to La Caldera, twenty-four leguas +farther down in the direction of Manila. Having entered port, they +built a fortress and left there a garrison of one hundred Spaniards, +with some artillery, provisions, and boats for their use. + +At this juncture, the governor's second message to General Don Joan +Ronquillo arrived, to which the latter replied that he was already +in La Caldera, and could not return to the river. Then, without any +further delay, Don Juan Ronquillo went to Manila with the balance of +his fleet, by way of the provinces of Oton, and Panay. The governor, +having heard of his coming, sent to arrest him on the road before +he entered the city, and proceeded against him by law for having +withdrawn the camp and army from Mindanao River, without awaiting the +orders he should have expected after the favorable turn that affairs +had taken. Don Juan Ronquillo was set at liberty on showing a private +letter from the governor, which the latter had sent him separately +with the first instructions, to the effect that he should return +to Manila with his troops in any event, for they were needed in the +islands for other purposes; and because of this letter Don Juan had +determined not to await the second order. + +Captain and Sargento-mayor Gallinato crossed from Cochinchina to Manila +in the flagship of his fleet, and informed Don Francisco Tello whom he +found governing, of the events of his expedition; and that Blas Ruyz +and Diego Belloso had gone by land to Lao from Cochinchina in search +of King Langara of Camboja. Thus by their absence he avoided the blame +of leaving Camboja, although there were not wanting many of his own +followers who angrily gave information of the opportunity that he had +lost by not showing himself or staying in Camboja when he had so good +an opportunity; and they stoutly asserted that if he had done so, +all that had been hoped in that kingdom would have been attained. + +The other ship of his convoy, to which the balance of his fleet +had been reduced, of which he made Alférez Luys Ortiz commander, +could not pursue the voyage on account of heavy storms, and put in at +Malaca. Some of the Spaniards remained there, and Ortiz with the rest +of the crew, was able to set sail after a few months, and returned +to Manila. + +Coincident with the above, and at the beginning of Don Francisco +Tello's administration, two Indian chiefs of the province of Cagayan, +the more powerful of whom was called Magalat, were detained in Manila, +because they, with their kinsmen, and others who followed their +party and opinion, often incited the settlements of that province to +rebellion; and it had cost no little trouble to subdue them; besides +the daily murder of many Spaniards and other injuries inflicted upon +the peaceful natives and their crops. Magalat was captain and leader +of these men, and since he, with his brother and other natives, was +in Manila, and unable to leave it, that province became more secure. + +Some Dominican religious bound for Segovia, the capital of that +province, where they give instruction, moved with pity, persuaded +the governor to let Magalat and his brother return to their country +with them. To such an extent did they importune the governor, that +he granted their request. Having reached Cagayan, the chiefs went +inland by the Lobo River and again incited the whole country to +rebellion. With the help of other chiefs of Tubigarao, and other +settlements, they so stirred up things, that it was impossible to +go to those settlements or a step beyond the city. Magalat was the +leader of the rebels, and he committed cruel murders and injuries +even upon the natives themselves, if they refused to rise against the +Spaniards. This reached such a point that the governor was obliged +to send the master-of-camp, Pedro de Chaves, from Manila with +troops, in order that he might suitably remedy the evil. In spite +of many difficulties, the latter had so good fortune that he seized +many insurgent leaders upon whom he executed justice and public +punishment. As for Magalat himself, the governor caused him to be +killed in his own house and land where he had fortified himself, by +the hand of his own Indians, who had offered to do it for a reward; +for in no other way did it appear possible. Had Magalat not been +killed, the war would have dragged on for many years, but with his +death the province became quiet and the peace secure. + +In April of the year one thousand five hundred and ninety-five, +Adelantado Alvaro de Mendaña de Neira sailed from Callao de Lima in +Peru, to colonize the Salomon Islands, which he had discovered many +years before in the South Sea, [66] the principal one of which he had +called San Christoval. He took four ships, two large ones--a flagship +and an almiranta--a frigate, and a galliot, with four hundred men +in all. He was also accompanied by his wife, Doña Ysabel Barreto and +his three brothers-in-law. On the way he discovered other islands at +which he did not stop; but not finding those which he had previously +discovered, and as his almiranta had been lost, he anchored with the +other ships at an island near Nueva Guinea, inhabited by blacks, +to which he gave the name of Santa Cruz [Holy Cross]. There he +settled--little to the satisfaction of his men. The adelantado, two of +his brothers-in-law, and many of his people died there. Doña Ysabel +Barreto abandoned the colony, on account of sickness and want, and +embarked the survivors aboard her flagship, frigate, and galliot. But +while they were sailing toward the Filipinas the frigate and galliot +disappeared in another direction. The flagship entered the river of +Butuan, in the island of Mindanao, and reached Manila after great +want and suffering. There Doña Ysabel Barreto married Don Fernando de +Castro, and returned to Nueva España in his ship, the "San Geronymo," +in the year ninety-six. The events of this voyage have been only +lightly touched upon here, so that it seems fitting to reproduce +literally the relation, to which Don Pedro Fernandez de Quiros, +chief pilot on this voyage, affixed his signature, which is as follows. + +Relation of the voyage of Adelantado Alvaro de Mendaña de Neira for +the discovery of the Salomon Islands + +On Friday, the ninth of the month of April, one thousand five hundred +and ninety-five, Adelantado Alvaro de Mendaña set sail with his fleet +for the conquest and settlement of the western islands in the South +Sea, sailing from the port of Callao de Lima, which lies in twelve and +one-half degrees south latitude. Laying his course toward the valleys +of Santa, Truxillo, and Saña, and collecting men and provisions, he +went to Paita. [67] There he took in water and numbered his forces, +which amounted to about four hundred persons. Then with his four +vessels, two large and two small, he left the said port, which is +five degrees higher than the former port, and directed his course +west-southwest in search of the islands that he had discovered. He +took Pedro Merino Manrique as master-of-camp; his brother-in-law, +Lope de la Vega, as admiral; and Pedro Fernandez de Quiros as +chief pilot. Following the above-mentioned course he sailed to the +altitude of nine and one-half degrees, whence he sailed southwest by +west to fourteen degrees, where he changed his course to northwest +by west. On Friday, the twenty-first of the month of July, having +reached an altitude of ten long degrees, we sighted an island to +which the general gave the name of Madalena. [68] From a port of this +island, about seventy canoes came out, each containing three men, +or thereabout, while some came swimming and others on logs. There +were more than four hundred Indians, white and of a very agreeable +appearance, tall and strong, large-limbed, and so well made that +they by far surpassed us. [69] They had fine teeth, eyes, mouth, +hands and feet, and beautiful long flowing hair, while many of them +were very fair. Very handsome youths were to be seen among them; +all were naked and covered no part. Their bodies, legs, arms, hands, +and even some of their faces, were all marked after the fashion of +these Bissayans. And indeed, for a barbarous people, naked, and of +so little reason, one could not restrain himself, at sight of them, +from thanking God for having created them. And do not think this +exaggeration, for it was so. These people invited us to their port, +and were in turn invited to our flagship, and about forty of them +came aboard. In comparison with them we appeared to be men of less +than ordinary size. Among them was one who was thought to be a palmo +taller than the tallest man of our fleet, although we had in the +fleet men of more than average height. The general gave some of them +shirts and other things, which they accepted with much pleasure, +dancing after their fashion and calling others. But being annoyed +at the liberties that they took, for they were great thieves, the +general had a cannon fired, in order to frighten them. When they +heard it they all swam ashore, seized their weapons, and at the sound +of a conch threw a few stones at the ships and threatened us with +their lances, for they had no other weapons. Our men fired their +arquebuses at them from the ships and killed five or six of them, +whereat they stopped. Our fleet sailed on and we discovered three +other islands. This island has a circumference of about six leguas. We +passed it on its southern side. On that side it is high and slopes +precipitously to the sea, and has mountainous ravines where the +Indians dwell. There seemed to be many inhabitants, for we saw them +on the rocks and on the beach. And so we continued our course to the +other three islands. The first, to which was given the name San Pedro, +is about ten leguas from Magdalena, and like it extends northwest by +north. It has a circumference of about three leguas. The island is +beautiful, and rich in woods and fine fields. We did not ascertain +whether it was inhabited or not, for we did not stop there. To the +southeast and about five leguas from it lies another island to which +the general gave the name of Dominica. It is very sightly, and to +all appearances thickly populated, and has a circumference of about +fifteen leguas. To the south and a little more than one legua from +it lies another island with a circumference of about eight leguas, +which received the name of Sancta Cristina. Our fleet passed through +the channel that separates the one island from the other, for all that +we saw of these islands is clear sailing. On the west side of Sancta +Cristina, a good port was found, and there the fleet anchored. [70] +These Indians did not seem to me to resemble the first; but many +beautiful women were seen. I did not see the latter, but some who did +assured me that in their opinion, they are as beautiful as the women +in Lima, but light complexioned and not so tall--and the women in Lima +are very beautiful. The articles of food seen in that port were swine +and fowl, sugar-cane, excellent bananas, cocoanuts, and a fruit that +grows on high trees. Each of the last is as large as a good-sized +pineapple, and is excellent eating. Much of it was eaten green, +roasted, and boiled. When ripe it is indeed so sweet and good that, +in my estimation, there is no other that surpasses it. Scarcely any +of it, except a little husk, has to be thrown away. [71] There was +also another fruit with a flavor like that of chestnuts, but much +larger in size than six chestnuts put together; much of this fruit +was eaten roasted and boiled. Certain nuts with a very hard shell, +and very oily, were also found, which were eaten in great quantities, +and which, according to some, induced diarrhoea. We also saw some +Castilian pumpkins growing. Near the beach there is a fine cascade +of very clear water, which issues from a rock at the height of two +men. Its volume is about the width of four or five fingers. Then +near by there is a stream, from which the boats drew a full supply +of water. The Indians fled to the forests and rocks, where they +fortified themselves and tried to do some mischief, by throwing +stones and rolling down rocks, but they never wounded anyone, for +the master-of-camp restrained them, by placing outposts. The Indians +of this island, on seeing one of our negroes, made signs toward the +south, saying that there were men like him there, and that they were +wont to go there to fight; that the others were armed with arrows; and +that they make the journey thither in certain large canoes which they +possess. Since there was no interpreter, or much curiosity to learn +more, no further investigations were made, although, in my opinion, +this is impossible for Indians so remote, unless there be a chain of +islands; for their boats and their customs in other things show that +they have not come from any great distance. + +This port lies in an altitude of nine and one-half degrees. The +adelantado ordered three crosses to be planted, and on Saturday, August +fifth, to weigh anchor and set sail southwest by west. We sailed with +easterly and east southeasterly winds, now southwest by west and now +northwest by west, for about four hundred leguas. One Sunday, August +twenty, we sighted four low islands with sandy beaches, abounding +in palms and other trees. On the southeast side, towards the north, +was seen a great sandbank. All four islands have a circuit of about +twelve leguas. Whether they were inhabited or not, we could not tell, +for we did not go to them. That year appeared to be one of talk, of +which I speak with anger. These islands lie in an altitude of ten and +three-quarters degrees. They were named San Bernardo, [72] because +they were discovered on that saint's day. Thenceforward we began to +meet southeasterly winds, which never failed us, and which seem to +prevail in those regions. With these winds we continued to sail always +in the said direction, never going above eleven or below ten degrees, +until Tuesday, August twenty-nine, when we discovered a round islet, +of about one legua in circumference, surrounded by reefs. We tried +to land there, so that the almiranta could take on wood and water, of +which there was great need, but could find no landing-place. We gave +it the name of La Solitaria [Solitary Island]. It lies in an altitude +of ten and two-thirds degrees, and is about one thousand five hundred +and thirty five leguas from Lima. [73] From this island we continued +to sail in the said course: a thing which drew a variety of opinions +from the men, some saying that we did not know where we were going, +and other things which did not fail to cause some hard feelings; but by +the mercy of God, at midnight on the eve of Nuestra Señora de Setiembre +[Our Lady of September], we sighted an island of about ninety or one +hundred leguas in circumference, which extends almost east southeast +and west northwest, and lies about one thousand eight hundred leguas +from Lima. [74] The whole island is full of dense forests, even to +the highest ridges; and where it was not cleared for the Indians' +fields, not a palmo of earth could be seen. The ships anchored in a +port on the north side of the island, in ten degrees of latitude. About +seven leguas north of that port, there is a volcano with a very well +shaped cone, which ejects much fire from its summit, and from other +parts. The volcano is high and about three leguas in circumference. On +the side toward the sea it is very steep and quite bare, and offers +no landing; and it rumbles frequently and loudly within. Northeast of +this volcano are several small inhabited islets, surrounded by many +shoals. The distance to these islets is seven or eight leguas. The +shoals extend about northwest, and one who saw them said that they +were numerous. Around the large island were several small ones, and +as we sailed around them, we found that they were all inhabited, +even the large one. Within sight of this large island, and to the +southeast of it, we saw another island of no great size. This must +be the connecting link with the other islands. [75] After having put +into port at the great island Sancta Cruz, as it had been named, the +adelantado ordered Captain Don Lorenzo, his brother-in-law, to go with +the frigate in search of the almiranta, of which I have no favorable +conjectures, and which had disappeared on the night that we sighted the +island. It was sought on this and on two other occasions, but nothing +except the shoals above-mentioned were found. What was seen in the +way of food in this bay and port was swine, fowl, bananas, sugar-cane, +some two or three kinds of roots resembling sweet potatoes, which are +eaten boiled or roasted and made into biscuits, buyos [i.e., betel], +two kinds of excellent almonds, two kinds of pine-nuts, ring-doves +and turtle-doves, ducks, gray and white herons, swallows, a great +quantity of amaranth, Castilian pumpkins, the fruit which I mentioned +as being in the first islands, chestnuts, and walnuts. Sweet basil, +of great fragrance, and red flowers, which are kept in the gardens +at that port, and two other kinds of different flowers, also red, are +found. There is another fruit which grows on high trees, and resembles +the pippin in its pleasing smell and savor; a great quantity of ginger +grows wild there, as also of the herb chiquilite, from which indigo +is made. [76] There are agave-trees, abundance of sagia [sago (?)], +[77] and many cocoanuts. Marble is also to be seen, as well as pearl +shells and large snail-shells, like those brought from China. There is +a very copious spring and five or six rivers of small volume. There +we settled close by the spring. The Indians endeavored to prevent +us; but as the arquebus tells at a distance, upon seeing its deadly +effects, their hostility was lukewarm, and they even gave us some of +the things that they possessed. In this matter of procuring provisions, +several cases of not over good treatment happened to the Indians; for +the Indian who was our best friend and lord of that island, Malope +by name, was killed, as well as two or three others, also friendly +to us. No more of all the island than about three leguas about the +camp was explored. The people of this island are black. They have +small single-masted canoes for use about their villages; and some +very large ones to use in the open sea. On Sunday, October eight, the +adelantado had the master-of-camp stabbed. Tomas de Ampuero was also +killed in the same way. Alférez Juan de Buitrago was beheaded; and the +adelantado intended to have two others, friends of the master-of-camp, +killed, but was restrained therefrom at our request. The cause of +this was notorious, for these men tried to induce the adelantado to +leave the land and abandon it. There must have been other reasons +unknown to me; what I saw was much dissoluteness and shamelessness, +and a great deal of improper conduct. On October eighteen, after a +total eclipse of the moon on the seventeenth, the adelantado died; +[78] November two, Don Lorenzo, his brother-in-law, who had succeeded +him as captain-general; the priest Antonio de Serpa, seven or eight +days before; and November eight the vicar, Juan de Espinosa. Disease +was rampant among our men and many died for lack of care, and the +want of an apothecary and doctor. The men begged the governor Doña +Ysabel Barreto to take them out of the country. All agreed to embark, +and by the mercy of God, we left this port on Saturday, the eighteenth +of the said month, and sailed southwest by west toward the island of +San Cristoval or rather in search of it, to see whether we could find +it or the almiranta, in accordance with the governor's orders. For two +days nothing was seen; and at the request of all the men, who cried +out that we were taking them to destruction, she ordered me to steer +from our settlement, located in ten and one-half degrees of latitude, +to Manila. Thence I steered north northwest to avoid meeting islands +on the way, since we were so ill prepared to approach any of them, +with our men so sick that about fifty of them died in the course of +the voyage and about forty there in the island. We continued our course +short of provisions, navigating five degrees south and as many north, +and meeting with many contrary winds and calms. When we reached an +altitude of six long degrees north latitude, we sighted an island, +apparently about twenty-five leguas in circumference, thickly wooded +and inhabited by many people who resembled those of the Ladrones, +and whom we saw coming toward us in canoes. From the southeast +to the north and then to the southwest, it is surrounded by large +reefs. [79] About four leguas west of it are some low islets. There, +although we tried, we failed to find a suitable place to anchor; for +the galliot and frigates which accompanied our ship had disappeared +some days before. [80] From this place we continued the said course +until we reached an altitude of thirteen and three-quarters degrees, +and in the two days that we sailed west in this latitude, we sighted +the islands of Serpana [i.e., Seypan] and Guan in the Ladrones. We +passed between the two and did not anchor there, because we had no +cable for lowering and hauling up the boat. This was the third of the +month of January, one thousand five hundred and ninety-six. On the +fourteenth of the same month we sighted the cape of Espiritu Sancto, +and on the fifteenth we anchored in the bay of Cobos. [81] We reached +there in such a state that only the goodness of God could have taken +us thither; for human strength and resources would hardly have taken +us a tenth of the way. We reached that place so dismantled and the +crew so weak that we were a most piteous sight, and with only nine +or ten jars of water. In this bay of Cobos the ship was repaired and +the men recuperated as much as possible. On Tuesday, February second, +we left the above port and bay, and on the tenth of the same month +we anchored in the port of Cabite, etc. + +Besides my desire to serve your Grace, I am moved to leave this brief +relation for you, by the fact that if, perchance, God should dispose of +my life, or other events should cause me or the relation that I carry +to disappear, the truth may be learned from this one, which may prove +a matter of great service to God and to the king our sovereign. [82] +Will your Grace look favorably upon my great desire to serve you, +of which I shall give a better proof, if God permit me to return to +this port. Will your Grace also pardon my brevity, since the fault +lies in the short time at my present disposal. Moreover, since no man +knows what time may bring, I beg your Grace to keep the matter secret, +for on considering it well, it seems only right that nothing be said +about the first islands until his Majesty be informed and order what +is convenient to his service, for, as the islands occupy a position +midway between Peru, Nueva Españia, and this land, the English, +on learning of them, might settle them and do much mischief in this +sea. Your Grace, I consider myself as the faithful servant of your +Grace. May God our Lord preserve you for many years in great joy and +increasing prosperity, etc. Your Grace's servant, PEDRO FERNANDEZ DE +QUIROS To Doctor Antonio de Morga, lieutenant-governor of his Majesty +in the Filipinas. + + When Governor Don Francisco Tello entered upon his office, in the +year ninety-six, he found the "San Geronymo," the ship in which Don +Fernando de Castro and his wife Doña Ysabel Barreto were returning +to Nueva España, preparing for the voyage in the port of Cabite. He +also found there the galleon "San Felipe" laden with Filipinas goods, +preparing to make its voyage to Nueva España. As soon as Governor +Don Francisco Tello entered upon his administration, both ships were +despatched and set sail. Although the "San Geronymo" sailed last, +it made the voyage, reaching Nueva Españia at the end of the said +year of ninety-six. The vessel "San Felipe," which was a large ship +and heavily laden with merchandise and passengers, and whose commander +and general was Don Mathia de Landecho, encountered many storms on the +voyage, so that at one time it became necessary to throw considerable +cargo overboard, and they lost their rudder while in thirty-seven +degrees of latitude, six hundred leguas from the Filipinas, and a +hundred and fifty from Xapon. Seeing themselves unable to continue +their voyage, it was decided to put back to the Filipinas. They set +about this and changed their course, but experienced even greater +difficulties and trials. Many times they gave themselves up as lost, +for the seas ran high, and as the vessel had no rudder, the rigging +and few sails were carried away, and blown into shreds. They could not +hold the vessel to its course, and it worked so often to windward that +they were in great danger of foundering, and lost all hope of reaching +the Filipinas. Xapon was the nearest place, but not sufficiently near +to enable them to reach it or to venture near its coast which is very +wild, and unknown to them even by sight; and even should they have the +good fortune to reach it, they did not know how the Japanese would +receive them. At this juncture arose confusion and a diversity of +opinion among the men aboard. Some said that they should not abandon +the course to Manila, in spite of the great peril and discomfort that +they were experiencing. Others said that it would be a rash act to do +so, and that, since Xapon was much nearer, they should make for it, +and look for the port of Nangasaqui, between which and the Filipinas +trade was carried on. There they would be well received and would find +means to repair their ships, and of resuming the voyage thence. This +opinion prevailed, for some religious in the ship adopted it, and the +rest coincided with them, on the assurance of the pilots that they +would quickly take the ship to Xapon. Accordingly they altered their +course for that country, and after six days sighted the coast and +country of Xapon, at a province called Toça; [83] and although they +tried by day to reach the land, at night, when they lowered the sails, +the tide carried them away from it. Many funeas [84] came to the ship +from a port called Hurando, and the Spaniards, persuaded by the king +of that province, who assured them of harbor, tackle, and repairs, +entered the port, after having sounded and examined the entrance, and +whether the water was deep enough. The Japanese, who were faithless, +and did this with evil intent, towed the ship into the port, leading +and guiding it onto a shoal, where, for lack of water, it touched and +grounded. Therefore the Spaniards were obliged to unload the ship and +take all the cargo ashore close to the town, to a stockade which was +given them for that purpose. For the time being the Japanese gave the +Spaniards a good reception, but as to repairing the ship and leaving +port again, the latter were given to understand that it could not be +done without permission and license from Taicosama, the sovereign of +Japon, who was at his court in Miaco, one hundred leguas from that +port. General Don Matia de Landecho and his companions, in order +to lose no time, resolved to send their ambassadors to court with a +valuable gift from the ship's cargo for Taicosama, to beg him to order +their departure. They sent on this mission Christoval de Mercado, +three other Spaniards, Fray Juan Pobre, of the Franciscan order, +and Fray Juan Tamayo, of the Augustinian order, who were aboard the +vessel. They were to confer concerning this affair with Taico in Miaco, +and were to avail themselves of the Franciscan fathers who were in +Miaco. The latter had gone as ambassadors from the Filipinas to settle +matters between Xapon and Manila, and were residing at court in a +permanent house and hospital, with Taico's sufferance. There they were +making a few converts, although with considerable opposition from the +religious of the Society of Jesus established in the same kingdom. The +latter asserted other religious to be forbidden by apostolic briefs and +royal decrees to undertake or engage in the conversion of Japon. The +king of Hurando, although to all appearances friendly and kind to +the Spaniards in his port, took great care to keep them and their +merchandise secure. He immediately sent word to court that that ship of +foreigners called Nambajies [85] had been wrecked there, and that the +Spaniards had brought great riches. This kindled Taicosama's greed, +who, in order to get possession of them, sent Ximonojo, one of his +favorites and a member of his council, to Hurando. Ximonojo, upon his +arrival, took possession of all the merchandise, and imprisoned the +Spaniards within a well-guarded palisade, after having forced them to +give up all their possessions and what they had hid, under pain of +death. Having exercised great rigor therein, he returned to court, + after granting permission to the general and others of his suite to go + to Miaco. The ambassadors who had been sent before to Miaco with the + present, were unable to see Taico, although the present was accepted; + nor did they succeed in making any profitable arrangement, although + father Fray Pedro Baptista, superior of the Franciscan religious + residing there, employed many methods for the purpose of remedying the + grievance of the Spaniards. These attempts only served to intensify + the evil; for the favorites, who were infidels and hated the religious + for making converts at court, on seeing Taico so bent upon the riches + of the ship and so unwilling to listen to any restitution, not only + did not ask him to do so, but in order to make the matter easier, and + taking advantage of the occasion, set Taicosama against the Spaniards; + telling him that the religious and the men from the ship were all + subjects of one sovereign, and conquerors of others' kingdoms. They + said that the Spaniards did this by first sending their religious + to the kingdoms, and then entered after with their arms, and that + they would do this with Xapon. They were aided in this purpose by + the fact that when the favorite, who went to seize the property of + the ship, was in Hurando, its pilot, Francisco de Sanda, had shown + him the sea-chart in which could be seen all the countries which had + been discovered, and España and the other kingdoms possessed by his + Majesty, among which were Piru and Nueva España. When the favorite + asked how those distant kingdoms had been gained, the pilot replied + that the religious had entered first and preached their religion, + and then the soldiers had followed and subdued them. It is true that + the said pilot imprudently gave those reasons, which Ximonojo noted + well and kept in mind, in order to relate them to Taicosama whenever + a suitable opportunity should present itself, which he now did. + +All this, together with the persistency with which the religious begged +Taico to restore the merchandise to the Spaniards, resulted in angering +him thoroughly, and like the barbarous and so avaricious tyrant that +he was, he gave orders to crucify them all and all the religious +who preached the religion of Namban [86] in his kingdoms. Five +religious who were in the house at Miaco were immediately seized, +together with another from the "San Felipe" who had joined them, and +all the Japanese preachers and teachers. [87] It was also understood +that the persecution would extend to the other orders and Christians +in Japon, whereupon all received great fear and confusion. But later +Taico's wrath was moderated, for, allowing himself to be entreated, +he declared that only the religious who had been found in the house +at Miaco, and their companions, the Japanese preachers and teachers, +who were arrested, would be crucified; and that all the others, +together with the Spaniards of the ship, would be allowed to return +to Manila. Fonzanbrandono, brother of Taracabadono, governor of +Nangasaqui, was entrusted with the execution of the order. He placed +all those who were taken from the house of the Franciscan religious at +Miaco on ox-carts, under a strong guard; namely, Fray Pedro Baptista, +Fray Martin de Aguirre, Fray Felipe de las Casas, Fray Gonçalo, +Fray Francisco Blanco, Fray Francisco de San Miguel, and twenty-six +[sic] Japanese preachers and teachers with two boys who were in the +service of the religious. Their right ears were cut off, and they were +paraded through the streets of Miaco and through those of the cities +of Fugimen, Usaca, and Sacai, [88] to the great grief and sorrow +of all Christians who saw their sufferings. The sentence and cause +of their martyrdom was written on a tablet in Chinese characters, +which was carried hanging on a spear; and read as follows. + +Sentence of the Combaco, [89] lord of Xapon, against the discalced +religious and their teachers, whom he has ordered to be martyred +in Nangasaqui. + +Inasmuch as these men came from the Luzones, from the island of Manila, +in the capacity of ambassadors, and were allowed to remain in the city +of Miaco, preaching the Christian religion, which in former years I +have strictly forbidden: I order that they be executed together with +the Japanese who embraced their religion. Therefore these twenty-four +[sic] men will be crucified in the city of Nangasaqui. And whereas +I again forbid the teaching of this religion henceforward: let all +understand this. I command that this decree be carried out; and should +any person dare to violate this order, he shall be punished together +with his whole family. Given on the first of Echo, and second of the +moon. [90] + +Thus these holy men were taken to Nangasaqui. There, on a hill sown +with wheat, in sight of the town and port, and near a house and +hospital called San Lazaro, established in Nangasaqui by the said +religious on their first coming from the Filipinas, before going +up to the capital, they were all crucified in a row. The religious +were placed in the middle and the others on either side upon high +crosses, with iron staples at their throats, hands, and feet, and +with long, sharp iron lances thrust up from below and crosswise +through their sides. [91] Thus did they render their souls to their +Creator for whom they died with great resolution, on the fifth of +February, day of St. Agueda, of the year one thousand five hundred and +ninety-seven. They left behind in that ploughed field, and through it +in all that kingdom, a great quantity of seed sown, which they watered +with their blood, and from which we hope to gather abundant fruit of +a numerous conversion to our holy Catholic faith. Before these holy +men were crucified, they wrote a letter to Doctor Antonio de Morga, +in Manila, by the hand of Fray Martin de Aguirre, which reads word +for word as follows. + +To Doctor Morga, lieutenant-governor of Manila, whom may God protect, +etc., Manila. + +Farewell, Doctor! farewell! Our Lord, not regarding my sins, has, +in His mercy, been pleased to make me one of a band of twenty-four +[sic] servants of God, who are about to die for love of Him. Six of +us are friars of St. Francis, and eighteen are native Japanese. With +hopes that many more will follow in the same path, may your Grace +receive the last farewell and the last embraces of all this company, +for we all acknowledge the support which you have manifested toward +the affairs of this conversion. And now, in taking leave, we beg +of you--and I especially--to make the protection of this field of +Christendom the object of your special care. Since you are a father, +and look with favor upon all things which may concern the mission of +the religious in this conversion, so may your Grace find one who will +protect and intercede for you before God in time of need. Farewell +sir! Will your Grace give my last adieu to Doña Juana. May our Lord +preserve, etc. From the road to execution, January twenty-eight, +one thousand five hundred and ninety-seven. + +This king's greed has been much whetted by what he stole from the +"San Felipe." It is said that next year he will go to Luzon, and that +he does not go this year because of being busy with the Coreans. In +order to gain his end, he intends to take the islands of Lequios [92] +and Hermosa, throw forces from them into Cagayan, and thence to fall +upon Manila, if God does not first put a stop to his advance. Your +Graces will attend to what is fitting and necessary. [93] + +FRAY MARTIN DE LA ASCENCION + +The bodies of the martyrs, although watched for many days by the +Japanese, were removed by bits (especially those of the monks) +from the crosses as relics by the Christians of the place, who very +reverently distributed them around. Together with the staples and +the wood of the crosses they are now scattered throughout Christendom. + +Two other religious of the same band, who were out of the house at +the time of the arrest, did not suffer this martyrdom. One, called +Fray Geronimo de Jesus, [94] hid himself and went inland, in order +not to leave the country; the other, called Fray Agustin Rodriguez, +was sheltered by the fathers of the Society, who sent him away by way +of Macan. General Don Mathia and the Spaniards of the ship, naked +and stripped, left Japon. They embarked at Nangasaqui and went to +Manila in various ships which make that voyage for the Japanese and +Portuguese. The first news of this event was learned from them in the +month of May of ninety-seven. Great grief and sadness was caused by +the news, in the death of the holy religious, and in the disturbances +which were expected to take place in future dealings between Japon +and the Filipinas; as well as in the loss of the galleon and its +cargo en route to Nueva España. The value of the vessel was over one +million [pesos?], and caused great poverty among the Spaniards. After +considering the advisable measures to take under the circumstances, +it was ultimately decided that, in order not to allow the matter to +pass, a circumspect man should be sent to Japon with letters from the +governor to Taicosama. The letters were to set forth the governor's +anger at the taking of the ship and merchandise from the Spaniards, +and at the killing of the religious; and were also to request Taicosama +to make all the reparation possible, by restoring and returning the +merchandise to the Spaniards, and the artillery, tackle, and spoils of +the vessel that were left, as well as the bodies of the religious whom +he had crucified; and Taicosama was so to arrange matters thenceforth, +that Spaniards should not be so treated in his kingdom. + +The governor sent Don Luis Navarrete [95] Fajardo as bearer of this +message, and a present of some gold and silver ornaments, swords, +and valuable cloth for Taicosama. He also sent him an elephant +well caparisoned and covered with silk, and with its naires [i.e., +elephant keepers] in the same livery, a thing never before seen in +Xapon. According to the custom of that kingdom, Don Luis was to make +the present to Taico when he presented his embassy, for the Japanese +are wont to give or receive embassies in no other manner. When Don +Luys de Navarrete reached Nangasaqui, Taicosama readily sent from +the court for the ambassador and for the present which had been sent +him from Luzon, for he was anxious to see the gifts, especially the +elephant, with which he was greatly delighted. He heard the embassy +and replied with much ostentation and display, exculpating himself +from the death of the religious upon whom he laid the blame, saying +that after he had forbidden them to christianize, or teach their +religion, they had disregarded his orders in his own court. Likewise, +the seizure of the ship and its merchandise, which entered the port +of Hurando in the province of Toza, had been a justifiable procedure, +according to the laws of Japon, because all ships lost on its coast +belong to the king, with their merchandise. Nevertheless, he added +that he was sorry for all that had happened, and that he would return +the merchandise had it not been distributed. As to the religious, +there was no remedy for it. But he begged the governor of Manila not +to send such persons to Xapon, for he had again passed laws forbidding +the making of Christians under pain of death. He would deliver whatever +had remained of the bodies of the religious and would be glad to have +peace and friendship with the Luzon Islands and the Spaniards, and +for his part, would endeavor to secure it. He said that if any other +vessel came to his kingdom from Manila, he would give orders that it +be well received and well treated. With this reply and a letter of the +same purport for the governor, Don Luys Navarrete was dismissed. He +was given a present for the governor consisting of lances, armor, and +catans, considered rare and valuable by the Japanese. The ambassador +thereupon left Miaco and went to Nangasaqui, whence by the first ship +sailing to Manila, he sent word to Governor Don Francisco concerning +his negotiations. But the message itself was taken later to Manila +by another person, on account of the illness and death of Don Luis in +Nangasaqui. Taicosama rejoiced over his answer to the ambassador, for +he had practically done nothing of what was asked of him. His reply +was more a display of dissembling and compliments than a desire for +friendship with the Spaniards. He boasted and published arrogantly, +and his favorites said in the same manner, that the Spaniards had sent +him that present and embassy through fear, and as an acknowledgment +of tribute and seigniory, so that he might not destroy them as he had +threatened them at other times in the past, when Gomez Perez Dasmariñas +was governor. And even then the Spaniards had sent him a message and +a present by Fray Juan Cobo, the Dominican, and Captain Llanos. + +The Japanese Faranda Quiemon sought war with Manila, and the favorites +who aided him did not neglect to beg Taico not to lose the opportunity +of conquering that city. They said that it would be easy, since +there were but few Spaniards there; that a fleet could be sent there +quickly, which Faranda would accompany. The latter assured Taico of +success, as one who knew the country and its resources. They urged +him so continually that Taico entrusted Faranda with the enterprise, +and gave him some supplies and other assistance toward it. Faranda +began to prepare ships and Chinese for the expedition, which he was +never able to carry out; for, being a man naturally low and poor, +he possessed neither the ability nor the means sufficient for the +enterprise. His protectors themselves did not choose to assist him, and +so his preparations were prolonged until the enterprise was abandoned +at the death of Taico, and his own death, as will be stated later. + +Meanwhile news was constantly reaching Manila that a fleet was being +equipped in Japon, completely under the supervision of Faranda, +and it naturally caused some anxiety among the people in spite of +their courage and determination to resist him, for the enemy was +arrogant and powerful. Although the city was thoroughly resolved +and determined to resist him, yet the governor and city would never +show openly that they were aware of the change which Taico was about +to make, in order not to precipitate the war or give the other side +any reason for hastening it. Trusting to time for the remedy, they so +disposed affairs in the city, that they might be ready for any future +emergency. They sent the Japanese who had settled in Manila--and they +were not few--back to Xapon, and made those who came in merchant ships +give up their weapons until their return, which they endeavored to +hasten as much as possible; but in all other respects, they treated +them hospitably. And because it was heard that Taico intended to take +possession of the island of Hermosa, a well-provisioned island off the +Chinese coast, very near Luzon, and on the way to Xapon, in order to +make it serve as a way-station for his fleet, and thus carry on more +easily the war with Manila, the governor sent two ships of the fleet +under command of Don Juan de Çamuzio, to reconnoiter that island and +all its ports, and the nature of the place, in order to be the first +to take possession of it. At least, if means and time should fail +him, he was to advise China, and the viceroys of the provinces of +Canton and Chincheo, so that, since the latter were old-time enemies +of Xapon, they might prevent the Japanese from entering the island, +which would prove so harmful to all of them. In these measures and +precautions several days were spent in the matter. However, nothing +was accomplished by this expedition to Hermosa Island beyond advising +Great China of Xapon's designs. + +Several days after the imprisonment of Father Alonso Ximenez in +Cochinchina where Captain and Sargento-mayor Juan Xuarez Gallinato +had left him, the kings of Tunquin and Sinua permitted him to return +to Manila. He took passage for Macan in a Portuguese vessel. Not only +did he arrive unwearied by his voyages, hardships, and imprisonment, +but with renewed energy and spirits proposed to set on foot again +the expedition to Camboja. Although little was known of the state +of affairs in that kingdom, and of the restoration of Prauncar to +his throne, he together with other religious of his order, persuaded +Don Luys Dasmariñas, upon whom he exercised great influence, and who +was then living in Manila, taking no part in government affairs, and +inclined him to broach the subject of making this expedition anew and +in person and at his own expense, from which would ensue good results +for the service of God and of his Majesty. Don Luys discussed the +matter with Governor Don Francisco Tello, and offered to bear all +the expense of the expedition. But a final decision was postponed +until the receipt of news from Camboja, for their only information +was that Blas Ruyz and Diego Belloso, leaving Captain Gallinato and +his ships in Cochinchina, had gone to Lao. + +At the departure of Don Juan Ronquillo and his camp from Mindanao +River, the people of Tampacan were so disheartened, and the spirit of +those of Buhahayen so increased that, in spite of the friendship that +they had made, and the homage that they had rendered, they became +declared enemies [to the former]. Matters returned to their former +state, so that, not only did the inhabitants of Buhahayen not dismantle +their forts, as they had promised to do, but they repaired them and +committed other excesses against their neighbors of Tampacan. They +would have altogether broken into open war, had they not feared that +the Spaniards would return better prepared and in larger number, as +they had left the garrison at La Caldera with that intention. Thus +they let matters stand, neither declaring themselves fully as rebels, +nor observing the laws of friendship toward the men of Tampacan and +other allies of the Spaniards. + +Near the island of Mindanao lies an island called Joló, not very large, +but thickly populated with natives, all Mahometans. They number about +three thousand men, and have their own lord and king. When Governor +Francisco de Sande was returning from his expedition to Borneo, +he sent Captain Estevan Rodriguez de Figueroa to Joló. He entered +the island and reduced the natives to his Majesty's rule as above +related. The natives were apportioned to Captain Pedro de Osseguera +for his lifetime, and after his death, to his son and successor, +Don Pedro de Osseguera. He asked and collected for several years +what tribute they chose to give him, which was but slight, without +urging more, in order not to make a general disturbance. While Don +Juan Ronquillo was with his camp in Mindanao, the men of Joló, seeing +Spanish affairs flourishing, were willing to enjoy peace and pay their +tribute; but at the departure of the Spaniards, they became lukewarm +again. Captain Juan Pacho, who commanded the presidio of La Caldera +in Don Juan Ronquillo's absence, having sent some soldiers to barter +for wax, the Joloans maltreated them and killed two of them. Juan +Pacho, with the intention of punishing this excess of the Joloans, +went there in person with several boats and thirty soldiers. As he +landed, a considerable body of Joloans descended from their king's +town, which is situated on a high and strongly-fortified hill, and +attacked the Spaniards. Through the number of the natives and the +Spaniards' inability to make use of their arquebuses, on account of +a heavy shower, the latter were routed, and Captain Juan Pacho and +twenty of his followers killed. The rest wounded and in flight took +to their boats and returned to La Caldera. + +This event caused great grief in Manila, especially because of the +reputation lost by it, both among the Joloans, and their neighbors, +the people of Mindanao. Although it was considered necessary to punish +the Joloans in order to erase this disgrace, yet as this should be +done signally and just then there was not sufficient preparation, +it was deferred until a better opportunity. Only Captain Villagra was +sent immediately as commander of the presidio of La Caldera, with some +soldiers. Having arrived there, they spent their time in pleasure, +until their provisions were consumed, and the garrison suffering. They +were maintained and supported because of the slight protection that +the people of Tampacan felt, knowing that there were Spaniards on the +island, and hoped for the arrival of more Spaniards, as Don Juan had +promised them, and for punishment and vengeance upon the men of Jolo. + +While affairs in the Filipinas were in this condition, ships from +Nueva España arrived at Manila, in the month of May, one thousand five +hundred and ninety-eight. These ships brought despatches ordering the +reëstablishment of the royal Audiencia, which had been suppressed +in the Filipinas some years before. Don Francisco Tello, who was +governing the country, was named and appointed its president; Doctor +Antonio de Morga and Licentiates Christoval Telles Almaçan and Alvaro +Rodriguez Zambrano, auditors; and Licentiate Geronymo de Salazar, +fiscal; and other officials of the Audiencia were also appointed. By +the same ships arrived the archbishop, Fray Ignacio de Sanctivañes, +who enjoyed the archbishopric only for a short time, for he died of +dysentery in, the month of August of the same year. The bishop of +Sebu, Fray Pedro de Agurto came also. On the eighth of May of this +year-five hundred and ninety-eight, the royal seal of the Audiencia +was received. It was taken from the monastery of San Agustin to the +cathedral upon a horse caparisoned with cloth of gold and crimson, +and under a canopy of the same material. The staves of the canopy were +carried by the regidors of the city, who were clad in robes of crimson +velvet lined with white silver cloth, and in breeches and doublets of +the same material. The horse that carried the seal in a box of cloth +of gold covered with brocade was led on the right by him who held +the office of alguacil-mayor, who was clad in cloth of gold and wore +no cloak. Surrounding the horse walked the president and auditors, +all afoot and bareheaded. In front walked a throng of citizens clad +in costly gala dress; behind followed the whole camp and the soldiers, +with their drums and banners, and their arms in hand, and the captains +and officers at their posts, with the master-of-camp preceding them, +staff in hand. The streets and windows were richly adorned with +quantities of tapestry and finery, and many triumphal arches, and +there was music from flutes, trumpets, and other instruments. When +the seal was taken to the door of the cathedral of Manila, the +archbishop in pontifical robes came out with the cross, accompanied +by the chapter and clergy of the church to receive it. Having lifted +the box containing the seal from the horse under the canopy, the +archbishop placed it in the hands of the president. Then the auditors +went into the church with him, while the band of singers intoned +the Te Deum laudamus. They reached the main altar, upon the steps +of which stood a stool covered with brocade. Upon this they placed +the box with the seal. All knelt and the archbishop chanted certain +prayers to the Holy Spirit for the health and good government of the +king, our sovereign. Then the president took the box with the seal, +and with the same order and music with which it had been brought +into the church it was carried out and replaced upon the horse. The +archbishop and clergy remained at the door of the church, while the +cortége proceeded to the royal buildings. The said box containing the +royal seal was placed and left in a beautifully-adorned apartment, +with a covering of cloth of gold and crimson, on a table covered with +brocade and cushions of the same material, which stood under a canopy +of crimson velvet embroidered with the royal arms. Then the royal +order for the establishment of the Audiencia was publicly read there, +and the nominations for president, auditors, and fiscal. Homage was +done them and the usual oath administered. The president proceeded +to the Audiencia hall, where the court rooms were well arranged +and contained a canopy for the royal arms. There the president, +auditors, and fiscal took their seats and received the ministers and +officials of the Audiencia. Then the ordinances of the Audiencia +were read in the presence of as many citizens as could find room +in the hall. This completed the establishment of the Audiencia +on that day. Thenceforth it has exercised its functions, and has +had charge and disposition in all cases, both civil and criminal, +of its district. The latter includes the Filipinas Islands and all +the mainland, of China discovered or to be discovered. In charge of +the president who acts as governor of the land, were all government +affairs according to royal laws, ordinances, and special orders, +which were acted on and brought before the Audiencia. + +A few days after the Chancillería of the Filipinas had been established +in Manila, news arrived of events in the kingdom of Camboja after +the arrival of Prauncar--son and successor of Prauncar Langara, who +died in Laos--together with Diego Belloso and Blas Ruyz de Hernan +Gonzalez, and of his victories and restoration to the throne, as has +already been related. [The news came] in letters from King Prauncar +to Governor Don Francisco Tello and Doctor Antonio de Morga. They +were signed by the king's hand and seal in red ink. The letters were +written in Castilian so that they might be better understood. Since +they were alike in essence, I thought it proper to reproduce here +the letter written by King Prauncar to Doctor Antonio de Morga, +which reads word for word as follows. + +Prauncar, King of Camboja, to Doctor Antonio de Morga, greeting; +to whom I send this letter with great love and joy. + +I, Prauncar, King of the rich land of Camboja, I, sole lord of it, +the great, cherish an ardent love for Doctor Antonio de Morga, whom +I am unable to keep from my thoughts, because I have learned through +Captain Chofa Don Blas, the Castilian, that he, from the kindness +of his heart, took an active part and has assisted the governor of +Luzon to send to this country Captain Chofa Don Blas, the Castilian, +and Captain Chofa Don Diego, the Portuguese, with soldiers to find +King Prauncar my father. Having searched for him in vain, the two +chofas and the soldiers killed Anacaparan, who was reigning as sole +great lord. Then they went with their ships to Cochinchina, whence the +two chofas went to Lao, to find the king of this land. They brought +me back to my kingdom, and I am here now through their aid. The two +chofas and other Spaniards who have come, have helped me to pacify +what I now hold. I understand that all this has come to me because the +doctor loves this country. Hence I shall act so that Doctor Antonio +de Morga may always love me as he did my father Prauncar, and assist +me now by sending fathers for the two chofas and the other Spaniards +and Christians who dwell in my kingdom. I shall build them churches +and permit them to christianize whatever Cambodians choose to become +Christians. I shall provide them with servants and I shall protect them +as did formerly King Prauncar my father. I shall provide Doctor Antonio +de Morga with whatever will be useful to him from this country. The two +chofas have received the lands which I promised them. To Captain Don +Blas, the Castilian, I gave the province of Tran, and to Captain Chofa +Don Diego, the Portuguese, the province of Bapano. These provinces I +grant and bestow upon them for the services which they have rendered +me and in payment for the property they have spent in my service, +so that they may possess and enjoy them as their own, and do what +they will with them while in my service. [96] + +Together with the king's letter Blas Ruis de Hernan Gonzalez wrote +another detailed letter to Doctor Morga, informing him of all the +events of his expeditions. The letter reads as follows. + +To Doctor Antonio de Morga, Lieutenant-governor of the Filipinas +Islands of Luzon, in the city of Manila, whom may our Lord preserve. + +From Camboja: Your Grace must have already heard of events in this +kingdom of Camboja, from my arrival until the captain withdrew the +fleet. These accounts will undoubtedly vary according to what each man +thought fit to say in order to gild his own affairs: some according to +their bent and opinion, and others according to their passion. Although +the matter has been witnessed and thoroughly known by many persons, I +am about to relate it as well as possible to your Grace, as to a person +who can weld all the facts together and give to each circumstance +the weight which it may possess and deserve. I shall also give an +account among other things of all that happened to Captain Diego +Belloso and myself on the journey to Lao, and the vicissitudes and +wars in this kingdom, from our arrival until the condition of affairs +now in force. Since Spaniards have taken part in all these events it +will please your Grace to know the manner and retirement with which +I have lived in this kingdom ever since my arrival here from Manila, +sustaining the soldiers and other men whom I brought in my ship at +my own expense, keeping them in a state of discipline and honor, +and never allowing them to abandon themselves to sensual pleasures; +although I had no credentials for this, for Gallinato had those which +the governor was to give me. I shall not discuss the why and wherefore +of most of the Chinese matters, because Fray Alonso Ximenez and Fray +Diego [97] witnessed some of the events and heard of others and will +have informed your Grace of everything, including the war against the +usurper, and Gallinato's abandonment of this kingdom when affairs had +practically been settled. Had he continued to follow up matters, half +of the kingdom would today justly belong to his Majesty, and the whole +of it would be in the power and under the rule of the Spaniards; and +perhaps the king himself with most of his people would have embraced +Christianity. As to Chinese matters which require most explanation I +only ask your Grace to consider the kingdom which we came to help, +that the Chinese had no more right there than we had, and that we +had to try to gain reputation, not to lose it. Since we came with +a warlike attitude, and it was the first time that an armed Spanish +force set foot on the mainland, was it right for us to endure insults, +abuse, contempt, and open affronts from a so vile race as they are, +and before all these pagans? [Was it right to endure] the further +action of their arguments before the usurping king, to induce him to +kill us; their many evil and infamous reports to him concerning us, +in order to induce him to grant their request; and above all their +impudence in killing and disarming Spaniards and going out in the +streets to spear them? All this I endured very patiently in order +not to disturb the land by breaking with them, until one day when +they actually tried to kill some of our men in their Parián, and the +numbers being very unequal, they had already wounded and maltreated +them. We came out at the noise and the Chinese drew up in battle +array, armed with many warlike instruments, challenging us to battle, +with insults and expressions of contempt. At this juncture, what would +have become of our reputation had we retired when the advantage was on +their side? Then, too, after attacking and killing many of them what +security had we in this tyrannical kingdom, which showed itself not +at all friendly to us, with only one ship, [98] which was at the time +aground, and with the artillery and provisions ashore; while they had +six ships and many rowboats all provided with one or two culverins +and many men, both in the ships and those living in the port? [99] +Would it have been right, after war had broken out, to have them +with all their resources while we had none? Had they taken our lives, +what reputation would the Spaniards have left in these kingdoms? For +this reason I thought it better for us to overpower them, rather +than to be at their mercy, or at that of the king. Accordingly, in +order to assure our lives we were obliged to seize their ships and +to strengthen ourselves by means of them, since the Chinese began +the war. After this, father Fray Alonso Ximenez and we thought that, +by making an embassy with presents to the king, and by exculpating +ourselves in this matter, before him, everything would turn out well; +and that if we had peace with him, and our persons in safety in a fort, +or under his word and safe-conduct, we would give the Chinese their +ship and property. All this was written out and signed by us. In order +to carry this out, a letter was written in the name of the governor of +that city [i.e., Manila], and we went to deliver it nine leguas away +at the residence of the king, leaving the vessels guarded. But when he +found us there, the king deprived us of the boats in which we had gone, +and refused to receive the letter, which went under form of embassy, +or to hear us unless we first restored the ships. Then he immediately +began to prepare arms and to assemble many men, with the intention, +unless we restored the ships, of killing us, or reducing us by force +to such straits as to compel us to restore them; and after their +restoration, of making an end of us all without trouble or risk to his +own men. For he trusted us in nothing, since we were going in search +of, and bringing help to, him whom he had dispossessed. All this was +told us by some Christians among them, especially by a young mestizo +from Malaca who lived among them and knew their language. Therefore +considering that we were already separated from our companions, +and that, if we restored the ships, they could easily take ours by +means of them and kill the men left in them, and then us who were in +that place; also that if we waited for them to collect and attack us, +they could very easily kill us: we decided to seek the remedy by first +attacking them instead of waiting to be attacked; and try to rejoin +our men and assure our lives or end them by fighting. Accordingly we +attacked them, and such was our good fortune that we killed the king +in the fight. Then we retired to our ships with great difficulty, +without the loss of a single Spaniard. We did not allow the king's +house to be sacked, so that it might not be said that we had done +this to rob him. At this juncture, the captain and sargento-mayor, +our leader, arrived. He belittled and censured what we had done, and +ridiculed our statement and that of some of the Cambodians, namely, +that we had killed the usurper. All that he did was simply to collect +whatever silver and gold certain soldiers seized during these troubles, +and everything valuable in the ships, and then to burn the latter. Then +he drew up a report against us and dispossessed us of our ships and +command, thus formulating suspicion and distrust. After that he gave +orders for the departure from the kingdom, paying no heed to many +Cambodians who came to speak to us when we went ashore, and told +us that we might build a fortress there, for they had a legitimate +king before, but that he who was their king lately had driven him +to Lao, and thus they had no king; that they would gather wherever +the most protection could be found; and that we should continue the +war. Nor did the captain accept any of our suggestions, when we told +him that the usurper had imprisoned a kinsman of the lawful king; +that we should go to his rescue; that the latter would raise men +in favor of the legitimate king; and that with his support we would +take possession of the kingdom, and then go to get the king. But he +was deaf to all this and accordingly abandoned the kingdom, and this +great opportunity was lost. The only thing that we could obtain from +him by great entreaty after putting to sea, was to go to Cochinchina +to inquire about the galley, since they had intended to send from +Manila for that purpose. I also offered to go to Lao by land at my +own expense, in search of the king of Camboja, for I knew that that +way led thither. Accordingly, as soon as we arrived in Cochinchina, +the captain sent Diego Belloso and myself to Lao, and Captain Gregorio +de Vargas to Tunquin. Meanwhile he held an auction among the soldiers +of everything valuable from the Chinese ships, and of what else he +had taken from the soldiers; but the men were all without a real, +and so he had everything bought for himself, at whatever price he was +pleased to give. The king of Sinoa, a province of Cochinchina, equipped +us for the voyage with a good outfit, by giving us an embassy for that +country, and men to accompany us on the road. Thus we made the entire +journey well provided and always highly honored and feared and much +looked at, as the like had never before been seen in those kingdoms. + +We were all sick on the road; but in all our troubles we were greatly +comforted by the love which the people showed towards us, and: by the +kind reception that we met at the hands of all. Finally we reached +Lanchan, the capital and the royal seat of the kingdom. This kingdom +has a vast territory, but it is thinly populated because it has been +often devastated by Pegu. It has mines of gold, silver, copper, iron, +brass, [sic] and tin. It produces silk, benzoin, lac, brasil, wax, and +ivory. There are also rhinoceroses, many elephants, and horses larger +than those of China. Lao is bounded on the east by Cochinchina and +on the northeast and north by China and Tartaria, from which places +came the sheep and the asses that were there when I went. Much of +their merchandise is exported by means of these animals. On its west +and southwest lie Pegu and Sian, and on the south and southeast, +it is bounded by Camboja and Champan. [100] It is a rich country, +and everything imported there is very expensive. Before our arrival +at Lanchan, a cousin of the exiled king, on account of the usurper's +death, had fled thither from Camboja, fearing lest the latter's son +who was then ruling would kill him. He related what we had done in +Camboja, in consequence of which the king of Lao received us very +cordially, and showed great respect for us, praising our deeds and +showing amazement that they had been accomplished by so few. When +we arrived the old king of Camboja, together with his elder son and +daughter, had already died, and there was left only the younger +son with his mother, aunt, and grandmother. These women rejoiced +greatly over our deeds and arrival, and more attention was given them +thenceforth. Before our arrival at the city, we met an ambassador, +whom the usurping king, Anacaparan, had sent from Camboja, in order +that he might reach Lanchan before we did, and see what was going +on there. He feigned excuse and pretext of asking for the old queen, +who was the step-mother of the dead king Prauncar, and whom Anacaparan +claimed to be his father's sister. The king of Lao was sending her, +but at our arrival, and on our assuring him of Anacaparan's death, he +ordered her to return, and the ambassador, for fear of being killed, +fled down the river in a boat to Camboja. Then we declared our embassy, +and asked for the heir of the kingdom in order to take him to our +ships and thence to his own country. We were answered that he [i.e., +the younger son] was the only one, and that they could not allow him +to go, especially through a foreign country, and over such rough roads +and seas. The youth wished to come, but his mothers [101] would not +consent to it. Finally it was decided that we should return to the +fleet and proceed with it to Camboja. We were to send them advices +from there, whereupon they would send him under a large escort. His +mothers gave me letters directed to that city [i.e., Manila], making +great promises to the Spaniards on behalf of the kingdom, if they would +return to Camboja to pacify the land and restore it to them. The king +of Lao entrusted me with another embassy, in which he petitioned for +friendship and requested that the fleet return to Camboja, adding that, +should Gallinato be unwilling to return, he would send large forces +by land to our assistance, under command of the heir himself. Thus we +took leave and went to Cochinchina. While these things were happening +in Lao, the following occurred in Camboja. As soon as the fleet had +departed, the news of Anacaparan's death was published. When it was +heard by Chupinaqueo, kinsman of the lawful king, who was in prison, +he escaped from his prison, incited a province to rise, collected +its men, and having proclaimed Prauncar as the lawful king, came to +get us with about six thousand men, in order to join us and make war +upon the sons of the usurper, who were now ruling. Not finding us in +Chordemuco, where our ships had been lying, he sent boats to look +for us as far as the bar. Seeing that we were nowhere to be found +he seized all the Chinese and other people there, and returned to +his province where he had gathered his forces, and there he fortified +himself. Meanwhile the men at Champan, who had gone thither to take it, +returned, whereupon the commander of the camp, called Ocuña de Chu, +took sides with the sons of the usurper and had one of them--the +second--Chupinanu by name, proclaimed king, because he was the most +warlike. For this reason, the elder brother, called Chupinanon, +and those of his party were angered, and consequently there was +continual strife between them. Then all having united, together with +the army from Chanpan, pursued Chupinaqueo, who came out to meet +them with many of his men. They fought for many days, but at last it +was Chupinaqueo's fate to be conquered and cruelly killed. Thus for +the time being Chupinanu ruled as king, and the camp was disbanded, +each man going to his own home. At this time a ship arrived from +Malaca on an embassy, bringing some Spaniards who came in search +of us, and a number of Japanese. Chupinanu would have liked to have +killed them all, but seeing that they came on an embassy, and from +Malaca, he let them go immediately. A large province, called Tele, +seeing the cruelty with which the king treated them, revolted, and +declaring themselves free, proclaimed a new king; then they marched +against Chupinanu, and defeated and routed him, took from him a large +number of elephants and artillery, and sacked his city. In the battle, +most of the Spaniards and Japanese who had come from Malaca were +killed. Chupinanu retreated with all his brothers, six in number, +to another province, always accompanied by Ocuña de Chu. There they +began to make plans and to collect men. They also invited two Malays, +leaders of all the other Malays on whom Chupinanu relied strongly, +who on the break-up of the camp after Chupinaqueo's death, had gone +to the lands of which they were magistrates. But in order that what +follows may be understood, I will tell who these Malays are. When +this country was being ravaged by Sian, these two went to Chanpan, +taking with them many of their Malays, as well as many Cambodians; +and because the ruler of Champan did not show them all the honors that +they desired, they caused an insurrection in the city when he was +away. They fortified themselves there, and then plundered the city, +after which they returned to this kingdom with all the artillery +and many captives. When they arrived here the usurper Anacaparan +was ruling. Congratulating one another mutually for their deeds, +the usurper gave them a friendly welcome, and they gave him all +the artillery and other things which they had brought. Then the +usurper gave them lands for their maintenance, and made them great +mandarins. These two Malays made it easy for him to capture Champan, +and offered to seize its king. Since the latter had been so great +and long-standing an enemy of the Cambodians, Anacaparan immediately +collected an army, which he sent under command of Ocuña de Chu. When +we killed Anacaparan, these forces were in Chanpan, and, as abovesaid, +they returned after his death. These men presented themselves before +the new king, Chupinanu, with all their Malays and it was at once +decided to attack the insurgents of Tele. At this juncture arrived the +ambassador who had fled from Lao as we reached Lanchan. He said that +we had remained there and that our purpose was to ask for the lawful +heir of Camboja in order to take him to our ships and transport him +to his kingdom; that the king of Cochinchina was going to help us +in this undertaking; that we had entered Lao with that report; and +that the king of Lao was about to send the heir with great forces by +river and by land, while we and the men of Cochinchina would go by +sea and join them in Camboja, where we would declare war and inflict +severe punishment upon whomsoever would not render homage. When the +new king and his followers heard this news they were frightened, and +consequently each thought only of himself. A few days later it was +reported from the bar that four Spanish ships had entered, accompanied +by many galleys from Cochinchina. This report was either a vision that +some had seen, or was a fiction; and we have been unable to clarify +the matter to this very day. At any rate, on hearing this news, these +people confirmed as true the entire report of the ambassador who had +fled. The mandarins of Camboja, taking into consideration the war which +was now waging with the men of Tele, and the new one threatened by the +Spaniards, Cochinchina, and Lao, decided to depose the new king and +render homage to the one who was coming from Lao. For this purpose they +communicated with the two Malays and together with them attacked the +king with his brothers and turned them out of the realm. The two elder +brothers fled separately, each to the province where he thought to find +more friends. After this the mandarins ordered a fleet of row-boats to +proceed toward Lao to receive their king, who they said was already +coming. They sent Ocuña de Chu as leader of the fleet and also his +two sons. Other boats were sent to the bar to receive the Spaniards, +and make friendly terms with them, sending for that purpose certain +Spaniards there. Two Cambodian mandarins and the two Malays were to +remain to guard the kingdom, and to act as governors. The Spaniards +went to the bar, but, finding nothing, returned. Ocuña de Chu took the +road to Lao, but seeing that he did not meet his king, or hear any news +of him, resolved to go to Lanchan and ask for him. He continued his +march, but suffered some pangs of hunger, for he had left the kingdom +unprovided, and the way was long. On account of this some of his men +deserted, but at last he reached Lanchan with ten armed praus. All +the kingdom of Lao was thrown into great confusion. Imagining that he +was coming to make war, they abandoned their villages and property, +and fled to the mountains. But on seeing that he was coming on a +peaceful mission, they lost their apprehension. At his arrival we +were already on the road to Cochinchina, whereupon the king ordered +us to return to Lanchan immediately. The king [of Lao], on learning +what was happening in Camboja, despatched there a large fleet by +sea, and forces by land, and sent for the king of that country. He +despatched me to Cochinchina with news of what was happening, and +to take the ships to Camboja; but, while on the way, I heard of the +battle fought by our fleet, whereupon I returned to Camboja with the +king. When we reached the first village of the kingdom, we learned +from the spies who had preceded us, that, as the news of the ships +had been untrue, and Cuña de Chu was delaying so long, the provinces +where the two brothers sought shelter had proclaimed them kings, +and were at war with one another; that the people of Tele had come +to fight with the governors, who were divided into factions; and that +each man obeyed whom he pleased. But they said that Ocuña Lacasamana, +one of the Malay headmen, had the greatest force of artillery +and praus; and that a Japanese junk--the one that had been in +Cochinchina when our fleet was there--had arrived, and was supporting +Chupinannu. The sea and land forces were collected together at the +point where this news had been received, and it was found that they +were not sufficient to make a warlike entry. A fort was built there, +and a request for more men sent to Lao. In the meantime, secret letters +were despatched to probe the hearts of the leading men. The men from +Lao delayed, and no answers were received to the letters. Feeling +insecure in that place, they deliberated upon returning to Lao, +but at this juncture news arrived from Ocuña Lacasamana, one of the +Malays who had fortified himself in his own land, saying that he was +on their side, although he had rendered homage to Chupinanu--a feigned +promise because he had seen the king's delay--but that as soon as the +king entered the land he would join his party. Soon after news came +from another Cambojan governor, to the effect that, although he had +rendered homage to Chupinanu, yet, if the king would come to him, +he would attack Chupinanu, and depose or kill him. For that he said +that he had four thousand men fortified with himself on a hill. He +sent one of his relatives with this message. All trusted in this man, +and immediately we set out for that place. When the above-mentioned +man learned of the king's approach, he attacked the other king and +routed him; then he came out to receive us, and thus we entered. That +province and many others were delivered to us immediately. Chupinanu +withdrew to some mountains. Immediately the two Malays, each with +his forces, joined us; the Japanese did the same. The king then gave +orders to pursue Chupinanu until he was taken and killed. Then he +seized another man who was acting as judge in another province and +put him to death. Soon after war began against the eldest of the +brothers and against the people of Tele who also refused homage. At +this juncture, a ship arrived from Malaca with fourteen Spaniards of +our fleet, who had put into Malaca. The king was delighted thereat, +and honored and made much of them, when he learned that they were +some of the men who had killed the usurper. They were esteemed and +respected in an extraordinary manner by the whole kingdom. Captain +Diego Belloso tried to assume charge of them by virtue of an old +document from Malaca; this I forbade, alleging that the right of this +jurisdiction should proceed from Manila, since the restoration of this +kingdom proceeded from that place, and that those men were Castilians +and had nothing to do with his document or with Malaca. The king, +before whom this matter was brought, replied that the matter lay +between us two, and refused to mingle in those affairs. Some of the +newcomers coincided with Belloso's opinion, and others with mine; +and thus we have gone on until now. This has been the cause of my +not asking the king for a fort to secure our personal safety. It +would have been a footing for some business, [102] and what I shall +relate later would not have happened to us. After the arrival of the +Castilians, the king sent an embassy to Cochinchina--a Spaniard and a +Cambodian--to get father Fray Alonso Ximenez and certain Spaniards, +who, as we heard, had remained there. The ruler of Chanpan seized +them, and they have not returned. The wars continued, in all of +which the Spaniards and Japanese took part. Whatever we attacked, +we conquered with God's assistance, but where we did not go, losses +always resulted. Consequently we gained great reputation and were +esteemed by our friends and feared by the enemy. While we were making +an incursion, Ocuña de Chu, who was now called manbaray--the highest +title in the kingdom--tried to revolt. In this he was aided by one of +the Malay chiefs called Cancona. The king summoned me and ordered me +to bring with me the Spaniards of my party. He ordered Diego Belloso +to remain, for both of us were leaders and still are, in any war in +which any of us is engaged. I came at his bidding, and he told me that +those men were trying to kill him and deprive him of his kingdom, +and asked me to prevent such a thing. The mambaray was the one who +ruled the kingdom, and since the king was young and addicted to wine, +he held the latter in little esteem and considered himself as king. At +last, I, aided by Spaniards, killed him; then his sons were captured +and killed. Afterward the Malay Cancona was seized and killed, and +the king was extricated from this peril by the Spaniards. Then we +returned to the war. I learned that another grandee who was head of a +province was trying to rebel and join Chupinannon; I captured him and +after trying him, put him to death. Therefore the king showed great +esteem for us, and the kingdom feared us; that province was subdued +and we returned to the king. At this time a vessel arrived from Sian, +and ported here on its way to an embassy at Manila. On board this +vessel were father Fray Pedro Custodio and some Portuguese. The king +was greatly delighted at the arrival of the father and wished to build +him a church. We all united and continued the war. Again we returned, +after having reduced many provinces to the obedience of the king, +and left Chupinanon secluded on some mountains, thus almost ending +the war. Hereupon many Laos arrived under the leadership of one +of their king's relatives, for hitherto they had done nothing nor +uttered any sound. I do not know whether it was from envy at seeing +us so high in the king's favor and that of the people of the kingdom, +or whether they decided the matter beforehand in their own country; +they killed a Spaniard with but slight pretext. When we asked the +king for justice in this matter, the latter ordered his mandarins to +judge the case. Meanwhile we sent for the Japanese who were carrying +on the war in another region, in order to take vengeance if justice +were not done. The Laos, either fearing this, or purposing to make +an end of us, attacked our quarters at night and killed the father +and several Spaniards who had accompanied him and who were sick; +they also killed some Japanese, for their anger was directed against +all. The rest of us escaped and took refuge on the Japanese vessel, +where we defended ourselves until the arrival of the Japanese. The +Laos made a fort and strengthened themselves therein. There were about +six thousand of them. They sent a message to the king saying that +they would not agree to any act of justice which he might order to +be carried out. The king was very angry for the deaths that they had +caused, and for the disrespect with which they treated him; but, in +order not to break with their king, he refused to give us forces with +which to attack them, although we often requested him to do so; nor did +we attack them ourselves, as we were without weapons. The king sent +word of this affair to Lao, and we remained for the time, stripped, +without property, without arms, without justice or revenge, and quite +angry at the king, although he was continually sending us excuses, +saying that if the king of Lao did not do justice in this matter, +he himself would do it, and would not let them leave the country on +that account; he also sent us food, and some clothes and weapons. At +this juncture a ship was despatched on an embassy to Malaca in which +we wished to embark, but neither the king nor his mothers would allow +Diego Belloso or me to leave. Some of the Spaniards embarked in it, +some returned to Sian, and others remained with us; and the king from +that time on made us more presents than ever. The Japanese gathered in +their ship, and refused to continue the war. When the enemy learned +that we were in confusion, they collected large forces and regained +many undefended regions. The king requested the Laos to go to war, +since they had thrown into confusion those who were defending his +country. They went, lost the first battle, and returned completely +routed, leaving many dead and wounded on the field. Chupinanon followed +up the victory and came within sight of the king's residence, only +a river separating them. Thereupon the king quite disregarded the +Laos, and persuaded us and the Japanese to take up arms again and +defend him. By this time we had all reëquipped ourselves with arms +and ammunition, and after much entreaty from him and his mothers, we +went to war and relieved a fortress which Chupinanon was besieging. We +won two battles and forced him to withdraw, thus taking from him all +he had just regained, as well as other lands which had remained in +those regions. We captured a quantity of rice and provisions from +the enemy--with which the king's forces recuperated themselves, +for they were suffering famine--and we went into quarters. This we +did, I, the Spaniards, and the Japanese who were on my side. Diego +Belloso and his men went to Tele, killed its king, and returned after +having conquered part of the province. At this time a Portuguese ship +arrived from Macao, [103] laden with merchandise; on which account, +and on beholding our deeds, the Laos were filled with great fear +of us, and without leave from the king, departed in boats to their +country. Thereupon we went to the king, and requested him not to let +them go without doing justice, unless he wished to break friendship +with Luzon and Malaca. He replied that he did not dare detain them, +but that if we wished to pursue and dared to fight them, he would +secretly give us men. Accordingly we all negotiated for ten praus, +and followed them. But since they were far ahead of us and under +the spell of fear, we could not overtake them for many days. For +this reason Belloso turned back with some Spaniards and Japanese. I +followed with great difficulty--on account of certain strong currents, +for we dragged the praus part way with ropes--although with but few +men, until I overtook many of the Laos, and seized their praus and +possessions, from which we all received compensation and gained +still more in reputation, which at present we enjoy to a higher +degree than was ever enjoyed by any nation in foreign lands. We are +greatly esteemed by the king and his men, and by those native here; +and greatly feared by foreigners. Accordingly we receive great respect +in all parts of the kingdom. They have bestowed upon Captain Diego +Belloso and myself the title of grandee, the highest in their kingdom, +so that we may be more respected and feared, and better obeyed. Two +of the best provinces in the kingdom are entered in our names, and +will be made over to us as soon as the turmoils of war are settled +and assemblies have been held to take the oaths to the king, which +has not yet been done. In the meantime we are making use of other +people whom the king orders to be given us. There is no opportunity +in the kingdom for any one else to possess entire power and command, +beyond Ocuña Lacasamana, leader of the Malays, whom the king favors on +account of his large forces, and because he needs him for the wars in +which he is engaged. The Spaniards have some encounters with his men, +for which reason we hold aloof from one another. I have informed +your Grace so minutely of these wars and affairs, in order that +it may be judged whether his Majesty has any justifiable and legal +right to seize any portion of this kingdom, since his forces killed +the man who was quietly in possession of it; and since its heir, who +was driven away where he had lost hope of ever again possessing it, +has afterward reconquered it through his Majesty's subjects, who have +guarded and defended his person from his enemies. For the hope that the +king will give it up voluntarily will never be realized, as he rather +fears having so many Spaniards in his country, even while he esteems +them; for he dreads lest they deprive him of his kingdom, since he +sees that this only requires the determination therefor. Some of our +enemies impress this fact upon him, especially the Moros. I beg and +entreat your Grace, who can do so much in this matter, to see that we +do not lose our hold on this land, since so much has been accomplished +in it, and it has been brought to a so satisfactory state. Moreover +it is very important to possess a fortress on the mainland, since it +is the beginning of great things. For if a fortress be built here, +and the king see a large force in this land, he would have to do what +he knows to be just, even if ill-disposed. I say this on account of +his mother, aunt, and grandmother, who rule and govern, for he only +does as they tell him. He is a child and is addicted to wine more +than his father; he only thinks of sports and hunting, and cares +nothing for the kingdom. Therefore should he see many Spaniards, +and that nobody could harm them, he would do whatever they wished, +because, as above-said, he loves them; neither would our opponents +dare to offer any opposition. If perchance there should be so few men +in the Filipinas at present that no great number of them can be sent, +at least send as many as possible with the fathers, so as not to +lose this jurisdiction and our share in anything; for Diego Belloso +sent to Malaca for religious, men, and documents, so that by that +means he may become chief justice of this land, and make over this +jurisdiction to Malaca. Since this kingdom has been restored by that +kingdom [i.e., the Philippines], your Grace should not allow others to +reap the fruits of our labors. If some soldiers should come, and the +Cambodians should refuse them the wherewithal to maintain themselves +because of their small number, and not fearing them, I would do here +whatever your Grace bade me, so long as it were reasonable; and until +more soldiers came, I could manage to make the Cambodians give it, +however much against their inclination. These men should come bound +hard and fast by documents, so that, as the country is very vast, +they should not be tempted to avail themselves of license, for lack of +discipline was the cause of our encounter with the Laos. It has been +very difficult for me to despatch this vessel, because little is given +to the king for any purpose, and because there were many opponents to +prevent it--for it is evident that the mandarins, whether native or +foreign, are not pleased to see men set over them in the kingdom--and +as I am poor, for I have lived hitherto by war, and subsisted from +its gains by many wars, for the king also is very poor. The Spaniard +whom I entrust with this mission is poor and an excellent soldier; +and to enable him to go, I have assisted him from my indigence. Will +your Grace please assist both him and the Cambodian, in order that +the latter may become acquainted with some of the grandeur of his +Majesty. I would rejoice to be the bearer of this, so as to give your +Grace a long account of these affairs and of other notable things, +and of the fertility of these kingdoms; but neither the king nor his +mothers have allowed me to go, as the bearer will state, among other +things. Your Grace may believe him, for he is a person disinterested in +all respects, having just arrived from Macan. On account of the many +wars, the king does not possess many things to send your Grace. He +sends two ivory tusks, and a slave. Your Grace will forgive him; he +will send many things next year, if the pacification of his country is +accomplished, for he still has something to do in it. I have spoken to +him and persuaded him to send to that city [i.e., Manila] to request +soldiers, in order to complete the pacification of the country; but +his mothers would not have it on any account, I am sure that they +act thus in order not to promise them lands for their maintenance, +or that they may not seize the land. But when they were in Lao, +they promised very vast lands. But if what is done is not sufficient +to provide for them, let the mercy of God suffice. When this embassy +was despatched, Diego Belloso and myself told the king that if he did +not give us the lands that he had promised us, we intended to go to +Luzon, because we did not now possess the wherewithal with which to +maintain ourselves. Many things occurred with respect to this request, +but finally he gave us the lands, as is stated in the embassy; he +gave them to us on condition of our holding them in his service and +obedience. By this means I shall have more resources for your Grace's +service. I spent all my possessions in meeting the expenses that I +incurred in that city [i.e., Manila], and in maintaining my men in +this kingdom. For that purpose I took the silver of the common seamen +of my vessel, and although I paid the latter with some silver which +we found in the [Chinese] ships, Gallinato would not consent to it, +but took it all for himself. In Malaca they made me pay it out of +the property on my ship, and would not consent to their being paid +out of the prizes, since the war was considered a just one. [104] For +this reason I am now destitute of any property, and therefore do not +possess the means of serving your Grace as I ought and as I should +have desired. Recollecting your Grace's unique armory I send you a +bottle and a small flask of ivory. Your Grace will forgive the trifle +for I promise to compensate for it next year. Your Grace may command +me in any service for I shall take great pleasure therein. Will your +Grace do me the favor to protect my affairs, so that they may gain +some merit by your favor. Trusting to this, may our Lord preserve +your Grace, and give you increase in your dignity, as this servant +of your Grace desires in your affairs. From Camboja, July twenty, +one thousand five hundred and ninety-eight. + +Your Grace's servant, + +BLAS RUYZ DE HERNAN GONÇALES + +Through this news and despatch from Camboja we learned in Manila of +the good result attained by the stay of Diego Belloso and Blas Ruys in +that land. Don Luys Dasmariñas gaining encouragement in the enterprise +that he had proposed, discussed it with greater warmth. But since +difficulties were still raised as to the justification with which an +entrance could be made into Camboja with armed forces for more than +the protection of, and completion of establishing, Prauncar in his +kingdom, and to leave preachers with him--it was said on Don Luys's +behalf that after accomplishing the above, he would, with the necessary +favor of the same king of Camboja, proceed to the neighboring kingdom +of Champan and take possession of it for his Majesty. He would drive +thence a usurper, the common enemy of all those kingdoms, who lorded +over it, and who, from his fortress near the sea, sallied out against +all navigators, plundering and capturing them. He had committed many +other crimes, murders, and thefts, on the Portuguese and other nations, +who were obliged to pass his coasts in their trading with, and voyages +to, China, Macan, Xapon, and other kingdoms, concerning all of which +sufficient testimony had been given. On account of all these reports, +the theologians and jurists decided that the war against the ruler +of Champan and the conquest of his lands was justifiable, and that +this position was of no less importance to the Spaniards than that +of Camboja. + +The governor and president, Don Francisco Tello, held a consultation +with the Audiencia and others--religious and captains--as to what in +their opinion was the most advisable measure to take in this matter. It +was resolved that, since Don Luys offered to make this expedition +at his own expense with those men who chose to follow him, the plan +should be carried out. [105] Accordingly, an agreement was made with +him on the above basis. He was to take the men at his own expense, +with commission and papers from the governor for affairs of government +and war, and provisions from the Audiencia for the administration of +justice. He began preparing ships, men, and provisions, in order to +sail as soon as possible. + +In the meanwhile, Governor Don Francisco Tello despatched Don Joan +de Çamudio with a moderate-sized ship to Great China to obtain leave +from the viceroy of Canton for the Spaniards to communicate and +trade with his province. He was also to fetch saltpeter and metals +which were wanted for the royal magazines of Manila. Don Joan reached +his destination with good weather, and after stationing himself off +the coast of Canton, sent certain of his company to the city with +despatches for the tuton or viceroy. When the viceroy heard of the +arrival of the Spaniards and the reason thereof, he gave them audience, +and treated them cordially. The Portuguese residing in Macan near the +city of Canton, made many efforts to prevent the viceroy, the conchifu, +and other mandarins from admitting the Castilians of Manila into +their country, alleging that the latter were pirates and evil-doers, +who seized upon whatever kingdom and province they visited. They told +them so many things that it would have sufficed to destroy them, had +not the viceroy and mandarins looked at the matter dispassionately; +for they knew the declaration of the Portuguese to be hate and enmity, +and that these passions moved them to desire that the Castilians +have no trade with China, for their own interests. The affair went so +far, that, having been brought before a court of justice, silence was +imposed upon the Portuguese of Macan, under penalty of severe corporal +punishment; while the Castilians were given and assigned a port on +the same coast, named El Pinal [Pine Grove], twelve leguas from the +city of Canton, where they might then and always enter and make a +settlement of their own; and they were given sufficient chapas [i.e., +edicts or passports of safety] and provisions therefor. Thereupon +Don Joan de Çamudio, entered El Pinal with his ship and there he was +furnished with everything needful by the Chinese at a moderate price +while the Spaniards went to and fro on the river upon their business +to Canton in lorchas [106] and champans. While the Spaniards were +detained, in the said port they were always well received in the city +and lodged in houses within its walls. They went about the streets +freely and armed, a thing which is new and unique in China in respect +to foreigners. This caused so great wonder and envy to the Portuguese +(who are not so treated) that they tried with might and main to +prevent it, even going so far as to come by night in boats from Macan +to El Pinal to fire the ship of the Castilians. This did not succeed, +however, for, having been heard, the necessary resistance was made, +and after that a good watch was always kept on board, until the ship +having accomplished its business and object departed thence, much to +the satisfaction of the Chinese, who gave the Spaniards chapas and +documents for the future. The ship reached Manila at the beginning +of the year one thousand five hundred and ninety-nine. + +After Don Luys Dasmariñas had equipped two moderate-sized ships and +a galliot, and collected two hundred men who chose to follow him +in this enterprise to Camboja--they were part of the unemployed in +Manila--with the necessary provisions, ammunition, and equipment on +his ships; and accompanied by Fray Alonso Ximenez and Fray Aduarte +of the Order of St. Dominic and Fray Joan Bautista of the Order of +St. Francis, some Japanese, and native Indians of Manila: he set sail +with his fleet from the bay, in the middle of July, [107] of the year +ninety-eight. The weather was somewhat contrary as the seasons of +the vendavals had set in, but his desire to accomplish his voyage, +lose no time, and leave Manila, which was the greatest difficulty, +caused him to disregard the weather; he thought that, once at sea, +he would be able to stop on the coast in the port of Bolinao. + +This plan did not succeed so well as Don Luis had anticipated, for, as +soon as the fleet of these three ships left the bay it was so buffeted +by the weather that it could not fetch the port of Bolinao or hold +the sea. The flagship sprung a leak, and the ships returned to the +mouth of the bay above Miraveles, [108] where they stayed several days +refitting. When the weather moderated they set sail again, but again +they were buffeted so violently that the ships were separated from +one another, and the galliot--the weakest of them--with difficulty +made the port of Cagayan. Quite dismantled and very necessitous, +it entered by the bar of Camalayuga to the city of Segovia, which is +at the head of the island of Luzon opposite Great China. There the +alcalde-mayor of that province furnished it the necessary provisions +and tackle. Captain Luis Ortiz, who commanded this galliot, together +with twenty-five Spaniards and some Indians, hastened preparations for +their departure and again left that port to rejoin the fleet which +he had to follow, according to his instructions, making for the bar +of the river of Camboja which was their destination. He had scarcely +left Cagayan, when the almiranta entered the port in the same distress +as the galliot. It was also detained some days to refit. Then it left +again to rejoin the flagship and the galliot. The flagship being a +stronger vessel kept the sea with difficulty; and as the storm lasted +a long time, it was compelled to run in the open toward China. The +storm continued to rage so steadily that, without being able to +meliorate its voyage, the ship was obliged to sail, amid high seas +and cloudy weather, to certain small uninhabited islands on the coast +of China below Macan. There it was many times in danger of shipwreck, +and parts of the cargo were thrown away daily. The almiranta, after +having been refitted, left Cagayan, made the same voyage in the same +storm, and anchored near the flagship, where it was lost with some +men and its entire cargo. [109]The flagship did its best to rescue +those who escaped from the almiranta, and although the former kept +afloat several days, at length it grounded near the coast. There +it began to leak so badly that, with that and the strong sea which +struck it broadside, the vessel went to pieces. The ship's boat had +already been lost, and in order to save their lives before the ship +was completely wrecked they were obliged to make rafts and prepare +framework and planks on which Don Luis and the religious and crew--in +all one hundred and twenty Spaniards--went ashore. They brought away +from the said ship a few of the most valuable objects, the weapons, +and the most manageable pieces of artillery, abandoning the rest as +lost. All of the Spaniards were so soaked and in so ill a plight that +some Chinese who came to the coast, from some neighboring towns, both +from compassion felt for their loss and on account of having been given +certain things that had been brought away from the wreck, provided +them with food and with a native vessel of small burden in which to +leave that place and make for Macan and Canton, which were not far. + +As soon as Don Luis and his men sighted Macan, the former sent two +soldiers of his company in Chinese vessels to the city and settlement +of the Portuguese to announce their arrival and hardships, in order to +obtain some help from them. He sent two other soldiers to Canton to +ask the viceroy or tuton for assistance and protection, so that they +might equip themselves in, and sail from, China, in prosecution of +their voyage. The people of Macan and their chief captain Don Pablo +of Portugal received the Castilians so ill that they were thrown +into prison and not allowed to return to Don Luis. To the latter they +sent word warning him to leave the coast immediately, as they would +treat them all no less ill. When the Portuguese learned that Captain +Hernando de los Rios [110] and one of his companions had gone to Canton +for the same purpose, they at once sent two Portuguese, members of +their council and magistracy [camara and regimiento] to oppose their +entry into China, by saying that they were robbers and pirates, and +evil-doers, as they had said before of Don Joan de Çamudio, who at +this time was with his ship in the port of El Pinal, as abovesaid. + +In Canton, Captain Hernando de los Rios and his companion met Alferez +Domingo de Artacho and other companions belonging to Don Joan's ship, +who, on learning of the disaster of Don Luis's fleet and that it had +been wrecked near by, came together and defended themselves against the +calumnies and pretensions of the Portuguese. The result was that, as +the main difficulty had been already overcome in the case of Don Joan, +and the viceroy and mandarins were informed that all were from Manila, +who Don Luis Dasmariñas was, and that he was going to Camboja with +his fleet, they received him with the same good-will with which they +had received Don Joan de Çamudio, and gave him permission to enter +the port of E1 Pinal with him. There the two met, with much regret +by the one at Don Luis Dasmariñas's loss, and with much satisfaction +by the other at finding there Don Joan de Çamudio and his men, who +provided them with certain things that they needed. With Don Joan's +assistance, Don Luis at once bought a strong, moderate-sized junk, +on which he embarked with some of his men, and the artillery and +goods which had been saved. He enjoyed the same advantages in that +port as the Spaniards of Don Joan de Çamudio's ship. He intended to +remain there until, having sent news to Manila, ships and the other +necessary things for pursuing his voyage thence to Camboja, should +be sent him, in respect to which Don Luis would never allow himself +to show any discouragement or loss of resolution. + +Don Joan de Çamudio left El Pinal, leaving Don Luis Dasmariñas and +his men in that port, at the beginning of the year ninety-nine, +and reached Manila in twelve days. After him, Don Luis sent Alférez +Francisco Rodrigues with three companions to Manila in a small champan +to beg the governor and his supporters for help and assistance in +his present emergency, a vessel, and what was needful to continue the +expedition that he had begun. In Manila the news of Don Luis's loss +and of the conditions to which he was reduced, was learned both from +Don Joan de Çamudio and from Alférez Francisco Rodrigues, who reached +Manila after the former. Seeing that it was impossible for Don Luis to +continue the voyage to Camboja, and that there was neither property +nor substance with which to equip him again, nor the time for it, +a moderate-sized ship was purchased and despatched from Manila to +E1 Pinal with provisions and other things, under command of the same +Alférez Francisco Rodrigues, who was accompanied by some soldiers of +whom he was captain and leader. Through them Don Francisco Tello sent +orders to Don Luis to embark his men and return to the Filipinas, +without thinking for the present of the expedition to Camboja or of +anything else. + +Captain Hernando de los Rios, who attended to Don Luis's affairs in +Canton, wrote a letter at this time to Doctor Antonio de Morga; and +in order that what happened in this respect may be better understood, +the letter reads word for word as follows. + +Fernando de los Rios Coronel, to Doctor Antonio de Morga, of +his Majesty's council, and his auditor in the royal Audiencia +and Chancillería of the Filipinas, whom may our Lord preserve, in +Manila. The hardships which have befallen us within the short time +since we left Manila, have been so many, that, if I were to give your +Grace an account of them all, it would weary you; moreover the short +time in which Don Joan is to depart does not allow of it. And since +he will relate everything fully, I will relate only what occurred to +us after reaching this land; for our Lord was pleased to change our +intentions, which were to remain in Bolinao until the bad weather +which we were having had terminated. In sight of the port we were +overtaken by a storm which greatly endangered our lives and forced +us to come to this kingdom of China, where we expected at least +that the Portuguese would allow us to refit our ship. As it was the +Lord's will that we should lose it, we have suffered hardships enough, +for scarcely anything was saved. I lost my property and a portion of +that of others, because I was not present at the time of the wreck, +as my general ordered myself and a coast-pilot the day before to go +to look for fresh provisions. This coast is so wretchedly laid down +on the charts that we did not know where we were, and on account +of bad weather I could not return to the ship. Consequently I was +obliged to go to Canton, where the Sangleys, who conveyed me and +those who left the ship with me, accused us of having killed three +Sangleys. And had we not found there Alférez Domingo de Artacho +and Marcos de la Cueva, who were pleading against the Portuguese, +we would have fared very ill. It was God's will, that, with their +aid, we settled the case in court; and, although without proofs, and +without taking our depositions, they condemned us to a fine of fifty +taes of silver. There we learned that for one and one-half months they +[i.e., the men of Juan Zamudio's vessel] had been defending themselves +against the Portuguese, who, as soon as the Spaniards had arrived, +went about saying that they were robbers and rebels, and people who +seized the kingdoms into which they entered, and other things not +worth writing. But in the end, all their efforts, good and evil--and +indeed very evil--profited them nothing, because, by means of great +assiduity and a quantity of silver, the Spaniards negotiated a matter +which the Portuguese had never imagined, namely, the opening of a +port in this country, in order that the Spaniards might always come +safely, and the granting of houses in Canton, a privilege which was +never extended to the Portuguese, on account of which the latter are, +or will be, even more angered. Besides, silence was imposed upon the +Portuguese, although this was no part of the negotiations, so that they +might not attempt by other means to do us all the injury possible (as +the Sangleys who were among them tell us). It is impossible to tell +how much the Portuguese abhor the name of Castilians, unless it be +experienced as we have done for our sins, for they have placed us in +great extremity, as Don Joan will relate fully. For, when our general +wrote to them that we had been wrecked, and were dying of hunger among +infidels, and in great peril, and that he was not coming to trade, +but was engaged in the service of his Majesty, the welcome given him +by the Portuguese was to seize his messengers and keep them up to the +present time in a dungeon. Lastly, while we have been in this port, +undergoing the difficulties and perils which Don Joan will relate, +although they are so near, not only do they leave us to suffer, but, +if there are any well-disposed persons, they have forbidden them to +communicate with us or to give us anything, under both temporal and +spiritual penalty. In truth, to reflect upon this cruelty, and still +more to experience it as we are doing, exhausts all patience. May God +in His mercy give us patience and consolation because these infidels +[i.e., the Chinese] are the people who have corrupted the natural +light more than any other people in the world. Hence angels and not men +are required to deal with them. Since there are historians who record +events in these regions, I shall not go into details respecting them. I +only say, in order that you may understand in what a country we are, +that it is the true kingdom of the devil, where he seems to rule with +full power. Hence each Sangley appears to be the devil incarnate, +for there is no malice or deceit which they do not attempt. Although +outwardly the government, with all its order and method, seems good +as far as its preservation is concerned, yet, in practice, it is all +a scheme of the devil. Although here they do not rob or plunder the +foreigners openly, yet they do it by other and worse methods. Don +Joan has worked hard, and gratitude is certainly due him, for he has +accomplished a thing so difficult, that the Portuguese say only the +devil or he could have done it. However, it is true that it has cost +him, as I have heard, about seven thousand pesos, besides the risk to +which he has been exposed; for the Portuguese attempted to burn him in +his ship; and although their schemes came to naught, it is impossible +to describe the bitterness which they feel at seeing us come here to +trade, because of the signal injury they receive thereby. However, +if one considers it thoroughly, the truth is that, if this business +were established on the basis of a fair agreement, the Portuguese +would rather gain by it, because they would dispose of innumerable +articles that they possess, and the majority of them, especially the +poor, would profit by selling the work of their hands, and what they +get from India, for which they always obtain a good price. As far +as raising the price of [Chinese] merchandise to them is concerned, +once established, and if the Sangleys understood that ships would come +every year, they would bring down much more merchandise: and so much +the more as Canton possesses such a large quantity of it, that there +is more than enough for twice as many as are here, as we have seen +with our own eyes. I can testify that, if they wish to load a ship +with only one kind of goods, they can do so, even if it be needles; +the more so, since the greater part of what the Chinese consume is +not included among our articles of purchase, the great bulk of our +purchases being raw silk. Therefore I believe that the continuation +of this would be of great advantage to that city [i.e., Manila] for +the following reasons which present themselves to me. The first is +that, if orders were given for a ship to come authorized to invest +the bulk of the money of that city [i.e., Manila], much more and +better goods could be bought with much less money, and in articles +which would prove more profitable; since, in short, we would save +what the people of Chincheo gain with us [at Manila]--a goodly sum. + +The second reason is that that city [i.e., Manila] would be provided +with all necessaries, because one can find in the city of Canton +anything that can be desired. + +The third is that by this means we would avoid the excessive commerce +of the Sangleys in that city [i.e., Manila], who cause the harm which +your Grace knows, and even that which we do not know. They are people +who, the less they are admitted, the better will it be for us in every +respect. Hence there is no need of there being more of them than the +number required for the service of the community; and then they would +neither raise the price of provisions, nor retail what remains in the +country, as they do now. Thus many pernicious sins which they commit +and teach to the natives would be avoided. Although there seems to +be some difficulty in establishing this and in smoothing down the +Portuguese, still it might be accomplished. + +The fourth reason is that, if the purchase is made here, it will +reach that city [i.e., Manila] by Christmas, and each man would store +his property in his house, and prepare and arrange it; and then, even +should the ships from Castilla arrive early, no loss would be suffered +as at present--when, if those ships arrive before the goods purchased +from China [reach Manila] the merchandise rises a hundred per cent. + +The fifth reason is that the ships might easily take in cargo any +time in the month of May, and take advantage of the first vendavals, +which sometimes begin by the middle of June or before. By sailing then, +they run less risk, and will reach Nueva España one month or even two +months earlier. Then, they can leave that country in January and come +here [i.e., to the Filipinas] by April without any of the dangers +which beset them among these islands if they sail late, as we know. + +The sixth reason is that the many inconveniences now existing at the +time of the purchase [in Manila] would be avoided--inconveniences +with which your Grace is acquainted--and the citizens would have +less trouble. Also in respect to the lading and its allotment [i.e., +of shipping room] a better system could certainly be followed, +and it would be known who is to share in it. Things would be better +remedied, because neither the money of Mexico nor that of companies +would be allowed to be employed. The strict prevention of this alone +would be sufficient to assure prosperity to Manila in a short time; +for, if only the inhabitants were to send their invested property, +it is certain that all the machinery of the money of the Mexicans +would have to be employed on the goods sent from here--I mean from +Manila--if they do not allow the Mexicans to purchase in that city +[i.e., Manila]. And if less merchandise is sent from here [i.e., +China, and consequently Manila] and there are more buyers there [i.e., +in Mexico], the goods would be worth double. This is self-evident, +and if, as your Graces have already begun to remedy this matter, +the measure be rigorously carried still farther, that city [i.e., +Manila] must prosper greatly. For, by not sending to Nueva España +any other produce except that from that city [i.e., Manila] mainly +purchased in this country [i.e., China], Manila would prosper as +greatly as one could desire. If we consider the benefit and favor +which his Majesty confers upon us in this matter, we would esteem +it much more than we do now. But I believe that we shall regret it, +when, perchance, we are deprived of it. Perhaps some one would say, +in opposition to what I have said about coming to purchase here, +that his Majesty would be defrauded of the customs and duties +which the Sangleys now pay, and of their tribute. But there is a +remedy for all this, for with the freight duties alone his Majesty +would save much more; as also by buying ammunitions here and other +articles which he needs for the conservation of that country [i.e., +the islands] twice as cheaply and abundantly, and without depending +on the Chinese to bring them at their leisure, who at times--and +indeed every year--leave us without them, since we are forced to go +to get them. As far as the tribute is concerned, I believe that his +Majesty would be better served if there were no Sangleys there at all, +than by receiving the tribute. And it might happen, through this way, +if our Lord ordered it, that a door might be opened for the preaching +of the gospel and for the conversion of the people, a thing desired so +earnestly by his Majesty, and especially aimed at by him. After all, +things require a beginning, and the road would be opened, although +at present it seems shut; for, if we hope that the Portuguese attempt +this, I do not know when they will do it, considering that they have +not tried to do so, for so long as they have been settled here. Even +the Sangleys say that the Portuguese began like ourselves. At first +they went to and fro; then two sick men remained; the next year they +built four houses; and thus they continued to increase. I know that +there is no other difficulty for us to do likewise than that which +the Portuguese offer. To return to the Portuguese opposition, it is +something amazing, for not only are they vexed at our coming here, +but also at our going to Camboja or to Sian. They assert that those +districts are theirs, but I cannot see why they so designate them--for +it is just the contrary--unless it be because we have allowed them, +through our negligence, to seize our possessions near the strait of +Malaca, and enter the line of demarcation falling to the crown of +Castilla, as I would make them fully understand if an opportunity were +presented. One can read in Historia de las Indias [111] [i.e., History +of the Indias] in the one hundred and second chapter, and before and +after it, that, at the request of the Portuguese, his Holiness drew the +said line from three hundred and seventy leguas west of the islands of +Caboverde, which were called the Espericas. The one hundred and eighty +degrees of longitude falling to the Portuguese terminate and end as +abovesaid, near the above-mentioned strait. All the rest belongs to +us. Furthermore, since we are subjects of one king, how do we suffer +them to forbid us all our trade? Why do they bar us from Maluco, Sian, +Camboja, Cochinchina, China, and all the rest of this archipelago? What +are we to do then, if they wish to seize everything? Surely this is +a very unreasonable proceeding. I have dwelt on this matter in order +to express my feelings. Not until our departure shall I write to +your Grace about the fertility and nature of the country, and of its +greatness. Then I shall endeavor to give a full account of the land, +and to mark out this coast, for nothing is put down correctly. + +This is the best coast [112] of all that have been discovered, +and the most suitable for galleys, if God should ordain that they +come hither. I have already discovered where the king keeps his +treasure. The country is very rich, and the city of Canton well +supplied, although there is nothing to be said in regard to its +buildings, of which the whole city possesses few of any importance, +according to the information received from a Theatin [113] Sangley with +whom I found much pleasure in talking--though I was able to do so for +only one afternoon. He was a man of intelligence and reason, and it is +said that he is a scholar. He told me that in Paquien [i.e., Pekin], +where the king resides, and in Lanquien [i.e., Nankin] the fathers +of the Society enjoy the quiet possession of three houses. There +are seven fathers, among whom is one called Father Riçio, [114] +an associate of Father Rugero who went to Roma. He is an excellent +mathematician and has corrected the Chinese calendar which contained +many errors and false opinions, and their fantastic idea of the world, +which they believed to be flat. He made them a globe and a sphere, +and with this and the sound arguments and reasons which they give +them, the fathers are considered as people descended from heaven. He +says that in those regions the people would be very favorable to +conversion, if there were ministers; and that there [i.e., in Pekin] +the foreigners are not looked upon with wonder as they are here +[i.e., in Canton]. He says that the people are much more sensible +and reasonable, so much so that they call the people of this country +barbarians. He adds that Lanquien lies in the latitude of Toledo, +namely thirty and two-thirds degrees, and that from there to Paquien +is a twenty-five days' journey, so that the latter city must lie in +more than fifty degrees of latitude. [115] The above-mentioned brother +comes down annually to collect the stipend given them by the people +here for their three houses. Now they are expecting a great friend of +theirs who is said to be the second person nearest to the king. One +can travel through all this land by water, and therefore it abounds +in everything, for articles are conveyed over the rivers and there +is no need of beasts of burden, which is its special greatness. + +He who wishes to depict China without having seen the land, must draw +a country full of rivers and towns, and without a palmo of ground left +lying idle. I wish I had more time in which to describe some of the +things of China which I have observed and inquired about with special +care, and of which, if God please, I shall be the messenger. The +affairs of Camboja are in a good condition, and we shall arrive there +at a seasonable time, if it be our Lord's will that we leave this +place with good auspices. The king sent a ship to Manila at the end +of August to ask for assistance. I do not know whether it has arrived +or whether it returned to put in port, for it left very late. Bias +Ruis sent fifty picos [116] from Camanguian. According to report, +the king has apportioned and given him nine thousand vassals, and as +many more to Belloso. + +At present we ourselves are enduring the necessity of which Don Juan +Çamudio will inform you. I entreat your Grace to help us, since it +is of so great importance. I kiss many times the hand of my lady +Doña Joana. May our Lord preserve your Grace for many years in the +prosperity and tranquillity which we your servants desire. From the +port of El Pinal, frozen with cold, the twenty-third of December, +ninety-eight. + +If my brother should come before I return, I beseech your Grace, +since it is so natural in your Grace to do good to all--especially +to those of that land--to show him the goodness which your Grace has +always shown me. + +FERNANDO DE LOS RIOS CORONEL + +After Don Juan de Çamudio's departure from El Pinal, where Don Luis +Dasmariñas remained with his junk awaiting the assistance that he +expected from Manila and which he had requested through Don Joan and +Alférez Francisco Rodrigues, Don Luis thought that, since some time had +passed, the answer was being delayed, while his people were suffering +great want and cold there. Therefore he tried to put out to sea in the +junk, and to make for Manila. But the weather did not permit this, +nor was the vessel large enough to hold all of Don Luis's men for +the voyage. He stopped near the fort where the Portuguese of Macan +again sent him many messages and requests to leave the coast at once, +warning him that they would seize him and his companions, and would +send them to India, where they would be severely punished. Don Luis +always answered them that he had not come to harm or offend them, +but that he was going to the kingdom of Camboja for the service of +God and of his Majesty; that he had been shipwrecked and had suffered +many hardships, the severest of which had been due to the Portuguese +of Macan themselves, subjects of his Majesty; that he was expecting +help from Manila in order that he might return thither; and that he +begged and requested them to aid and protect him, and to free the +two Castilians whom they had seized. Finally he declared that if, in +spite of all this, they should attempt to do him any harm or injury, he +would defend himself to the best of his ability; and he protested that +any losses resulting therefrom would lie at their door. Thenceforward +Don Luis Dasmariñas kept strict watch on his ship. He kept his weapons +ready and the artillery loaded, and was on his guard day and night. And +he was not mistaken, for the people of Macan resolved to attack him in +order to seize him. To this end the chief captain himself came one day, +with some fustas and other vessels, and with men armed with javelins, +guns, and artillery, when they thought the Castilians would be off +their guard, to attack Don Luis Dasmariñas. The latter, suspecting +what was about to happen, awaited them arms in hand; and as he saw +the Portuguese fleet attacking him, he began to play upon them with +his muskets, arquebuses, and a few pieces of artillery, with such +rapidity that he inflicted a very severe loss upon his enemy and +upon the ship which carried the chief captain, killing one of his +pages who stood behind him, and other persons. The chief captain +retired with all the other vessels, and they made for the high sea, +having been defeated by Don Luis, who did not attempt to follow them +but remained on the watch. As the Portuguese did not dare attack him +again they made for Macan, and Don Luis Dasmariñas put into the port +of El Pinal, where he thought he would be in greater security. There +Don Luis remained until Captain Francisco Rodrigues arrived with the +ship from Manila, and joined him. They distributed their men between +the two ships and made some purchases with what this last ship had +brought from Manila, in the very city of Macan, for the Portuguese, +for the sake of their own interests, gave and sold them goods, in +spite of a certain apprehension of the law. They returned to Manila +leaving a few men in El Pinal who had died of sickness, among whom was +Fray Alonso Ximenez, the principal promoter of this enterprise. His +associate, Fray Diego Aduarte, did not choose to return to Manila, +but went to Macan and thence to Goa, in order to go to España. Don +Luis reached Manila with both ships, and his expedition to Camboja +and his conduct of the said enterprise remained in this state. + +It has been already related that the galliot, one of the ships of +Don Luis Dasmariñas's fleet, in which Luis Ortiz and twenty-five +Spaniards had sailed, after having put into Cagayan and refitted +there, sailed again during fairly good weather to find the fleet. This +ship although so inadequate to resist storms at sea, was permitted, +through God's mercy, to encounter those which it met without being +wrecked. It made its way along the coast of Cochinchina and Champan, +inside the shoals of Aynao, and reached the bar of Camboja. Expecting +to find all or some of the ships of its convoy within the bar, it +ascended the river as far as the city of Chordemuco. There they +found Diego Belloso and Blas Ruys de Hernan Gonçalez, with some +Castilians who had joined them, and other Portuguese who had come by +way of Malaca, and with whose assistance many battles had been won +in favor of King Prauncar, who had been restored to his kingdom, +although some of his provinces had not been entirely pacified. It +was learned there that neither Don Luis Dasmariñas nor any other of +his fleet had reached Camboja. Those in the galliot said that Don +Luis was coming in person with a large force of ships, men, arms, +and some religious, to accomplish what he had always desired to do +in that kingdom; that he would not be long in coming; and that their +galliot and crew belonged to his fleet. Blas Ruis and his Castilian +companions greatly rejoiced over so opportune news. The former thought +that everything was turning out well, and that now, according to the +present state of affairs, matters would be accomplished and settled as +they wished. Diego Belloso and his party, although they did not show +their regret, were not so pleased, for they much preferred the happy +termination and reward of this expedition to be for the Portuguese and +the government of India. They had had certain quarrels and disputes +with Blas Ruis over this. But seeing that the affair had reached this +state, they conformed to the times. Thereupon all joined together, +Portuguese and Castilians, and informed Prauncar and his mandarins +of the arrival of Alférez Luis Ortiz with his galliot and companions, +saying that they were part of a large fleet which would shortly arrive, +and that Don Luis Dasmariñas was coming in it in person, with religious +and men to aid and serve the king, in conformity to what he himself +had requested in his letter to Manila, several months before. The +king seemed pleased at this, and so did some of his mandarins who +liked the Spaniards, and recognized what benefits they had derived +from them hitherto. These believed that the matter would turn out +as it was represented to them. But the king's stepmother, and other +mandarins of her party, especially the Moro Malay Ocuña Lacasamana, +were vexed at the arrival of the Spaniards, for they thought that +the latter, being valiant men, numerous, and so courageous, as they +already knew, would dominate everything, or at least would take the +best; moreover they alone wished to deal with King Prauncar. Thus +their aversion for Spanish affairs became known to be as great as +the favor with which Prauncar, on the contrary, regarded them. The +latter immediately assigned the Spaniards a position with their ship +near the city, at the place which Blas Ruiz and Diego Belloso occupied. + +Before Don Luis Dasmariñas left Manila with his fleet, Captain Joan +de Mendoça Gamboa requested Governor Don Francisco Tello to allow him +to go to the kingdom of Sian with a moderate-sized ship, in order to +trade. For the greater security of his voyage and business, he asked +the governor to give him letters to the king of Sian, in which the +latter should be informed that he was sent as the governor's ambassador +and messenger to continue the peace, friendship, and commerce which +Joan Tello de Aguirre had contracted with Sian the year before. Seeing +that Don Luis Dasmariñas, who was on the way to Camboja, had left in +Manila for another occasion some ammunition and other things of use +to his fleet, Don Joan, in order better to facilitate the granting of +his request, offered to take these stores on board his ship and sail +round by way of Camboja, where he supposed that he would find Don +Luis Dasmariñas, and deliver them to him. The governor thought the +two proposals timely, and having furnished him with the necessary +despatches, Don Joan de Mendoça left Manila with his ship, taking +as pilot Joan Martinez de Chave, who had been Joan Tello's pilot +when the latter went to Sian. He took as companions some sailors and +Indian natives. He had a quantity of siguei [117] and other goods to +barter, and the ammunition and provisions which he was to convey to +Don Luis. With him embarked Fray Joan Maldonado [118] and an associate, +both religious of the Order of St. Dominic. The former was a grave and +learned man and a very intimate friend of Don Luis Dasmariñas, to whom +his order took great pleasure in sending him as a companion. They left +Manila, without knowing of Don Luis's shipwreck two months after the +latter had set sail. Crossing over the shoals they shortly reached +the bar of Camboja and ascended to the capital, where they found +the galliot of the fleet and learned that its other ships had not +arrived. The king received them cordially and lodged them with Diego +Belloso, Blas Ruiz, Luis Ortiz, and their companions. They passed +the time together, and would not let Joan de Mendoça leave Camboja +with his ship until something was heard of Don Luis Dasmariñas. A few +days later, they learned through Chinese ships, and by other means, +that the latter had put into China with difficulty and in distress, +and that he was there preparing to continue his voyage. Although this +event caused them sorrow, they still hoped that in a short time Don +Luis would be in Camboja with the two ships of his fleet. + +At this same time, a mestizo, named Govea, son of a Portuguese +and a Japanese woman, who lived in Japon, collected some mestizo +companions, as well as Japanese and Portuguese, on a junk which +he owned in the port of Nangasaqui, with the intention of coasting +along China, Champan, and Camboja, to seek adventures and to barter, +but mainly to make prizes of what they might meet at sea. With them +embarked a Castilian who had lived in Nangasaqui after the wreck of +the galleon "San Felipe," while on its way to Nueva España in the +year ninety-six. His name was Don Antonio Malaver, and he had been +a soldier in Italia. He came to the Filipinas from Nueva España as +captain and sargento-mayor of the troops brought that year by Doctor +Antonio de Morga in the fleet from Nueva España to Manila. Don Antonio +Malaver, who had no wish to return to the Filipinas, thinking that +by that way he could go to India and thence to España, and that on +the road there might fall to him some share of the illgotten gains +of that voyage, embarked with Govea and his company. After they had +run down the coast and heard some news of the entry of Spaniards +into Camboja, Don Antonio persuaded Govea to enter the river of +Camboja, where they would find Spaniards, and affairs in such a +state that they might take some effective action in that kingdom, +and thrive better than at sea. They went up as far as Chordemuco, +joined the Castilians and Portuguese and were received into their +company and list. As they all--and they were a considerable number of +men--saw the delay of Don Luis Dasmariñas, they proclaimed as leaders +Fray Joan Maldonado, Diego Belloso, and Blas Ruis. Then they began +to treat with King Prauncar on their own account concerning their +establishment and comfort, and to request lands and rice for their +maintenance and other things which had been promised them, alleging +that they did not derive the necessary usufruct and profit out of +his concessions to Belloso and Blas Ruis. Although the king gave +them good hopes for everything he brought nothing to a conclusion, +being hindered in this by his stepmother and the mandarins of her +party, who would have liked to see the Spaniards out of the kingdom; +and in this they gained more animus every day by the non-arrival of +Don Luis Dasmariñas. Consequently, the Spaniards spent the time in +going to and fro between their quarters and the city to negotiate +with the king, with whose answers and conversations they sometimes +returned satisfied and at other times not so much so. + +Ocuña Lacasamana and his Malays had their quarters near those of the +Spaniards, and since they were Moros, so opposed in religion and +pretension, the two parties had no affinity. Once a quarrel arose +between Spaniards and Malays, and several men were severely wounded on +both sides. Among them Alférez Luys Ortiz, commander of the galliot, +had both legs run through and was in great danger. King Prauncar was +angry at this, but did not dare to inflict any punishment or make +any reparation for these injuries. While matters were at such a heat +and the Malays were ill-disposed toward the Spaniards, one day while +Fray Joan Maldonado, Diego Belloso, and Blas Ruyz were in the city, +and Luys de Villafañe was in command of the quarters, on account of +the wounds and illness of Luys Ortiz, another quarrel arose in the +quarters with the Malays. Luys de Villafañe, taking advantage of this +opportunity, determined, with a few Spaniards who followed him, to +unite with Govea and his men, and attack the Malays, their quarters, +and the goods that they possessed, and sack them. Incited by anger and +still more by covetousness, they carried this out, and after having +killed many Malays and taken a quantity of property from them, they +retired and fortified themselves in their own quarters and in the +Japanese ship. The king and his mandarins were very angry at this, +and not less so were Fray Joan Maldonado, Belloso, and Blas Ruyz, +who were in Chordemuco; but Ocuña Lacasamana was far the angriest, +at seeing the injury and insult done him, and at the breaking of the +peace so recently made in reference to former quarrels. Although Fray +Joan Maldonado, Belloso, and Blas Ruiz went at once to the quarters +to remedy the matter, they found it so complicated that not even +King Prauncar, who tried to intervene, could compose it. The latter +warned the Spaniards to look to their personal safety, for he saw +their party fallen and in great danger, without his being able to +help it. Fray Joan Maldonado and his companion, although facing the +matter in company with Diego Belloso and Bias Ruis, yet took refuge +in Joan de Mendoça's ship for greater security, and some Spaniards +did the same. Diego Belloso, Blas Ruiz, and the others relying on +the king's friendship, and their services in the country, remained +on shore, although they took every precaution and kept the closest +possible guard over their safety. [119] + +The Malay Lacasamana, aided by his men and the mandarins of his +party, and supported by the king's step-mother, lost no more +time, nor the present opportunity, but attacked the Castilians, +Portuguese, and Japanese, at once, both by land and sea. Finding them +separated--although some offered as much resistance as possible--he +killed them all, including Diego Belloso and Blas Ruiz de Hernan +Gonçales. Then he burned their quarters and vessels except that of +Joan de Mendoça, who, fearing the danger, descended the river toward +the sea and defended himself against some praus that had followed +him. He took with him Fray Joan Maldonado, the latter's associate, and +some few Spaniards. On shore there remained alive only one Franciscan +religious, five Manila Indians, and a Castilian named Joan Dias, whom +the king, who grieved exceedingly for the deaths of the Spaniards, +had hid carefully in the open country. Although the king advised +the friar not to appear in public until the Malays were appeased, +that religious, imagining that he could escape their fury, emerged +with two Indians in order to escape from the kingdom. But they were +found and killed like the others. Joan Dias and three Indians remained +many days in concealment, and the king maintained them, until, after +other events, they could appear. Thus the cause of the Spaniards in +Camboja came to an end, and was so entirely defeated that the Moro +Malay and his partisans remained complete masters. They managed the +affairs of the kingdom with so little respect for King Prauncar, +that finally they killed him also. Thereupon a fresh insurrection +broke out, the provinces revolted, each man seized whatever he could, +and there was more confusion and disturbance than before. + +The Spanish garrison left in La Caldera, at the withdrawal of Don +Joan Ronquillo's camp from the river of Mindanao, passed into command +of Captain Villagra at the death of Captain Joan Pacho in Jolo, and +was suffering for lack of provisions; for neither the people of the +river could give them to the Spaniards, nor would the Joloans furnish +any on account of the war declared upon them. Therefore the garrison +urgently requested Governor Don Francisco Tello either to aid their +presidio with provisions, soldiers, and ammunition, or to allow them +to retire to Manila--a thing of which they were most desirous--since +there they gained no other special result than that of famine, and +of incarceration in that fort, and of no place wherein to seek their +sustenance. The governor, in view of their insistence in the matter; +and having but little money in the royal exchequer, with which to +provide for and maintain the said presidio--and for the same reason +the punishment that was to be inflicted upon the Joloans for their +outrages upon the Spaniards, and their insurrection was deferred--and +thinking that the return to Mindanao matters would be a long question: +he was inclined to excuse the difficulty and anxiety of maintaining +the presidio of La Caldera. In order to do it with a reasonable +excuse he consulted the Audiencia and other intelligent persons, and +requested them to give him their opinion. But he first communicated +his wishes to them and gave them some reasons with which he tried to +persuade them to give him the answer that he desired. The Audiencia +advised him not to remove or raise the garrison of La Caldera, but to +reënforce and maintain it, and to attend to the affairs of Jolo and +the river of Mindanao as soon as possible, even if what was necessary +for those two places should be withdrawn from some other section. They +said that this was the most urgent need, and the one which required +the greatest attention in the islands, both in order to pacify those +provinces and to keep them curbed; lest, seeing the Spaniards totally +withdrawn, they should gain courage and boldly venture still farther, +and come down to make captures among the Pintados and carry the war +to the very doors of the Spaniards. [120] Notwithstanding this reply +the governor resolved to raise and withdraw the garrison, and sent +orders to Captain Villagra immediately to burn the fort which had +been built in La Caldera, to withdraw with all his men and ships, +and return to Manila. This was quickly done, for the captain and the +soldiers of the garrison waited for nothing more than to dismantle +the fort and leave. When the Joloans saw the Spaniards abandoning the +country, they were persuaded that the latter would return to Mindanao +no more, and that they had not sufficient forces to do so. Thereupon +they gained fresh resolution and courage, and united with the people +of Buhahayen on the river, and equipped a number of caracoas and other +craft, in order to descend upon the coast of Pintados to plunder them +and make captives. The people of Tampacan, who lost hope of receiving +further help from the Spaniards, and of the latter's return to the +river, since they had also abandoned the fort of La Caldera and left +the country, came to terms with and joined the people of Buhahayen, +their neighbors, in order to avoid the war and injuries that they +were suffering from the latter. Then all turned their arms against +the Spaniards, promising themselves to make many incursions into their +territory and gain much plunder. Accordingly they prepared their fleet, +and appointed as leaders and commanders of it two of the experienced +chiefs, of the river of Mindanao, called Sali and Silonga. They left +the Mindanao River in the month of July of the year ninety-nine, in +the season of the vendavals, with fifty caracoas, containing more than +three thousand soldiers armed with arquebuses, campilans, carasas, +other weapons with handles, and many culverins, and steered toward +the islands of Oton and Panay, and neighboring islands. They passed +Negros Island and went to the river of Panay, which they ascended +for five leguas to the chief settlement, where the alcalde-mayor and +some Spaniards were living. They sacked the settlement, burned the +houses and churches, captured many native Christians--men, women, +and children--upon whom they committed many murders, cruelties, +and outrages. They pursued these in boats more than ten leguas up +the river, and destroyed all the crops. For the alcalde-mayor, and +those who could, fled inland among the mountains, and accordingly the +enemy had a better opportunity to do what they pleased. After they had +burned all the vessels in the river, they left the river of Panay with +their boats laden with pillaged goods and captive Christians. They +did the same in the other islands and towns which they passed. Then +they returned to Mindanao, without any opposition being offered, with +a quantity of gold and goods and more than eight hundred captives, +besides the people whom they had killed. In Mindanao they divided +the spoil, and agreed to get ready a larger fleet for the next year, +and return to make war better prepared. [121] + +This daring attack of the Mindanaos worked great injury to the islands +of Pintados, both on account of their deeds there and also on account +of the fear and terror with which they inspired the natives; because +of the latter being in the power of the Spaniards, who kept them +subject, tributary, and disarmed, and neither protected them from +their enemies, nor left them the means to defend themselves, as they +used to do when there were no Spaniards in the country. Therefore +many towns of peaceful and subjected Indians revolted and withdrew +to the tingues, [122] and refused to descend to their houses, +magistrates, and encomenderos. As was reported daily, they all +had a great desire to revolt and rebel, but they were appeased and +reduced again to subjection by a few promises and presents from their +encomenderos and religious who showed great pity and sadness over +their injuries. Although in Manila people regretted these injuries, +and still more those which were expected in the future from the enemy, +they did nothing but regret them--since the governor was ill provided +with ship and other necessities for the defense--and reckon them with +the loss which they had suffered for having raised the camp on the +river of Mindanao and dismantled the presidio of La Caldera. + +As soon as the weather permitted, the Mindanaos and Joloans returned +with a large fleet of more than seventy well-equipped ships and more +than four thousand fighting men, led by the same Silonga and Sali, +and other Mindanao and Jolo chiefs, to the same islands of Pintados, +with the determination of taking and sacking the Spanish town of +Arevalo, which is situated in Oton. Captain Joan Garcia de Sierra, +alcalde-mayor of that province, having heard of this expedition and +of the designs entertained by the enemy, took the most necessary +precautions, and, gathering into the town all the Spaniards who +lived there and in its neighborhood, shut himself up in it with all +of them. Then, having repaired, as well as possible, a wooden fort +there, he gathered there the women and their possessions. He and +the Spaniards--about seventy men--armed with arquebuses, awaited the +enemy. The latter, who intended to attack the river of Panay again, +passed Negros Island and made for the town of Arevalo, where they +anchored close to the native settlement. Then they landed one thousand +five hundred men armed with arquebuses, campilans, and carasas, and, +without stopping on the way marched against the Spanish town which +was the object of their attack. The Spaniards, divided into troops, +sallied forth and opened fire with their arquebuses upon the enemy +with such vehemence that they forced them to retreat and take refuge +on board their caracoas. So great was the enemy's confusion that many +Mindanaos were killed before they could embark. Captain Joan Garcia +de Sierra, who was on horseback, pursued the enemy so closely to the +water's edge that the latter cut off the legs of his mount with their +campilans and brought him to the ground where they killed him. The +enemy embarked with a heavy loss of men, and halted at the island of +Guimaraez, [123] in sight of Arevalo. There they counted their men, +including the dead and the wounded, who were not a few, and among whom +was one of the most noted chiefs and leaders. Then they sailed for +Mindanao, making a great show of grief and sorrow, and sounding their +bells and tifas. [124] They made no further delay at the Pintados, +deriving little profit or gain from the expedition, but much injury, +and loss of men and reputation, which was felt more deeply upon their +arrival in Jolo and Mindanao. In order to remedy this disaster, it +was proposed to renew their expedition against the Pintados at the +first monsoon with more ships and men, and it was so decided. + +When the affairs of Japon were discussed above, we spoke of the loss +of the ship "San Felipe" in Hurando, in the province of Toca; of the +martyrdom of the discalced Franciscan religious in Nangasaqui; and of +the departure of the Spaniards and religious who had remained there, +with the exception of Fray Geronymo de Jesus, who, changing his habit, +concealed himself in the interior of the country. We related that +Taicosama, after he had given an answer to the governor of Manila, +through his ambassador, Don Luis Navarrete, excusing himself for what +had happened, was induced, at the instigation of Faranda Quiemon and +his supporters, to send a fleet against Manila; that he had supplied +Faranda with rice and other provisions in order to despatch it; and +that the latter had begun preparations, but not having managed to +bring the matter to the point that he had promised, the enterprise +was dragged on and left in that condition. What happened after these +events is that Taicosama was seized with a severe sickness in Miaco and +died, not without having first had time to dispose of the succession +and government of his kingdom, and to see that the empire should be +continued in his only son, who was ten years old at that time. For +this purpose he fixed his choice on the greatest tono in Japon, +called Yeyasudono, lord of Quanto--which are certain provinces in +the north--who had children and grandchildren, and more influence and +power in Japon than any other man in the kingdom. Taicosama summoned +Yeyasudono to court, and told him that he wished to marry his son to +the latter's granddaughter, the daughter of his eldest son, so that +he might succeed to the empire. The marriage was celebrated, and the +government of Japon left, until his son was older, to Yeyasudono, +associated with Guenifuin, Fungen, Ximonojo, and Xicoraju, his special +favorites and counselors, [125] to whose hands the affairs of his +government had passed for some years, in order that thus united they +might continue to administer them after his death, until his son, whom +he left named and accepted by the kingdom as his successor and supreme +lord of Japon, was old enough to rule in person. After the death of +Taicosama in the year one thousand five hundred and ninety-nine, [126] +the five governors kept his son carefully watched in the fortress of +Usaca, with the service and pomp due his person, while they remained +at Miaco at the head of the government for some time. Consequently the +pretensions of Faranda Quiemon to make an expedition against Manila +ceased altogether, and nothing more was said about the matter. Since +the affairs of Japon are never settled, but have always been in +a disturbed condition, they could not last many days as Taico left +them. For, with the new administration and the arrival at court, from +other provinces of Japon, of tonos, lords, captains, and soldiers, +whom the combaco in his lifetime had kept busy in the wars with Coray +[i.e., Corea] and the king of China, in order to divert them from +the affairs of his kingdom, the men began to become restless and +corrupt. The result was that the four governors entertained suspicions +of, and quarreled with, Yeyasudono, for they feared from his manner of +governing and procedure that he was preparing, on account of his power, +to seize the empire for himself, and to exclude and take no notice +of Taico's son, who had been married to his granddaughter. The flame +burned still higher, for many tonos and lords of the kingdom felt the +same way about the matter; and now, either because they desired the +succession of Taico's son, or because they liked to see matters in +disorder so that each one might act for his own interest--which was +the most likely motive, and not the affection for Taicosama, who, +being a tyrant, had been feared rather than loved--they persuaded +the governors to oppose Yeyasudono and check his designs. Under this +excitement, the opposition became so lively, that they completely +declared themselves, and Yeyasudono found it convenient to leave the +kingdom of Miaco and go to his lands of Quanto, in order to insure his +own safety and return to the capital with large forces with which to +demand obedience. The governors, understanding his intentions, were +not idle, but collected men and put two hundred thousand soldiers in +the field. They were joined by most of the tonos and lords of Japon, +[127] both Christian and pagan, while the minority remained among +the partisans and followers of Yeyasudono. The latter came down as +speedily as possible from Quanto to meet the governors and their army, +in order to give them battle with one hundred thousand picked men +of his own land. The two armies met, and the battle was fought with +all their forces. [128] In the course of the struggle, there were +various fortunes, which rendered the result doubtful. But, finally, +after a number of men had deserted from the camp of the governors to +that of Yeyasudono, it was perceived that the latter's affairs were +improving. Victory was declared in his favor, after the death of many +soldiers and lords. Those who remained--for but few escaped--including +the four governors, surrendered to Yeyasudono. After he had beheaded +the majority of the tonos, and deprived others of their seigniories +and provinces, which he granted again to men devoted to his party; +and after his return to the capital, triumphant over his enemies, +and master of the whole kingdom: he inflicted special punishment +upon the governors, by having them crucified immediately, and their +ears cut off, and then carried through the streets of the principal +cities of Usaca, Sacay, Fugimen, and Miaco, in carts, until they died +on the crosses in the midst of other tortures. Since these were the +men through whose zeal and advice Taico had, a few years before, +inflicted the same punishment upon the discalced friars whom he +martyred, we may infer that God chose to punish them in this world +also with the same rigor. + +Thus Yeyasudono remained the supreme ruler of Japon as Taico had been, +but failed to withdraw the son from the fortress of Usaca; on the +contrary he set more guards over him. Then, changing his own name, +as is usual among the seigniors of Japon, he styled himself Daifusama +for the sake of greater dignity. + +Fray Geronymo de Jesus, associate of the martyrs, who kept hidden +in Japon on account of the tyrant Taicosama's persecution, +lived in disguise in the interior of the country among the +Christians. Consequently, although he was carefully sought, he could +not be found, until, after Taicosama's death and Daifu's seizure +of the government, he came to Miaco. He found means to reveal +himself to one of Dayfu's servants, to whom he told many things +about the Filipinas, the king of España, and the latter's kingdoms +and seigniories, especially those of Nueva España and Peru, of which +the Filipinas were a dependency and with whom they had communication, +and the importance to Daifu of gaining the friendship and commerce of +the Spaniards. The servant found an opportunity to relate all these +things to Daifu, who for some time had desired to have the trade and +commerce which the Portuguese had established in Nangasaqui in his +own kingdoms of Quanto, of which he was the natural lord, in order +to give it more importance. Thinking that this could be accomplished +through the means which Fray Geronymo had suggested, he had the latter +summoned. Having asked him his name, Fray Geronymo told the king that +after the martyrdom of his associates, he had remained in Japon, +that he was one of the religious whom the governor of Manila had +sent when Taicosama was alive, to treat of peace and friendship with +the Spaniards, and who had died as was well known, after having made +converts to Christianity and established several hospitals and houses +at the capital and other cities of Japon, where they healed the sick +and performed other works of piety, without asking any other reward or +advantage than to serve God, to teach the souls of that kingdom the +faith and path of salvation, and to serve their neighbors. In this +work, and in works of charity, especially to the poor, as he and his +fellow religious professed, they lived and maintained themselves, +without seeking or holding any goods or property upon the earth, +solely upon the alms which were given them therefor. After this, he +told him who the king of España was, that he was a Christian, and that +he possessed great kingdoms and territories in all parts of the world; +and that Nueva España, Piru, Filipinas, and India, belonged to him; +and that he governed and defended them all, attending above all else +to the growth and conservation of the faith of our Lord Jesus Christ, +the true God, and Creator of the universe. The religious explained to +the king, as well as he could, other things concerning the Christian +religion, and said that if he wished friendship with his Majesty and +the latter's subjects of Manila, as well as with his viceroys of Nueva +España and Piru he [i.e., Fray Geronymo] would be able to compass +it, for it would be very useful and profitable to the king and to +all his Japanese kingdoms and provinces. This last motive, namely, +the profit and benefit to be derived from friendship and commerce +with the Spaniards, was more to the taste of Daifusama than what he +had heard concerning their religion. Although he did not reject the +latter or say anything about it, yet at this interview and at others +with Fray Geronymo--whom Daifu had given permission to appear in +public in his religious habit, and to whom he furnished the necessary +support--he treated only of friendship with the governor of Manila, +of the Spaniards' coming yearly with ships from Manila to trade at +Quanto, where the Japanese had a port, and an established commerce +with the Spaniards. Also his Japanese were to sail thence to Nueva +España, where they were to enjoy the same amity and trade. As he +understood the voyage to be long and Spanish ships necessary for +it, Daifu proposed that the governor of Manila send him masters and +workmen to build them. He also proposed that in the said kingdom and +principal port of Quanto, which, as above-said, lies in the north +of Japon, and is a mountainous country, abounding in silver mines, +which were not worked because no one knew how, Fray Geronymo and +whatever associates he might choose from among the Spaniards who +came there, should establish their house and dwelling, just as the +religious of the Society of Jesus had theirs with the Portuguese +in Nangasaqui. Fray Geronymo, who desired by any means to restore +the cause of his religious, and of the conversion of Japon through +their labor, as they had begun to do when the martyrs were alive--for +this aim alone moved him--did not doubt that he could once and many +times facilitate Daifusama's desires, and even assured him that they +would certainly be realized through his help, and that there would +be no difficulty whatever to prevent this. Thereupon Daifu appeared +favorable and more inclined to the affairs of Manila than Taico, +his predecessor, had been. He assured the religious that he would +give the Spaniards a good reception in Japon, and that the ships, +which should happen to put in there in distress or in any other way, +would be equipped and despatched with all necessities; and that he +would not allow any Japanese to go to plunder or commit any injury +on the coasts of the Filipinas. In fact, because he learned that +six ships of Japanese corsairs had sailed that year from the island +of Zazuma [Satsuma] and other ports of the lower kingdoms, and had +seized and plundered two Chinese merchantmen on the way to Manila, and +had done other mischief on its coast, he immediately had them sought +out in his kingdom. Having imprisoned more than four hundred men, +he had them all crucified. Likewise he ordered that, in the future, +the annual ships from Nangasaqui to Manila laden with flour and other +goods should not be so numerous, but only enough to supply Manila, +and that they should have the permission and sanction of its governor, +so that they might not be the cause of loss or injury to that place. + +Since Daifu pressed Fray Geronymo more and more every day for the +fulfilment of what he had taken upon himself, the latter told him +that he had already written and would write again about those matters +to the governor and royal Audiencia of Manila. He requested Daifu to +send a servant of his household with these letters and the message, +in order that they might have more credit and authority. Daifu +approved of this and despatched them through Captain Chiquiro, a +pagan Japanese and a servant of his, who took a present of various +weapons to the governor and the letters of Fray Geronymo. There +was no special letter from Daifu, except that Fray Geronymo said +that he wrote and petitioned in the name of Daifu. He explained the +better condition of peace and friendship now existing between the +Filipinas and Japon, and what Daifu promised and assured. He wrote +that, in order to facilitate the above, Daifu had promised him that +the Spaniards could go with their ships to trade at Quanto, and that +the governor should send him masters and workmen to build ships for +the voyage from Japon to Nueva España. There was also to be commerce +and friendship with the viceroy of that country. He said that Daifu +had already given leave for religious to go to Japon, to christianize +and to found churches and monasteries, and had given him a good site +for a monastery in Miaco, where he was, and that the same would be +done in other parts and regions of Japon in which they might wish to +settle. Fray Geronymo insidiously and cunningly added this last to +Daifu's promise in order that he might incite the religious of the +Filipinas to push the matter more earnestly before the governor and +Audiencia, that they might agree to this more easily, in order not +to lose the great results that Fray Geronymo said were set afoot. + +During the same administration of Don Francisco Tello, in the year +one thousand six hundred, toward the end of the month of October, +a ship came from the province of Camarines with news that two ships, +a flagship and its almiranta, well armed and with foreign crews, +had entered and anchored in one of its northern bays, twenty leguas +from the channel and cape of Espiritu Sancto. Under pretense of +being friends of the Spaniards they asked, and bartered with, the +natives for rice and other provisions that they needed. Then they +weighed anchor and went away, making for the channel through which +they entered, after having left certain feigned letters for Governor +Don Francisco Tello, in which they declared themselves friends, +and that they were coming to Manila to trade by permission of his +Majesty. From this, and from a negro who escaped from these ships +by swimming to the island of Capul, and also through an Englishman, +[129] seized by the natives while on shore, we learned that these +ships were from Holanda, whence they had sailed in a convoy of three +other armed vessels, with patents and documents from Count Mauricio de +Nasao who called himself Prince of Orange, in order to make prizes in +the Indias. [130] Having entered the South Sea through the strait of +Magallanes, three of the five ships had been lost, and these two, the +flagship and the almiranta coasted along Chile, where they captured +two vessels. Then, having turned away from the coast of Lima, they +put out to sea and pursued their voyage, without stopping anywhere, +in the direction of the Filipinas, among which they entered with the +intention of plundering whatever might come their way. Having learned +that a galleon, named "Santo Tomas" was expected from Nueva España with +the money derived from the merchandise of two years' cargoes which had +been sent there from Manila; that in a few days merchant ships would +begin to arrive from China, by which they could fill their hands; +and that there were no galleys or armed ships at that season which +could do them any harm: they determined to go as far as the mouth of +Manila Bay, and stay there, supplying themselves with the provisions +and refreshments which might enter the city; and accordingly, they +carried out this resolution. The flagship named "Mauricio," with one +hundred men and twenty-four pieces of bronze artillery with ladles +[131] was under the command of Oliber de Nort [i.e., Oliver van +Noordt] of Amstradam. This ship was one of those which the count of +Leste had several years before at the taking of the city of Cadiz. +[132] The almiranta named "Concordia," with forty men and ten pieces +of artillery, was under command of Captain Lamberto Viesman of +Roterdam. When these ships were seen on the coast of Chile, Viceroy +Don Luis de Velasco, who was governor in Piru, despatched a fleet +of vessels well equipped with artillery and brave soldiers to follow +and pursue them along the coast of Piru and Nueva España, as far as +California. The fleet left Callao de Lima, under command of Don Joan de +Velasco, but was unable to find the enemy, as they had left the coast, +put out to sea, and steered for the Filipinas. Moreover the Piru fleet, +having been overtaken by a storm on its way back from California, +lost its flagship with all hands aboard and was never seen again. + +Governor Don Francisco Tello, seeing that this corsair was making +incursions among the islands, according to the information given +him by certain captains and soldiers whom he had sent by land along +the coasts of the island of Luzon, in order to prevent the enemy +from landing men and from injuring the settlements, and from the +information given by certain small single boats which had kept in +sight of the enemy, discussed plans for meeting this necessity. This +it appeared very difficult to do on that occasion, not only because +the governor found himself without any kind of rowing vessels or ships +with high freeboard, with which to put to sea, but also because he had +few soldiers in the camp, for the majority of them were with Captain +and Sargento-mayor Joan Xuarez Gallinato in the Pintados provinces, +together with galleys, galliots, and other craft, for the purpose of +defending the natives against the ships of the Mindanaos and Joloans, +who were continually making plundering expeditions against them, and +of preparing for the expedition which it was thought would be made from +Jolo at the first monsoon, and which could no longer be deferred. When +the governor saw himself hard pressed by this difficulty, and that the +Dutch enemy could cause so much harm, take so many prizes, and then +depart with them, leaving the country ruined, he summoned the Audiencia +and communicated the state of affairs to them, requesting the auditors +to assist him in person in any advisable course. They discussed what +should be done, namely, to put the port of Cabit, which is inside +the bay, into a state of defense, in order to prevent the enemy from +seizing it, together with the magazines, artillery, and shipyard; then +to endeavor to equip several ships with which to put to sea and offer +some resistance to the enemy--even if no more could be done--so that +he might not firmly establish himself in the land, and that he might +be induced to leave the islands. For, if the enemy found everything +so defenseless and if no resistance were offered him, he would remain +there until he attained his designs. The execution of these measures +was entrusted to Doctor Antonio de Morga. Licentiate Telles de Almaçan +was ordered to remain in the city with the governor and president for +its defense, and to supply thence the port of Cabit and Doctor Antonio +de Morga with what was necessary for the latter's commission. On the +same day, the last of October of the year six hundred, Doctor Antonio +de Morga left Manila with some soldiers and ammunition and went to the +port of Cabit, which he put in a state of defense with one hundred and +fifty men, both arquebusiers and musketeers, who kept continual watch +day and night over the port, by means of sentinels and outposts at +the necessary points. He collected at the settlement all the vessels +in port, and stationed them as near as possible to the shipyards, +where a galizabra was being built, and where lay a ship of Sebu with +a small Portuguese patache, the latter of which had come from Malaca +laden with merchandise. For the defense of these he placed and planted +on shore twelve pieces of moderate-sized bronze cannon with ladles, +besides two of greater range, which were placed on a point at the +entrance of the port. These altogether commanded the port and the +vessels in it. Farther on along the beach, a rampart was made with +stakes and planks, filled in with earth, behind which, in case the +enemy should enter, the soldiery could cover and defend themselves +with their artillery. After the auditor had thus put the said port +in a state of defense, he planned to complete the galizabra, although +much work was still needed, to launch it, and fit it with sails, and +at the same time to refit the Sebu ship. He attended to these works +with so great haste that within thirty days he hoisted the yards on +the galizabra and on the Sebu ship, and furnished each of the two with +eleven pieces of artillery, both of large and moderate size, which +had been sent from Manila, in addition to the artillery in the port. + +The corsair reached the mouth of the bay, eight leguas from the +port of Cabit, but did not dare to make a dash into the port, as he +had planned, for he learned from some Sangleys who were going out +to sea with their champans, that it was already defended. However, +he was not informed that the Spaniards were arming to attack him, +or that there was any preparation or forces at that season for +that purpose. Accordingly he contented himself with remaining at +the mouth of the bay, moving about with both ships and their boats, +and going from one side to another on various days, in order to seize +the vessels coming to the city with provisions, and not allowing one +to escape him. At night he anchored under shelter of the land. All +this took place four leguas from the mouth of the bay, and he went +no farther from it, in order to be ready for any occasion that might +present itself. + +Doctor Antonio de Morga kept several very small and swift vessels +within sight of the enemy, under shelter of the land, which informed +him daily of the enemy's position and doings. They reported that +he had quietly stationed himself, and that every evening he placed +his guard on deck with drums and flags, and firing of musketry. The +corsair's forces could be estimated from that and it could be seen +that the larger and better contingent was aboard the flagship, which +was a good and swift ship. The auditor also took the precaution +not to let any champan or ship leave the bay, in order not to give +the corsair an opportunity to learn what was going on. When affairs +reached this point, he informed the governor of what had been done, +and suggested that, if the latter thought it advisable, the Portuguese +vessel might also be equipped, in order to sally out with the two +ships--the galizabra and the "Sant Antonio" of Sebu--for he had laid +an embargo on it, and had fitted it for that purpose. Ammunition +and some provisions of rice and fish were providedfor the two ships, +and it remained only to man them with sailors and soldiers who were +to go out in them. Of such there was little supply; the sailors were +hiding and feigning sickness, and one and all showed little desire +to undertake an affair of more risk and peril than of personal +profit. The captains and private soldiers of the city, who were +receiving neither pay nor rations from the king, but who could go +on the expedition, did not offer their services to the governor; +and if anyone were ready to do so, he dissembled until knowing who +was to be commander of the fleet. For, although some land captains +might fill the place, the governor was not inclined to appoint any +of them, nor were the others willing to go under their command. Each +one claimed and boasted himself capable of being the leader, and +none other of his neighbors was to have command. The governor was +prevented from going out in person, and learned that all the people +of the city were willing to go with Doctor Antonio de Morga if he +had command of the fleet, and would not mind any dangers that might +present themselves. When the governor learned the desire of those who +were able to embark, and understood that there was no other means +by which to realize the aim in view, and that each day's delay was +of very great detriment, he summoned the auditor to the city and set +the matter before him. In order that the latter might not refuse, the +governor issued an act and had the auditor immediately notified by the +secretary of the government and ordered, on behalf of his Majesty, +to embark as general and commander of the fleet and to follow and +pursue the corsair, because, as matters stood, the suitable result +could not be attained otherwise. The auditor, thinking that, if he +failed to take up the matter, he would receive the blame of losing so +pressing an occasion for the service of God and his Majesty, and for +the welfare of the whole country; and, since war affairs both of sea +and of land had been under his charge and management, that it might +be reckoned ill against him if he turned his back at this juncture, +when he had been sought for it and served especially with papers from +the governor, appointing him to the charge: obeyed for the discharge +of his conscience the orders set forth in the governor's act, which +together with his answer reads word for word as follows. + +Edict of Governor Don Francisco Tello, and reply of Doctor Antonio +de Morga + +In the city of Manila, on the first of December, one thousand six +hundred, Don Francisco Tello, knight of the Order of Santiago, governor +and captain-general of these Filipinas Islands, and president of the +royal Audiencia resident therein, declared: That, whereas, because +of the coming to these islands of two hostile English [sic] ships, +the preparation of a fleet to attack them was immediately discussed +with the resolution and advice of the royal Audiencia, and for this +effect it was resolved that Antonio de Morga should go to the port of +Cabit to attend to the fitting and despatch of the said war-vessels +and the defense of that port, as appears, by the act and resolution +made thereon, in the book of the government matters pertaining to +this said Audiencia, on the last day of the month of October, of this +present year, and to which we refer; and whereas, in execution of the +said resolution, he has attended until now, to the defense of the said +port, and the fitting and equipping of the said fleet, consisting of +the vessel "San Diego," [133] of Sebu, the galleon "San Bartolome," +which he caused to be finished in the shipyard and launched, an English +[134] patache from the city of Malaca, a galliot which was fitted up, +and other smaller craft; and whereas, the said fleet, because of his +diligence and care, is in so good condition that it can shortly sail, +and the said enemy is still near this city, on the coast of the island +of Miraveles [i.e., Corregidor]; and whereas, many captains, knights, +and chief men of this community have heard that the said auditor was +to make the said expedition, they have offered to go with him to serve +the king, our sovereign, in it at their own expense; and whereas, +a great preparation of men and provisions has been made with this +intent, which would fail and be of no effect did the said auditor not +sail with the said fleet in pursuit of the said enemy, and would not +have the result aimed at--a matter so greatly to the service of God +our Lord, and the welfare of this country--and whereas, moreover, the +said auditor is (as is a fact) experienced in matters of war, and has +been general of his Majesty's fleets by the latter's own appointment +at other times, and lieutenant of the captain-general in this kingdom +for several years, in which he has fulfilled his duties well; and +whereas he is highly esteemed and liked by the soldiers; and whereas +he is the most suitable man, according to the condition of affairs; +and for other just considerations that move the governor thereto, +so that the said expedition may be effected and not fall through, +or at least, so that it may not be delayed with loss and trouble: +therefore he ordered--and he did so order--the said auditor, since +he has fostered this affair, and has personally put it in its present +good shape, and since all the men--and they are many--who receive no +pay, have prepared in consideration of him, to prepare himself to go +as general and commander of the said fleet in pursuit of the enemy, +with all possible haste. For this the governor said that he would +give him the necessary messages and instructions, for thus is it +advantageous to the service of the king our sovereign. In the name of +the latter, the governor orders him to do and accomplish the above. He +[i.e., the governor] as president of the said royal Audiencia, +grants him leave and absence for the above during the time that he +shall occupy himself therein, from attendance on his duties in the +said royal Audiencia. He gave him the commission in due legal form, +and authority for the said absence. Thus he provided and ordered, +and affixed his signature thereto. + +DON FRANCISCO TELLO + +Before me: + +GASPAR DE AZEBO + +In the city of Manila, on the first of December, of the year one +thousand six hundred, I, the government notary, served the above act +upon Doctor Antonio de Morga, auditor of the royal Audiencia. He +declared that, from the first day of the month of November just +expired, by commission of the royal Audiencia of these islands, he +has busied himself in everything mentioned in the said act, and has +done his utmost toward its execution; that the expedition is on the +good footing and in the condition that is known; that if, for its good +result and for what is expected from it, his person and property are +suitable and fitting for the service of the king our sovereign, he +is ready to employ everything in it and to do what has been ordered +and commanded him by the said president; and that consequently he +has no other wish or desire than for what might be to the service of +God and of his Majesty. Thereupon may your Lordship order and provide +what may be found most expedient, and as such he will fulfil it. He +affixed his signature to this writ. + +DOCTOR ANTONIO DE MORGA + +GASPAR DE AZEBO + +Doctor Antonio de Morga provided himself with all that was requisite +for the expedition without asking or taking anything from the +king's exchequer. He aided several needy soldiers who came to offer +their services, and many other persons of importance who had done +the same, so that, within one week, there were already enough men +for the expedition, and an abundance of provisions, ship's stores, +and arms; whereupon all embarked. With the volunteers and regulars +whom the governor had in camp under Captain Augustin de Urdiales, and +whom he gave to the auditor, there were men enough to man both ships +each with about one hundred soldiers in addition to gunners, sailors, +and common seamen, of the last mentioned of whom there was a smaller +supply than was needed. As admiral of this fleet the governor appointed +Captain Joan de Alcega, an old soldier, and one well acquainted with +the islands; as captain of the paid soldiers who were to sail in the +almiranta, Joan Tello y Aguirre; as sargento-mayor of the fleet, Don +Pedro Tello, his kinsman; the necessary other offices and positions; +and the nomination and title of general of the fleet to Doctor Antonio +de Morga. He gave the latter closed and sealed instructions concerning +what he was to do in the course of the voyage and expedition, with +orders not to open them until he had put to sea, outside of the bay +of Manila. The instructions read as follows. + + * * * * * + +Instructions given by the governor to Doctor Antonio de Morga + +What Doctor Antonio de Morga, auditor of the royal Audiencia of these +Filipinas Islands, and captain-general of the fleet which is about +to pursue the English [sic] enemy, has to do, is as follows. + +First, inasmuch as we have been informed that the English [sic] enemy, +against whom this fleet has been prepared, lies in the bay of Maryuma, +[135] it is ordered that, lest perchance the enemy hearing of our +fleet should try to escape without receiving any injury, the fleet +sail as quickly as possible in his pursuit, in order to engage and +fight him until, through the grace of our Lord, he be taken or sunk. + +Item: If, in fighting the said enemy both with artillery and in +grappling--and this shall be attempted with all the diligence and +care possible--whichever the weather may better and more conveniently +permit, the latter should take to flight at sight of the fleet, +he shall be pursued until the desired result is attained. + +Item: If, at the time that the fleet sails to attack the said enemy he +shall have left this coast and news is received that he has coasted +to any other of these islands, the fleet shall follow and pursue +him until he is taken or sunk. If the enemy has left these islands, +the fleet shall pursue him as far as possible; but this is left to +your own discretion so long as the object be attained. + +Item: Inasmuch as the opinion was expressed in a council of war held +on the second day of the present month and year, by the master-of-camp +and the captains who were present, that, if there were no certain +information of the course and direction taken by the enemy, the said +fleet should follow the coast of Ilocos, and make for the strait +of Sincapura, through which it is presumed that the enemy will pass +in order to pursue his voyage: notwithstanding the said council of +war, if the said general should not receive any information as to +the course taken by the enemy, then he shall do what he thinks most +expedient, as the one in charge of the affair, and as the enemy and +the occasion allow, endeavoring to obtain the desired object, namely, +the overtaking and destruction of the enemy. + +Item: If the fleet should encounter any other hostile pirates or any +others going about these islands or who shall have left them after +doing them injury, whether they be English, Japanese, Terrenatans, +Mindanaos, or others, it shall endeavor to chastise and injure them, so +that should this occur a good result might also be obtained therefrom. + +Item: If the enemy be captured, as is hoped through the grace of God +our Lord, the survivors and ships shall be brought in by the fleet. + +Item: Any spoil found in the said ships shall be divided as is +customary, among the victors. + +Item: Great care shall be exercised to keep the men of the fleet +peaceable and well disciplined; concerning this, the course taken on +similar occasions shall be followed. + +Item: A good system in regard to the provisions and ammunition carried +shall be observed, and the use of them all well moderated, especially +should the fleet leave sight of these islands. + +Item: If perchance, after having engaged the said enemy or pursued +him, he should leave these islands, then, the object having been +accomplished, you shall endeavor to return as speedily as possible +to the islands. If the weather do not permit a return until the +monsoon sets in, you shall endeavor to keep the fleet together and +to supply and provide it with everything necessary, at the expense +of his Majesty, so that you may pursue your voyage with the greatest +speed and safety possible. Given in the city of Manila, the tenth of +December of the year one thousand six hundred. + +DON FRANCISCO TELLO + +By order of the governor and captain-general: + +GASPAR DE AZEBO + +The auditor went to the port with all his men and put them aboard +the two ships. As flagship he took the "Sant Antonio" of Sebu, on +account of its having more room to accommodate the assistants [gente +de cumplimiento] who embarked with him. He left the Portuguese patache +because the governor had taken off the embargo, in order to allow the +Portuguese to return with it to Malaca without loss of time. Then he +equipped two caracoas for the service of the fleet with Indian crews +and two Spaniards to direct them. After they had confessed and taken +communion, they left the port of Cabit and set sail on the twelfth day +of the month of December of the year one thousand six hundred, with +Alonzo Gomez as chief pilot. They also took Father Diego de Santiago +and a lay brother of the Society of Jesus, and Fray Francisco de Valdes +of the Order of Augustine, aboard the flagship; and Fray Joan Gutierrez +[136] and another associate of the same order aboard the almiranta, +so that they might attend to whatever required their ministry. + +At night of the same day both ships of this fleet anchored near the +settlement and anchorage of the island of Miraveles at the mouth of +the bay. Immediately at daybreak a barangai approached the ships from +shore with the sentinels whom the auditor had hastily sent the day +before to obtain some reliable news of the corsair's position. They +told him that, as soon as the fleet sailed from the port of Cabit, the +enemy, who lay in the direction of the port Del Fraile [of the Friar], +[137] had also weighed anchor, and having stowed their small boats, +both ships had crossed to the other and sea side, and that they had +seen him anchor after nightfall opposite the point of Valeitegui, +[138] where he still was. Upon hearing this, the auditor thought that +perhaps the corsair had been informed of the preparation of the fleet +and of its departure, and had consequently weighed anchor from his +position; and that, since he had stowed his small boats aboard the +ships, he was about to put to sea to avoid the fleet. He immediately +sent the same news to the admiral, and opened the instructions given +him by the governor. Seeing that he was ordered thereby to seek the +enemy with all diligence, pursue him, and endeavor to fight him, he +thought best to shorten the work before him, and to lose no time and +not allow the enemy to get farther away. With this object in view, +the fleet spent the thirteenth of December, St. Lucy's day, in making +waist-cloths, arranging the artillery, getting ready the weapons, +alloting men to their posts, and preparing themselves to fight on +the next day, on which it was thought that they would fall in with +the corsair. The auditor sent special instructions in writing to the +admiral concerning what he was to do and observe on his part. These +instructions specified chiefly that upon engaging with the enemy, +both ships were to grapple and fight the corsair's flagship--in which +were carried all the forces--and other things which will be understood +from the instructions given to the admiral. These were as follows. + +[These instructions are given in VOL. XI of this series, pp. 145-148.] + +At the same time the auditor notified the admiral that the fleet +would weigh anchor from its anchorage shortly after midnight, and +would go out of the bay to sea, crowding all sail possible, so that +at dawn it might be off the point of Baleitigui to windward of the +point where the enemy had anchored on Tuesday night, according to +the sentinels' report. + +At the appointed hour both vessels--the flagship and the +almiranta--weighed anchor from Miraveles, and, favored by a light +wind, sailed the rest of the night toward Baleitigui. The two +caracoas used as tenders could not follow because of a choppy sea, +and a fresh northwester; they crossed within the bay, and under +shelter of the land to the other side. At the first streak of light +both vessels of the fleet found themselves off the point; and one +legua to leeward, and seaward, they sighted the corsair's two vessels +riding at anchor. As soon as the latter recognized our ships and saw +that they flung captain's and admiral's colors at the masthead, they +weighed anchor and set sail from their anchorage, after having first +reënforced the flagship with a boatload of men from their almiranta, +which stood to sea, while the flagship hove to, and awaited our fleet, +firing several pieces at long range. The flagship of our fleet being +unable to answer the enemy with its artillery because the gun-ports +were shut, and the vessel was tacking to starboard, determined to +close with him. It grappled his flagship on the port side, sweeping +and clearing the decks of the men on them. Then the colors with thirty +soldiers and a few sailors were thrown aboard. They took possession of +the forecastle and after-cabin and captured their colors at masthead +and quarter, and the white, blue, and orange standard with the arms +of Count Mauricio flung at the stern. The main- and mizzen-mast were +stripped of all the rigging and sails, and a large boat which the +enemy carried on the poop was captured. The enemy, who had retreated +to the bows below the harpings, upon seeing two ships attacking +him with so great resolution, sent to ask the auditor for terms +of surrender. While an answer was being given him, Admiral Joan de +Alcega, who, in accordance with the instructions given him the day +previous by the auditor, ought to have grappled at the same time as +the flagship, and lashed his vessel to the enemy, thinking that the +victory was won, that the corsair's almiranta was escaping, and that it +would be well to capture it, left the flagship and followed astern of +Lamberto Viezman, crowding all sail and chasing him until he overtook +him. Oliber de Nort, seeing himself alone and with a better ship and +artillery than the auditor's, waited no longer for the answer to the +terms for which he had asked at first, and renewed the fight with +musketry and artillery. The combat between the two flagships was so +obstinate and bitter on both sides that it lasted more than six hours, +and many were killed on both sides. But the corsair had the worst of +it all the time, for not more than fifteen of his men were left alive, +and those badly maimed and wounded. [139] Finally the corsair's ship +caught fire, and the flames rose high by the mizzen-mast and in the +stern. The auditor, in order not to endanger his own ship, found it +necessary to recall his colors and men from the enemy's ship, and +to cast loose and separate from it. This he did, only to discover +that his ship, from the pounding of the artillery during so long a +combat, as it was but slightly strengthened, had an opening in the +bows and was filling so rapidly that being unable to overcome the +leak, it was foundering. The corsair seeing his opponent's trouble +and his inability to follow him, made haste with his few remaining +men to extinguish the fire on board his ship. Having quenched it, +he set his foresail, which was still left. Shattered in all parts, +stripped of rigging, and without men he reached Borneo and Sunda, +where he was seen so enfeebled and distressed that it seemed impossible +for him to navigate, or to go farther without shipwreck. The Spanish +flagship, which was fully occupied in trying to remedy the extremity +to which it was reduced, could not be assisted, because it was alone +and far from land, and consequently sank so rapidly that the men +could neither disarm themselves, nor get hold of anything which +might be of help to them. The auditor did not abandon the ship, +although some soldiers, in order to escape therein, seized the boat +at the stern, and asked him also to get into it. Thereupon they made +off and went away, in order to prevent others from taking it away +from them. When the ship sunk, the auditor swam constantly for four +hours, with the quarter colors and the enemy's standard which he took +with him. He reached a very small desert island, two leguas away, +called Fortuna, where a few of the ship's men who had more endurance +in the sea, also arrived in safety. Some perished and were drowned, +for they had not even disarmed themselves, and whom this predicament +had overtaken when exhausted by the long fight with the enemy. Those +who met death on this occasion were fifty in all. The most important +among them were Captains Don Francisco de Mendoça, Gregorio de Vargas, +Francisco Rodriguez, and Gaspar de los Rios, [140] all of whom died +fighting with the enemy. Among those drowned at sea were Captains Don +Joan de Camudio, Augustin de Urdiales, Don Pedro Tello, Don Gabriel +Maldonado, Don Cristoval de Heredia, Don Luis de Belver, Don Alonso +Loçano, Domingo de Arrieta, Melchior de Figueroa, Chief-pilot Alonso +Gomez, father Fray Diego de Santiago, and the brother who went with +him. Admiral Joan de Alcega, having overtaken Lamberto Viezman slightly +after midday, captured him with little resistance; and although he +afterward saw the so battered ship of Oliber del Nort pass by and +escaping at a short distance, he did not pursue him. On the contrary, +without stopping longer, he returned with his almiranta to Miraveles, +leaving the prize with some of his own men, whom he had put aboard +it, to follow him. He neither looked for his flagship nor took any +other step, imagining that if any mishap had occurred, he might be +blamed for leaving the flagship alone with the corsair and pursuing +Lambert Biezman without orders from the auditor, and contrary to +the instructions given him in writing; and fearing lest if he were to +rejoin the auditor after having left him, ill would befall himself. The +auditor took the wounded and the men who had escaped from the islet of +Fortun, at nightfall, in his ship's boat which he found at that port, +as well as the corsair's boat and a caracoa which arrived there. And +on the following day, he landed them in Luzon, at the bar of Anazibu, +in the province of Balayan, [141] thirty leguas from Manila, where +he supplied them with provisions as quickly as possible. Moreover he +explored the coast and neighboring islands with swift boats, in search +of his almiranta and the captured corsair. This prize was taken to +Manila, with twenty-five men alive and the admiral, ten pieces of +artillery, and a quantity of wine, oil, cloth, linen, weapons, and +other goods which it carried. The admiral and the Dutchmen of his +company were garroted by orders of the governor. [142] Thus ended +the expedition. Thereby was averted the injury which it was thought +that the corsair would inflict in these seas, had he been allowed +to remain there with the aim that he cherished, although so much +to the detriment of the Spaniards by the loss of their flagship, +which would not have happened had the orders of the auditor been +observed. Governor Don Francisco Tello presented an attestation of +this event to the auditor, which is as follows. + + * * * * * + +Attestation of Governor Don Francisco Tello of events in the expedition +against the Dutch corsair + +Don Francisco Tello, knight of the Order of Santiago, governor and +captain-general in these Filipinas Islands, and president of the +Audiencia and royal Chancillería resident therein, etc.: I certify +to whomever may see this present, that last year, one thousand six +hundred, a squadron of Dutch war-vessels under command of Oliber +del Nort, after passing through the strait of Magallanes to the +South Sea, reached these islands, in the month of October of the +said year, with two armed ships. They entered among these islands, +making prizes and committing depredations, and at length stationed +themselves off the entrance of the bay of the city of Manila, with +the design of lying in wait for the merchant ships from China, and +for the galleon "Santo Tomas," expected from Nueva España with the +silver of two years belonging to the merchants of this kingdom. By a +decision of the said royal Audiencia, on the thirty-first of October +of the said year, Doctor Antonio de Morga, senior auditor of the said +Audiencia, was commissioned and charged to go immediately to the +port of Cabit, and place and hold it in a state of defense, and to +prepare and equip a fleet to attack the corsair. In this matter the +said auditor busied himself in person. Having, with great assiduity +and industry, fortified and put the said port in a state of defense, +he completed in the shipyard and then launched, a moderate-sized ship, +armed and equipped another belonging to private persons then in the +port, both of which he equipped with yards and rigging--all inside of +forty days. In order that the expedition might be made more quickly, +and with a supply of soldiers and the most necessary equipment, +inasmuch as affairs were such that it could be done by no one else, +on the first of December of the same year, I nominated and appointed +the said auditor to sail as general of the fleet in pursuit of the +enemy, and to fight him until destroying and driving him from these +islands. The said auditor performed and accomplished this in the +following manner. On the twelfth of the said month of December, +he sailed with the two ships of his fleet from the port of Cabit; +on the fourteenth of the same month, at dawn, he sighted the corsair +outside of the bay of this city, off the promontory of Baleitigui, +with his two ships--flagship and almiranta. He pursued the enemy until +he came close to him; and both fleets having prepared for action, +engaged one another. The said auditor in his flagship attacked the +corsair's flagship with great gallantry and resolution, and grappled +it. The latter was a large and strong ship, carrying a quantity of +artillery and many fighting men. The auditor immediately threw on +board the enemy the infantry colors with thirty arquebusiers and a +few volunteers and sailors, who captured the forecastle, after-cabin, +and the colors of the vessel. At the end of the action, these men +retreated to our ship on account of the violent fire which at the +last began to rage aboard the enemy's ship. Thereupon the action +and fight continued on both sides, and lasted more than six hours, +during which the artillery, musketry, and arquebuses were repeatedly +discharged in all quarters. In another direction the enemy's almiranta, +commanded by Lamberto Viezman, was defeated and captured, with the +crew, artillery and other things aboard it. The two flagships having +cast loose and separated on account of the fire which had broken out, +and the quantity of water that poured in our bows, the enemy took +to flight with only the foremast standing, with nearly all his men +killed, and having lost his boat, the standard and the colors at his +masthead and quarter. Stripped of his yards, sails, and rigging, and +the ship leaking in many places, the enemy ran before the wind. It +has been heard from various sources that he passed Borneo with only +fifteen or sixteen men alive, and most of them maimed and wounded, +and that a few days later, he was entirely wrecked not far from +the Sunda. [143] The said auditor and his companions suffered great +hardship and danger; for besides several men of note who died fighting, +the ship which was leaking at the bows as abovesaid, because of being +weak and not built for a war vessel, and as they were unable to stop +or overcome the leak, foundered that same day, and part of the men +on board were drowned on account of being wearied with fighting and +not even yet having disarmed. When the ship sunk, the said auditor, +who would never leave or abandon it, took to the water with the rest +of the men, and escaped by swimming, with some of the enemy's colors +about him, to an uninhabited islet, called Fortun, two leguas from +the place where the fight had taken place. The next day he took away +the people from that place in several small boats which he found, +and landed them in safety on this island. In all the above, the said +auditor acted with great diligence and valor, exposing himself to all +the risks of the battle and afterward of the sea. He did not receive +any reward for his services, nor any salary, expenses, or any other +recompense. On the contrary, he contributed and spent his own property +to provide all the necessary equipment for the said expedition, +and also assisted some volunteers who went with him. Of the booty +taken from the corsair's almiranta, which was brought to this city, +he refused to take nor did he take anything; on the contrary, the share +which should have fallen to him, he ceded and passed over to the king, +our sovereign, and to his royal exchequer. Thus our aim and object, +namely, the destroying and defeating of the said corsair, has been +accomplished, so much to the service of God and of his Majesty, and to +the welfare of this kingdom, as is more minutely set forth by acts, +depositions, and other inquiries concerning this expedition. At the +request of the said Doctor Antonio de Morga, I gave him the present, +with my signature attached, and sealed with the seal of my arms. Given +in Manila, August twenty-four, one thousand six hundred and one. + +DON FRANCISCO TELLO + + * * * * * + +In the same year of one thousand six hundred, two merchantships left +Manila for Nueva España: the flagship the "Sancta Margarita," with Juan +Martinez de Guillestigui as general, who had arrived the year before +in the same capacity; and the "San Geronimo," under Don Fernando de +Castro. On their way, both ships met with storms in the latitude of +thirty-eight degrees and at six hundred leguas from the Filipinas, +and suffered great hardship. At the end of nine months at sea, after +many of the men had died and much of the merchandise had been thrown +overboard and lost, the "San Geronimo" put back to the Filipinas, off +the islands of Catenduanes, outside of the channel of Espiritu Santo, +and there was wrecked, although the crew were saved. The flagship +"Sancta Margarita," after the death of the general and most of the +crew, ported at the Ladrones Islands and anchored at Zarpana. There +natives who went to the ships, seeing it so abandoned and battered, +boarded and took possession of it, and of its goods and property. The +few men whom they found alive, they took away to their settlements, +where they killed some and apportioned others to various villages, +where they maintained them and gave them better treatment. The Indians +wore the gold chains and other things of the ship around their necks, +and then hung them to the trees and in their houses, like people who +had no knowledge of their value. [144] + +In the month of May of the year six hundred and one, the galleon "Santo +Tomas" arrived at the Filipinas from Nueva España with passengers, +soldiers, and the return proceeds of the merchandise which had been +delayed in Mexico. Its general was Licentiate Don Antonio de Ribera +Maldonado, who had been appointed auditor of Manila. A small patache +had sailed in company with the galleon from the port of Acapulco, +but being unable to sail as rapidly as the "Santo Tomas," after a few +days' voyage, it dropped behind. When they arrived off the Ladrones +Islands, some natives went out, as usual, to meet the ship in their +boats, and brought with them five Spaniards of the crew of the ship +"Sancta Margarita," which had been lost there the year before. The +loss of that vessel was learned from those men; also that as many +as twenty-six Spaniards were living in the towns of those islands; +and that if the ship would wait, the natives would bring them. + +The religious and men with the general tried to persuade him, since the +weather was calm, to wait in that place, in order to take these men +from those islands, where they had lingered for a year. Certain more +courageous persons even offered to go ashore to get them either in +the galleon's boat or in the vessels of the Ladrones themselves. But +the general would not allow this, believing that time would be lost, +and his expedition exposed to peril. Without leave from the general, +Fray Juan Pobre, a lay-brother, who was in charge of the discalced +religious of St. Francis, who were coming on that occasion to the +Filipinas, jumped into one of the Ladrones' vessels, and was taken by +the Indians to the island of Guan, where he remained with the Spaniards +whom he found. The galleon "Santo Tomas," without further delay, +pursued its voyage, to the great grief and regret of the Spaniards on +shore, who saw themselves left among those barbarians, where some of +them died later of illness and other hardships. The galleon reached +the Filipinas, making for the cape of Espiritu Santo and the harbor of +Capul, at the conjunction of the moon and change of the weather. The +land was so covered with thick fogs, that the ship was upon it before +it was seen, nor did the pilots and sailors know the country or place +where they were. They ran toward the Catenduanes, and entered a bay, +called Catamban, [145] twenty leguas from the channel, where they +found themselves embayed and with so much wind and sea astern of +them, that the galleon ran upon some rocks near the land and came +very near being wrecked that night with all aboard. At daybreak, +the general went ashore with the small boat and had the ship made +fast to some rocks. As the weather did not improve, and the ship was +hourly in greater danger of being wrecked, and the cables with which +it was made fast had given way, he determined to disembark the cargo +there, and as quickly as possible, by means of the boat. They went +to work immediately and took off the people, the silver, and the +greater part of the goods and property, until, with native boats, +the Spaniards and Indians of that province carried everything to +Manila over a distance of eighty leguas, partly by sea and partly +by land. They left the ship--a new and handsome one--wrecked there, +without being able to derive any profit whatever from it. + +The daring and audacity of the Mindanaos and Joloans in making +incursions with their fleets into the islands of Pintados had reached +such a state that it was now expected that they would come as far +as Manila, plundering and devastating. In order to check them, at +the beginning of the year six hundred and two, Governor Don Francisco +Tello, deriving strength from weakness, determined that the expedition +against Jolo should be made at once, without more delay, in order +to punish and pacify it, with the forces and men whom Captain and +Sargento-mayor Joan Xuarez Gallinato held in Sebu and in the Pintados, +together with more men, ships, and provisions, which were sent him, +accompanied by the necessary documents and instructions for him to +enter the island, chastise its king and inhabitants, and pacify and +reduce it to the obedience of his Majesty. By this means, until there +should be an opportunity to settle the affairs of Mindanao, which is +quite near Jolo, the audacity of the enemy would be checked; and by +bringing the war into his own country, he would not come out to commit +depredations. Captain Gallinato set out on this expedition with two +hundred Spanish soldiers, ships, artillery, enough provisions for four +months--the time which it was thought the expedition would last--and +with Indians as rowers for the ships and for other services that might +arise. When he arrived at Jolo, at the bar of the river of this island, +which is two leguas from the principal town and dwellings of the king, +he landed his men, artillery, and the necessary provisions and left +his ships under a sufficient guard. The islanders were all in the town +and dwellings of the king, which are situated on a very high hill +above some cliffs, and have two roads of approach through paths and +roads so narrow that they can be reached only in single file. They had +fortified the whole place, intrenched it with palms and other woods, +and a number of culverins. They had also collected provisions and +water for their sustenance, besides a supply of arquebuses and other +weapons. They had neither women nor children with them, for they had +taken them out of the island. They had requested aid from the people +of Mindanao, Borney, and Terrenate, and were awaiting the same, since +they had been informed of the fleet which was being prepared against +them in the Pintados. Gallinato determined to pitch his camp near the +town, before this aid should arrive, and to attack the fort. After +he had quartered himself at a distance of one-half legua, in a plain +facing the ascent, he sent interpreters with messages to the king and +chiefs of the island, calling on them to surrender, and telling them +that good terms would be given them. While waiting for an answer, +he fortified his quarters in that spot, intrenching himself wherever +necessary. He mounted the artillery in the best position for use, +and kept his men ready for any emergency. A false and deceptive answer +was returned, making excuses for the excesses that had been committed, +and for not complying just then with what had been asked of them, and +making loud promises to do so later. All this was with the object of +detaining the captain in that place, which is very unhealthy, until the +rains should set in, his provisions run short, and the arrival of the +expected aid. After this answer had been received the Joloans, thinking +that the Spaniards had become more careless on account of it, swarmed +down quickly from the said fort in a large body of probably somewhat +over one thousand; and armed with arquebuses and other weapons with +handles, campilans, and caraças, attacked and assaulted the quarters +and camp of the Spaniards. This could not be done so secretly as not +to be seen by the Spaniards, and allow them opportunity to prepare +to receive the Joloans before their arrival. This the Spaniards did, +and having permitted the natives to come all together in a body to +the very inside of the quarters and trenches, as soon as the Joloans +had discharged their arquebuses, the Spaniards opened fire upon them, +first with their artillery, and then with their arquebuses, killing +many, and forcing the rest to retire in flight to the fort. The +Spaniards pursued them, wounding and killing to the middle of the +hill. But seeing that farther on the paths were so narrow and rough, +they retreated before the heavy artillery fire from the heights, +and the large stones hurled down upon them, and returned to their +quarters. Upon many other days, efforts were made to reach the fort, +but without any result. Thereupon Gallinato, in consideration of the +war being prolonged beyond what had been expected, built two forts, +one where he kept his ships in order to defend them and the port; +and the other one-half legua farther on in a suitable place where +they could take refuge and communicate with the camp. The forts were +built of wood and fascines, and fortified with the artillery from the +ships. The Spaniards shut themselves up in these forts, whence from +time to time they sallied, making incursions as far as the enemy's +fort. The latter always remained shut up in their fort without ever +choosing to come down or to yield; for he was convinced that the +Spaniards could not remain long in the island. When Gallinato saw +that the rains were fast setting in, that his men were becoming ill, +and that his provisions were failing, without his having accomplished +the desired task, and that it could not be accomplished with his +remaining resources; and that the enemy from Mindanao with other +allies of theirs were boasting that they were gathering a large fleet +in order to drive the Spaniards from Jolo: he sent news of all that had +occurred to the governor of Manila, with a plan of the island and fort +and a relation of the difficulties which the enterprise presented. He +sent this in a swift vessel, by Captain and Sargento-mayor Pedro +Cotelo de Morales, toward the end of May of the year six hundred +and two, in order to obtain instructions as to his procedure, and +the necessary reënforcements of men and provisions. The captain was +charged to return quickly with the answer. + +When the Moro Ocuña Lacasamana and his followers killed Diego Belloso, +Blas Ruyz de Hernan Gonçales, and the Castilians and Portuguese with +them in the kingdom of Camboja, we said that Joan de Mendoça Gamboa +with father Fray Joan Malclonado, and his associate, Don Antonio +Malaver, Luys de Villafañe, and other Spaniards who escaped by +embarking with him in his vessel, descended the river with his vessel +toward the sea, defending themselves against some Cambodian and Malayan +praus which pursued them until they crossed the bar. Joan de Mendoça +pursued his voyage along the coast to Sian, where his main business +lay. Having reached the bar he ascended the river to the city of Odia, +the court of the king, and the latter received the letter and message +of Governor Don Francisco Tello, although with less pomp and courtesy +than Joan de Mendoça wished. + +Then he bartered his merchandise, and was so stingy in the regular +custom of making some presents and gifts to the king and his favorites +that he even bargained closely over the presents offered. The king +was even inclined to seize the artillery of his ship, for which he +had a great longing. Joan de Mendoça, fearing this, sunk it in the +river with buoys, so that he could recover it at his departure, +and for appearances left in the ship only one iron gun and some +culverins. There was a Portuguese of the Order of St. Dominic in +Odia, who had been residing in that court for the last two years, +administering to the Portuguese who carried on trade in that +region. Among these Portuguese were some whom the king had brought +from Camboja and Pigu, when at war with both kingdoms. These and other +Portuguese had had some quarrels with Siamese in the city, and had +killed one of the king's servants. The king, being little inclined +to clemency, had fried some of the delinquents and had forbidden +the other Portuguese and the religious to leave the city or kingdom, +although they had urgently asked leave and permission to do so. On +seeing themselves deprived of liberty, less well treated than before, +and threatened daily, they conspired with Fray Joan Maldonado to be +smuggled aboard his vessel at its departure, and taken out of the +kingdom. The religious took the matter upon himself. After Joan de +Mendoça had concluded his business, although not as he had desired, +since the king gave him no answer for the governor, putting it off, +and his merchandise had not yielded much profit, he determined, at the +advice of Fray Joan Maldonado, to recover his artillery some night, +and to descend the river as rapidly as possible. On that same night +the Portuguese religious and his companions, about twelve in number, +were to leave the city secretly and wait eight leguas down the river +in an appointed place, where they would be taken aboard. This plan +was carried out, but when the king heard that Don Joan de Mendoça had +taken his ship and departed without his leave and dismissal, and that +he was carrying away the friar and the Portuguese who had been kept at +his court, he was so angered that he sent forty praus with artillery +and many soldiers in pursuit of him with orders to capture and bring +them back to court or to kill them. Although Joan de Mendoça made all +possible haste to descend the river, the ship, being without oars and +its sails not always to be depended upon, and the distance to cover +more than seventy leguas, he was overtaken by the Siamese in the +river. When they drew near, Joan de Mendoça assumed the defensive, +and gave them so much trouble with his artillery and musketry, +that they did not dare to board him. Nevertheless, they approached +him several times, and managing to break through, tossed artificial +fire aboard, which caused the Spaniards much trouble, for the combat +lasted more than one week, day and night. Finally, when near the bar, +in order that the ship might not escape them, all the praus surviving +the previous engagements attacked with one accord and made the last +effort in their power. Although the Siamese could not carry out their +intentions, and suffered the more killed and wounded, the Spaniards +did not escape without severe losses; for the pilot, Joan Martinez de +Chave, the associate of Fray Joan Maldonado, and eight other Spaniards +died in the conflict. Fray Joan Maldonado was badly wounded by a ball +from a culverin, which shattered his arm, and Captain Joan de Mendoça +also received dangerous wounds. Thereupon the Siamese reascended the +river, and the ship put to sea badly misused. As the weather was not +favorable for crossing by way of the shoals to Manila or Malaca, which +lay nearer to them, they steered for Cochinchina, where they put in +and joined a Portuguese vessel lying there, for which they waited until +it should sail to Malaca, in order to sail in its company. There Fray +Joan Maldonado and Captain Joan de Mendoça grew worse of their wounds, +and both died. Fray Joan Maldonado left a letter, written a few days +before his death, for his superior and the Order of St. Dominic, in +which he related his journeys, hardships and the cause of his death; +and informed them of the nature and condition of the affairs of Camboja +(whither he had been sent), of the slight foundation and motives for +them troubling themselves with that enterprise, and the slight gain +which could be hoped from it. He charged them upon their consciences +not again to become instruments of a return to Camboja. The ship +went to Malaca with its cargo, where everything was sold there by the +probate judge. Some of the Spaniards still living returned to Manila +sick, poor, and needy, from the hardships which they had undergone. + +The affairs of Maluco continued to assume a worse appearance, +because the ruler of Terrenate was openly waging war against his +neighbor of Tidore and against the Portuguese who were with the +latter. He had allowed some ships which had come to Terrenate from +the islands of Holanda and Zelanda by way of India to trade with +him, and through them had sent a message to Inglaterra and to the +prince of Orange, concerning peace, trade, and commerce with the +English and the Dutch. To this he had received a favorable answer, +and he expected shortly a large fleet from Inglaterra and the islands, +with whose help he expected to accomplish great things against Tidore +and the Filipinas. Meanwhile, he kept some Flemings and Englishmen +in Terrenate who had remained as pledges, and a factor engaged in +purchasing cloves. These people had brought many fine weapons for this +trade, so that the island of Terrenate was exceedingly well supplied +with them. The king of Tidore and the chief captain wrote yearly to +the governor of the Filipinas, informing him of what was going on, +so that it might be remedied in time, and aid sent to them. Once, +Cachilcota, [146] brother of the king of Tidore, a brave soldier +and one of the most famous of all Maluco, came to Manila for that +purpose. They always received men, provisions, and some ammunition; +but what they most desired was that an expedition should be made +opportunely against Terrenate, before the English and Dutch came +with the expected fleet. This could not be done without an order +from his Majesty, and great preparation and equipment for such an +enterprise. The same message was always sent from Tidore. At last, +during this administration of Don Francisco Tello, Captain Marcos +Dias de Febra returned with this request, and brought letters to the +governor and to the Audiencia from the king [of Tidore], and from +the chief captain, Rui Gonçales de Sequeira, in which were detailed +contemporaneous events, and the necessity of at least sending succor +to Tidore. The king wrote specially about this to the king [of España] +and to Doctor Antonio de Morga, with the latter of whom he used to +correspond, the following letter, which was written in Portuguese +and signed in his own language. + +To Doctor Morga, in the Filipinas Islands, from the king of Tidore. + +I greatly rejoiced in receiving a letter from your Grace written on +the eighth of November last, because by it I particularly understand +your great sincerity in remembering me and my affairs; for this, may +God reward your Grace with long life and prosperity for the service +of the king, my sovereign. For I understood that he keeps your Grace +in these islands with the hope of their increase, and I am aware that +your being there will serve as a remedy for this fortress and island of +Tidore. I have written to the governor and to the Audiencia in Manila, +concerning the succor for which I beg, for I have asked it so often, +on account of the great necessity of it; for through its means the +injury may be checked; otherwise it may later cost much to the king +our sovereign. I beg your Grace to favor me in this, or at least in +what may be necessary for the future, for thus it will render a great +service to God and to the king, my sovereign. May God preserve your +Grace with life for many years. From this island of Tidore, today, +March eight, one thousand six hundred and one. + +THE KING OF TIDORE + +The bearer, namely, Marcos Dias, will give your Grace a flagon and a +little flask of Moorish brass workmanship. I send them in order that +your Grace may remember this your friend. [147] + +Marcos Dias returned to Tidore at the first monsoon, in the beginning +of the year six hundred and two, bearing an answer to his message, +and taking the reënforcements that had been asked, of provisions, +ammunition, and a few soldiers. He was satisfied therewith, until a +fitting opportunity should offer for making the desired expedition +from Manila. + + + +Of the government of Don Pedro de Acuña, governor and president +of the Filipinas, and of what happened during his administration, +until his death in June of the year six hundred and six, after his +return to Manila from Maluco, where he had completed the conquest of +the islands subject to the king of Terrenate. + +CHAPTER SEVENTH + +In the month of May of six hundred and two, four ships came to Manila +from Nueva España, with a new governor and president of the Audiencia, +named Don Pedro de Acuña, knight of the Order of St. John, comendador +of Salamanca, and lately governor of Cartagena in Tierra Firme. He was +received into the government to the great satisfaction of the whole +country, on account of the need there of one who would be as skilled +in matters of war as watchful and careful in the government. Don +Francisco Tello, his predecessor, awaiting his residencia which +was to be taken, had to remain in Manila until the following year, +six hundred and three, and in the month of April he died of an acute +illness. The new governor, upon seeing things in so great need of +stability, and so limited resources in the royal treasury for the +purpose, found that his lot was not so good as he had imagined when +he had been appointed; since the state of affairs obliged him to risk +a part of his reputation without his being able to remedy matters +as quickly as was to be desired. He took heart as much as possible, +however, and without sparing himself any personal labor in whatever +presented itself, he began with what was to be done in Manila and +its environs. He began to construct galleys and other vessels in +the shipyard, for there was great need of these, in order to defend +the sea, which was full of enemies and pirates from other islands, +especially from Mindanao. He discussed going immediately in person +to visit the provinces of Pintados, in order to supply more quickly +the needs of that region, which was causing the greatest anxiety. But +he had to postpone that several months to arrange for the despatch of +Japon and Jolo matters, and for the ships which were to make the voyage +to Nueva España, all of which came at once and had to be seen to. + +Chiquiro, the Japanese, having arrived in Manila, delivered his +message and present to Governor Don Pedro de Acuña, who had been in +the government but a few days. The matter and its determination, +together with the reply, were immediately considered. It required +the greatest amount of thought to decide how this was to be made, +in the most fitting manner possible. For, although friendship with +Daifusama was held to be a good thing and of great profit, and a +necessity to obtain and conclude, even should certain difficulties +have to be overcome; and although the sailing to Quanto and its +commerce were not of much account to the Spaniards; nevertheless +those things would be fulfilled by sending a ship there with some +goods for exchange. But the rest, namely, the trade and friendship +with Nueva España, and the sending of masters and workmen to build +ships in Japon for that navigation, which Daifu insisted upon, and +which Fray Geronymo had assured him would be done, was a serious +matter and impossible to be carried out, as it was very harmful +and prejudicial to the Filipinas. For their greatest security from +Japon had ever been the Japanese lack of ships and their ignorance +of navigation. As often as the latter had intended to attack Manila, +they had been prevented by this obstacle. Now to send the Japanese +workmen and masters to make Spanish ships for them and show them how +such vessels were made, would be to give them the weapons that they +needed for their own [i.e., the Filipinas'] destruction, while their +navigation to Nueva España, and making long voyages, would cause very +great troubles. [148] Each matter singly was of great importance and +consideration, and such that the governor could not decide them, and +they could not be decided in Manila, without informing his Majesty +and the latter's viceroy of Nueva España, who was so much concerned, +thereof. In order to take measures in the matter, and not to delay the +Japanese from returning with his reply, a moderate present of Spanish +articles was sent to Daifu, in the same ship which had come, in return +for what it had brought. These Fray Geronymo was to give Daifu in +person. The former was written to tell Daifu with what pleasure the +governor received the good-will that he manifested to him, and the +peace and friendship with the Spaniards, and all the other things that +he was doing for them; and that he, the governor, would keep it and +observe it in so far as he was concerned, and that very year he would +send a Spanish ship to trade at Quanto according to Daifu's desire, +and that he would despatch it quickly. As to the navigation which +the latter wished to undertake to Nueva España and his desire to have +masters sent him for that purpose, to build ships for that voyage, that +was a matter which--although the governor would do his best to effect, +and to please him in everything--was not within his control, without +first informing his Majesty and the latter's viceroy in Nueva España +thereof; for he, the governor, had no power or authority outside of +the affairs of his government of the Filipinas. He said that he would +write and would treat of it immediately, and hoped that it would be +properly settled there. Until the reply came from España, which would +necessarily have to be delayed three years, because that country was +so far, he begged Daifu to be patient and suffer it, since it was not +in his control, and nothing else could be done. The governor wrote +Fray Geronymo to humor Daifu in everything, with the best words he +could use to please him, but not to embarrass himself thenceforward by +promising him and expediting such things for him. With this despatch, +Chiquiro sailed for Japon with his ship, but was so unfortunate +on the voyage that he was wrecked off the head of Hermosa Island, +and neither the vessel nor its crew escaped. News thereof was not +received in Manila or in Japon until many days afterward. + +Upon the arrival of the letters from Fray Geronymo de Jesus, and the +news of the changed conditions which he wrote existed in Japon, and the +permission which he said that Daifu had given him to make Christians +and build churches, not only the discalced religious of St. Francis +but those of the other orders of St. Dominic and St. Augustine, set +about going to Japon without loss of time; and, in order to be taken, +each one made use of the Japanese ships and captains which were then +at Manila, having come with flour, and which were about to return. In +particular, the Order of St. Dominic sent to the kingdom of Zazuma +four religious, under Fray Francisco de Morales, [149] Prior of Manila, +in a ship about to go to that island and province. They said that they +had been summoned by its king, the only one who had not yet rendered +homage to Daifusama. The Order of St. Augustine sent two religious to +the kingdom of Firando in a ship which had come from that port, under +Fray Diego de Guebara, [150] Prior of Manila, because they had heard +that they would be well received by the king of that province. The +Order of St. Francis, in the ships about to sail to Nangasaqui, +sent Fray Augustin Rodrigues, [151] who had been in Japon before, +in company with the martyrs, and a lay-brother, with orders to go to +Miaco, to become associates of Fray Geronymo de Jesus. Although some +difficulties presented themselves to the governor in regard to the +departure of these religious from Manila, and their going to Japon +so hastily, yet on account of the great pressure which they brought +to bear upon him, these were not sufficient to cause him to refuse +them the permission which they requested. The religious reached the +provinces to which they were going and were received there, although +more coolly than they had expected, and with fewer conveniences than +they needed for their support, and less inclination than they desired +for the matters of the conversion, in which they had imagined that +they were to have great and immediate results, for very few of the +Japanese became Christians. In fact, the kings and tonos of those +provinces kept them in order, by means of them, to open intercourse +and commerce in their lands with the Spaniards--which they desired +for their own interests rather than for the religion, to which they +were not inclined. + +The governor, Don Pedro de Acuña, in fulfilment of his letter, +namely, that he would send a ship to Quanto, prepared and then sent +out a medium-sized ship, named "Santiago el Menor" [i.e., St. James +the Less], with a captain and the necessary seamen and officers, and +some goods consisting of red wood, [152] deerskins, raw silk [153] +and other things. This ship set out with orders to go to Quanto, +where it would find discalced Franciscan religious and there to sell +its goods and return with the exchange--and with the permission of +Daifusama--to Manila. Thus Japanese matters were provided for, as +far as seemed necessary, according to the state of affairs. + +Daifusama, sovereign of Japon, who was awaiting Chiquiro, his servant, +whom he had sent to Manila with the letters from Fray Geronymo de +Jesus, pressed the latter so closely concerning the things which he +desired and about which he had treated with him, that Fray Geronymo, +seeing that Chiquiro was slow in returning, and that few arguments +were of avail with Daifu, in order to satisfy him the better, +requested permission of him to go to Manila in person, there to +communicate and conclude matters with the governor by word of mouth, +and bring a reply to him. He said that he would leave at the court Fray +Augustin Rodriguez and another companion, who had lately come to him, +as hostages for his return. The king granted the permission and gave +him provision, so that Fray Geronymo came quickly to Manila, where +he learned of the message which Chiquiro had taken. Then he began to +treat with Governor Don Pedro de Acuña, about his business, saying +that Chiquiro had not yet arrived in Xapon, which gave rise to the +suspicion that he had been wrecked. The ship sent by the governor being +unable to double the head of Xapon in order to pass to the north side, +put into the port of Firando, where the religious of St. Augustine +had had a station for a short time, and anchored there. Thence the +captain advised the court of Miaco that he had been unable to reach +Quanto. He sent also the letters for the religious and what was to +be given to Daifu. The religious, Fray Geronymo's associates, gave +Daifu the presents which were for him, and told him that the governor +was sending that ship at his disposition and command, but that the +weather had not allowed it to reach Quanto. Daifusama received the +presents, although he did not believe what they told him, but that +they were compliments to please him. He ordered the ship to get its +trading done immediately, and to return with some things which he gave +them for the governor, and thenceforward to go to Quanto as promised +him. Thereupon it returned to Manila. + +Fray Geronymo de Jesus reached the Filipinas so quickly, as has +been said, that he had opportunity to treat with Governor Don Pedro +de Acuña, about the matters under his charge, from whom he received +the promise that ships would continue to be sent to Quanto to please +Daifusama. Taking with him a good present, given him by the governor, +consisting of a very rich and large Venetian mirror, glass, clothes +from Castilla, honey, several tibores, [154] and other things which it +was known would please Daifu, he returned immediately to Japon. He was +well received there by Daifu, to whom he communicated his message, and +that his servant Chiquiro had been well sent off by the new governor, +and that nothing less than shipwreck was possible, since he had not +appeared in so long a time. He gave Daifu what he had brought, which +pleased the latter greatly. + +During the first days of the governor's administration he found in +the shipyard of Cabit two large ships which were being finished to +make their voyage that year to Nueva España. One of them, belonging +to Don Luys Dasmariñas, by an agreement which the latter had made +with the governor's predecessor, Don Francisco Tello, was to go with a +cargo of merchandise. The other, called the "Espiritu Santo," built by +Joan Tello de Aguirre and other residents of Manila, was to make the +voyage with the merchandise of that year credited to the builders, +but was to pass into possession of his Majesty on its arrival in +Nueva España, according to an agreement and contract made with the +same governor, Don Francisco Tello. Don Pedro de Acuña made so great +haste in despatching both ships that, with the cargo which they were +to carry, he sent them out of port at the beginning of July of the +aforesaid year six hundred and two, with Don Lope de Ulloa in the +"Espiritu Santo" as general, and Don Pedro Flores in charge of the +"Jesus Maria." Both ships went on their way, and in thirty-eight +degrees met such storms that they were many times on the point of being +wrecked, and threw overboard a quantity of their merchandise. The ship +"Jesus Maria" put back into Manila with difficulty after having been +more than forty days in the island of the Ladrones, whence it was +unable to depart. During this time they had opportunity to pick up +all the surviving Spaniards from among those left by the ship "Santa +Margarita," among them, Fray Joan Pobre, who had jumped into one +of the boats of the natives from the galleon "Santo Tomas," when it +passed that way the year before. Five other Spaniards were in other +islands of the same Ladrones, but although every effort was made to +bring them, they could not come. The natives brought Fray Joan Pobre +and the others to the ship in their own boats, with great friendship +and good will. After they had been entertained on board the ship, which +they entered without fear, and after iron and other presents had been +given to them, they returned without the Spaniards, weeping and showing +great sorrow. The ship "Espiritu Santo," with the same difficulty, +put into Japon, as it could do nothing else, with its mainmast gone, +and entered a port of Firando, twenty leguas from a station of the +religious of St. Augustine, who had gone there the same year from +Manila, and where also the ship bound for Quanto had entered. The +harbor could be sounded [i.e., it formed a good anchorage], but +to enter and leave it were very difficult, because its channel had +many turns, with rocks and high mountains on both sides. However, +as the Japanese natives with their funeas towed and guided the ship +so that it might enter, it had less difficulty. When it was inside, +a Japanese guard was placed on the ship, and those who went ashore +were not allowed to return to the ship. The supplies furnished them +did not suffice for all their necessities, and the price was not +suitable. On this account, and because a large number of soldiers had +assembled quickly at the port from the whole district, and had asked +the general for the sails of the ship, which he had always declined +to give them, he feared that they wished to seize the ship and its +merchandise, as was done in Hurando, with the ship "San Felipe," +in the year ninety-six. He acted with caution, and kept much closer +watch thenceforward, without leaving his ship or allowing his men +to leave it alone, or any of the merchandise to be unloaded. At the +same time he sent his brother, Don Alonso de Ulloa, and Don Antonio +Maldonado to Miaco with a reasonable present for Daifusama, that he +might have provision given them and permission to go out again from +that harbor. [155] These men made the journey by land. Meanwhile, +those on the ship were greatly troubled by the Japanese who were in the +port, and by their captains, who were not satisfied with the presents +which were given them to make them well disposed, but forcibly seized +whatever they saw, giving out that everything was theirs and that it +would soon be in their power. Fray Diego de Guebara, the Augustinian +superior in Firando, came to the ship and told the general that he had +put into a bad harbor of infidels and wicked people, who would take +his ship and rob it, and that he should endeavor with all his might +to get it out of there and take it to Firando where he [the father] +was living. Meanwhile he told him to be on the watch and guard to the +best of his ability. As the father was returning to his house with +some pieces of silk, given him on the ship for his new church and +monastery at Firando, the Japanese took it away from him and did not +leave him a thing, saying that it was all theirs, and he went away +without it. About a dozen and a half of the Spaniards of the ship +were ashore, where they were kept in confinement and not allowed to +go on board again, and although the general warned them that he had +determined to leave the port as soon as possible, and that they should +make every effort to come to the ship, they could not all do so, +but only four or five of them. Without waiting any longer he drove +the Japanese guard from the ship, bent the foresail and spritsail, +loaded the artillery, and, with weapons in hand, one morning set the +ship in readiness to weigh anchor. The Japanese went to the channel at +the mouth of the harbor with many funeas and arquebusiers, stretched +a thick rattan cable which they had woven, and moored it on both banks +in order that the ship might not be able to sail out. The general sent +a small boat with six arquebusiers to find out what they were doing, +but at their approach, a number of the Japanese funeas attacked them +with the purpose of capturing them. However, by defending themselves +with their arquebuses they returned to the ship and reported to the +general that the Japanese were closing the exit from the harbor with +a cable. Taking this to be a bad sign, the ship immediately set sail +against the cable to break it, and a negro, to whom the general +promised his freedom, offered to be let down over the bow with a +large machete in order to cut the cable when the ship should reach it. + +With the artillery and the arquebuses he cleared the channel of the +funeas there, and when he came to the cable, with the impetus of +the vessel and the strenuous efforts of the negro with the machete, +it broke, and the ship passed through. It still remained for it to go +through the many turns which the channel made before coming out to the +sea and it seemed impossible for a ship which was sailing fast to go +through them, but God permitted it to pass out through them as though +it had had a breeze for each turn. But the Japanese, who had assembled +in great numbers on the hills and rocks within range of where the ship +was passing, did not fail to annoy the ship with many volleys, with +which they killed one Spaniard on the ship and wounded others. The +ship did the same, and with their artillery they killed several of +the Japanese. The Japanese failed to obstruct the ship's passage, and +accordingly were left without it. The general, finding himself on the +sea and free from the past danger, and seeing that it was beginning +to blow a little from the north, thought it best to venture on his +voyage to Manila rather than to seek another harbor in Japon. Having +raised a jury-mast [156] in place of the main-mast, and with the wind +freshening daily from the north, he crossed to Luzón in twelve days, +via the cape of Bojeador, and reached the mouth of the bay of Manila, +where he found the ship "Jesus Maria," which was also putting in in +distress through the Capul Channel; and so the two ships together, +as they had gone together out of the port of Cabit five months before, +made harbor there again in distress after having suffered many damages +and losses to the exchequer. + +Don Alonso de Ulloa and Don Francisco Maldonado, while this was going +on in the harbor where they had left the ship "Espiritu Santo," reached +Miaco and delivered their message and present to Daifusama. The latter, +upon being informed who they were, that their ship had entered Japon, +and that they were from Manila, received them cordially, and quickly +gave them warrants and chapas [i.e., safe-conducts], in order that the +tonos and governors of the provinces where the ship had entered should +allow it and its crew to depart freely. They were to be allowed to +refit, and to be given what they needed; and whatever had been taken +from them, whether much or little, was to be returned. + +While this matter was being attended to, news reached Miaco of the +departure of the ship from the harbor, and the skirmish with the +Japanese over it, and of this they complained anew to Diafu. He showed +that he was troubled at the departure of the ship and the discourtesy +to it, and at the outrages committed by the Japanese. He gave new +chapas for restitution of all the goods to be made; and sent a catan +from his own hand with which justice should be performed upon those +who had offended in this matter, [157] and ordered that the Spaniards +who remained in the port should be set free, and that their goods +be returned to them. With this warrant the Spaniards left that port +and recovered what had been taken from them. The ambassadors and the +others returned to Manila in the first vessels which left, taking with +them eight chapas of the same tenor from Daifusama, in order that in +the future ships coming from Manila to any port whatever of J apon, +might be received courteously and well treated, without having any +harm done them. These, upon their arrival in Manila, they handed over +to the governor, who gives them to the ships sailing to Nueva España, +to provide for any incidents on the voyage. + +At the same time that Governor Don Pedro de Acuña entered upon +his administration, the captain and sargento-mayor, Pedro Cotelo de +Morales, arrived from Jolo with the advices and report of Joan Xuarez +Gallinato concerning the state of affairs in that island, whither +he had gone with the fleet at the beginning of that same year. The +governor, on account of the importance of the matter, wished to make +every effort possible, and determined to send him supplies and a +reënforcement of some men, which he did as soon as possible. He was +ordered to at least make an effort to punish that enemy, even if he +could do nothing more, and, whenever the opportunity presented itself, +to go to do the same thing in the river of Mindanao, and return to the +Pintados. When this commission reached Jolo, Gallinato was already so +worn out, and his men so ill, that the reënforcements only made it +possible for him to get away from there; accordingly without seeing +to another thing, he broke camp, burned the forts which he had built, +embarked, and went to Pintados, leaving the people of that island of +Jolo and their neighbors, those of Mindanao, emboldened more than +ever to make raids against the Pintados, and the islands within, +which they did. + +The governor, without delaying any longer in Manila, hastily started +for the island of Panay and the town of Arevalo, in a galliot and +other small vessels, to see their needs with his own eyes, in order to +provide for them. He left war matters in Manila, during his absence, in +charge of Licentiate Don Antonio de Ribera, auditor of the Audiencia. + +As soon as the governor left Manila, the auditor had plenty to look +after, because a squadron of twenty caracoas and other vessels from +Mindanao entered the islands as far as the island of Luzon and its +coasts, making captures. Having taken some ships bound from Sebu to +Manila, they captured ten Spaniards in them, among them a woman and +a priest and Captain Martin de Mandia, and they took them off with +them. They entered Calilaya, burned the church and all the town, +and captured many persons of all classes among the natives. Thence +they passed to the town of Valayan [Balayán] to do the same, but the +auditor, having received news of the enemy in Manila, had it already +in a state of defense with fifty Spaniards and a captain and some +vessels. Consequently, they did not dare to enter the town or its +bay, but crossed over to Mindoro, where, in the principal town, they +captured many men, women, and children among the natives, seizing their +gold and possessions, and burning their houses and church, where they +captured theprebendary Corral, curate of that doctrina. They filled +their own ships, and others which they seized there, with captives, +gold, and property, staying in the port of Mindoro as leisurely as +though in their own land, notwithstanding that it is but twenty-four +leguas from Manila. Captain Martin de Mendia, prisoner of these +pirates, offered for himself and the other Spanish captives that, +if they would let him go to Manila, he would get the ransom for all, +and would take it, or would send it within six months, to the river +of Mindanao, or otherwise he would return to their power. The chief +in command of the fleet agreed thereto, with certain provisions and +conditions, and caused the other captives to write, to the effect +that what had been agreed upon might be fulfilled, and then he +allowed the captain to leave the fleet. The latter came to the city, +and upon receiving his report, the auditor sent munitions, ships, +and more men to Valayan than there were there already, with orders +to go in pursuit of the enemy without delay, saying that they would +find him in Mindoro. Captain Gaspar Perez, who had charge of this in +Valayan, did not start so quickly as he should have done in order +to find the enemy in Mindoro, for when he arrived he found that he +had left that port six days before, laden with ships and booty, to +return to Mindanao. Then he went in pursuit of him, although somewhat +slowly. The enemy put into the river of a little uninhabited island +to get water and wood. Just at that time Governor Don Pedro de Acuña, +who was hastily returning to Manila, from the town of Arvalo, where +he had learned of the incursion of those pirates, passed. He passed +so near the mouth of this river, in two small champans and a virrey, +with very few men, that it was a wonder that he was not seen and +captured by the enemy. He learned that the enemy was there, from a +boat of natives which was escaping therefrom, and then he met Gaspar +Perez going in search of the enemy with twelve vessels, caracoas and +vireys, and some large champans. The governor made him make more haste +and gave him some of his own men to guide him to where he had left +the pirates the day before, whereupon they went to attack them. But +the latter espied the fleet through their sentinels whom they had +already stationed in the sea, outside the river. Accordingly they +left the river in haste, and took to flight, throwing into the sea +goods and slaves in order to flee more lightly. Their flagship and +almiranta caracoas protected the ships which were dropping behind +and made them throw overboard what they could and work with all +the strength of their paddles, assisted by their sails. The Spanish +fleet, the vessels of which were not so light, could not put forth +enough strength to overtake all of them, because, furthermore, +they went into the open without fear of the heavy seas which were +running, inasmuch as they were fleeing. Yet some of the ships of +Captain Gaspar Perez, being lighter, got among the enemy's fleet, +sunk some caracoas, and captured two, but the rest escaped, although +with great danger of being lost. Without accomplishing anything else, +the fleet returned to Manila where the governor had already entered, +very much disturbed that things should have come to such a pass that +these enemies, who had never dared to leave their houses, should have +been so daring and bold as to come to the very gates of the city, +doing great damage and making captures. + +Some years before this his Majesty had ordered an expedition to be +prepared in Portuguese India for the capture of the fort of Terrenate +in Maluco, which was in the power of a Moro who had rebelled and +subjected it in a tyrannical manner, and had driven out the Portuguese +there. The necessary preparations of ships, munitions, and men were +made for this undertaking in India, and a hidalgo, named Andrea Furtado +de Mendoça, [158] was chosen general of this expedition. He was a +soldier skilled in the affairs of India, who had won many victories +of great importance and fame on sea and land in those parts, and had +lately had a very notable one at Jabanapatan. [159] He sailed from +Goa with six galleons of the kingdom, fourteen galliots and fustas, +and other ships, and one thousand five hundred fighting men, and with +supplies and munitions for the fleet. On account of the storms which +he met, his fleet was so scattered before reaching Amboino that the +galleys and fustas could not keep up with the galleons or follow them, +and only three of them, in convoy of the galleons, reached Amboino. The +other vessels put back into Goa and other forts on the line of that +voyage. The island of Amboino was in rebellion and the Portuguese +fort there was in great need, so that, while the galliots, fustas, +and other vessels of his fleet which had fallen off on the voyage were +gathering, and while help was coming which he had sent to ask of the +fort of Malaca, it seemed best to Andrea Furtado de Mendoça to stop +in Amboino, which is eighty leguas from Maluco, in order to pacify +the island and some towns of the neighborhood, and reduce them to +the crown of Portugal. He was more than six months in this, having +encounters with the enemy and with the rebels, in which he always +came out victorious, and from which he obtained the desired result, +and left everything reduced and pacified. His ships did not arrive, +however, and the help which he had requested did not come from Malaca, +and yet it was necessary for him to go to Terrenate, as that was the +principal purpose for which he had been sent. Considering this, and +yet seeing that he had fewer men than he needed for it, and that the +greater part of the munitions and supplies which he had brought were +spent, he determined to send word to the governor of the Filipinas of +his coming with that fleet, of what he had done in Amboino, that he +was to proceed to attack Terrenate, and that, because a part of his +ships had been scattered, and because he had stopped so many months +for those undertakings, he had fewer men than he wanted and was in need +of some things, especially supplies. He requested the governor, since +this matter was so important and so to the service of his Majesty, +and since so much had been spent on it from the royal treasury of the +crown of Portugal, to favor and help him, by sending him some supplies +and munitions and some Castilians for the undertaking. He asked that +all of this should reach Terrenate by January of six hundred and three, +for he would then be off that fort and the help would come to him very +opportunely. This message and his letters for the governor and the +Audiencia he sent to Manila from Amboino in a light vessel in charge +of Father Andre Pereira of the Society of Jesus, and Captain Antonio +Fogoça, one of his own followers. They found Governor Don Pedro de +Acuña in Manila, and presented the matter to him, making use of the +Audiencia and of the orders, and making many boasts of the Portuguese +fleet and the illustrious men who were in it, and of the valor and +renown of its general in whatever he undertook. They asserted at +the same time the success of the capture of Terrenate at that time, +especially if they received from Manila the succor and help for which +they had come, and which, in justice, should be given them, as it was +given from the Filipinas whenever the king of Tidore and the chief +captain of that fort requested it, and as his Majesty had ordered--and +with more good reason and foundation on such an occasion. [160] + +Although Don Pedro de Acuña, from the time of his appointment to +the government, had the intention and desire to make an expedition +against Terrenate, and when he was in Mexico on his way, had treated +of this matter with those there who had any information about Maluco, +and sent Brother Gaspar Gomez of the Society of Jesus from Nueva +Españia to his Majesty's court--who had lived in Manila many years, +and also in Maluco in the time of Governor Gomez Perez Dasmariñas--to +treat of the matter in his name with his Majesty; and although he was +in hopes of making this expedition: nevertheless it seemed to him best, +without declaring his own desires, to aid in what Andrea Furtado asked, +and even more, not only on account of the importance of the matter, +but also because by thus helping, he would keep the general and his +messengers, in case they were unsuccessful, from excusing themselves +by saying that they had asked for help and reënforcement from the +governor of the Filipinas, and the latter had not given it, and so +that it might not be understood that he had failed to do so because +he himself was arranging for the expedition. Don Pedro de Acuñia +consulted about this matter with the Audiencia, which was of the +opinion that the aforesaid reënforcement, and more besides, should +be sent to the Portuguese at the time for which it was asked. When +this was decided upon, they put it into execution, very much to the +satisfaction of Father Andrea Pereira and Captain Fogaça. At the end of +the year six hundred and two they were despatched from the Filipinas, +taking with them the ship "Santa Potenciana" and three large frigates, +with one hundred and fifty well armed Spanish soldiers, ten thousand +fanégas of rice, one thousand five hundred earthen jars of palm wine, +two hundred head of salt beef, twenty hogsheads of sardines, conserves +and medicines, fifty quintals of powder, cannon-balls and bullets, +and cordage and other supplies, the whole in charge of the captain +and sargento-mayor, Joan Xuarez Gallinato--who had now returned from +Jolo and was in Pintados--with orders and instructions as to what he +was to do, namely, to take that help to Terrenate, to the Portuguese +fleet which he would find there, and to place himself at the orders +and command of its general. [161] Thither he made his voyage in a +fortnight, and anchored in the port of Talangame, in the island of +Terrenate, two leguas from the fort, where he found Andrea Furtado +de Mendoça with his galleons at anchor, awaiting what was being sent +from Manila. He and all his men were very much pleased with it. + +In the month of March of this year six hundred and three, there +entered Manila Bay a ship from Great China, in which the sentinels +reported that three great mandarins were coming, with their insignia +as such, on business in the service of their king. The governor gave +them permission to leave their ship and enter the city with their +suites. In very curious chairs of ivory and fine gilded woods, borne +on the shoulders of men, they went straight to the royal houses of +the Audiencia, where the governor was awaiting them, with a large +suite of captains and soldiers throughout the house and through the +streets where they passed. When they had reached the doors of the +royal houses they alighted from their chairs and entered on foot, +leaving in the street the banners, plumes, lances and other very showy +insignia which they brought with them. The mandarins went into a large, +finely-decorated hall, where the governor received them standing, +they making many bows and compliments to him after their fashion, and +he replying to them after his. They told him through the interpreters +that their king had sent them, with a Chinaman whom they had with +them in chains, to see with their own eyes an island of gold, called +Cabit, which he had told their king was near Manila, and belonged to no +one. [162] They said that this man had asked for a quantity of ships, +which he said he would bring back laden with gold, and if it were +not so that they could punish him with his life. So they had come +to ascertain and tell their king what there was in the matter. The +governor replied briefly, saying only that they were welcome, and +appointed them quarters in two houses within the city which had been +prepared for them, in which they and their men could lodge. He said +that the business would be discussed afterwards. Thereupon they left +the royal houses again, and at the doors mounted in their chairs on +the shoulders of their servants, who were dressed in red, and were +carried to their lodgings, where the governor ordered them to be +supplied fully with whatever they needed during the days of their stay. + +The coming of these mandarins seemed suspicious, and their purpose +to be different from what they said, because it seemed a fiction for +people, of so much understanding as the Chinese, to say that their +king was sending them on this business. Among the Chinese themselves +who came to Manila at the same time in eight merchant ships, and +among those who lived in the city, it was said that these mandarins +were coming to see the land and study its nature, because the king of +China wished to break relations with the Spaniards and send a large +fleet, before the end of the year, with one hundred thousand men to +take the country. + +The governor and the Audiencia thought that they ought to be very +careful in guarding the city, and that these mandarins should be well +treated, but that they should not go out of the city nor be allowed to +administer justice, as they were beginning to do among the Sangleys, +at which the mandarins were somewhat angry. He asked them to treat +of their business, and then to return to China quickly, and he warned +the Spaniards not to show that they understood or were suspicious of +anything other than what the mandarins had said. The mandarins had +another interview with the governor, and he told them more clearly, +making some joke of their coming, that he was astonished that their +king should have believed what that Chinaman whom they had with them +had said, and even if it were true that there was so much gold in the +Filipinas, that the Spaniards would not allow it to be carried away, +since the country belonged to his Majesty. The mandarins said that they +understood very well what the governor had communicated to them, but +that their king had ordered them to come and that they must needs obey +and bring him a reply, and that when they had performed their duty, +that was all, and they would return. The governor, to cut short the +business, sent the mandarins, with their servants and the prisoner, +to Cabit, which is the port, two leguas from the city. There they were +received with a great artillery salute, which was fired suddenly as +they landed, at which they were very frightened and fearful. When they +had landed, they asked the prisoner if that was the island of which +he had spoken to the king, and he replied that it was. They asked him +where the gold was, and he replied that everything there was gold and +that he would make his statement good with the king. They asked him +other questions and he always replied the same thing. Everything was +written down in the presence of some Spanish captains who were there +with some confidential interpreters. The mandarins ordered a basketful +of earth to be taken from the ground, to take to the king of China, +and then, having eaten and rested, they returned to Manila the same +day, with the prisoner. The interpreters said that the prisoner, +when hard pressed by the mandarins to make suitable answers to their +questions, had said that what he had meant to tell the king of China +was that there was much gold and wealth in the hands of the natives +and Spaniards of Manila, and that if they gave him a fleet with men, +he offered, as a man who had been in Luzon and knew the country, to +capture it and bring the ships back laden with gold and riches. This, +together with what some Chinamen had said at the beginning, seemed very +much to have more meaning than the mandarins had implied, especially +to Don Fray Miguel de Benavides, archbishop-elect of Manila, who knew +the language. Thereupon the archbishop and other religious warned the +governor and the city, publicly and privately, to look to its defense, +because they felt sure of the coming of the Chinese fleet against it +shortly. Then the governor dismissed the mandarins and embarked them +on their ship, with their prisoner, after giving them some pieces +of silver and other things with which they were pleased. Although, +in the opinion of the majority of those in the city, it seemed that +it was beyond all reason that the Chinese should attack the country, +the governor began covertly to prepare ships and other things suitable +for defense, and made haste to complete extensive repairs which he +had begun to make on the fort of Sanctiago at the point of the river, +and for the defense of the fort he built on the inside a wall of +great strength, with its wings, facing toward the parade ground. + +At the end of April of this year six hundred and three, on the +eve of Sts. Philip and James [Santiago] a fire started in a little +field house [casilla de zacate] used by some Indians and negroes of +the native hospital in the city, at three o'clock in the afternoon, +and passed to other houses so quickly, with the force of the rather +fresh wind, that it could not be stopped, and burned houses of wood +and stone, even the monastery of St. Dominic--house and church--the +royal hospital for the Spaniards, and the royal warehouses, without +leaving a building standing among them. Fourteen people died in the +fire, Spaniards, Indians, and negroes, and among them Licentiate Sanz, +canon of the cathedral. In all two hundred and sixty houses were +burned, with much property which was in them, and it was understood +that the damage and loss amounted to more than one million [pesos]. + +After Ocuña Lacasamanà, the Moro Malay, with the help of the mandarins +of Camboja who sided with him, and of the stepmother of King Prauncar, +had killed and put an end to Bias Ruyz de Hernan Gonçales and Diego +Belloso, and the Castilians, Portuguese, and Japanese on their side +who were in the kingdom, his boldness went so far that he even killed +the king himself, whereby the whole kingdom was divided into factions +and suffered greater disturbances than it had ever known before. God +permitted this for His just judgments, and because Prauncar did +not deserve to enjoy the good fortune which he had had in being +placed on his father's throne, since he lost it at the same time +that he did his life. Nor did Bias Ruiz de Hernan Gonzales and Diego +Belloso, and their companions, deserve the fruit and labor of their +expeditions and victories, since they were converted into disastrous +and cruel death at the time when they seemed most secure and certain, +for perchance their pretensions and claims were not so well adjusted +to the obligations of conscience as they ought to have been. But God +did not wish the Moro Malay to remain unpunished. + +When this Malay thought that he was going to get the better part +of the kingdom of Camboja, because he had killed the Castilians and +Portuguese, their captains, and the legitimate and natural king himself +who favored them, he was more mistaken than he thought, because the +disorders and uprisings in the provinces gave opportunity for some +powerful mandarins in the kingdom, who held and maintained the saner +course, to join, and avenge the death of King Prauncar by force of +arms. So they turned against Ocuña Lacasamana and his Malays, and, +meeting them in battle on different occasions, conquered and routed +them, so that the Moro was forced to flee from Camboja, with the +remaining remnant of his men, and pass to the kingdom of Champa, +which bordered on it, with the purpose of disturbing it and making +war on the usurper who held it, and of seizing it all, or as much as +he could. This also did not turn out well for him, for, although he +brought war into Champa, and all the disturbances which it brings, +and caused the usurper and his men a great deal of trouble, at last +he was routed and killed and came to pay wretchedly for his sins at +the usurper's hands. + +Seeing themselves rid of the Malay, but finding that the kingdom was +still disturbed, as he had left it, and without a male descendant +in the line of Prauncar Langara, who died in Laos, the mandarins +of Camboja turned their eyes toward a brother of his whom the +king of Sian had captured and taken with him in the war which he +had made against Langara, and whom he held in the city of Odia, as +they thought that he had the best right to the kingdom of Camboja, +by legitimate succession, and that it would be more easily pacified +in his presence. They sent an embassy to Sian, asking him to come to +reign, and asking the king of Sian, who held him captive, to allow +him to go. The king thought well of it, and, with certain provisions +and conditions which he made with his prisoner, gave him his liberty +and six thousand fighting men to serve and accompany him. With these +he came immediately to Camboja and was readily received in Sistor and +other provinces, and placed on the throne, and from those provinces +he went on pacifying and reducing the more distant ones. + +This new king of Camboja who, from being a captive of the king of Sian, +came to the throne by such strange events and varying chances--for +God held this good fortune in store for him, and holds still more of +greater worth, if he can carry on what he has begun--caused search +to be made for Joan Diaz, a Castilian soldier, who survived from the +company of Blas Ruyz de Hernan Gonçales. He bade him go to Manila +and, in his behalf, tell the governor that he was on the throne, and +also what had happened in regard to the death of the Spaniards and +of his nephew Prauncar, in which he [the new king] was in no wise to +blame. He said that he recognized the friendship which they--Langara, +his brother, and the latter's son--received from the Spaniards in the +time of their troubles; that he himself was well disposed to continue +this friendship and understanding; and he again asked the governor, +if he were willing, to send him some religious and Castilians to reside +at his court and to make Christians of those who wished to become so. + +With this message and embassy, and many promises, Joan Diaz came +to Manila, where he found Don Pedro de Acuña in the government, +and treated of the matter with him. The governor thought it unwise +to close the door to the preaching of the holy gospel in Camboja, +which God had opened again in this way, and he agreed to do what the +king asked. So, at the beginning of the year six hundred and three, +he sent a frigate to Camboja, with four religious of the Order of +St. Dominic with Fray Yñigo de Santa Maria, prior of Manila, at +their head with five soldiers to accompany them, among them Joan +Diaz himself. They were to give the king the reply to his message, +in confirmation of the peace and friendship for which he asked, and, +according to the circumstances which they found there, the religious +were to stay in his court and advise what seemed best to them. This +frigate reached Camboja after a ten days' voyage with favoring winds, +and the religious and the soldiers in their company ascended the river +to Chordemuco, where the king received them with great satisfaction. He +immediately built them a church, and gave them rice for their support, +and granted them liberty to preach and christianize. This seemed +to the religious to be the work of Heaven, and a matter in which a +great many workers could be employed. They sent immediate word of +their good reception and condition to Manila in the same frigate, +after asking permission of the king that it might return. The king +granted it and gave them the necessary supplies for their voyage, and +at the same time sent a servant of his with a present of ivory tusks, +benzoin, and other curious things for the governor, with a letter +thanking him for what he was doing and asking for more religious and +Castilians. Fray Yñigo de Santa Maria [163] with a companion embarked +on this frigate, in order to come to give a better report of what he +had found, but he sickened and died on the voyage. His companion and +those aboard the frigate reached Manila in May of six hundred and +three and gave an account of events in Camboja. + +At the end of the same month of May, there came to Manila two ships +from Nueva España, in command of Don Diego de Camudio, with the +regular reënforcements for the Philipinas. It brought news that +Fray Diego de Soria, [164] of the Order of St. Dominic, bishop of +Cagayan, was in Mexico, and was bringing the bulls and pallium to +the archbishop-elect of Manila, and Fray Baltasar de Cobarrubias, +[165] of the Order of St. Augustine, appointed bishop of Camarines +by the death of Fray Francisco de Ortega. In the same ships came two +auditors for the Audiencia of Manila, Licentiates Andres de Alcaraz, +and Manuel de Madrid y Luna. + +The captain and sargento-mayor, Joan Xuarez Gallinato, with the ship +"Santa Potenciana" and the men whom he had taken in it to Maluco in aid +of the Portuguese fleet which Andrea Furtado de Mendoça had brought +to assault the fortress of Terrenate, found this fleet in the port +of Talangame. As soon as this help arrived, Andrea Furtado landed +his men, Portuguese and Castilians, with six pieces of artillery, +and marched with them along the shore, toward the fort, to plant the +battery. He took two days to reach the fort, passing through some +narrow places and gullies which the enemy had fortified. When he had +reached the principal fort, he had all that he could do to plant the +artillery, for the enemy sallied out frequently against the camp and +hindered the work. Once they reached the very gate of the quarters, +and would have done a great deal of damage had not the Castilians +nearest the entrance stopped them and pressed the Moros so hard that, +leaving some dead, they turned and fled and shut themselves up in the +fort. At the same time five pieces were placed within cannon-shot +of it. The enemy, who had sufficient men for their defense, with +a great deal of artillery and ammunition, did much damage in the +camp, whereas the pieces of the battery had no considerable effect, +having but a short supply of powder and ammunition. Consequently what +Gallinato and his men had heard, when they joined the Portuguese fleet, +of the scant supply and outfit which Andrea Furtado had brought for so +great an enterprise, was seen and experienced very quickly. That they +might not all be killed, Andrea Furtado, having asked the opinion of +all the officers of his camp and fleet, withdrew his pieces and camp +to the port of Talangame. He embarked his men on his galleons and +returned to the forts and islands of Amboino and Vanda, where he had +first been, taking for the support of the fleet the supplies brought +him by Gallinato, to whom he gave permission to return to Manila, +with the Castilians. The latter did so, in company with Ruy Gonçales +de Sequeira, until recently chief captain of the fort of Tidore, who, +with his household and merchandise, left that fortress in another ship, +and they reached Manila at the beginning of the month of July of this +year six hundred and three, bearing the following letter from Andrea +Furtado de Mendoça to Governor Don Pedro de Acuña. + + * * * * * + +A letter which General Andrea Furtado de Mendoça wrote to Don Pedro +de Acuña from Terrenate on the twenty-fifth of March of the year one +thousand six hundred and three. + +There are no misfortunes in the world, however great they may be, +from which some good may not be gained. Of all those through which +I have passed in this undertaking, and they have been infinite, the +result has been that I have learned the zeal and courage which your +Lordship shows in the service of his Majesty, on account of which I +envy your Lordship and hold you as master, affirming that the thing +which I would like most in this life would be for your Lordship to hold +the same opinion of me, and, as one that is very particularly your own, +that your Lordship should command me in what is for your service. + +The help sent me by your Lordship came in time, by the favor of God, +and was what gave this fleet to his Majesty and our lives to all of +us alive today. By what happened in this expedition, his Majesty will +understand how much he owes to your Lordship and how little to the +captain of Malaca, for the latter was partly the cause that the service +of his Majesty was not accomplished. When the ship sent me by your +Lordship arrived, this fleet was without any supplies because it had +been two years since it had left Goa, and they had all been consumed +and spent on the occasions which had presented themselves. Admitting +this in order that it may not be imagined that it was on my account +that the service of his Majesty was not carried out, I went on shore, +which I gained, inflicting great losses on the enemy, and I placed +my last trenches a hundred paces from the enemy's fortification. I +landed five heavy pieces for battering, and in ten days of bombarding, +knocked to pieces a large part of a bastion where all the enemy's +force was concentrated. In these days all the powder in the fleet +was spent, without a grain being left with which its artillery could +be loaded even once, and if I should happen to run across a Dutch +squadron, of which I have little doubt, I should be forced to fight +with them. This was the principal cause for which I raised the siege, +when I had the enemy in great distress through hunger and also through +having killed many of his captains and other men in the course of the +fighting. From this your Lordship may judge of the state of suffering +and grief in which I must be. God be praised for everything, since +it is His will, and may He permit that His greatest enemies in these +regions may become the vassals of his Majesty. + +I am leaving for Amboino to see if I can get help there, and if I +find sufficient, and if there is not elsewhere in the south anything +in such urgent need that I must attend to it, I am going to return to +this undertaking, and I will inform your Lordship of it at length. If +I do not find there the help which I expect, I shall go to Malaca to +refit, and from whatever place I am in, I shall always inform your +Lordship. I am writing to his Majesty, giving him a long account of the +affairs of this enterprise, and stating that it cannot be accomplished +or preserved in the future, unless it is done by the order of your +Lordship, and helped and increased by that government, since India is +so far that it could not receive help from there within two years. In +conformity with this, your Lordship should inform his Majesty, that +he may be undeceived in this regard about Maluco, and I trust to God +that I may be one of your Highness's soldiers. + +I do not know with what words I can praise or thank your Lordship for +the kind things which you have done for me. These were made plain +to me by Antonio de Brito Fogaça, as well as by Tomas de Araux, my +servant. These are things which can not be rewarded or paid except by +risking life, honor, and property on every occasion which offers itself +in your service. If such an occasion should be presented to me, it will +be seen that I am not ungrateful for the favors which I have received; +the greatest of which, and the one which I esteem most highly, was +that, with this help, your Lordship sent me Joan Xuarez Gallinato, +Don Tomas de Acuña, and the other captains and soldiers. If I were to +mention to your Lordship the deserts of each and every one of these, +I should never end. + +Joan Xuarez Gallinato is a person whom your Lordship should +esteem highly on every occasion, because he deserves it all. In +this expedition and enterprise he conducted himself with so great +satisfaction, courage, and prudence, that it is very clear that +he was sent by your Lordship and had fought under the banners of +so distinguished captains. Consequently, I shall be glad to know +that your Lordship has shown him many kindnesses, on account of his +services to his Majesty in these regions, and on my own account. The +thing which pleased me most in this undertaking, and which is worthy +of being remembered, is that, contrary to the proverb of the old +Portuguese women, in the course of this war there was not one harsh +word between the Spaniards and Portuguese, though they ate together at +one mess. But your Lordship may attribute this to your good fortune, +and to the intelligence and experience of Joan Xuarez Gallinato. + +Don Tomas conducted himself in this war, not like a gentleman of +his age, but like an old soldier, full of experience. Your Lordship +should greatly esteem this relative, for I trust that your Lordship +may be a second father to him. + +The sargento-mayor conducted himself in this war like an excellent +soldier, and he is a man whom your Lordship should regard favorably, +for I give my word that the Manilas do not contain a better soldier +than he, and I shall be greatly pleased if your Lordship honor him +and show him very particular favors on my account. Captain Villagra +fulfilled his duty well and Don Luys did the same. In short all the +soldiers, to a man, great and small, did likewise in this enterprise, +so that for this reason I am under so great obligations to them that, +if I were now before his Majesty, I would not leave his feet till I +had heaped them all with honors and favors since they also deserve +them. So for this reason I shall always be particularly glad if +your Lordship confers honors and favors on them all in general. May +our Lord preserve your Lordship for many years, as I, your servant, +desire. From the port of Talangame, in the island of Terrenate, on the +twenty-fifth of March, of the year one thousand six hundred and three. + +ANDREA FURTADO DE MENDOÇA + +(To be concluded) + + + +BIBLIOGRAPHICAL DATA + +Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas, by Dr. Antonio de Morga.--The +translation is made from the Harvard original. In conjunction with it +have been used the following editions: The Zaragoza reprint (Madrid, +1887) a unique copy (No. 2658, Catálogo de la librería de P. Vindel) +owned by Edward E. Ayer, of Chicago; the Rizal reprint (Paris, 1890); +and Lord Stanley's translation (London, Hakluyt Society edition, 1868). + + +APPENDIX A: EXPEDITION OF THOMAS CANDISH + +Thomas Candish or Cavendish, was a native of "Trimley in the country +of Suffolke." His fleet, consisting of three vessels, "The Desire," +of 120 tons, "The Content," of 60 tons, and "Hugh Gallant," of 40 tons, +left Plymouth July 21, 1586, with one hundred and twenty-three men in +all, and provisions for two years. Steering a general southwest course +they reached the Strait of Magellan January 6, 1587. In the strait they +found the melancholy remains of a Spanish colony started three years +before--Twenty-three people out of the four hundred settlers, two of +whom were women. One named Hernando they took with them. This place +the Englishmen appropriately named Port Famine. Shortly after leaving +the strait they found at an Indian settlement, under the Spanish, +some "guinie wheat, which is called Maiz." The first capture was +May 1--a boat of three hundred tons from Guaianel laden with timber +and food. Prizes after that were thick and fast, and the vessels +were generally burned after being despoiled of valuables. On July 9, +near the coast of New Spain, a ship of one hundred and twenty tons was +taken, from one of the crew of which, Michael Sancius from Marseilles, +they first heard of "the great shippe called The Santa Anna, vvhich +vve aftervvard tooke comming from the Philippinas." After coasting +along New Spain and California committing various depredations, +among them the defacing of the Spanish churches, and various other +piratical deeds, they met on the fourth of November with the "Santa +Ana." They pursued it for three or four hours and finally overtaking +fought with and captured it. The fight is described as follows: + +"In the afternoone we gat vp vnto them, giuing them the broad side +with our great ordnance, and a volee of small shot, and presently +laid the ship aboord, whereof the King of Spaine was owner, which was +Admirall of the South-sea, called the S. Anna, and thought to be seuen +hundred tvnnes in burthen. Now as we were readie on their ships side +to enter her, beeing not past fiftie or sixty men at the vttermost +in our ship, we perceived that the Captain of the said ship had made +fights fore and after, and laid their sailes close on their poope, +their mid-ship, with their fore-castle, and hauing not one man to +be seene, stood close vnder their fights, with Lances, Iauelings, +Rapiers and Targets, and an innumerable sort of great stones, which +they threw ouer boord vpon our heads, and into our ship so fast, +and beeing so many of them, that they put vs off the shippe againe, +with the losse of two of our men which were slaine, and with the +hurting of foure or fiue. But for all this we new trimmed our sailes, +and fitted euery man his furniture, and gaue them a fresh incounter +with our great Ordnance, and also with our small shot, raking them +thorough and thorough, to the killing and maiming of many of their +men. Their Captaine still like a valiant man with his companie, stood +very stoutly vnto his close fights, not yeelding as yet. Our General +incouraging his men afresh with the whole noyse of trumpets, gaue them +the third encounter with our great Ordnance, and all our small shot to +the great discomforting of our enemies, raking them through in diuerse +places, killing and spoyling many. They beeing thus discomforted, +and their shippe beeing in hazard of sinking by reason of the great +shot which were made, whereof some were vnder water, within fiue or +sixe houres fight, set out a flagge of truce, and parled for mercie, +desiring our Generall to saue their liues, and to take their goods, +and that they would presently yeeld. Our Generall promised them +mercy, and willed them to strike their sayles, and to hoyse out their +boat, & to come aboord: which newes they were full glad to heare, +and presently stroke their sailes, hoysed their boat out, and one of +their chiefe marchants came aboord vnto our Generall: and falling downe +vpon his knees, offered to haue kissed his feete, and craued mercie: +the Captaine and their Pilote, at their comming vsed the like duetie +and reuerence as the former did. The Generall promised their liues and +good vsage. They declared what goods they had within boord, to wit, +an hundreth and two and twenty thousand pezos of gold: and the rest +of the riches that the ship was laden with, was in Silkes, Sattens, +Damasks, with Muske and diuers other marchandize, and great store +of all manner of victualls, with the choice of many conserues of all +sorts for to eate, and of sundry sorts of very good wines. These things +beeing made knowne, they were commanded to stay aboord the Desire, +and on the sixt day of Nouember following, we went into an harbour, +which is called by the Spaniards, Aguada Segura, or Puerto Seguro." + +During the division of the booty, a mutiny broke out, especially in +the ship "Content," but was quelled. The Spaniards, to the number +of one hundred and ninety men and women, were set ashore. Ammunition +and arms were left them, and the English departed: taking with them +however from the Spanish boat two clever young Japanese, three boys +born in Manila, a Portuguese, and one Thomas de Ersola, a pilot from +Acapulco. The "Santa Ana" was burned on the nineteenth of November, +and the English turned toward home. That same night the "Content" +vanished and was seen no more. January 3, 1588, the Ladrones were +reached. They had the experiences with the natives that are so often +described by the Spaniards, iron being the usual article bartered +by the English. The natives are described as "of a tawny colour, and +maruellous fat, and bigger ordinarily of stature then the most part of +our men in England, wearing their haire maruellous long: yet some of +them haue it made vp, and tyed with a knot on the Crowne and some with +two knots, much like vnto their Images which we faw carued in wood, +and standing in the head of their boats, like vnto the Images of the +deuill." January 14, they reached the Philippines at Cabo del Santo +Espiritu, "which is of very great bignesse and length .... and it is +short of the chiefest Island of the Philippinas called Manilla, about +sixtie leagues. Manilla is vvel planted and inhabited with Spaniards, +to the number of sixe or seuen hundred persons: vvhich dvvell in +a tovvne vnvvalled, which hath three or foure Blocke-houses, part +made of vvood, and part of stone, being indeed of no great strength: +they haue one or tvvo small Gallies belonging to the Tovvne. It is +a very rich place of Gold, and many other commodities; and they haue +yeerely traffique from Alcapulco in Nueva Espanna, and also twenty or +thirtie shippes from China, and from the Sanguelos, which bring them +many sorts of marchandize. They bring great store of gold vvith them, +vvhich they traffique and exchange for siluer, and give vveight for +vveight. These Sanguelos are men of maruellous capacity, in deuising +and making all manner of things, especially in all handiecrafts +and sciences: and euery one is so expert, perfect, and skilfull in +his facultie, as fevv or no Christians are able to go beyond them +in that vvhich they take in hand. For drawing and imbroidering vpon +Satten, Silke, or Lavvne, either beast, fovvle, fish, or vvorme, for +liuelinesse and perfectnesse, both in Silke, Siluer, Gold, and Pearle, +they excell. Also the fourteenth day at night we entred the Straits +between the Island of Luçon, and the Island of Camlaia." The natives +imagining them Spaniards willingly traded their food with them. At +an anchorage Thomas Ersola, the Spanish pilot, was hanged for trying +to inform the Spanish of the English. The following on the customs +of the inhabitants as seen at the island of Capul is interesting, +and accords, with slight differences, with the Spanish records: + +"We roade for the space of nine dayes, about this Island of Capul, +where we had diuerse kinds of fresh victualls, with excellent fresh +water in euery bay, and great store of wood. The people of this +Island go almost all naked, and are tawny of colour. The men weare +onely a stroope about their wastes, of some kind of linnen of their +owne weauing, which is made of Plantan-leaues, and another stroope +comming from their backe vnder their twistes, Which couereth their +priuy parts, and is made fast to their girdles at their nauels; +which is this. Euery man and manchild among them, hath a nayle of +Tynne thrust quite through the head of his priuie part, being split +in the lower ende, and riuetted, and on the head of the nayle is as +it were a Crowne: which is driuen through their priuities when they +be yong, and the place groweth vp ag tine [sic], without any great +paine to the child: and they take this nayle out and in as occasion +serueth; and for the truth thereof, we our selues haue taken one of +these nayles from a Sonne of one of the Kings, which was of the age +of tenne yeeres, who did weare the same in his priuy member. This +custome was granted at the request of the women of the Country, +who finding their men to be giuen to the fovvle sinne of Sodomie, +desired fome remedie against that mischiefe, and obtained this before +named of the Magistrates. Moreouer all the males are circumcised, +hauing the fore skinne of their flesh cut avvay. These people vvholly +vvorshippe the Deuill, and oftentimes haue conference vvith him, +vvhich appeareth vnto them in moft vgly and monstrous shape." + +In this island Candish, or Cavendish, announced their nationality +to the natives--whom he had made pay tribute in "Hogges, Hennes, +Potatoes, and Cocos"--and their hostility to the Spaniards. The +natives promised "both themselues and all the Islands thereabout, +to ayde him, whensoeuer hee should come againe to ouercome the +Spaniards." Their tribute money was returned to them in token of +the Englishmen's hostility to the Spaniards. January 24 the English +coasted along Luzón, and ran northwest between that island and Masbat. + +"The eight and twentieth day, in the morning about seuen of the clocke, +riding at an anchor betwixt two Islands, wee espyed a Frigat vnder +her two Coarses, comming out betweene two other Islands, which (as wee +imagined) came from Manilla, sayling close aboord the shore, along the +maine Island of Panama. Here wee rode at anchor all that night, and +perceiued that certaine Spaniards (which came from Manilla to Ragaun, +to fetch a new shippe of the Kings, there builded) had disperfed their +Band into two or three parts, and kept great Watch in seuerall steedes, +with Fires, and shooting off their Pieces. This Island hath much plaine +Ground in it, in many places, and many faire and straight Trees doe +grow vpon it, fit for to make excellent good Masts for all sorts of +shippes. There are also Mynes of very fine Gold in it, which are in the +custodie of the Indians. And to the South-ward of this place, there +is another very great Island, which is not subdued by the Spaniards, +nor any other Nation. The people which inhabit it, are all Negros, +and the Island is called the Island of Negros; and is almost as bigge +as England, standing in nine degrees: The most part of it seemeth to +be very lowe Land, and by all likelyhood is very fruitfull. + +"The nine and twentieth day of January, about six of the clocke in the +morning wee set sayle, sending our Boat before, vntill it was two of +the clocke in the afternoone, passing all this time as it were through +a Strait, betwixt the laid two Islands of Panama, and the Island of +Negros; and about sixteene Leagues off, wee espyed a faire opening, +trending South-west and by South: at which time our Boat came aboord, +and our Generall sent commendations to the Spanish Captaine, which +wee came from the Euening before, by a Spaniard which wee had taken, +and willed him to provide a good store of Gold; for hee meant for to +see him with his company at Manilla within few yeeres; and that hee +did but want a bigger Boat to haue landed his men; or else hee would +haue seene him then; and so caused him to be let on shore." + +Thence the expedition passed through the Moluccas. At one of the +islands where they reprovisioned two Portuguese came to inquire of +"Don Antonio their King, then in England." These Portuguese declared +"that if their King Don Antonio, would come vnto them, they would +warrant him to haue all the Malucos at commandment, besides China, +Sangles, and the Isles of the Philippinas, and that he might be assured +to have all the Indians on his side that are in the countrey." The +sixteenth of May the Cape of Good Hope was sighted. August 23, +the Azores Islands hove in sight, and on September 9, they put into +Plymouth. A letter from the commander contains the following: + +"The matter of most profit vnto me, was a great ship of the Kings +vvhich I tooke at California, vvhich ship came from the Philippinas, +beeing one of the richest of merchandize that euer passed those +Seas, as the Kings Register and marchants accounts did shew: for +it did amount in value to * in Mexico to be sold. Which goods (for +that my Ships vvere not able to containe the least part of them) +I vvas inforced to set on fire. From the Cape of California, being +the vthermost part of all Nueua Espanna, I nauigated to the Islands +of the Philippinas, hard vpon the Coast of China; of which Countrey +I haue brought such intelligence as hath not been heard of in these +parts. The statlinesse and riches of vvhich Countrey I feare to make +report of, least I should not be credited: for if I had not knovvn +sufficiently the incomparable vvealth of that Countrey, I should +haue beene as incredulous thereof, as others vvill be rhat [sic] +haue not had the like experience." [166] + + +APPENDIX B: EARLY YEARS OF THE DUTCH IN THE EAST INDIES + +The voyages of the Dutch into the East Indies had important results for +both Spain and Portugal. While they concerned themselves principally +with Java and the islands of the Moluccas, they made incursions among +the Philippines, where they were a constant menace for many years. The +first two expeditions--that of Houtman, June 11, 1596-August 14, +1597; and that of van Neck and van Warwyck, May 1, 1598-May 30, +1600--did little but establish the custom and make beginnings in +the East India trade. The first was concerned mainly with Java, but +the second entered (with four of its eight vessels) the Moluccas, +and brought back a load of cloves. These two expeditions also marked +the beginning of troubles with the Portuguese and natives. They were +both by way of the Cape of Good Hope. + +VOYAGE OF OLIVER VAN NOORDT + +The first voyage of great importance was that of Oliver van +Noordt. In 1598 a commercial company contracted with him to conduct +five vessels through the Strait of Magellan for traffic on South +American coasts. This fleet sailed on September 13, 1598, going +first to Plymouth, England, where an English pilot, who had been with +Candish on his expedition, was engaged. After various fortunes along +the eastern South American coasts, during which about one hundred +men were lost, the fleet entered the Strait of Magellan November 5, +1599. Contentions between van Noordt and his vice-admiral resulted +in the latter's being marooned, and the elevation to his place of +Captain Pierre de Lint, while Lambert Biesman was made captain of +the "Concordia." The vice-admiral and his ship were lost on March 14, +1600, which with other losses, reduced the fleet to but two vessels. On +debouching from the strait the fleet cruised along the Chilean coast, +alternately trading and committing depredations, and seizing prizes, +and finally determined to go to the Philippines by way of the +Ladrones. On September 15, the latter islands were sighted. There +they met the same experience as the Spaniards from the thievishness +of the natives. "These people, both men and women, seem amphibious, +and to be able to live on water as well as on the land, so well do +they swim and dive. Five pieces of iron were thrown into the sea to +them for the pleasure of seeing them exercise themselves. One of them +was skilful enough to get all five of them, and in so short a time +that one can regard it as marvelous.... Their canoes are so well +made ... and are fifteen or twenty feet long. They are quite roomy +and good sailers. They do not turn about to tack, but place the helm +in what was the bow, and leave the sail, which is made of reed mats +and resembles a mizzen-sail, in its same position without changing +it." Thence the route to the Philippines was continued. "They are +called also the Manillas, from the name of the chief port, and the +city built by the Spaniards. + +"Some call them the islands of Luçon, because their chief +island is so named. It is said to be quite one hundred leagues in +circumference. There is located the city of Manille or Manilhe, the +capital of all these islands. They were formerly part of the crown +of China, which abandoned them for some slight pretext. After that +their laws and civilization were so poorly observed that they seemed +deadened when the Spaniards landed there. In fact, the inhabitants +there lived like beasts. Each one enslaved his neighbor, if he could, +and their chief occupation was mutual oppression. + +"Such a nature gave the Spaniards great facility in subduing them, +which was rendered greater, since these people were simple and very +stupid. As soon as one mentioned baptism to them, they ran to get it +in droves, and became Christians to the extent desired. However the +Ilocos and others, too, who are called Pintados did not cease to give +trouble to their new masters. + +"All these islands are densely populated and produce abundance of rice +and wine made from nypa. Deer, buffaloes, bulls, cows, swine, goats, +and other live-stock are found, although formerly they had none. But +now the care exercised by the Spaniards has made them so abundant, +that they yield in no way to Nouvelle Espagne. + +"There are also many civet-cats, and all sorts of fruit as in +China. They yield considerable quantities of honey and wax. They +even have gold, but although the islanders pay their tribute to the +Spaniards in gold, the latter have not as yet--that is in the year +1600--been able to ascertain where they get it, notwithstanding their +efforts. They are commencing to sow wheat there. Flour was formerly +brought from Japon. The islands also supplied quantities of ebony +and bamboo. + +"The Chinese engage extensively in trade there. They take all kinds +of merchandise there from China, namely, silks, cottons, china-ware, +gunpowder, sulphur, iron, steel, quicksilver, copper, flour, walnuts, +chestnuts, biscuits, dates, all sorts of stuffs, writing-desks, +and other curiosities. + +"The Spaniards load all this merchandise in Manila and export it +to Nouvelle Espagne, whence more than one and one-half millions of +silver in money and in bars is taken annually to the Philippines. This +silver is exchanged for gold, giving four livres of silver for one +of gold. But this traffic is not extensive, since there is enough +gold in Pérou and Chili. They prefer to traffic with the Chinese, +for their returns reach one thousand per cent. + +"The city of Manille is located in fourteen degrees of north +latitude. There is situated the residence of the Spanish governor, +who rules all the islands. The archbishop also lives there. He has +supreme authority in the ecclesiastical affairs of all the same +islands, where there are also three bishops suffragan to himself." + +On October 14, 1600, the Dutch sighted the cape of Espiritu +Santo, whence they steered toward Manila. On the sixteenth +their first encounter with the Spanish in the islands occurred, +but the Dutch reassured the latter by flying a Spanish pennant, +and declaring themselves to be French commissioned by the Spanish +monarch. Consequently they were allowed to buy provisions freely, +in return for which the natives demanded money. + +"The majority of these Indians were naked. Some wore a cloth +garment, while some were even clad like Spaniards. The chiefs, who +belong to the former race of commanders of the country, and who yet +remember that fact, have their skin cut or pricked very skilfully +and singularly. These cuts or pricks have been made with iron and +never fade. + +"Besides this is a wretched race, who have no weapons, so that the +Spaniards tyrannize over them at will. They make them pay a tribute +of three reals [sic], that is, a trifle less than three Dutch florins, +per head, all men or women above twenty years. + +"There are very few Spaniards in each district. They have a priest, +whom the inhabitants of the place revere greatly, so much so that +only lack of priests prevents them from holding all these islands +in servitude; for even in places where there are neither priests nor +Spaniards they have made the people pay tribute." + +The Spaniards at last became suspicious of the strangers and +demanded to see their commission, upon which the one given by the +prince of Orange was produced, whereat great consternation reigned, +and the Dutch were forbidden more provisions. The latter continuing +their course entered the Manila strait on October 24, anchoring near +Capul. On landing near here, one of the crew, Jean Caleway [i.e., John +Calleway], an Englishman, and a musician, was somehow left behind, +and it was conjectured that the natives had seized him. November 1, +the vessels left Capul for Manila, sailing among the various islands, +and committing some depredations on Spanish, native, and Chinese +vessels. From a Chinese pilot, van Noordt gained certain information +concerning Manila. + +"The houses of the city of Manila are built close together. The city is +surrounded by a rampart supported by a wall. More than fifteen thousand +Chinese live outside its walls. They engage in their business together, +and are given to various industries. In addition more than four hundred +vessels go there annually from China, from the city and province of +Chincheo, laden with silks and all sorts of merchandise. They take back +silver money in return. They come at a certain fixed time, namely, +after the month of December or between Christmas and Easter. At the +beginning of this present month of November ... two Japanese vessels +also generally sail to Manila, laden with iron, flour, bacon, and +other food.... + +"The walls of the city of Manila and the houses are built of stone, in +the modern fashion. It is so large and extensive that the Spaniards +have had a second wall built inside the city of less size than +the first, within which to retire in case of need.... It was made +especially in consideration of the Japanese, of whom the Spaniards +are very suspicious. + +"The governor of all the islands, who resembles a viceroy, lives in +Manille, as does also the archbishop. Besides the cathedral there are +several other beautiful churches. All the inhabitants of these islands +are either Christians or pagans. As for the Moros or Mahometans, +they have all been exterminated." + +The Dutch continued their depredations, and sent a letter by an +Indian to the governor, notifying him that they were going to visit +him. Biesman was sent on a scouting expedition, from which he finally +returned, after having been considered lost by some of the Dutch. + +"The island of Manille, called Luçon by its inhabitants, is larger +than England and Scotland together. [167] There are other various +islands about it, also very large." + +From a Japanese vessel some provisions were obtained, and the vessel +was allowed to continue its course to Manila. The depredations of +the Dutch were called to a sudden halt by the two Spanish vessels +sent out under Dr. Morga on the fourteenth of December, 1600, when +ensued the fight described in Morga. [168] Van Noordt inspired his +men with new courage by threatening to blow up the vessel unless they +fought more bravely. The Dutch found "a little silver box containing +little tickets filled with prayers and devotions to various saints, +to obtain their protection in times of peril," on the dead body of a +Spaniard. "The two Spanish vessels had about five hundred men, both +Spaniards and Indians, and ten pieces of cannon." The Dutch flagship +finally returned to Holland by way of Borneo, and Cape of Good Hope, +reaching Rotterdam August 26, 1601. [169] + + * * * * * + +Etienne van der Hagen's expedition (April 6, 1599--July 12, 1601) +reached the island of Amboina, where they besieged the Portuguese +fort there for two months, but were unable to take it. They made an +alliance with the natives before leaving against the Portuguese. The +Dutch fleet consisted of three vessels, and was sent out by the Dutch +East India Company for trading purposes. + +The first expedition of Paul van Caerden (the Blancardo of the Spanish +accounts) occupied December 21, 1599--October 11, 1601, and was sent +out by the Nouvelle Compagnie des Brabançons. The fleet--four vessels +in all--left Holland in charge of Admiral Pierre Both. In their +company sailed four vessels of the old company, but they separated +almost immediately. They all went by way of the Cape of Good Hope. At +Bantam in Java two vessels of the four were sent, under command of van +Caerden, to trade for pepper. The two ships coasted the shore of the +island of Sumatra, stopping at various places, without much success, +on account of the tricks of the natives in their trade, until they +reached Achem in the northern part of the island. There they had +trouble with the natives which was instigated by a Portuguese priest, +and after seizing some pepper, which act they justified, returned +to Bantam in Java, where their cargo was completed. Van Caerden lost +twenty-seven men on this voyage, but brought back ten others who had +been held prisoners at Achem. + +The second voyage of van Neck, or Nek (June 28, 1600--July 15, 1604), +followed, as the preceding expedition, the African route to Bantam, +where it met two Dutch vessels of the new trading company. The fleet of +six vessels had separated by common consent, October 10, 1600, in order +to facilitate their trade. Van Neck in the vessels with him, skirted +Celebes, and went to Ternate, where he was cordially received by the +natives. There the usual troubles with the Portuguese began, which +ended in an indecisive naval battle. Shortly after, the Dutch left for +China, leaving six men to watch their interests among the natives. "On +the nineteenth [of August] they anchored near the island of Coyo, +one of the Philippines. There they sent a small boat ashore. Its crew +learned that the inhabitants were savages, who paid tribute to the +Spaniards. On the twenty-second they anchored near another large island +of the Philippines, whose name cannot be found on the maps. It was +called Langhairs-eiland, or Longhair Island, because its inhabitants +wore their hair long, and hanging below the shoulders." September 20 +they reached the Chinese coast, and on the twenty-seventh sighted "a +large city, built almost like Spanish cities," which they found to be +Macao. There unfortunate encounters with the Portuguese lost the Dutch +some men; and failing in their efforts there, they went to Patane, +where they traded some pepper. Thence the return voyage to Holland by +way of the Cape of Good Hope was made. The other three vessels of his +fleet arrived six weeks later. As consorts to van Neck's six vessels +two other vessels had left Holland on the same date, also sent by +the new trading company. After several mutinies they reached Sumatra, +whence after troubles with the king of Achem, the two vessels left, +leaving twelve of their men prisoners. The efforts of the latter to +escape were fruitless and even the efforts (in 1602) of one of the +vessels of Admiral Heemskerk, commander of a Dutch trading fleet, +were unable to rescue the prisoners. + +April 5, 1601, a Dutch fleet of five vessels, under Wolphart Harmansan, +set out with another fleet under Jaques van Heemskerk. On May 8, the +two fleets separated, the former reaching the Bantam channel December +26, 1601. Several naval encounters with the Portuguese fleet under +Andrea Furtado de Mendoza resulted in partial victory for the Dutch, +who, after refitting at Bantam, took their course through the Moluccas, +and then returned to Bantam and Holland, reaching that country, +April 4, 1603. + +Georges Spilberg left Holland May 5, 1601, with three vessels. Rounding +the cape, he cruised along until reaching Ceylon, whence he went +to Sumatra in September of 1602. At Sumatra he joined some English +vessels, and all remained together, and opposed the Portuguese. April +3, 1603, the Dutch and English left Sumatra and went to Java. At Bantam +they were joined by Admiral Wybrant Waarwyk with nine vessels. On June +30, Admiral Heemskerk anchored at the same place with a Portuguese +prize. After effecting their trade, the vessels returned to Holland, +and Spilberg reached that country May 24, 1604. + +Corneille de Veen, in command of nine vessels, sailed from Holland +June 17, 1602, and was joined at sea by three others. April 15, 1603, +Sumatra was sighted, and the fleet anchored at Bantam in Java on the +twenty-ninth. Thence part of the fleet sailed for China. The fleet +captured near Macao a Portuguese vessel richly laden. They also +fought with a Siamese vessel, mistaking it for an enemy. Leaving +Bantam finally on their homeward trip, on January 27, 1604, they +reached Holland the thirtieth of August. + +The expedition under Wybrandt van Waarwyk marked a new progression +in Dutch trading in Eastern seas. His expedition established +Bantam in Java more fully as the chief Dutch trading-post and +base of supplies. The number of vessels at his command (fifteen) +enabled him to despatch them in different directions to pursue their +trade. The hostility to, and competition with, the Portuguese became +more marked, and the entrance into India (through Ceylon), Siam, +and China, more pronounced. This expedition left Holland July 17, +1602, being joined on the nineteenth by other vessels. Near the +Cape of Good Hope three vessels separated with orders to proceed +directly to Achem in Sumatra. At that place they met three vessels, +which had left Holland May 30, 1602, and whose commander Sebald de +Weert received commission from Waarwyk as vice-admiral of the six +vessels. After negotiations at Achem, the six vessels established +relations and promised assistance against the Portuguese, in Ceylon, +but they almost ended by the massacre of the vice-admiral and a number +of his men. Engagements with the Portuguese through these seas, +and more or less successful attempts at trading and establishing +themselves marked the progress of these vessels, until the return of +three of them to Holland in the latter part of 1604. The main body of +the fleet had experiences about similar to the above vessels, singly +and in company, cruising through the East Indian seas, trading for +pepper, cinnamon, silks, and other products. The Moluccas and the +Philippines were generally given a wide berth, the Dutch seeking to +establish themselves fully on portions of the mainland and in Sumatra +and Java. François Wittert, who was later commander of a fleet, was +made chief commissary at Bantam and given detailed instructions. The +admiral finally reached Holland June 4, 1607, with several vessels. + +The expedition in charge of Etienne van der Hagen (or Haagen), that +set out from Holland late in 1603 and early in 1604, had also decisive +results that more completely established the Dutch power in the East +Indies. This expedition was destined to come more intimately in contact +with the Portuguese and Spaniards than any former expedition. From +this time and even before, the Dutch expeditions overlapped, and +Dutch vessels in the Eastern seas were by no means rare. This fleet +(the second voyage of van der Hagen) comprised twelve vessels and +twelve hundred men. Its course was by way of Goa, Calicut, Cochin, +and Ceylon, to Sumatra and Java, reaching the post at Bantam December +31, 1604. There, shortly after, some English vessels were met. On +January 17, 1605, the principal vessels of the fleet left for the +Moluccas. February 21, they anchored at Amboina, where they were about +to storm the Portuguese fort, when the commander capitulated. "After +several conferences between the Portuguese commander's deputies +and the admiral, it was resolved that all the unmarried Portuguese +should retire, and that those married could be free to remain, if +they took the oath of allegiance to the States-general and to Prince +Maurice. Each one was allowed to take his gun or musket, but all +the cannon, ammunition, and arms of the king were to remain in the +fort." The admiral and fifty men went to the captured fort, where +they ran up the Dutch colors. The fort and island had contained six +hundred Portuguese. Forty-six Portuguese families remained and took +the oath. "This victory was considerable, not only because of its +slight cost, no blood having been shed, but because this place and +this island were of great importance." Thence five Dutch vessels went +to Tidore, where the Portuguese lost two vessels in a sea fight. Then +the Portuguese fort was attacked, which was taken May 19, 1605, with +a loss of two Dutchmen and seventy-three Portuguese. The Portuguese, +five hundred in number, took the boats offered them and set out for +the Philippines. "By this last victory, the Portuguese were driven +from all the Moluccas, and had nothing more there, except a small +fort in the island of Soler, near Timer." The conquered fort was +destroyed. Meanwhile other vessels of the fleet cruised about Sumatra, +Java, Malacca, and neighboring places, trading and seeking to check +the Portuguese. Shortly after June of 1607, the Spaniards, two hundred +and fifty in number, attacked one of the Dutch and Ternatan forts, +but were repulsed. On the desertion of the Tidore fort by the Dutch, +seven hundred Spaniards returned to it. Thus the Dutch continued to +strengthen their hold throughout the Indies. + +The expedition under command of Admiral Corneille Matelief (1605-1608) +was remarkable chiefly for its siege of Malacca, and later its +manipulations in the Moluccas and in China. The fleet was composed of +eleven vessels and one thousand three hundred and fifty-seven men, +and cost 1,952,282 livres. Great trouble was experienced by the +admiral in the intoxication and excesses of his men, which led to +insubordination, during the entire course of the expedition. Also in +all parts he met a great unwillingness among the natives for work and +the coming to definite conclusions, the latter exercising duplicity +and at times treachery in their dealings with the Dutch. On March +22, 1606, the fleet sighted Sumatra, after hearing of the successes +in Amboina and Tidore. Going to the mainland they made agreements +or treaties with the king of Johore, clause ten of which reads: +"Neither of the two parties shall make peace with the king of Spain, +without the consent of the other." The succeeding siege of Malacca +resulted in failure, and on August 24, 1606, the Dutch retired after +losing two of their ships. The Portuguese were in charge of Andrea +Furtado de Mendoza. On the return of the Dutch to Sumatra and Java, +they met the great Portuguese fleet consisting of eighteen galleons, +four galleys, one caravel, and twenty-three fustas, with over three +thousand men--the largest fleet ever seen in the Indias--and in +the combat captured and destroyed four galleons, although with +some considerable loss to themselves. The Portuguese prisoners +taken formed lengthy material for debates between the Portuguese +and Dutch. On December 6, 1606, the admiral determined to go to the +Moluccas with six vessels, and to send the others to Achem to load +cargo for Holland. Reaching those islands after anchoring at Bantam, +the Dutch negotiated with the natives for their aid against the +Spaniards garrisoned in Ternate and Tidore. At Amboina, the admiral +"learned that the soldiers of the garrison were living there in great +debauchery, and that they became intoxicated, and nearly every man had +his concubine. On that account the inhabitants were greatly shocked +and were losing all their affection for the Dutch. They said that the +Portuguese married women among them, by which the two nations were +united. But since there were no marriages with the Dutch, the two races +could not be bound by affection." Besides the natives wished settlers +and not new men continually, whom they did not know. In consequence +the Dutch were permitted to marry the native women. Skirmishes with +the Spaniards resulted in little gain for the Dutch, and finally the +fleet sailed for China, after passing among a few of the Philippines, +where they entered into various relations and had various adventures, +trying ever to establish a fixed trade. Thence the vessels went in +different directions and on different missions toward the Dutch base +at Bantam. At Bantam Admiral Paul van Caerden anchored on January 5, +1608, to whom Matelief communicated the necessity of first attending +to Molucca affairs, giving him also information and advice concerning +those islands and the Dutch and Spaniards there. Shortly after Admiral +Matelief returned to Holland, where he anchored on September 2, +1608. Admiral Matelief drew up while on this expedition a good résumé +of Dutch aspirations in the East Indies that shows the compelling +motive in their expeditions thither. This memorial is as follows. + + * * * * * + +Memoir by Admiral C. Matelief, on the subject of the condition and +the commerce of the Indies + +When I consider the condition of our country, and the wars that afflict +it, on the part of an enemy so powerful as Albert of Austria, who +is sustained by the house of Austria, and by his own house of Spain, +it seems to me that one cannot be more assured of the prosperity of +affairs in the Indias, than by leaving them solely in the hands of +the directors [of the trading company]. + +The Spaniards and the Portuguese are our adversaries. More than a +century ago they began to establish themselves there. They have gained +an entrance into several countries, where they have fortresses, many +men, and an established government. Consequently they are enabled to +attend to their business with greater certainty and by more convenient +methods than we, for we have to bring men from Holland, who become +weakened by the fatigues of the voyage, while the subjects of the +Portuguese, who live in the country, are fresh and full of health. + +For, although the Portuguese have an insufficient number of men in +the Indias, to attend to all matters that arise, and at the same +time defend themselves against our nation, they can send men there +much easier than we. Vessels from Portugal are obliged to go only as +far as Goa, where their men disembark and rest. Then they form their +fleets from them; and the other Spaniards who come from the Manilles +do the same. + +If, then, we would also establish ourselves advantageously and solidly +in the Indias, we must necessarily have some station, where we may +be received and free, on our arrival from Holland. This would be the +means of great profits. Refreshments could be found there ready for the +crews and for the vessels. That would increase our reputation among the +Indian princes, who as yet have not dared repose entire confidence in +us. The natives are sufficiently convinced that the Dutch are a good +race, and more gentle and tractable than the Spaniards. "But," they +say, "what good does that do us? The Dutch come here in passing, and +only while on their journey. As soon as their vessels are laden, they +return. After that we are abandoned to the Spaniards and Portuguese, +against whom we are powerless to defend ourselves. They come to pounce +upon us, because we have traded with the Dutch, their enemies. On the +other hand, if we attach ourselves to the Spanish, they, at least, +protect us in our needs. On the contrary, although the Dutch should +come with forces sufficient to protect us, we fear nothing from +them; they do not treat us as enemies. Even though we trade with the +Portuguese, the Dutch allow us to live quietly, and we have only to +be careful of those who molest us. Consequently our best plan is to +favor the Portuguese, lest they annihilate us." + +Such are the reflections of all the Indians. Besides the Portuguese do +their best to persuade them that we have no forces, that we are but +a rabble, who scarcely have fixed habitations in our own country, +and quite far from being able to make lasting settlements in the +Indias. As for them, they are established there with men who wish to +live there. Therefore it is necessary for us to seek means by which +to gain the Indians, and make them understand that we have forces, +and wish also to become established among them. If not, one must +recognize that our affairs will prosper ill. + +The commerce of the Indias consists chiefly: 1. In pepper, which +is loaded at Bantam, Jahor, Patane, Queda, and Achin; 2. in cloves, +which are loaded at Amboina and the Moluccas; 3. in nutmeg and mace, +or the rind of the nutmeg, which are loaded at Banda; 4. in the +commerce of Cambaie; 5. in the commerce of the Coromandel coast; +6. in the commerce of both the Chinese and Japanese coasts. + +If the commerce of each of these is not managed by one nation, whether +the Portuguese or others, it will happen that one will destroy the +other. It will cause the price of merchandise in the Indias to advance, +and a low price will be paid for them in Europe. + +However, in regard to pepper, it is impossible for us to get the +commerce all to ourselves; for, besides the Portuguese, the English +have also undertaken the navigation to Bantam. They have their +trading-posts and houses, and are trading there peacefully, while we +are at war against the Portuguese. We defend Bantam and the English +together, while they enjoy there the profits that cost them neither +defenses, blood, nor any annoyance. + +[The king of Bantam is too young to negotiate with, and too much +money would be spent uselessly. For the natives throughout the Indies +would not hesitate to violate any treaty in any peril or to their +own profit.] + +Besides we are at peace with the English, and it would be unjust to +try to find means to exclude them from a commerce which they have +already commenced. But measures can easily be taken to prevent them +from entering into the commerce of other spices. In regard to pepper, +we would have to make it serve as a ballast. By this means we could +give it so cheaply that the other nations, finding scarcely any profit +in it longer, would be obliged to cease trading in it themselves, +without counting on our part our profits from the other merchandise. + +For, according to my opinion, we could easily attract all the commerce +of nutmegs and mace. For this purpose, instead of seizing Banda, +and building a fort there, which would cost considerable, and give +us a bad reputation among the Indian princes, the following is what +I think that we should do. + +As the king of Macassar is a powerful prince, whose country is densely +populated, and well supplied with rice and all manner of food; and as +he furnishes them to Malacca and Banda: it would be necessary to make +a treaty with him, and to send him three vessels with two hundred men +for his country. This number, together with the Macassar men, would be +sufficient to attack Banda, and we would promise the king to deliver +it into his hands, without claiming any recompense for this aid, +except that no other nation but our own could load merchandise there, +and that the nutmegs and mace would be taken annually at a fixed price, +namely, at the selling price at the time of the expedition. + +[Matelief is certain that the king of Macassar will acquiesce, +and would also probably be willing to build a trading-house for +the Dutch. Other conditions for the security of Banda might also be +imposed in the treaty.] + +Of the clove-trade, it is very difficult for us to render ourselves +masters. We have the product of Amboina, Luho, and Cambelo; but not +that yielded by the Moluccas. The only means of obtaining it is to +drive the Spaniards from Ternate, and it can easily be imagined that +the task is not easy. However I shall not hesitate to write here my +thought concerning the matter. + +The thing does not appear impossible to me, if one wishes to build on a +firm foundation. This would require a return to the Malacca affair. For +had the Portuguese lost Malacca, they could not easily go from Goa to +reënforce the Moluccas; and I do not think there would be much trouble +in preventing the sending of supplies to Ternate from the Manilles. + +First, we should have to send three or four vessels to the king of +Mindanao, whose country is densely inhabited, and who, as report +runs, can launch fifty caracoas. All this fleet would go to Panama or +Panati [i.e., Panay] which is near the Manilles, and where there is +a place named Otting [i.e., Oton], guarded by but eighteen Spanish +soldiers with about the same number of other inhabitants, so that +in all there are but forty whites. This place would be destroyed, +or if the blacks of Mindanao wished to keep it, it would be given +them, for it is a country abounding in rice and several other foods, +which are transported to Ternate. + +Thence I would suggest going directly to the Manilles to destroy +all the vessels in their ports, so that they could not aid +Ternate. Immediately a vessel of one hundred and sixty or two hundred +tons would be sent back to Mindanao, which would cross with the king's +caracoas to the strait of Tagima, to capture the vessels that should +try still to go to Ternate, because there is no other route. After +capturing one or two of them, no other vessels would dare to try it, +so that Ternate would perish from famine. For did we try at present +to overpower the island by force, I believe that the Spaniards could +fortify it so strongly, and have so many men there, that large armies +would be required to drive them out. + +It would be difficult for them to provide Ternate with cloth, for the +little taken there now is brought by the Chinese to the Manilles. This +want of cloth would not fail to trouble the inhabitants, and it would +have to be sent from Malacca, and that could not be done easily. If +a galley could also be taken to Ternate, it would greatly annoy the +Spaniards.... + +The commerce of China depends moreover upon Malacca. If the Portuguese +were driven from that place, the Chinese would have to give up that +traffic.... + +The commerce of cotton stuffs at Coromandel is of great importance, +for all the inhabitants of the Indias dress in those stuffs, and must +have them at any price. There are different styles for each nation, +according to their taste, and they make them so in different places +... If Malacca were taken from the Portuguese, they would have no +further favorable opportunity for the trade in cloth.... + +If no means are found to besiege Malacca again, the Portuguese might +make use of their fustas to hinder our trade with Coromandel. For, +since this entire coast is low, and the fustas draw but little +water, they could always station themselves between the shore and our +vessels. Besides it is very dangerous for vessels to anchor there. If +the enemy is spry, he could carry the news to Goa in one week, whence +they could easily despatch their fleets against us. + +It is certain that, if the Portuguese could be driven from Malacca, +they would have to renounce trade on the Coromandel coast; for +they would have no safe course, should they wish to get cloth, +and they could gain nothing, for the expense would overbalance the +profit. Consequently, I believe that all the commerce of the Portuguese +in the East Indies depends on Malacca, and that, in order to cut it, +one must take that place. + +After that, there is no doubt that the inhabitants of Bantam would +not be reasonable, when they would see us in fixed establishments, +and would understand that since the English had no other commerce in +the Indias than that of pepper, they would not care to make frequent +voyages, or great expenses. The pepper of Jambeo, Andragyri, and +other points, that is taken to Bantam, would be taken to Malacca, +where, also, cloth for the return cargo would be found. + +I have not learned whether the Portuguese have any strength at +Bengale. All whom I have heard speak of that country say that a good +commerce can be obtained there.... + +It would be advisable to send two vessels to Arracan to try to +trade. Besides the king is very anxious for us to go there. A +Portuguese, one Philippe de Britto, has a fort there, with a +garrison of eighty men. This fort is fifty leagues inland, and Britto +holds the entire country in check. Although the king of Arracan is +powerful, he has been unable as yet to find means for driving out +this Portuguese. This alarms all the kingdom of Pegu, especially +since it is annoyed by civil wars. That country has immense wealth, +especially in precious gems. + +I do not believe that anything can be done with Cambaie while the +Portuguese have forts on the Malabar coast, and while the king is not +better disposed toward us. We must wait until he knows us better, +and until his mind is disabused concerning the Spaniards. For, +until he gives us permission to trade in his ports, we would always +encounter great danger, since large vessels can not enter. Besides +that country is so near Goa, that the Portuguese would be notified as +soon as we arrived there, and would pounce upon us with their forces, +so that we could hope for neither help nor protection. + +All the above points to Malacca's importance, for the establishment +that we wish to make in the Indias. Therefore, for that reason, we +should reflect on it well. For, in short, it is time now for us to +assure ourselves of a fixed place and of a retreat. And this place +or that place that one might select, would cost immense sums before +it could reach the present condition of Malacca. Besides it will be +very difficult to find a place so advantageous. + + * * * * * + +The second expedition of Paul van Caerden (1606-1609) consisted of +eight vessels, equipped at a cost of 1,825,135 livres. Its chief +result was the capture of the Spanish fort at Machian and the two +captures of the commander, who finally died in prison at Manila. The +expedition sailed April 20, 1606, and shortly afterward began to have +trouble with the Portuguese. After rounding the cape they besieged +and took a Portuguese trading-post, after which they cruised past +Goa, Calcutta, and other places, finally sighting Sumatra, January 5, +1607, and anchoring at Bantam, January 6. There they met the Matelief +expedition. With a half-hearted following of Matelief's advice, van +Caerden anchored at Amboina in March, whence on May 10, he started +for Ternate. His capture by the Spanish of Ternate, the taking of the +Spanish fort at Machian--the place "most abounding in cloves of all +the Moluccas"--and other operations on land and sea followed. The +expedition finally left Ternate on August 3, 1608, and by way of +Bantam, reached Holland August 6, 1609, with a portion of its vessels. + +The few years succeeding, events came thick and fast. Dutch +interests in the Indias multiplied. The taking of Malacca was +again considered. Resistance to Portuguese and Spanish interests +became even more pronounced, while the English and the Dutch came +to definite agreements, between their respective trading companies +as to trade in the Indias. The Dutch opened trade communication with +Japan. They became thoroughly established in the Moluccas, in Amboina, +and in the islands of Banda. The Spanish under Governor Juan de Silva +of Manila, took the offensive, and opposed the Dutch vigorously, +maintaining certain forts in Ternate, from which the efforts of the +Dutch failed to dislodge them. A Dutch fleet of thirteen vessels, with +Pierre Verhoeven as Admiral, and Francois Wittert as vice-admiral, +left Holland in 1607. Their course carried them along the shores of +India, before Malacca, and among the islands of Sumatra, Java, and +others. They had communication with vessels of other Dutch commanders, +among them those of the ill-fated van Caerden, who was exchanged by the +Spaniards March 23, 1610, proclaimed general of all the Moluccas July +1, 1610, and shortly after captured again by the Spaniards. They had +certain negotiations also with the English. At Borneo, Amboina, Banda, +Ternate, and their neighboring islands many important negotiations +were carried on, looking ever to the strengthening and prepetuation +of Dutch power. The war with the Banda islanders was at length +settled satisfactorily, although it required a number of years. In +this period came the twelve years' truce between Spain and Holland, +or the States-general, but notwithstanding active hostilities between +the two nations occurred afterward, the defeat and capture of Wittert's +vessels near Manila Bay occurring after news of the truce had reached +the Indias. In September of 1610 two vessels returning to Holland met +seven vessels under Admiral Both, in which were the first Dutch women +sent to the Indias. About 1613 the Spanish force in the Moluccas is +stated as follows: + +"... The Spaniards have control of the city of Gammalamma, in the +island of Ternate, which they took from the inhabitants. They call +it Nuestra Signora di Rosario. It has a wall and bastions built of +stone. It is abundantly provided with cannon and war-supplies, which +are sent from the Manilles. + +"It is at present garrisoned by 200 Spaniards and 90 Papaugos [i.e., +Pampangos (?)] who are inhabitants of the Philippines, who are well +disciplined in arms, and serve as Spanish soldiers. There are also +30 Portuguese families, 60 or 80 Chinese families, who engage in +different trades, and 50 or 60 Christian Molucca families. + +"They have another fort between Gammalamma and Malaia, called +Sts. Peter and Paul, located on an elevation, and mounted with six +pieces of cannon. There are thirty-three cast-iron cannon in the first +fort. The garrison of the latter consists generally of 27 Spaniards, +20 Papaugos, and some other people from the Manilles. + +"They possess all the island of Tidore, where they have three forts, +namely, that of Taroula, located in the large city where the king +lives. It is stronger than the other two by its situation, which is +on an elevation. Its garrison is usually 50 Spaniards, and 8 or 10 +Papaugos. It has ten large cast-iron cannon. + +"The second fort is the old Portuguese castle taken by Corneille +Bastiaansz, which the Spaniards have retaken. It has 13 Spaniards, +with several islanders, and 2 pieces of cannon. + +"The third is named Marieco, and is in sight of Gammalamma....Its +garrison consists of 14 Castilians and a few Papaugos, and it has two +pieces of cannon....The wars have somewhat depopulated the country...." + +[The Spaniards also possessed several forts in Gilolo: Sabougo, taken +from the Dutch by Juan de Silva in 1611; Gilolo, also taken from the +Dutch by the same governor; and Aquilamo. All these forts contained +light garrisons. On the island of Moro, the Spaniards had the forts +Jolo, Isiau, and Joffougho. They usually maintained in the sea a +number of vessels. Juan de Silva is described as a brave, energetic, +and diplomatic man. The second capture of van Caerden proved a decided +blow to the Dutch, because of the loss of certain important papers.] + +The Dutch power in the Moluccas was as follows: + +"We have three forts at Ternate: that of Malaia, or Orange, commenced +by Admiral Matelief, where the king of Ternate lives; that of Toluco, +or Hollande, lying at the east end of the island, on an elevation, +one-half legua north of that of Malaia, built of stone; for fear lest +the Spaniards occupy this post, and for the same reason to send there +to live a portion of the superfluous men at Malaïa. + +"Our third fort is that of Tacomma or Willemstad, lying at the +northwest. It was constructed by Admiral Simon Jansz Hoen...." + +[In the island of Machian, they possessed the fort of Taffalo and +Tabillola. In Bachian they had a fort called Gammedource. All these +forts were adequately garrisoned.] + +By 1627 affairs were still more flourishing and Batavia in Bantam, +on the island of Java, had already been made a base of supplies. Spain +still maintained forts at Ternate in that year. Signs of a desire to +attack the Spaniards in the Philippines began to be manifest. + +In regard to Wittert's expedition, defeat, and death, the following +has been translated and condensed from Journal de l'amiral Wittert, +1607-10 (Liége, 1875), a small pamphlet in the library of Columbia +University, New York. + +"In the year 1607, the Company of the East Indies despatched thirteen +vessels to find the Portuguese fleet, and probably to attack it, off +Mosambique or in neighboring waters. Pierre Willemsz, of Amsterdam, +was appointed admiral of this fleet; and François de Wittert, of the +ancient baronial family of that name--seignior of Hoogeland, Emeeclaar, +etc.--was made vice-admiral and president of the council-in-ordinary, +with full power to take the place of the admiral, who was very old +and infirm." The flagships of these officers were of eight hundred +and one thousand tons, respectively. The entire fleet carried two +thousand eight hundred to two thousand nine hundred men, forty-two +pieces of brass artillery and two hundred and eighty-three of +iron, one hundred stone-mortars, with the necessary munitions, and +provisions for more than three years. This armament cost ten million +eight hundred livres. The fleet set sail from the Texel on December +22, 1607, and reached "the fort of Mosambique" on the twenty-eighth +of July following. The Dutch besieged the fort, but were obliged to +retreat (August 13). "In this siege 30 of our men were killed, and 85 +wounded. We fired 2,250 cannon-shots at this fortress, which is the +most important one possessed by the Portuguese in the East Indies; +it has four bastions and three ramparts. But after this siege, it +was almost entirely ruined, and the Portuguese power is destroyed, +especially as regards the puissant empire of the Abissinians, whose +emperor is named Preter-Jan [i.e., Prester John]." On November 5, +1608, the Dutch fleet reached Sumatra, where a naval battle with +some Portuguese vessels ensued. In January, 1609, Wittert went, +with some of the ships, to Johor, and aided the king of that state +to resist the Portuguese. On February 15, the fleet anchored at +Bantam, and on April 8, at Nera, one of the isles of Banda, where +they built a fort. Here, on May 22, the admiral and many of his +officers were treacherously assassinated by the natives. Here the +journal ends. Another and later entry reads: "Letters from Moluque +[Maluco] bring the news that on June 12, 1610, the admiral François +Wittert, while having some junks unloaded at Manila, was surprised by +the Spanish and slain in the combat. He was attacked by more than 12 +vessels at once, but defended himself for a long time. The 'Amsterdam' +was finally captured by four ships which attacked it at once--one of +which, however, the Dutch blew up--and was taken to Manila with 51 +dead on board, including the admiral; the yacht 'Faucon' had 34 dead, +and all its officers were slain except two--Piérre Gervits, master +of the yacht, and Piérre Hertsing--who were wounded. The 'Faucon' +also was carried away, with 22 dead. [170] The Spaniards made 120 +prisoners on the two ships. As for the other vessels in their company +the yacht 'Aigle' was blown up; the 'Paon' and the shallop 'Delft' +escaped. It is not exactly known whither these vessels have gone; +but it is believed that they went to Patan." + +With the increase of Dutch power in the Indias, complications +naturally multiplied. The year spent by Pierre van den Broeck +in the eastern seas, saw conflicts on the Indian coast, in Java, +against the English and Javanese, and also with the Portuguese. Van +den Broeck was in the service of the Dutch Trading Company for over +seventeen years. He went first to the Indias in the expedition under +Gerard Reyust, which left Holland May 3, 1613. On June 1, 1615, +he embarked with Admiral Verhagen for the Moluccas. He played an +important part in the establishment of Batavia in 1619, and in the +troubles with the English and Javanese. The truth of the inadequacy +of the natives against the more progressive races was proved again, +as it had previously been proved by the experiences of Portuguese +and Spanish. A siege of Batavia in 1629, by the Javanese failed in +its purpose. Van den Broeck returned to Holland June 6, 1630. + +The second Dutch voyage to the East Indies under command of Georges +Spilberg sailed from Holland August 8, 1614, with six vessels. Its +object was chastisement of the Spanish. Reaching the Strait of +Magellan, March 28, 1615, after many adventures with the Portuguese +along the Brazilian coast, the fleet made the passage, and debouched +into the South Sea on May 6. Thence they coasted the western shores of +South America, and as far as Acapulco in New Spain. Near Lima a sea +fight with the Spanish occurred, in which the latter were worsted, +and three ships destroyed. When some of the Spanish who were in the +water called piteously for help, after saving the first and second +pilot, and a few sailors, "we left the remainder to the mercy of the +waves." The chronicle adds "Nevertheless some of the sailors killed +several who were swimming, and struggling against death--which they did +in disobedience to their orders." At Acapulco, the Spanish received the +Dutch well and some change of prisoners was effected. On November 18, +1615, the fleet turned westward, and sighted the Ladrones by January +1, 1616. On February 9, the cape of Espiritu Santo was sighted, and +on the 19th, under the guidance of native pilots, they sailed toward +Manila Bay, and anchored that same day near Luzón. "Our intention +was to make some Spaniard prisoner, in order to gain more detailed +information of what had been told us at Capul, namely, that a fleet had +been awaiting us for many days at the Manilles, and we wished eagerly +to learn more particular news of it." It was learned that the Spanish +fleet under Juan de Silva had gone to the Moluccas to aid the Spanish +there. Consequently, the Dutch fleet, after an ineffectual attempt +to exchange prisoners at Manila, went (March 10) to the Moluccas. On +the way they received assurance of the hatred in and about Mindanao +for the Spaniards, and their willingness to join the Dutch. + +Reaching the Moluccas they cruised about for some time, and finally +two of the vessels were sent back to Holland, reaching that country, +July 1, 1617. With them they took the celebrated Jacques le Maire +who had attempted to find a new passage to the South Sea, below the +Strait of Magellan. As his voyage was not for the trading company +which enjoyed the monopoly of trade in the Indias, his ship was +confiscated. He died on the passage home. [171] + +Although the Dutch were later in their explorations and conquests +throughout the Indias and neighboring regions than other nations, +their activity carried them to all the places visited or conquered by +the latter. As years went on the contests of the Dutch with the Spanish +tended to lessen, while those with the natives increased. Women went +to the new colonies in greater number, and life gradually assumed +a more settled aspect. The strenuous efforts of the Dutch sent +them into Formosa, China, Japan, and other countries. Expeditions +of more or less ships multiplied. The names of the Dutch famous in +the annals of the eastern seas are numerous. Their efforts, first +and foremost, were the establishment of a sound commerce. The above, +with the exception of the extract concerning François de Wittert, is +translated and condensed from Recueil des voyages ... de la Compagnie +des Indes Orientales (Amsterdam, 1725). See also, Histoire des voyages +(Paris, 1750); Isabelo de los Reyes y Florentino: Articulos varios, +(Manila, 1887), pp. 71-86, "Triunfos del Rosario ó Los Holandeses en +Filipinas;" and Ferdinand Blumentritt: Hollændische Angriffe auf die +Philippinen (Leitmeritz, 1880). + + + + + + + + + + + + + + + +Morga's Philippine Islands + +Volume II + + + + +HISTORY OF THE PHILIPPINE ISLANDS + + +From their discovery by Magellan in 1521 to the beginning of the XVII +Century; with descriptions of Japan, China and adjacent countries, by + +Dr. ANTONIO DE MORGA + +Alcalde of Criminal Causes, in the Royal Audiencia of Nueva España, +and Counsel for the Holy Office of the Inquisition + +Completely translated into English, edited and annotated by + +E. H. BLAIR and J. A. ROBERTSON + +With Facsimiles + +[Separate publication from "The Philippine Islands, 1493-1898" in +which series this appears as volumes 15 and 16.] + +VOLUME II + + + +CONTENTS OF VOLUME II [xvi of series] + +Preface + +Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas. Dr. Antonio de Morga; Mexico, 1609 + +ILLUSTRATIONS + +View of Mallaca-Levinus Hulsius (Franckfurt am Mayn, 1612) + +Weapons of the Moros; photograph of weapons in the Museo-Biblioteca +de Ultramar, Madrid + +"Incola ex Insulis Moluco," from Voyage ofte Schipvaert, by Jan Huygen +van Linschoten; from original in Boston Public Library + +View of corcoa (the vessel known as "caracoa"); photographic facsimile +of engraving in John Stevens's Collection of Voyages and Travels +(London, 1711), i.--in Argensola's "Discovery and conquest of the +Molucco and Philippine Islands," p. 61; from copy in library of +Wisconsin Historical Society + +Map of the Philippine Islands, showing province of the Order of the +Hermits of St. Augustine; from Lubin's Orbis Augustianus ... (Paris, +1639); from copy in the Library of Congress + +View of Acapulco Harbor, in Mexico; from Valentyn's Oud en Nieuw +Oost Indien (Dordrecht and Amsterdam, 1724); from copy in library of +Wisconsin State Historical Society + +Autograph signature of Antonio de Morga; photographic facsimile from +MS. in Archivo general de Indias, Sevilla + + +PREFACE + +In the present volume is concluded the notable work by Morga, Sucesos +de las Islas Filipinas, which was begun in VOL. I. The reader is +referred to the preface of that volume for some account of the book, +and of the manner in which it is presented in this series. + +Continuing his narrative, Morga describes his voyage to Mexico, +whither he goes (1603) to be a member of the Audiencia there. He then +relates the events of the Chinese uprising in Luzón in that year, +which has been fully described in previous volumes of this series; +and his picturesque although plain narrative casts new light upon that +episode. Many Spaniards in Manila are so alarmed by this danger that +they remove, with all their households and property, to Nueva España; +but one of the ships carrying them is lost at sea, and the other is +compelled, after great injury and loss, to return to Manila--a serious +calamity for the colony there. The governor does his best to fortify +the city, and reënforcements and supplies are provided for him from +Nueva España. Bishop Benavides dies (1605). Friars from the islands +go to Japan, but the emperor of that country is offended at their +preaching, and advises Acuña to restrain them. In the summer of 1605 +arrive supplies and men from Nueva España, and Acuña proceeds with his +preparations for the expedition against the Dutch in the Moluccas. In +the following spring he sets out on this enterprise, conducting it +in person; Morga describes this naval campaign in detail. Ternate is +captured by the Spaniards without bombardment, and with little loss to +themselves. The fugitive king of the island is persuaded to surrender +to the Spaniards and become a vassal of Felipe. Several other petty +rulers follow his example and promise not to allow the Dutch to engage +in the clove trade. Acuña builds a new fort there, and another in +Tidore, leaving Juan de Esquivel as governor of the Moluccas, with +a garrison and several vessels for their defense, and carrying to +Manila the king of Ternate and many of his nobles, as hostages. During +Acuña's absence a mutiny occurs among the Japanese near Manila, which +is quelled mainly by the influence of the friars. The governor dies, +apparently from poison, soon after his return to Manila. The trade +of the islands is injured by the restrictions laid upon it by the +home government; and the reduction of Ternate has not sufficed to +restrain the Moro pirates. The natives of the Moluccas are uneasy and +rebellious, especially as they have a prospect of aid from the Dutch, +who are endeavoring to regain their lost possessions there. Morga cites +a letter from a Spanish officer at La Palma, recounting the purpose +and outcome of van Noordt's expedition to the Indian archipelago. + +The historical part of Morga's account ends here; and the final +chapter is devoted to a description of the islands and their people, +the customs and religious beliefs of the natives, and the condition at +that time of the Spanish colony and the city of Manila. He describes +the principal islands of the Philippine group, beginning with Luzón; +the various races of inhabitants--Moros, Negritos, and Visayans: +their mode of dress, their occupations and industries, their habits +of life; their weapons, their ships and boats; the trees and fruits of +the islands; the animals and birds, both wild and tame; the reptiles, +fishes, and other creatures; and various plants. Among these is the +buyo (or betel); the habit of chewing it has become universal among the +Spaniards, of all classes, and poison is often administered through +its medium. Various means and methods of poisoning are described, +as well as some antidotes therefor. Some account is given of the +gold mines and pearl fisheries, and of other products of the country +which form articles of commerce. Morga describes the two great lakes +of Luzón (Bombon and Bai), Manila and its harbor and approaches, and +other principal ports, with some neighboring islands; and gives some +account of the Visayan people and the larger islands inhabited by them, +and of the tides in the archipelago. Then follows an interesting and +detailed account of the Filipino peoples, their language, customs, +beliefs, etc. The language used in Luzón and other northern islands +is different from that of the Visayas; but all the natives write, +expressing themselves fluently and correctly, and using a simple +alphabet which resembles the Arabic. Their houses, and their mode +of life therein, are fully described; also their government, social +organization, and administration of justice. The classes and status +of slaves, and the causes of enslavement are recounted. Their customs +in marriages and dowries, divorces, adoption, and inheritance are +described; also in usury, trading, and punishment for crimes. The +standard of social purity is described by Morga as being very low; +yet infamous vices were not indigenous with them, but communicated by +foreigners, especially by the Chinese. The natives of Luzón appear +to be superior, both intellectually and morally, to the Visayan +peoples. Their religious beliefs and practices are recounted by Morga, +who naturally ascribes these to the influence of the devil. He also +narrates the entrance of Mahometanism into the islands, and how it +was checked by the coming of the Spaniards. + +Morga next sketches the condition at that time of Spanish colonies +in the islands. He describes the city of Manila in detail, with +its fortifications, arsenals, government and municipal buildings, +cathedral, and convents; also the seminary of Santa Potenciana, and +the hospitals. There are six hundred houses, mostly built of stone, +within the walls, and even more in the suburbs; "and all are the +habitations and homes of Spaniards." All the people, both men and +women, are clad and gorgeously adorned in silks; and nowhere is there +greater abundance of food, and of other necessaries of human life, +than in Manila. Morga enumerates the dignitaries, ecclesiastical +and civil, who reside in the city; and mentions it as the center +and metropolis of the archipelago. He then briefly describes the +other Spanish settlements in the Philippines; and mentions in their +turn the various orders and their work there, with the number of +laborers in each. He praises their efforts for the conversion, +education, and social improvement of the Indians. He defines the +functions of both the civil and the ecclesiastical authorities, +and the policy of the government toward the natives; and describes +the application and results in the Philippines of the encomienda +system imported thither from America. He deprecates the permission +given to the Indians for paying their tributes in kind or in money, +at their option; for it has led to their neglecting their former +industries, and thus to the general damage of the country. Slavery +still exists among them, but the Spaniards have been forbidden to +enslave the natives. Personal services of various sorts are due +from the latter, however, to their encomenderos, to the religious, +and to the king, for all of which they receive a moderate wage; and +all other services for the Spaniards are voluntary and paid. Close +restrictions are laid upon the intercourse of the Spaniards with +natives. Various information is given regarding appointments to +office, residencias, elections, town government, and finances; also +of the ecclesiastical organization, expenses, and administration, +as well as of the incomes of the religious orders. Morga recounts +the numbers, character, pay, and organization of the military and +naval forces in the islands. The bulk of the citizens are merchants +and traders, commerce being the chief occupation and support of the +Spanish colony. Manila is a market for all the countries of Eastern +Asia, from Japan to Borneo. The China trade is restricted to the +inhabitants of the Philippines; Morga describes its nature and extent, +and the manner in which it is conducted, as well as the character +and methods of the Chinese traders. A similar account is given of the +trade carried on with the Philippines by the Japanese, Borneans, and +other neighboring peoples, and of the shipment to Nueva España of the +goods thus procured. This last commerce is "so great and profitable, +and easy to control, that the Spaniards do not apply themselves to, +or engage in, any other industry," and thus not only they neglect to +avail themselves of and develop the natural resources of the country, +but the natives are neglecting and forgetting their former industries; +and the supply of silver in the country steadily flows out of it and +into the hands of infidels. Morga enumerates the officials, revenues, +and expenditures of the colonial government. As its income is too small +for its necessary expenses, the annual deficit is made up from the +royal treasury of Nueva España. But this great expense is incurred +"only for the Christianization and conversion of the natives, for +the hopes of greater fruits in other kingdoms and provinces of Asia." + +The large extent of the Chinese immigration to the islands is +disapproved by Morga, as unsafe to the Spaniards and injurious to the +natives. Some Chinese are needed for the service of the Spaniards, +for all the trades are carried on by them; but the number of Chinese +allowed to live in the islands should be restricted to those who are +thus needed. Morga describes the character, dress, mode of life, +and settlements of the Chinese near Manila; they are cared for in +religious matters by the Dominican friars. The Christian Chinese live +apart from the heathens, in a settlement of some five hundred people; +Morga has but a poor opinion of even these converts. Some account is +also given of the Japanese who have settled in Manila; Morga commends +them, and states that they prove to be good Christians. + +He ends his work by a detailed account of the navigation and voyage +to and from the Philippines. The Mexican port of departure for this +route has been removed from Navidad to Acapulco. Morga describes the +westward voyage; the stop at the Ladrone Islands, and the traffic +of the natives with the ships; and the route thence, and among the +Philippine Islands. The return route to Mexico is much more difficult +and dangerous; for the winds are varying and not always favorable, +and the ship must change its course more frequently, and go far north +to secure favoring winds, there encountering cold weather. These severe +changes cause much suffering, and even death; and the vessel makes this +voyage without once touching land until it reaches Acapulco, a period +of five or six months. Morga also describes the voyage to Spain by +way of Goa and the Cape of Good Hope, which also is long and dangerous. + +THE EDITORS + +January, 1907. + + + + +SUCESOS DE LAS ISLAS FILIPINAS + +(concluded) + +By Dr. Antonio de Morga. Mexico: at the shop of Geronymo Balli in +the year 1609; printed by Cornelio Adriano Cesar. + +Source: The translation is made from the Harvard copy of the original +printed work. + +TRANSLATION: This is made by Alfonso de Salvio, Norman F. Hall, +and James Alexander Robertson. + + + + +EVENTS IN THE FILIPINAS ISLANDS. [172] + +CHAPTER SEVENTH (concluded) + +On the tenth [of July] [173] of the same year, the vessels +"Espiritu-Santo" and "Jesus Maria" left the port of Cabit en route +for Nueva España--in the wake of two smaller vessels, which had been +despatched a fortnight before--with the Filipinas merchandise. Don Lope +de Ulloa was their commander, while Doctor Antonio de Morga left those +islands in the almiranta, the "Santo Espiritu," to fill the office of +alcalde of the court of Mexico. Before leaving the bay, both vessels +were struck head on by a storm, and went dragging upon the coast, +buffeted by the heavy seas and winds, and amid dark and tempestuous +weather, from three in the afternoon until morning of the next day, +notwithstanding that they were anchored with two heavy cables in the +shelter of the land, and their topmasts struck. Then they grounded +upon the coast, in La Pampanga, ten leguas from Manila. The storm +lasted for three more consecutive days. Consequently it was regarded +as impossible for those vessels to sail and make their voyage, +inasmuch as the season was now well advanced, and the vessels +were very large and heavily laden, and were deeply imbedded in the +sand. Advice was immediately sent overland to Manila, whence were +brought several Chinese ships, cables, and anchors. By dint of the +great efforts exerted, both vessels, each singly, were fitted with +tackle and cables, which were rigged at the stern. There awaiting the +high tide, the ships were drawn, by force of capstan and men, stern +first for more than one legua through a bank of sand, upon which +they had struck, until they were set afloat, on the twenty-second +of July, St. Magdelen's day. Immediately they set sail again, +as the vessels had sustained no injury, nor sprung any leak; and +they made their voyage and navigation, under light winds, to the +coast of Nueva España. A violent south-southwest gale, accompanied +by heavy showers, hail, and cold, struck the ship "Espiritu Sancto" +on the tenth of November, in forty-two degrees, and within sight of +land. The wind was blowing obliquely toward the shore, upon which the +vessel was almost wrecked several times. The vessel suffered distress +and lost its rigging, while the crew was worn out by the voyage and +with the cold. The storm lasted until November twenty-second. On the +morning of that day, while the ship was in the trough of the waves, +and with topmasts shipped, it was struck by a squall of rain and hail, +accompanied by great darkness. A thunderbolt, descending the mainmast, +struck the vessel amidships. It killed three men besides wounding and +maiming eight others; it had entered the hatches, and torn open the +mainhatch, with a blaze of light, so that the interior of the ship +could be seen. Another thunderbolt fell down along the same mast +among the entire crew, and stunned sixteen persons, some of whom +were speechless and unconscious all that day. It left the vessel +by the pump-dale. The next day, the wind veered to north-northeast, +whereupon the ship set sail, and went coasting along the land, with +sufficient winds until the nineteenth of the month of December, +when it made port at Acapulco. There were found the two smaller +vessels that had sailed first from Manila. Three days later, General +Don Lope de Ulloa entered the same port of Acapulco, in the ship +"Jesus Maria." That vessel had sustained the same storms as the ship +"Espiritu Sancto." From the time when the two vessels had separated, +on sailing out of the channel of Capul, in the Filipinas Islands, +they had not sighted one another again during the entire voyage. + +In the same year six hundred and three, Governor Don Pedro de Acuña +sent the ship "Sanctiago" from Manila to Japon, with merchandise. It +was ordered to make its voyage to Quanto, in order to comply with +the desire and wish of Daifusama. As news had been already received +of the death of Fray Geronimo de Jesus, four of the most important +religious of his order in Manila--namely, Fray Diego de Bermeo [174] +(who had been provincial), Fray Alonso de la Madre de Dios, Fray +Luys Sotello, [175] and one other associate--sailed on that vessel +for the said kingdom. + +As soon as the ships "Jesus Maria" and "Espiritu Sancto" sailed for +Nueva España, and the ship "Sanctiago" with the religious for Japon, +there was more time to discuss further the matter started by the +coming of the Chinese mandarins. For finding themselves unoccupied +with other matters, fear of the Sangleys became universal, and the +suspicions that were current that the Sangleys were about to commit +some mischievous outbreak. This the archbishop and some religious +affirmed and told, publicly and privately. At this time, a considerable +number of Chinese were living in Manila and its environs. Some of +them were baptized Christians living in the settlements of Baibai +and Minondoc, [176] on the other side of the river, opposite the +city. Most of them were infidels, occupied and living in these same +settlements and in the shops of the parián in the city; [they were +employed] as merchants and in all other occupations. The majority of +them were fishermen, stonecutters, charcoal-burners, porters, masons, +and day-laborers. Greater security was always felt in regard to the +merchants, for they are the better class of people, and those who are +most interested, because of their property. So great security was not +felt about the others, even though they were Christians; because, as +they are a poor and covetous people, they would be inclined to any act +of meanness. However, it was always thought that it would be difficult +for them to cause any commotion, unless a strong fleet came from China, +on which they could rely. Talk continued to increase daily, and with +it suspicion; for some of the Chinese themselves, both infidels and +Christians, in order to prove themselves friends of the Spaniards, +and clean from all guilt, even told the Spaniards that there was +to be an insurrection shortly, and other similar things. Although +the governor always considered these statements as fictions and the +exaggerations of that nation, and did not credit them, yet he was +not so heedless that he did not act cautiously and watch, although +with dissembling, for whatever might happen. He took pains to have +the city guarded and the soldiers armed, besides flattering the most +prominent of the Chinese and the merchants, whom he assured of their +lives and property. The natives of La Pampanga and other provinces +near by were instructed beforehand to supply the city with rice and +other provisions, and to come to reënforce it with their persons and +arms, should necessity arise. The same was done with some Japanese in +the city. As all this was done with some publicity, since it could +not be done secretly, as so many were concerned, one and all became +convinced of the certainty of the danger. Many even desired it, +in order to see the peace disturbed, and to have the opportunity +to seize something. [177] From that time, both in the city and its +environs, where the Sangleys were living scattered, these people began +to persecute the Sangleys by word and deed. The natives, Japanese and +soldiers of the camp took from them their possessions and inflicted on +them other ill-treatment, calling them dogs and traitors, and saying +that they knew well that they meant to rebel. But they said they would +kill all the Sangleys first, and that very soon, for the governor was +preparing for it. This alone was sufficient to make it necessary for +the Sangleys to do what they had no intention of doing. [178] Some +of the most clever and covetous set themselves to rouse the courage +of the others, and to make themselves leaders, telling the Sangleys +that their destruction was sure, according to the determination which +they saw in the Spaniards, unless they should anticipate the latter, +since they [the Sangleys] were so numerous, and attack and capture the +city. They said that it would not be difficult for them to kill the +Spaniards, seize their possessions, and become masters of the country, +with the aid and reënforcements that would immediately come to them +from China, as soon as the auspicious beginning that they would have +made in the matter should be known. In order to do this when the time +came, it was advisable to build a fort and quarters in some retired and +strong place near the city, where the people could gather and unite, +and where arms and supplies could be provided for the war. At least +such a fort would be sufficient to assure there their lives from the +outrages that they were expecting from the Spaniards. It was learned +that the chief mover in this matter was a Christian Sangley, an +old-time resident in the country, named Joan Bautista de Vera. [179] +He was rich and highly esteemed by the Spaniards, and feared and +respected by the Sangleys. He had often been governor of the latter, +and had many godchildren and dependents. He had become an excellent +Spaniard, and was courageous. He himself, exercising duplicity and +cunning, did not leave the city, or the houses of the Spanish during +this time, in order to arouse less suspicion of himself. From there +he managed the affair through his confidants; and in order to assure +himself better of the result, and to ascertain the number of men of +his race, and to make a census and list of them, he cunningly had +each of them ordered to bring him a needle, which he pretended to +be necessary for a certain work that he had to do. These needles he +placed, as he received them, in a little box; and when he took them +out of it, he found that he had sufficient men for his purpose. They +began to construct the fort or quarters immediately at a distance of +slightly more than one-half legua from the village of Tondo, among some +estuaries and swamps, and in a hidden location. [180] They stored there +some rice and other provisions, and weapons of little importance. The +Sangleys began to gather there, especially the masses--the common +people and day-laborers; for those of the parián, and the mechanics, +although urged to do the same, did not resolve to do it, and remained +quiet, guarding their houses and property. The restlessness of the +Sangleys daily continued to become more inflamed. This, and the +advices given to the governor and the Spaniards, kept the latter +more anxious and apprehensive, and made them talk more openly of the +matter. The Sangleys, seeing that their intention was discovered, and +that delay might be of so great harm to them, determined, although the +insurrection was planned for St. Andrew's day, the last of November, +to anticipate that day, and to lose no more time. On Friday, the third +day of the month of October, the eve of St. Francis, they collected +very hurriedly in the above-mentioned fort; consequently, by nightfall, +there were two thousand men in it. Joan Bautista de Vera--a thief in +the rôle of an honest man, since he was the leader and organizer of the +treason--went immediately to the city and told the governor that the +Sangleys had risen, and that they were collecting on the other side of +the river. The governor, suspecting the mischief, had him immediately +arrested and carefully guarded; and he was afterward executed. Then, +without tap of drum, the governor ordered the companies, both of +the camp and the city, to be notified, and all to hold their arms in +readiness. Very shortly after nightfall, Don Luys Dasmariñas, who was +living near the monastery and church of Minondoc, on the other side of +the river, came hurriedly to the city to advise the governor that the +Sangleys had revolted. He asked for twenty soldiers to go to the other +side [of the river], where he would guard the said monastery. Cristoval +de Axqueta, sargento-mayor of the camp, went with these men, together +with Don Luys. As the silence of night deepened, the noise made by the +Sangleys grew louder, for they were continuing to assemble and were +sounding horns and other instruments, after their fashion. Don Luys +remained to guard the monastery, with the men brought from Manila, +where he had placed in shelter many women and children of Christian +Sangleys, with the religious. The sargento-mayor returned immediately +to the city, where he told of what was being done. The call to arms +was sounded, for the noise and shouts of the Sangleys, who had sallied +out to set fire to some houses in the country, was so great that it +was thought that they were devastating that district. The Sangleys +burned, first, a stone country-house belonging to Captain Estevan +de Marquina. The latter was living there with his wife and children; +and none of them escaped, except a little girl, who was wounded, but +who was hidden in a thicket. [181] Thence the Sangleys went to the +settlement of Laguio, [182] situated on the shore of the river, and +burned it. They killed several Indians of that settlement, and the rest +fled to the city. There the gates were already shut and all the people, +with arms in hand, manned the walls and other suitable posts, ready +for any emergency, until dawn. The enemy, who now had a greater number +of men, retired to their fort, to make another sally thence with more +force. Don Luys Dasmariñas, who was guarding the church and monastery +of Minondoc, expected hourly that the enemy was about to attack him, +and sent a messenger to the governor to beg for more men. These were +sent him, and consisted of regulars and inhabitants of the city, +under Captains Don Tomas Brabo de Acuña (the governor's nephew), +Joan de Alcega, Pedro de Arzeo, and Gaspar Perez, by whose counsel and +advice Don Luys was to be guided on this occasion. All was confusion, +shouting, and outcry in the city, particularly among the Indians, and +the women and children, who were coming thither for safety. Although, +to make certain of the Sangleys of the parián, their merchants had +been asked to come into the city, and bring their property, they did +not dare to do so; for they always thought that the enemy would take +the city because of their great force of numbers, and annihilate the +Spaniards, and they would all be in danger. Consequently they preferred +to remain in their parián, in order to join the victorious side. Don +Luys Dasmariñas thought it advisable to go in search of the enemy +immediately with the reënforcements sent him by the governor, before +they should all assemble and present a strong front. He left seventy +soldiers in Minondoc, in charge of Gaspar Perez; while with the rest, +about one hundred and forty of the best picked arquebusiers, he +went to the village of Tondo, in order to fortify himself in the +church, a stone building. He arrived there at eleven o'clock in the +morning. The Chinese, in number one thousand five hundred, arrived +at the same place at the same time, bent on the same purpose. An +hour's skirmish took place between the two sides, as to which one +would gain the monastery. Captain Gaspar Perez came up with the +reënforcement of the men left at Minondoc. The enemy retired to his +fort, with a loss of five hundred men. Gaspar Perez returned to his +post, where Pedro de Arzeo was also stationed. Don Luys Dasmariñas, +exultant over this fortunate engagement, determined immediately to +press forward in pursuit of the enemy with his men, notwithstanding +the heat of the sun and without waiting to rest his followers. He sent +Alferez Luys de Ybarren to reconnoiter. The latter brought word that +the enemy was in great force, and near by. Although Juan de Alcega +and others requested Don Luys to halt and rest his men, and await +the governor's orders as to what was to be done, his desire not to +lose the opportunity was so great that, rousing his men with harsh +words, in order to make them follow him, he marched forward until +they reached a swamp. After leaving the swamp, they came suddenly +into a large clearing, where the enemy was stationed. The latter, +upon seeing the Spaniards, surrounded them in force on all sides, +armed with clubs, some with catans, and a few with battle-axes. Don +Luys and his men, not being able to retreat, fought valiantly, and +killed a number of Sangleys. But finally, as the latter were in so +great force, they cut all the Spaniards to pieces, only four of whom +escaped, badly wounded; and these carried the news to Manila. [183] +This result was of great importance to the Sangleys, both because so +many and the best Spanish soldiers were killed in this place, and +because of the weapons that the Sangleys took from them, and which +they needed. With these arms they flattered themselves that their +object was more certain of accomplishment. Next day, October five, +the Sangleys sent the heads of Don Luys, Don Tomas, Joan de Alcega, +and other captains to the parián; and they told the Sangleys there +that, since the flower of Manila had been killed, they should revolt +and join them, or they would immediately come to kill them. The +confusion and grief of the Spaniards in the city was so great that +it prevented them from taking the precautions and exercising the +diligence demanded by the affair. But the sight of their necessity, +and the spirit of their governor and officials made them all remain +at their posts on the walls, arms in hand. They fortified as strongly +as possible the gates of the parián and of Dilao, and all that part of +the wall where the enemy might make an assault. They mounted a piece of +artillery above each gate, and stationed there the best men, among whom +were religious of all the orders. Upon that day, Sunday, the enemy, +flushed with the victory of the preceding day and their army swelled +by the additional men that joined them, attacked the city. Burning +and destroying everything in their path, they went to the river, for +there was no vessel with which to resist them, as all those of the +fleet were in the provinces of the Pintados. They entered the parián, +[184] and furiously assaulted the city gate, but were driven back +by the arquebuses and muskets, with the loss of many Sangleys. They +went to the church of Dilao, and there assaulted the gate and walls +(which were there lower), by means of scaling-ladders, with the same +determination. But they experienced the same resistance and loss, +which compelled them, on the approach of night, to retire with great +loss to the parián and to Dilao. That whole night the Spaniards +spent in guarding their wall, and in preparing for the morrow. The +enemy passed the night in the parián and at Dilao, making carts, +mantelets, scaling-ladders, artificial fire, and other contrivances, +for approaching and assaulting the wall, and for burning the gates, +and setting fire to everything. At dawn of the next day, Monday, the +Sangleys came together with these arms and tools, and having reached +the wall with their bravest and best-armed men, attacked it with +great fury and resolution. The artillery destroyed their machines, and +caused them so great injury and resistance with it and the arquebuses, +that the Sangleys were forced to retire again to the parián and +to Dilao, with heavy loss. Joan Xuarez Gallinato, accompanied by +some soldiers and a Japanese troop, made a sally from the Dilao gate +upon the Sangleys. They reached the church, when the Sangleys turned +upon them and threw the Japanese into disorder. The latter were the +cause of all retreating again to seek the protection of the walls, +whither the Sangleys pursued them. At this juncture Captain Don Luys de +Velasco entered Manila. He came from the Pintados in a stout caracoa, +manned by some good arquebusiers, while others manned some bancas that +sailed in the shelter of the caracoa. They approached the parián and +Dilao by the river, and harassed the enemy quartered there on that and +the two following days, so that they were compelled to abandon those +positions. These vessels set fire to the parián, and burned everything, +and pursued the enemy wherever they could penetrate. The Sangleys, +upon beholding their cause waning, and their inability to attain the +end desired, resolved to retire from the city, after having lost more +than four thousand men; to advise China, so that that country would +reënforce them; and for their support to divide their men into three +divisions in different districts--one among the Tingues of Passic, the +second among those of Ayonbon, and the third at La Laguna de Bay, San +Pablo, and Batangas. On Wednesday they abandoned the city completely, +and, divided as above stated, marched inland. Don Luys de Velasco, +with some soldiers and armed Indians who came from all sides to the +relief of Manila, accompanied by some Spaniards who guided them, and +the religious from their missions, went by way of the river in pursuit +of them, and pressed them, so that they killed and annihilated the +bands bound for the Tingues of Passic and for Ayombon. The majority +and main body of the Sangleys went to La Laguna de Bay, the mountains +of San Pablo, and Batangas, where they considered themselves more +secure. Burning towns and churches, and everything in their path, they +fortified themselves in the above-mentioned sites. Don Luys de Velasco, +with seventy soldiers, continued to pursue them, killing each day a +great number of them. On one occasion Don Luys was so closely engaged +with the enemy, that the latter killed him and ten soldiers of his +company, and fortified themselves again in San Pablo and Batangas, +where they hoped to be able to sustain themselves until the arrival +of reënforcements from China. [185] + +The governor, fearful of this danger, and desirous of finishing +the enemy, and giving entire peace to the country, sent Captain +and Sargento-mayor Cristoval de Axqueta Menchaca with soldiers +to pursue and finish the enemy. This man left with two hundred +Spaniards--soldiers and volunteers--three hundred Japanese, and +one thousand five hundred Pampanga and Tagál Indians, [186] on the +twentieth of October. He was so expeditious, that with little or no +loss of men, he found the Sangleys fortified in San Pablo and Batangas, +and, after fighting with them, killed and destroyed them all. None +escaped, except two hundred, who were taken alive to Manila for the +galleys. The captain was occupied in this for twenty days, and with it +the war was ended. Very few merchants were left in Manila, and they had +taken the good counsel to betake themselves, with their possessions, +among the Spaniards in the city. At the beginning of the war there were +not seven hundred Spaniards in the city capable of bearing arms. [187] + +After the end of the war, the need of the city began, for, because +of not having Sangleys who worked at the trades, and brought in +all the provisions, there was no food, nor any shoes to wear, +not even at excessive prices. The native Indians are very far from +exercising those trades, and have even forgotten much of farming, and +the raising of fowls, cattle, and cotton, and the weaving of cloth, +which they used to do in the days of their paganism and for a long +time after the conquest of the country. [188] In addition to this, +people thought that Chinese vessels would not come to the islands +with food and merchandise, on account of the late revolution. Above +all, they lived not without fear and suspicion that, instead of +the merchant vessels, an armed fleet would attack Manila, in order +to avenge the death of their Sangleys. All conspired to sadden the +minds of the Spaniards. After having sent Fray Diego de Guevara, +prior of the monastery of St. Augustine in Manila, to the court of +España by way of India, with news of this event--but who was unable +to reach Madrid for three years, because of his various fortunes +in India, Persia, and Italia, through which countries he went--they +immediately sent Captain Marco de la Cueva, together with Fray Luys +Gandullo of the Order of St. Dominic, to the city of Macao in China, +where the Portuguese were living, with letters for the chief captain +and the council of that city. These letters advised the latter of +the revolt of the Sangleys, and of the result of the war, so that, +if they should hear any rumors of a Chinese fleet, they could send +word. At the same time letters were taken from the governor to the +Tutons, Aytaos, and visitors of the provinces of Canton and Chincheo, +recounting the outbreak of the Chinese, which obliged the Spaniards +to kill them. Upon their arrival at Macao, Marcos de la Cueva and +Fray Luys Gandullo found no news of a fleet, but that everything was +quiet--although the Chinese had already heard of the insurrection and +much of the result, from some Sangleys who had fled from Manila in +champans, upon that occasion. It was immediately learned in Chincheo +that these Spaniards were in Macao, whereupon Captains Guansan Sinu +and Guachan, wealthy men and usually engaged in trade with Manila, +went to look for them. Having learned the truth of the event, they +took the letters for the mandarins and promised to deliver them. They +urged other merchants and vessels of Chincheo, who were afraid, to go +to Manila that year. This was very useful, for through them much of the +necessity that the city [of Manila] was suffering was supplied. With +this result and with some powder, saltpeter, and lead which Marcos +de la Cueva had provided for the magazines, the latter left Macao, +and sailed to Manila, which he reached in May, to the universal joy +of the city over the news that he brought--which began to be verified +immediately by the coming of the fleet of thirteen Chinese vessels +bearing food and merchandise. + +In the month of June of this year six hundred and three, [189] two +vessels were despatched from Manila to Nueva España, under command +of Don Diego de Mendoça who had been sent that year by the viceroy, +Marques de Montesclaros, with the usual reënforcements for the +islands. The flagship was "Nuestra Señora de los Remedios" and the +almiranta "Sant Antonio." + +Many rich men of Manila, warned by the past troubles, took passage +in these vessels with their households and property, for Nueva +España--especially in the almiranta--with the greatest wealth that +has ever left the Filipinas. Both vessels experienced so severe +storms during the voyage, in the altitude of thirty-four degrees, +and before having passed Japon, that the flagship, without masts and +greatly lightened and damaged, put back in distress to Manila. The +almiranta was swallowed up in the sea, and no one was saved. This was +one of the greatest shipwrecks and calamities that the Filipinas have +suffered since the past ones. + +During the rest of that year and that of six hundred and five, until +the sailing of the vessels which were to go to Castilla, [190] the +governor occupied himself in repairing the city, and supplying it with +provisions and ammunition, with the special object and care that the +decision which he was awaiting from the court for making an expedition +to Maluco--of which he had been advised and warned--should not find +him so unprepared as to cause him to delay the expedition. In this +he was very successful, for at that same time, the master-of-camp, +Joan de Esquivel, had arrived in Mexico with six hundred soldiers +from España. In Mexico more men were being enrolled, and a great +preparation was made of ammunition, food, money, and arms, which the +viceroy sent to the governor from Nueva España in March of that year, +by order of his Majesty, in order that he might go to Maluco. All +this arrived safely and in due season at Manila. + +Shortly after the ships had left Manila for Nueva España, and those +despatched thence by the viceroy had entered, Archbishop Don Fray +Miguel de Benavides died of a long illness. His body was buried +amid the universal devotion and grief of the city. [191] At this +same time, Don Pedro de Acuña received three letters, by the ships +that continued to come from China that year, with the merchandise and +with their principal captains. They were all of the same tenor--when +translated into Castilian--from the Tuton and Haytao, and from the +inspector-general of the province of Chincheo, and were on the matter +of the insurrection of the Sangleys and their punishment. They were +as follows: + +[This letter occupies folios 113b-115a of the original edition of +Morga. We have already presented that document in our V0L. XIII, +p. 287, which is translated from a copy of the original manuscript. The +answer of Acuña to this letter will be found in V0L. XIV, in the +second document of that volume.] + +The letter of the inspector-general was written on the twelfth of +the second month--which according to our reckoning is March of the +twenty-third year of the reign of Vandel [i.e., Wanleh]. The eunuch's +[192] letter was written on the sixteenth of the said month and year; +and that of the viceroy, on the twenty-second of the month. + +The governor answered these letters through the same messengers, +civilly and authoritatively. He gave an explanation of the deed and +justified the Spaniards, and offered friendship and trade anew with the +Chinese. He said that their property, which had remained in Manila, +would be restored to the owners, and that those imprisoned in the +galleys would be freed in due season. First, however, he intended to +use them for the Maluco expedition, which he was undertaking. + +The entrances into various provinces of Japon by the discalced +religious of St. Francis and those of St. Dominic and St. Augustine, +continued to be made, both in the Castilian vessel itself which was +despatched that year to the kingdoms of Quanto, [193] and in other +Japanese vessels which came to Manila with the silver and flour of the +Japanese, in order to trade. This was permitted and allowed by Daifu, +now called Cubosama, who that year sent the governor, through one of +his servants, certain weapons and presents, in return for others which +the governor had sent him. He answered the latter's letter as follows: + +Letter from Daifusama, lord of Japon, to governor Don Pedro de Acuña, +in the year one thousand six hundred and five. + +I received two letters from your Lordship, and all the gifts and +presents mentioned in the memorandum. Among them, when I received them, +the wine made from grapes pleased me greatly. During former years, +your Lordship requested permission for six vessels, and last year for +four, and I always granted your request. But, what angers me greatly is +that among the four vessels that your Lordship requested was that one +called "Antonio," which made the voyage without my orders. This was a +very lawless act, and in contempt of me. Can it be, perhaps, that your +Lordship would send to Japon without my permission any vessel that you +wished? Besides this, your Lordship and others have often negotiated +about the sects of Japon, and requested many things in regard to +them. This likewise I cannot concede; for this region is called Xincoco +[Shinkoku], or "dedicated to the idols." These have been honored with +the highest adoration from the time of our ancestors until now, and +their acts I alone cannot undo or destroy. Consequently, it is not at +all advisable that your religion be promulgated or preached in Japon; +and if your Lordship wish to preserve friendship with these kingdoms of +Japon and with me, do what I wish, and never do what is displeasing to +me. Lastly, many have told me that many wicked and perverse Japanese, +who go to that kingdom and live there for many years, afterward return +to Japon. This makes me very angry. Consequently, your Lordship will, +in the future, allow no one of the Japanese to come here in the +vessels that come from your country. In other matters, your Lordship +shall act advisedly and prudently, and shall so conduct affairs, +that henceforth I may not be angered on account of them. + +The governor, carrying out his dearest wish, was to make the +expedition to Terrenate in the Malucos, which should be done quickly, +before the enemy could gather more strength than he had then; for +he had been informed that the Dutch, who had seized the island +and fortress of Amboino, had done the same with that of Tidore, +whence they had driven the Portuguese who had settled therein, and +had entered Terrenate, where they had established a trading-post for +the clove-trade. Accordingly, as soon as the despatches in regard to +this undertaking arrived from España, in June of six hundred and five, +and the men and supplies from Nueva España, which were brought at the +same time by the master-of-camp, Joan de Esquivel, the governor spent +the balance of this year in preparing the ships, men, and provisions +that he deemed necessary for the undertaking. Leaving behind in +Manila sufficient force for its defense, he went to the provinces of +Pintados, where the fleet was collected, in the beginning of the year +six hundred and six. + +By the fifteenth day of the month of March, the governor had thoroughly +prepared the fleet--which consisted of five ships, four galleys with +poop-lanterns [galeras de fanal], three galliots, four champans, three +funeas, two English lanchas, two brigantines, one barca chata [194] +for the artillery, and thirteen fragatas with high freeboard. There +were one thousand three hundred Spaniards, counting regulars, captains +and officers, substitutes [entretenidos], and volunteers. Among +them were some Portuguese captains and soldiers, under charge of +the chief captain of Tidore, [195] who was at that island when the +Dutch seized it. These Portuguese came from Malaca to serve in the +expedition. There were also four hundred Indian pioneers--Tagáls and +Pampangos of Manila--who went to serve at their own cost, under their +own officers, and with their own weapons. There was a quantity of +artillery of all kinds, ammunition, tools, and provisions for nine +months. [196] Don Pedro de Acuña left the point of Hilohilo, which +is near the town of Arevalo in the island of Panai, [on the above +day] with all this equipment, and coasting the island of Mindanao, +made port at La Caldera, in order to replenish his water, wood, +and other necessaries. + +The governor embarked in the galley "Santiago" and took under +his charge the other galleys and oared vessels. The ship "Jesus +Maria" acted as flagship of the other vessels, and was commanded +by the master-of-camp, Joan de Esquivel. Captain and Sargento-mayor +Cristoval de Azcueta Menchaca acted as admiral of the fleet, which, +after attending to its necessities at La Caldera, left that port. On +setting sail, the flagship, which was a heavy vessel, was unable to +leave port, and the currents drove it shoreward so that, without the +others being able to help it, it grounded. It was wrecked there, but +the crew, artillery, and a portion of its ammunition and clothing, +were saved. After setting fire to the ship, and taking what nails and +bolts they could, so that the Mindanaos could not make use of them, +the fleet continued its voyage. The galleys coasted along the island +of Mindanao, and the ships and other deep-draught vessels sailed in +the open sea, all making for the port of Talangame, in the island of +Terrenate. The vessels, although experiencing some changes of weather, +first sighted the islands of Maluco, after they had been reconnoitered +by a large Dutch ship, well equipped with artillery, which was anchored +at Terrenate. This vessel fired some heavy artillery at our vessels, +and then immediately entered the port, where it fortified itself under +shelter of the land, and with its artillery and crew and the people +of Terrenate. The master-of-camp went with his vessels to the island +of Tidore, where he was well received by the Moro chiefs and cachils; +for the king was away, as he had gone to the island of Bachan to be +married. The master-of-camp found four Dutch factors there, who were +trading for cloves. He learned from them that the ship at Terrenate +was from Holland, and was one of those which had sailed from Amboino +and seized Tidore, whence it had driven the Portuguese, and that it was +being laden with cloves. It was awaiting other vessels of its convoy, +for they had made friendship and treaties with Tidore and Terrenate, +in order to be protected against the Castilians and Portuguese. The +master-of-camp had the king of Tidore summoned immediately, and, +while awaiting Don Pedro de Acuña, rested his men and cleaned the +ships, and made gabions and other things necessary for the war. Don +Pedro de Acuña, through his pilots' fault, had gone thirty leguas +to leeward of the island of Terrenate toward the island of Celebes, +otherwise called Mateo. Recognizing that island, he returned to +Terrenate, and passing in sight of Talangame, discovered the Dutch +vessel. He tried to reconnoiter it, but after seeing that it was +harming his galleys with its artillery, and that the master-of-camp +was not there, he proceeded to Tidore, where he found the latter, +to the great joy of all. There they spent the remainder of the month +of March. At this juncture the king of Tidore arrived, with twelve +well-armed caracoas. He expressed joy at the governor's coming, to +whom he complained at length of the tyranny and subjection in which +he was kept by Sultan Zayde, [197] king of Terrenate, who was aided +by the Dutch. He offered to go in person to serve his Majesty in the +fleet, with six hundred men of Tidore. Don Pedro received him and +feasted him. Then, without any further delay at Tidore, or any more +concern about the ship at Talangame, he set about the chief purpose +for which they had come. On the last of March he started to return to +Terrenate. On that day he anchored in a harbor between the settlement +and the port, as did also the king of Tidore with his caracoas. That +same night the Dutch ship weighed anchor and went to Amboino. At dawn +of next day, April first, soldiers were landed with some difficulty, +with the intention of marching along the shore (which was a very close +and narrow stretch) to the fort, in order to plant the artillery, +with which to bombard it. As the governor thought that mischief would +ensue because of the narrowness and closeness of the pass, he landed +a number of pioneers on the high ground, to open another road, so +that the remainder of the army might pass, and the enemy be diverted +in several directions. By these efforts, he placed his camp under +the walls, although a great number of Terenatans came from various +directions to prevent him. The vanguard of the camp was in charge +of Joan Xuarez Gallinato and Captains Joan de Cuevas, Don Rodrigo +de Mendoça, Pasqual de Alarcon, Joan de Cervantes, Captain Vergara, +and Cristoval de Villagra, with their companies. The other captains +were in the body of the squadron. The rearguard was under command of +Captain Delgado, while the master-of-camp aided in all parts. The +army came up within range of the enemy's artillery, which suddenly +began to play. The governor came to see how the troops were formed, +and, leaving them at their post, returned to the fleet to have the +pieces brought out for bombarding, and to obtain refreshment for +the soldiers. Some high trees intervened between the troops and the +wall, in which the enemy had posted some scouts to reconnoiter the +field. They were driven down, and our own scouts posted there, who gave +advice from above of what was being done in the fort. Captain Vergara, +and after him, Don Rodrigo de Mendoça and Alarcon, went to reconnoiter +the walls, the bastion of Nuestra Señora, and the pieces mounted on +the ground there, and a low wall of rough stone which extended to +the mountain, where there was a bastion in which the wall ended. It +was called Cachiltulo, and was defended with pieces of artillery and +a number of culverins, muskets, arquebuses, and pikes; while many +other weapons peculiar to the Terenatans were placed along the wall +for its defense. Having seen and reconnoitered all this, although not +with impunity, because the enemy had killed six soldiers with the +artillery and wounded Alferez Joan de la Rambla in the knee with a +musket-ball, the Spaniards returned to the army. A trifle past noon, +a lofty site was reconnoitered, in the direction of the bastion of +Cachiltulo, whence the enemy could be attacked and driven from the +wall; and Captain Cuevas was ordered to occupy it with twenty-five +musketeers. Having done this, the enemy sent out a crowd of men +to prevent him from occupying it. A skirmish ensued, and the Moros +turned and retreated to their wall. Cuevas followed them so closely +and persisted so long, that he needed reënforcement. The scouts in +the trees gave information of what was being done, whereupon Captains +Don Rodrigo de Mendoça, Alarcon, Cervantes, and Vergara reënforced +him with their light-armed pikemen and halberdiers. They pursued the +enemy with so great rapidity and resolution that they entered the +walls behind them. However, some of the Spaniards were wounded, and +Captain Cervantes was pushed down from the wall and his legs broken, +which caused his death. Captain Don Rodrigo de Mendoça, pursuing the +enemy, who were retiring, ran inside the wall as far as the cavalier +of Nuestra Señora, while Vergara ran in the opposite direction along +the curtain of the wall to the bastion of Cachiltulo, and went on +as far as the mountain. By this time the main body of the army had +already assaulted the wall. Mutually aiding one another, they mounted +the wall and entered the place on all sides, although with the loss of +some dead and wounded soldiers. The soldiers were stopped by a trench +beyond the fort of Nuestra Señora, for the enemy had retreated to a +shed, which was fortified with a considerable number of musketeers and +arquebusiers, and four light pieces. They discharged their arquebuses +and muskets at the Spaniards, and threw cane spears hardened in fire, +and bacacaes, [198] after their fashion. The Spaniards assaulted the +shed, whereupon a Dutch artilleryman trying to fire a large swivel-gun, +with which he would have done great damage, being confused did not +succeed, and threw down the linstock, turned, and fled. The enemy +did the same after him, and abandoned the shed, fleeing in all +directions. Those who would do so embarked with the king and some +of his wives and the Dutch in one caracoa and four juangas [199] +which they had armed near the king's fort. Captain Vergara entered the +fort immediately, but found it deserted. Don Rodrigo de Mendoça and +Villagra pursued the enemy toward the mountain for a long distance, +and killed many Moros. With this, at two o'clock in the afternoon, +the settlement and fort of Terrenate was completely gained. The +Spanish banners and standards were flung from it, without it having +been necessary for them to bombard the walls, as they had expected; +and the fort was taken at so slight cost to the Spaniards. Their dead +numbered fifteen men, and the wounded twenty more. The whole town was +reconnoitered, even its extremity--a small fort, called Limataen--which +contained two pieces of artillery, and two other pieces near the +mosque on the seashore. The loot of the place was of small importance, +for already the things of most value, and the women and children, +had been removed to the island of Moro, whither the king fled and +took refuge in a fort that he had there. Some products of that land +were found, and a great quantity of cloves. In the factory of the +Dutch were found two thousand ducados, some cloth goods and linens, +and many weapons, while in many places were excellent Portuguese and +Dutch artillery, a number of culverins and a quantity of ammunition, +of which possession was taken for his Majesty. [200] A guard was +placed over what was gained, and the place was put in a condition +for defense with some pieces taken from the fleet, while the governor +ordered and provided whatever else was advisable. + +Cachil Amuxa, the king's nephew and the greatest chief of Terrenate, +came with other cachils to make peace with the governor. He said +that he and all the Terenatans wished to be vassals of his Majesty, +and that they would have rendered homage long before, but the king +prevented them. The latter as a proud man, and, confident in his +own opinion, although he had been advised to surrender the fort to +his Majesty and render him homage, had steadily refused to do so, +having been encouraged and emboldened by the success that he had +gained upon other occasions. That was the reason that he found himself +in his present wretched condition. He offered to induce the king to +leave the fort of Moro if given assurance of life. Don Pedro de Acuña +received this Moro well, and as a Portuguese, Pablo de Lima--one of +those whom the Dutch had driven from Tidore, a man of high standing, +and well acquainted with the king--offered to accompany him, the +governor despatched them with a written passport as follows: + +Passport from Don Pedro de Acuña to the king of Terrenate + +I, Don Pedro de Acuña, governor, captain-general, and president of +the Filipinas Islands, and general of this army and fleet, declare +that, over my signature, I hereby give security of life to the king +of Terrenate, in order that he may come to talk with me--both to him +and those whom he may bring with him--reserving to myself the disposal +of all the others as I may see fit. I certify this in his Majesty's +name. And I order that no person of this fleet molest him or any of +his possessions, and that all observe what is herein contained. Given +in Terrenate, April six, one thousand six hundred and six. + +DON PEDRO DE ACUÑA + +Within nine days Cachilamuja and Pablo de Lima returned to Terrenate +with the king, the prince, his son, [201] and others of his relatives, +cachils and sangajes, [202] under the said passport. They placed +themselves under the governor's power, and he received them with +great affection and respect. He lodged the king and his son in a +good house in the settlement, under guard of a company. The king +restored the villages of Christians that his Majesty had possessed +in the island of Moro, when the fort of Terrenate was lost by the +Portuguese. He placed his person and kingdom in his Majesty's power, +and surrendered a quantity of muskets and heavy artillery that he had +in some forts of the said island. The governor did not despoil him +of his kingdom, but on the contrary allowed him to appoint two of his +men to govern, whose choice was to be ratified by himself. The king, +his son the prince, and their cachils and sangajes swore homage to his +Majesty. The kings of Tidore and Bachan, and the sangaje of La Bua did +the same, and covenanted and promised not to admit either the Dutch +or other nations into Maluco for the clove-trade. They promised, as +his Majesty's vassals, to go on all occasions to serve him with their +persons, men, and ships, whenever summoned by whomever commanded the +fort of Terrenate; that they would oppose no obstacles to the Moros +who wished to become Christians; that if any wicked Christian went +to their lands to turn renegade, they would surrender him; and other +suitable things. Therewith great and small were content and pleased, +since they were freed from the tyranny of the king of Terrenate. The +governor remitted to them the third part of the tributes which they +were wont to pay their king, and gave the Moros other advantages. Then +he planned a new and modern fort, in a very conspicuous and suitable +location, and began to build it. In order that the old fort might be +better defended while the new one was being completed, he reduced it +to a less size, by making new cavaliers and bastions, which he finished +and furnished with ramparts and stout gates. He commenced another fort +in the island of Tidore, on a good location near the settlement. After +placing in order whatever he judged necessary in Terrenate and Tidore, +and in the other towns and fortresses of Maluco, he returned with +his fleet to the Filipinas. He left the master-of-camp, Joan de +Esquivel, with a garrison of six hundred soldier--five hundred, +in five companies, for Terrenate--in the fort of Terrenate to act +as his assistant and as governor of Maluco; he also left there one +large forge and a number of smiths, sixty-five pioneers, thirty-five +stonecutters, two galliots, two well-armed brigantines, and crews of +rowers. The other company of soldiers [was to be stationed] in Tidore +under command of Captain Alarcon; while ammunition and provisions for +one year were left in both forts. In order to be more assured of the +[peaceful] condition of the country, he took the king of Terrenate +from it and carried him to Manila, as well as his son the prince, and +twenty-four cachils and sangajes, most of them the king's relatives, +to whom he showed every honor and good treatment. He explained to +them why he took them, and that their return to Maluco depended upon +the security and tranquillity with which the Moros should conduct +themselves in their obedience and service to his Majesty. [203] The +three Portuguese galliots returned to Malaca, taking with them the +Dutch who were in Maluco and the Portuguese captains and soldiers who +had come to take part in this expedition. The governor entered Manila +in triumph with the remainder of the fleet, on the last day of May, +six hundred and six. He was received there with acclamations of joy +and praise from the city, who gave thanks to God for so happy and +prompt result in an undertaking of so great weight and importance. + +During the governor's absence in Maluco, the royal Audiencia of +the islands governed the Filipinas. The Audiencia wished to drive +a number of Japanese from the city, for they were a turbulent +people and promised little security for the country. When this +was attempted and force employed, the Japanese resisted, and the +matter came to such a pass that they took arms to oppose it, and +it was necessary for the Spaniards to take their arms also. The +affair assumed definite proportions, and some on either side wished +to give battle. However, it was postponed by various means until, +through the efforts of certain religious, the Japanese were quieted; +and afterward as many as possible were embarked in vessels, although +they resented it greatly. This was one of the greatest dangers that +has threatened Manila, for the Spaniards were few in number, and the +Japanese more than one thousand five hundred, and they are a spirited +and very mettlesome race. Had they come to blows on this occasion, +the Spaniards would have fared ill. [204] + +The governor, upon entering Manila, took over immediately the affairs +of his government, especially the despatching of two vessels about to +sail to Nueva España. He was present in person in the port of Cabit +at the equipment and lading of the ships, and the embarcation of the +passengers. He was seized by some indisposition of the stomach which +compelled him to return to Manila and take to his bed. His pain and +vomiting increased so rapidly that, without its being possible to +relieve him, he died in great anguish on St. John's day, to the great +sorrow and grief of the country. Especially did the king of Terrenate +show and express his grief, for he had always received great honor +and kind treatment from the governor. It was suspected that his death +had been violent, because of the severity and the symptoms of his +illness. The suspicion increased, because the physicians and surgeons, +having opened his body, declared, from the signs that they found, that +he had been poisoned, which made his death more regrettable. [205] +The Audiencia buried the governor in the monastery of St. Augustine +at Manila, with the pomp and ostentation due to his person and +offices. Then, again taking charge of the government, the Audiencia +despatched the vessels to Nueva España, whence advice was sent to +his Majesty of the taking of Maluco and the death of the governor. + +The flagship, in which Don Rodrigo de Mendoça was sailing as general +and captain, reached Nueva España quickly with this news. The +almiranta, notwithstanding that it left the islands at the same +time, delayed more than six months. Eighty persons who perished +from disease were buried in the sea, while many others stricken by +the disease died of it upon landing at the port of Acapulco. Among +these was the licentiate Don Antonio de Ribera, auditor of Manila, +who had been appointed auditor of Mexico. + +At the arrival of these vessels, it was learned that since the death +of Don Pedro de Acuña, and the taking over of the government by the +Audiencia, no change had occurred in the affairs of the islands; +but that their commerce was restricted because of the prohibition +which forbade sending to the islands more than five hundred thousand +pesos each year of the proceeds from the sale of the merchandise in +Nueva España. On account of this the people were in need, as this +amount appeared little for the many Spaniards and for the extent +of the trade--by which all classes are sustained, as they have no +other resources or capital. Also, although the gaining of Maluco had +been so important for affairs in those islands themselves, and their +punishment for the reduction of the other rebels--especially those +of Mindanao and Jolo, from whom the Filipinas had received so great +injury--the desirable quiet and stability had not been secured. For +the Mindanaos and the Joloans were not yet discontinuing their +descents upon the provinces of the Pintados in their war-vessels, to +seize booty according to their custom--and this will continue until +a suitable expedition be sent against them--and Maluco affairs were +not failing to give Joan de Esquivel, the master-of-camp, sufficient +to do. He was acting as governor there and had but little security +from the natives, who, being a Mahometan people, and by nature easily +persuaded and fickle, are restless, and ready for disturbances and +wars. Daily and in different parts the natives were being incited +and aroused to rebellion; and although the master-of-camp and his +captains were endeavoring to punish and pacify them, they could not +do what was necessary to quiet so many disturbances as arose. The +soldiers were dying, and the food giving out; and the aid sent from +Manila could not arrive at the time or in so great quantity as was +requested, because of the perils of the voyage and the straits of +the royal treasury. [206] The coming of vessels to Maluco at this +time from Holanda and Zelanda was not less prejudicial to all our +interests; for the Dutch, having so great interests in the islands, +and having established their interests there so firmly, were coming +in squadrons by the India route, to recover what they had lost in +Amboino, Terrenate, and other islands. With their countenance, the +Moros were revolting against the Spaniards, who had their hands full +with them, and more so with the Dutch, for the latter were numerous, +and more dangerous enemies than the natives. + +The Dutch interest in these regions is so vast--both in the clove-trade +and that of other drugs and spices, and because they think that +they will have a gateway there for the subjugation of the whole +Orient--that, overcoming all the toil and dangers of the voyage, +they are continually coming to these islands in greater numbers and +with larger fleets. If a very fundamental and timely remedy be not +administered in this matter, it will increase to such an extent in +a short time that afterward no remedy can be applied. + +The English and Flemish usually make this voyage by way of the strait +of Magallanes. Francisco Draque [Drake] was the first to make it, +and some years later Tomas Liscander [Candish or Cavendish], who +passed by Maluco. + +Lately Oliver del Nort, a Fleming, made the voyage. The Spanish fleet +fought with his fleet amid the Filipinas Islands, at the end of the +year one thousand six hundred. In this fight, after the capture of +his almiranta (which was commanded by Lamberto Biezman) the flagship, +having lost nearly all its crew, and being much disabled, took to +flight. And as it afterward left the Filipinas, and was seen in Sunda +and the Java channels, so disabled, it seemed impossible for it to +navigate, and that it would surely be lost, as was recounted above +when treating of this. + +This pirate, although so crippled, had the good fortune to escape from +the Spaniards, and, after great troubles and hardships, he returned +to Amstradam with his ship "Mauricio," with only nine men alive, +reaching it on the twenty-sixth of August in the year six hundred +and one. He wrote the relation and the events of his voyage, and gave +plates of the battle and of the ships. This was afterward translated +into Latin and printed by Teodoro de Bri, a German, at Francfort, in +the year six hundred and two. Both relations are going the rounds, +and the voyage is regarded as a most prodigious feat and one of so +great hardships and perils. [207] + +Bartolome Perez, a pilot, gave the same news from the island of La +Palma. He, having come from England by way of Holanda, conversed +with Oliver del Nort, and the latter narrated to him his voyage and +sufferings, as mentioned by Licentiate Fernando de la Cueva in a +letter from the island of La Palma, [208] on the last of July, of +the year six hundred and four, to Marcos de la Cueva, his brother, +who was a resident of Manila, and one of the volunteers who embarked +on the Spanish flagship which fought with the pirate. This letter is +as follows. + +I answer two of your Grace's letters in this: one dated July, six +hundred and one, and the other July, six hundred and two. In both +of them your Grace relates to me the shipwreck that befell you and +how you saved yourself by swimming. Long before I saw your Grace's +letters, I had learned of your mishap, whereat I was very anxious and +even quite grieved; because of what was reported here, I imagined +that your Grace had a part in it. Consequently, I was singularly +overjoyed at the assurance that your Grace still possessed life and +health. Having them, one can conquer other things; and without them +human treasure has no value. By way of Flandes (whence ships come +daily to this island), I learned much, nay, all the event, although +not so minutely. For Oliver de Nort, who was the Dutch general, with +whom the engagement occurred, arrived safely in Holanda, with eight +men--and he made nine--and without money. His purpose when he left +the rebellious states of Holanda and Zelanda, with five armed vessels +laden with merchandise--which were worth, principal and merchandise, +one hundred and fifty or two hundred thousand ducados--was to trade +and carry on commerce through the strait (and such were his orders), +in whatever parts he should be, with friends or enemies. He was not to +attack anyone, but only to defend himself and to incline the Indians to +trade and exchange with him. All the vessels having reached the strait +together, three of them became separated there because of storms, +and must have been wrecked; for up to the present nothing has been +heard of them. Having seen himself so abandoned, and that he could +not restore his loss by trade, or else because he did not receive a +hospitable reception from the inhabitants of Piru, he determined to +exceed his orders, and make that voyage one of plundering. Accordingly +he stationed himself at the mouth of the river to await ships. The +rest that befell, your Grace knows. Oliver de Nort is a native of the +city of Roterdam, and he reached it with an anchor of wood. [209] +He had no other with which to anchor, nor indeed had he any other +left. It is said that this is a very heavy wood of the Indias, and he +has placed it at the door of his house, as a mark of distinction. He +arrived, as I say, with nine men, all told, very much worn out, and as +by a miracle. He has printed a book of his voyage, with engravings of +his vessels, and many other details of what happened to him, and the +hardships that they endured in the fight and throughout the voyage, +both to show his own glory and to incite others to similar deeds. + +A pilot of this island, one Bartolome Perez, was seized and taken to +Inglaterra before the peace or truce. He came through Holanda, where +he conversed at great length with Oliver. The latter told him all that +had happened to him, which is known to all, and was discussed in this +island before that voyage. Bartolome Perez says that Oliver de Nort +praised the Spaniards greatly, and said they were the bravest men he +had seen in his life. They had gained the deck of his ship, and all +the upper works, when he cried out from below deck to set fire to +the powder, whereupon he believes that the Spaniards left for fear +of being blown up. The Dutch then had an opportunity to escape, but +so crippled were they that their reaching port seems a miracle. The +pilot says that he saw the anchor and the book, and what pertains to +the book is stated here. I have recounted this to your Grace, because +of the statements in your letter, namely, that people considered them +as lost, and so that so singular a case may be known there. + +Now the Dutch make the voyage more quickly and more safely, going +and coming, by way of India, but not touching at its ports or coasts, +until they reach the islands of the Javas [210]--Java major and Java +minor--and Samatra, Amboino, and the Malucas. Since they know the +district so well, and have experienced the immense profits ensuing to +them therefrom, it will be difficult to drive them from the Orient, +where they have inflicted so many losses in both spiritual and +temporal affairs. + + + +¶ Relation of the Filipinas Islands and of their natives, antiquity, +customs, and government, both during the period of their paganism +and after their conquest by the Spaniards, and other details. + +¶ CHAPTER EIGHTH + +The islands of the eastern Ocean Sea, adjacent to farther Asia, +belonging to the crown of España, are generally called, by those who +navigate thither by way of the demarcation of Castilla and Castilla's +seas and lands of America, "the Western Islands;" for from the time +that one leaves España, he sails in the course of the sun from east +to west, until he reaches them. For the same reason they are called +"Eastern Islands" by those who sail from west to east by way of +Portuguese India, each of them circumscribing the world by voyaging +in opposite directions, until they meet at these islands, which are +numerous and of varying size; they are properly called Filipinas, +and are subject to the crown of Castilla. They lie within the tropic +of Cancer, and extend from twenty-four degrees north latitude to the +equinoctial line, which cuts the islands of Maluco. There are many +others on the other side of the line, in the tropic of Capricorn, +which extend for twelve degrees in south latitude. [211] The ancients +affirmed that each and all of them were desert and uninhabitable, [212] +but now experience has demonstrated that they deceived themselves; +for good climates, many people, and food and other things necessary +for human life are found there, besides many mines of rich metals, +with precious gems and pearls, and animals and plants, which nature +has not stinted. + +It is impossible to number all the islands--counting larger and +smaller--of this vast archipelago. Those comprised in the name and +government of Filipinas, number about forty large islands, besides +other smaller ones, all consecutive. The chiefest and best known are +Luzon, Mindoro, Tendaya, [213] Capul, Burias, Mazbate, Marinduque, +Leite, Camar, Ybabao, Sebu, Panay, Bohol, Catenduanes, Calamianes, +Mindanao, and others of less renown. + +The first island conquered and colonized by the Spaniards was +Sebu. [214] From there the conquest was started and continued in +all the neighboring islands. Those islands are inhabited by people, +natives of the same islands, called Viçayas; or by another name, +Pintados--for the more prominent of the men, from their youth, tattoo +their whole bodies, by pricking them wherever they are marked and then +throwing certain black powders over the bleeding surface, the figures +becoming indelible. But, as the chief seat of the government, and the +principal Spanish settlement, was moved to the island of Luzon--the +largest island, and that one nearest and opposite to Great China and +Japon--I shall treat of it first; for much that will be said of it is +similar in the others, to each of whose particulars and distinctive +details I shall pass in due time. + +This island of Luzon extends lengthwise, from the point and head where +one enters the Filipinas Islands (by the channel of Capul, which +lies in thirteen and one-half degrees north latitude) to the other +point in the province of Cagayan, called Cape Bojeador (and located +opposite China, in twenty degrees), more than two hundred leguas. In +some parts its width is more constricted than in others, especially in +the middle of the island, where it is so narrow that it is less than +thirty leguas from sea to sea, or from one coast to the other. The +whole island is more than four hundred leguas in circumference. + +The climates of this island are not harmonious; on the contrary, they +present a great diversity in its different districts and provinces. The +head and beginning of the island, in the region of the channel, is more +temperate in the interior, although the coasts are hot. The site of +the city of Manila is hot, for it is on the coast and is low; but in +its vicinity, quite near the city, there are districts and settlements +much cooler, where the heat is not oppressive. The same is true of the +other head of the island, opposite China, named Cagayan. The seasons +of the year--winter and summer--are contrary to those in Europe; for +the rains generally last in all these islands from the month of June +until the month of September, and are accompanied by heavy showers, +whirlwinds, and storms on sea and land. The summer lasts from October +to the end of May, with clear skies and fair winds at sea. However, +the winter and rainy season begins earlier in some provinces than +in others. [215] In Cagayan winter and summer almost coincide with +those of España, and come at the same seasons. + +The people inhabiting the province of Camarines and almost as far as +the provinces of Manila, in this great island of Luzon, both along +the coast and in the interior, are natives of this island. They are +of medium height, with a complexion like stewed quinces; and both +men and women are well-featured. They have very black hair, and +thin beards; and are very clever at anything that they undertake, +keen and passionate, and of great resolution. All live from their +labor and gains in the field, their fishing, and trade, going from +island to island by sea, and from province to province by land. + +The natives of the other provinces of this island as far as Cagayan are +of the same nature and disposition, except that it has been learned +by tradition that those of Manila and its vicinity were not natives +of this island, but came thither in the past and colonized it; and +that they are Malay natives, and come from other islands and remote +provinces. [216] + +In various parts of this island of Luzon are found a number of +natives black in color. Both men and women have woolly hair, and their +stature is not very great, although they are strong and robust. These +people are barbarians, and have but little capacity. They possess no +fixed houses or settlements, but wander in bands and hordes through +the mountains and rough country, changing from one site to another +according to the season. They support themselves in certain clearings, +and by planting rice, which they do temporarily, and by means of the +game that they bring down with their bows, in the use of which they +are very skilful and certain. [217] They live also on honey from the +mountains, and roots produced by the ground. They are a barbarous +people, in whom one cannot place confidence. They are much given to +killing and to attacking the settlements of the other natives, in which +they commit many depredations; and there is nothing that can be done +to stop them, or to subdue or pacify them, although this is always +attempted by fair or foul means, as opportunity and necessity demand. + +The province of Cagayan is inhabited by natives of the same complexion +as the others of the island, although they are better built, and more +valiant and warlike than the others. They wear their hair long and +hanging down the back. They have been in revolt and rebellion twice +since the first time when they were pacified; and there has been plenty +to do, on different occasions, in subduing them and repacifying them. + +The apparel and clothing of these natives of Luzon before the +entrance of the Spaniards into the country were generally, for the +men, certain short collarless garments of cangan, sewed together +in the front, and with short sleeves, and reaching slightly below +the waist; some were blue and others black, while the chiefs had +some red ones, called chinanas. [218] They also wore a strip of +colored cloth wrapped about the waist, and passed between the legs, +so that it covered the privy parts, reaching half-way down the thigh; +these are called bahaques. [219] They go with legs bare, feet unshod, +and the head uncovered, wrapping a narrow cloth, called potong [220] +just below it, with which they bind the forehead and temples. About +their necks they wear gold necklaces, wrought like spun wax, [221] +and with links in our fashion, some larger than others. On their +arms they wear armlets of wrought gold, which they call calombigas, +and which are very large and made in different patterns. Some wear +strings of precious stones--cornelians and agates; and other blue +and white stones, which they esteem highly. [222] They wear around +the legs some strings of these stones, and certain cords, covered +with black pitch in many foldings, as garters. [223] + +In a province called Zambales, they wear the head shaved from +the middle forward. On the skull they have a huge lock of loose +hair. [224] The women throughout this island wear small jackets +[sayuelos] with sleeves of the same kinds of cloth and of all colors, +called varos. [225] They wear no shifts, but certain white cotton +garments which are wrapped about the waist and fall to the feet, +while other dyed cloths are wrapped about the body, like kirtles, and +are very graceful. The principal women have crimson ones, and some +of silk, while others are woven with gold, and adorned with fringe +and other ornaments. They wear many gold necklaces about the neck, +calumbigas on the wrists, large earrings of wrought gold in the ears, +and rings of gold and precious stones. Their black hair is done up +in a very graceful knot on the head. Since the Spaniards came to the +country many Indians do not wear bahaques, but wide drawers of the +same cloths and materials, and hats on their heads. The chiefs wear +braids of wrought gold containing many designs, while many of them wear +shoes. The chief women also wear beautiful shoes, many of them having +shoes of velvet adorned with gold, and white garments like petticoats. + +Men and women, and especially the chief people, are very clean and neat +in their persons and clothing, and of pleasing address and grace. They +dress their hair carefully, and regard it as being more ornamental when +it is very black. They wash it with water in which has been boiled +the bark of a tree called gogo. [226] They anoint it with aljonjoli +oil, prepared with musk, and other perfumes. All are very careful of +their teeth, which from a very early age they file and render even, +with stones and iron. [227] They dye them a black color, which is +lasting, and which preserves their teeth until they are very old, +although it is ugly to look at. [228] + +They quite generally bathe the entire body in the rivers and creeks, +both young and old, without reflecting that it could at any time be +injurious to them; [229] for in their baths do they find their best +medicines. When an infant is born, they immediately bathe it, and +the mother likewise. The women have needlework as their employment +and occupation, and they are very clever at it, and at all kinds of +sewing. They weave cloth and spin cotton, and serve in the houses +of their husbands and fathers. They pound the rice for eating, +[230] and prepare the other food. They raise fowls and swine, and +keep the houses, while the men are engaged in the labors of the +field, and in their fishing, navigation, and trading. They are not +very chaste, either single or married women; while their husbands, +fathers, or brothers are not very jealous or anxious about it. Both +men and women are so selfish and greedy that, if they are paid, they +are easily won over. When the husband finds his wife in adultery, +he is smoothed and pacified without any trouble--although, since they +have known Spaniards, some of those who assume to be more enlightened +among them have sometimes killed the adulterers. Both men and women, +especially the chiefs, walk slowly and sedately when upon their +visits, and when going through the streets and to the temples; and +are accompanied by many slaves, both male and female, with parasols +of silk which they carry to protect them from the sun and rain. The +women walk ahead and their female servants and slaves follow them; +behind these walk their husbands, fathers, or brothers, with their +man-servants and slaves. [231] + +Their ordinary food is rice pounded in wooden mortars, and cooked--this +is called morisqueta, [232] and is the ordinary bread of the whole +country--boiled fish (which is very abundant), the flesh of swine, +deer, and wild buffaloes (which they call carabaos). Meat and fish they +relish better when it has begun to spoil and when it stinks. [233] They +also eat boiled camotes (which are sweet potatoes), beans, quilites +[234] and other vegetables; all kinds of bananas, guavas, pineapples, +custard apples, many varieties of oranges, and other varieties of +fruits and herbs, with which the country teems. Their drink is a wine +made from the tops of cocoa and nipa palm, of which there is a great +abundance. They are grown and tended like vineyards, although without +so much toil and labor. Drawing off the tuba, [235] they distil it, +using for alembics their own little furnaces and utensils, to a greater +or less strength, and it becomes brandy. This is drunk throughout the +islands. It is a wine of the clarity of water, but strong and dry. If +it be used with moderation, it acts as a medicine for the stomach, +and is a protection against humors and all sorts of rheums. Mixed +with Spanish wine, it makes a mild liquor, and one very palatable +and healthful. + +In the assemblies, marriages, and feasts of the natives of these +islands, the chief thing consists in drinking this wine, day and night, +without ceasing, when the turn of each comes, some singing and others +drinking. As a consequence, they generally become intoxicated without +this vice being regarded as a dishonor or disgrace. [236] + +The weapons of this people are, in some provinces, bow and arrows. But +those generally used throughout the islands are moderate-sized spears +with well-made points; and certain shields of light wood, with their +armholes fastened on the inside. These cover them from top to toe, +and are called carasas [kalasag]. At the waist they carry a dagger four +fingers in breadth, the blade pointed, and a third of a vara in length; +the hilt is of gold or ivory. The pommel is open and has two cross bars +or projections, without any other guard. They are called bararaos. They +have two cutting edges, and are kept in wooden scabbards, or those +of buffalo-horn, admirably wrought. [237] With these they strike +with the point, but more generally with the edge. When they go in +pursuit of their opponent, they show great dexterity in seizing his +hair with one hand, while with the other they cut off his head with +one stroke of the bararao, and carry it away. They afterward keep +the heads suspended in their houses, where they may be seen; and of +these they make a display, in order to be considered as valiant, and +avengers of their enemies and of the injuries committed by them. [238] + +Since they have seen the Spaniards use their weapons, many of the +natives handle the arquebuses and muskets quite skilfully. Before the +arrival of the Spaniards they had bronze culverins and other pieces +of cast iron, with which they defended their forts and settlements, +although their powder is not so well refined as that of the Spaniards. + +Their ships and boats are of many kinds; for on the rivers and creeks +inland they use certain very large canoes, each made from one log, +and others fitted with benches and made from planks, and built up +on keels. They have vireys and barangays, which are certain quick +and light vessels that lie low in the water, put together with little +wooden nails. These are as slender at the stern as at the bow, and they +can hold a number of rowers on both sides, who propel their vessels +with bucçeyes or paddles, and with gaones [239] on the outside of the +vessel; and they time their rowing to the accompaniment of some who +sing in their language refrains by which they understand whether to +hasten or retard their rowing. [240] Above the rowers is a platform or +gangway, built of bamboo, upon which the fighting-men stand, in order +not to interfere with the rowing of the oarsmen. In accordance with the +capacity of the vessels is the number of men on these gangways. From +that place they manage the sail, which is square and made of linen, +and hoisted on a support or yard made of two thick bamboos, which +serves as a mast. When the vessel is large, it also has a foresail of +the same form. Both yards, with their tackle, can be lowered upon the +gangway when the weather is rough. The helmsmen are stationed in the +stern to steer. It carries another bamboo framework on the gangway +itself; and upon this, when the sun shines hot, or it rains, they +stretch an awning made from some mats, woven from palm-leaves. These +are very bulky and close, and are called cayanes [241] Thus all the +ship and its crew are covered and protected. There are also other +bamboo frameworks for each side of the vessel, which are so long as +the vessel, and securely fastened on. They skim the water, without +hindering the rowing, and serve as a counterpoise, so that the ship +cannot overturn nor upset, however heavy the sea, or strong the wind +against the sail. It may happen that the entire hull of these vessels, +which have no decks, may fill with water and remain between wind and +water, even until it is destroyed and broken up, without sinking, +because of these counterpoises. These vessels have been used commonly +throughout the islands since olden times. They have other larger +vessels called caracoas, lapis, and tapaques, which are used to carry +their merchandise, and which are very suitable, as they are roomy and +draw but little water. They generally drag them ashore every night, +at the mouths of rivers and creeks, among which they always navigate +without going into the open sea or leaving the shore. All the natives +can row and manage these boats. Some are so long that they can carry +one hundred rowers on a side and thirty soldiers above to fight. The +boats commonly used are barangays and vireys, which carry a less +crew and fighting force. Now they put many of them together with +iron nails instead of the wooden pegs and the joints in the planks, +while the helms and bows have beaks like Castilian boats. [242] + +The land is well shaded in all parts by trees of different kinds, +and fruit-trees which beautify it throughout the year, both along +the shore and inland among the plains and mountains. It is very full +of large and small rivers, of good fresh water, which flow into the +sea. All of them are navigable, and abound in all kinds of fish, +which are very pleasant to the taste. For the above reason there +is a large supply of lumber, which is cut and sawed, dragged to the +rivers, and brought down, by the natives. This lumber is very useful +for houses and buildings, and for the construction of small and large +vessels. Many very straight thick trees, light and pliable, are found, +which are used as masts for ships and galleons. Consequently, vessels +of any size may be fitted with masts from these trees, made of one +piece of timber, without its being necessary to splice them or make +them of different pieces. For the hulls of the ships, the keels, +futtock-timbers, top-timbers, and any other kinds of supports and +braces, compass-timbers, transoms, knees small and large, and rudders, +all sorts of good timber are easily found; as well as good planking +for the sides, decks, and upper-works, from very suitable woods. [243] + +There are many native fruit-trees, such as the sanctors, mabolos, +tamarinds, nancas, custard-apples, papaws, guavas, and everywhere +many oranges, of all kinds--large and small, sweet and sour; +citrons, lemons, and ten or twelve varieties of very healthful and +palatable bananas. [244] There are many cocoa-palms bearing fruit +of pleasant taste--from which is made wine and common oil, which +is a very healing remedy for wounds; and other wild palms of the +forests--that do not yield cocoa-nuts, but serve as wood, and from +whose bark is made bonote, a tow for rigging and cables, and also for +calking ships. Efforts have been made to plant olives and quinces, +and other fruit-trees of España, but as yet they have had no success, +except with pomegranates and grapevines, which bear fruit the second +year. These bear abundance of exceedingly good grapes three times a +year; and some fig-trees have succeeded. Vegetables of every kind +grow well and very abundantly, but do not seed, and it is always +necessary to bring the seeds from Castilla, China, or Japon. + +In the Cagayan provinces are found chestnut-trees, which produce +fruit. In other districts are found pines and other trees which yield +certain very large pine-nuts, with a hard shell and a pleasant taste, +which are called piles. [245] There is abundance of cedar which is +called calanta, a beautiful red wood called asana, [246] ebony of +various qualities, and many other precious woods for all uses. The meat +generally eaten is that of swine, of which there is a great abundance, +and it is very palatable and wholesome. + +Beef is eaten, cattle being raised abundantly in stock-farms in +many different parts of the islands. The cattle are bred from those +of China and Nueva España. [247] The Chinese cattle are small, and +excellent breeders. Their horns are very small and twisted, and some +cattle can move them. They have a large hump upon the shoulders, and +are very manageable beasts. There are plenty of fowls like those of +Castilla, and others very large, which are bred from fowls brought +from China. They are very palatable, and make fine capons. Some of +these fowls are black in feather, skin, flesh, and bones, and are +pleasant to the taste. [248] Many geese are raised, as well as swans, +ducks, and tame pigeons brought from China. There is abundance of +flesh of wild game, such as venison, and wild boars, and in some parts +porcupines. There are many buffaloes, which are called carabaos, which +are raised in the fields and are very spirited; others are brought +tame from China; these are very numerous, and very handsome. These +last are used only for milking, and their milk is thicker and more +palatable than that of cows. + +Goats and kids are raised, although their flesh is not savory, because +of the humidity of the country. These animals sicken and die for that +reason, and because they eat certain poisonous herbs. Ewes and rams, +although often brought from Nueva España, never multiply. Consequently +there are none of these animals, for the climate and pasturage has not +as yet seemed suitable for them. [249] There were no horses, mares, or +asses in the islands, until the Spaniards had them brought from China +and brought them from Nueva España. Asses and mules are very rare, +but there are many horses and mares. Some farms are being stocked with +them, and those born there (mixed breeds for the most part) turn out +well, and have good colors, are good tempered and willing to work, and +are of medium size. Those brought from China are small, very strong, +good goers, treacherous, quarrelsome, and bad-tempered. Some horses +of good colors are brought from Japon. They have well-shaped bodies, +thick hair, large fetlocks, large legs and front hoofs, which makes +them look like draft-horses. Their heads are rather large, and their +mouths hard. They run but slowly, but walk well, and are spirited, +and of much mettle. The daily feed of the horses consists throughout +the year of green provender, [250] besides rice in the husk, which +keeps them very fat. [251] + +There are many fowls and field birds, and wild birds of wonderful +colors and very beautiful. There are no singing birds suitable for +keeping in cages, although some calendar larks [Calandrias] called +fimbaros, [252] smaller than those of España, are brought from Japon, +whose song is most sweet. There are many turtle-doves, ring-doves; +other doves with an extremely green plumage, and red feet and beaks; +and others that are white with a red spot on the breast, like a +pelican. Instead of quail, there are certain birds resembling them, +but smaller, which are called povos [253] and other smaller birds +called mayuelas. [254] There are many wild chickens and cocks, which +are very small, and taste like partridge. There are royal, white, and +grey herons, flycatchers, and other shore birds, ducks, lavancos, [255] +crested cranes, sea-crows, eagles, eagle-owls, and other birds of prey, +although none are used for hawking. There are jays and thrushes as in +España, and white storks and cranes. [256] They do not rear peacocks, +rabbits, or hares, although they have tried to do so. It is believed +that the wild animals in the forests and fields eat and destroy them, +namely, the cats, foxes, badgers, and large and small rats, which +are very numerous, and other land animals. [257] + +Throughout these islands are found a great number of monkeys, of +various sizes, with which at times the trees are covered. There are +green and white parrots, but they are stupid in talking; and very +small parroquets, of beautiful green and red colors, which talk as +little. The forests and settlements have many serpents, of various +colors, which are generally larger than those of Castilla. Some +have been seen in the forests of unusual size, and wonderful to +behold. [258] The most harmful are certain slender snakes, of less +than one vara in length, which dart down upon passersby from the trees +(where they generally hang), and sting them; their venom is so powerful +that within twenty-four hours the person dies raving. + +There are many very large scorpions in the rivers and creeks, +and a great number of crocodiles, which are very bloodthirsty and +cruel. They quite commonly pull from their bancas the natives who go +in those boats, and cause many injuries among the horned cattle and +the horses of the stock-farms, when they go to drink. And although the +people fish for them often and kill them, they are never diminished +in number. For that reason, the natives set closely-grated divisions +and enclosures in the rivers and creeks of their settlements, where +they bathe. There they enter the water to bathe, secure from those +monsters, which they fear so greatly that they venerate and adore +them, as if they were beings superior to themselves. All their oaths +and execrations, and those which are of any weight with them (even +among the Christians) are, thus expressed: "So may the crocodile kill +him!" They call the crocodile buhaya in their language. It has happened +when some one has sworn falsely, or when he has broken his word, that +then some accident has occurred to him with the crocodile, which God, +whom he offends, has so permitted for the sake of the authority and +purity of the truth, and the promise of it. [259] + +The fisheries of sea and rivers are most abundant, and include all +kinds of fish; both of fresh and salt water. These are generally +used as food throughout the entire country. There are many good +sardines, sea-eels, sea-breams (which they call bacocos), daces, +skates, bicudas, tanguingues, soles, plantanos, [260] taraquitos, +needle-fish, gilt-heads, and eels; large oysters, mussels, [261] +porçebes, crawfish, shrimp, sea-spiders, center-fish, and all kinds +of cockles, shad, white fish, and in the Tajo River of Cagayan, [262] +during their season, a great number of bobos, which come down to spawn +at the bar. In the lake of Bonbon, a quantity of tunny-fish, not so +large as those of España, but of the same shape, flesh, and taste, are +caught. Many sea-fish are found in the sea, such as whales, sharks, +caellas, marajos, bufeos, and other unknown species of extraordinary +forms and size. In the year of five hundred and ninety-six, during a +furious storm in the islands, a fish was flung into shallow water on +one of the Luzon coasts near the province of Camarines. It was so huge +and misshapen, that although it lay in more than three and one-half +braças of water, it could not again get afloat, and died there. The +natives said that they had never seen anything like it, nor another +shaped like it. Its head was of wonderful size and fierce aspect. On +its frontal it bore two horns, which pointed toward its back. One of +them was taken to Manila. It was covered with its skin or hide, but +had no hair or scales. It was white, and twenty feet long. Where it +joined the head it was as thick as the thigh, and gradually tapered +proportionally to the tip. It was somewhat curved and not very round; +and to all appearances, quite solid. It caused great wonder in all +beholders. [263] + +There is a fresh-water lake in the island of Luzon, five leguas from +Manila, which contains a quantity of fish. Many rivers flow into this +lake, and it empties into the sea through the river flowing from it +to Manila. It is called La Laguna de Bay ["Bay Lake"]. It is thirty +leguas in circumference, and has an uninhabited island in its middle, +where game abounds. [264] Its shores are lined with many native +villages. The natives navigate the lake, and commonly cross it in +their skiffs. At times it is quite stormy and dangerous to navigate, +when the north winds blow, for these winds make it very boisterous, +although it is very deep. + +Twenty leguas from Manila, in the province of Bonbon, is another lake +of the same name [Bonbon], not so extensive as the former, but with +a great abundance of fish. The natives' method of catching them is +by making corrals [265] of bejucos, which are certain slender canes +or rushes, solid and very pliant and strong; these are employed +for making cables for the natives' boats, as well as other kinds +of ropes. They catch the fish inside these corrals, having made the +enclosures fast by means of stakes. They also catch the fish in wicker +baskets made from the bejucos, but most generally with atarrayas, +[266] esparaveles, other small barrederas, [267] and with hand lines +and hooks. [268] The most usual food of the natives is a fish as small +as pejerreyes. [269] They dry and cure these fish in the sun and air, +and cook them in many styles. They like them better than large fish. It +is called laulau among them. [270] + +Instead of olives and other pickled fruit, they have a green fruit, +like walnuts, which they call paos. [271] Some are small, and others +larger in size, and when prepared they have a pleasant taste. They +also prepare charas [272] in pickle brine, and all sorts of vegetables +and greens, which are very appetizing. There is much ginger, and it +is eaten green, pickled, and preserved. There are also quantities of +cachumba [273] instead of saffron and other condiments. The ordinary +dainty throughout these islands, and in many kingdoms of the mainland +of those regions, is buyo [betel]. This is made from a tree, [274] +whose leaf is shaped like that of the mulberry. The fruit resembles +an oak acorn, and is white inside. [275] This fruit, which is called +bonga, is cut lengthwise in strips, and each strip is put into an +envelope or covering made from the leaf. With the bonga is thrown +in a powder of quick lime. [276] This compound is placed in the +mouth and chewed. It is so strong a mixture, and burns so much, +that it induces sleep and intoxication. It burns the mouths of +those not used to it, and causes them to smart. The saliva and all +the mouth are made as red as blood. It does not taste bad. After +having been chewed [277] for a considerable time it is spit out, +when it no longer has any juice, which is called çapa [sapá]. They +consider very beneficial that quantity of the juice which has gone +into the stomach, for strengthening it, and for various diseases. It +strengthens and preserves the teeth and gums from all inflammations, +decay, and aches. They tell other wonderful effects of it. What has +been seen is that the natives and Spaniards--laymen and religious, +men and women--use it so commonly and generally that mornings and +afternoons, at parties and visits, and even alone in their houses, +all their refreshments and luxuries consist of buyos served on +heavily-gilded and handsomely adorned plates and trays like chocolate +in Nueva España. In these poison has been often administered from +which the persons eating them have died, and that quite commonly. + +The natives (especially the chiefs) take whenever they leave their +houses, for show and entertainment, their boxes of buyos--which they +call buccetas [278]--ready to use, and the leaf, bonga, and quick lime, +separately. With these handsome boxes, which are made of metal and of +other materials, they carry the scissors and other tools for making +the buyo with cleanliness and neatness. Wherever they may stop, they +make and use their buyo. In the pariáns, or bazars, buyos are sold +ready made, and the outfit for making them. [279] + +The natives of these islands quite commonly use as venoms and poisons +the herbs of that class found throughout the islands. They are so +efficacious and deadly that they produce wonderful effects. There +is a lizard, commonly found in the houses, somewhat dark-green in +color, one palmo long, and as thick as three fingers, which is called +chacon. [280] They put this in a joint of bamboo, and cover it up. The +slaver of this animal during its imprisonment is gathered. It is an +exceedingly strong poison, when introduced as above stated, in the +food or drink, in however minute quantities. There are various herbs +known and gathered by the natives for the same use. Some of them are +used dry, and others green; some are to be mixed in food, and others +inhaled. Some kill by simply touching them with the hands or feet, or +by sleeping upon them. The natives are so skilful in making compounds +from these substances, that they mix and apply them in such a manner +that they take effect at once, or at a set time--long or short, as +they wish, even after a year. Many persons usually die wretchedly by +these means--especially Spaniards, who lack foresight, and who are +tactless and hated because of the ill-treatment that they inflict upon +the natives with whom they deal, either in the collection of their +tributes, or in other matters in which they employ them, without +there being any remedy for it. There are certain poisonous herbs, +with which, when the natives gather them, they carry, all ready, other +herbs which act as antidotes. In the island of Bohol is one herb of +such nature that the natives approach it from windward when they cut +it from the shrub on which it grows; for the very air alone that blows +over the herb is deadly. Nature did not leave this danger without a +remedy, for other herbs and roots are found in the same islands, of +so great efficacy and virtue that they destroy and correct the poison +and mischief of the others, and are used when needed. Accordingly, +when one knows what poison has been given him, it is not difficult, +if recourse be had in time, to cure it, by giving the herb that is +antidotal to such poison. At times it has happened that pressure has +been put upon the person suspected of having committed the evil to +make him bring the antidote, by which it has been remedied. There are +also other general antidotes, both for preservation against poison and +for mitigating the effects of poison that has been administered. But +the most certain and efficacious antidotes are certain small flies or +insects, of a violet color, found on certain bushes in the islands +of Pintados. These are shut up in a clean bamboo joint, and covered +over. There they breed and multiply. Ground rice is put in with them, +and they exist thereon. Every week they are visited [281] and the old +rice removed and new rice put in, and they are kept alive by this +means. If six of these insects are taken in a spoonful of wine or +water--for they emit no bad odor, and taste like cress--they produce +a wonderful effect. Even when people go to banquets or dinners where +there is any suspicion, they are wont to take with them these insects, +in order to preserve and assure themselves from any danger of poison +and venom. + +All these islands are, in many districts, rich in placers and mines +of gold, a metal which the natives dig and work. However, since the +advent of the Spaniards in the land, the natives proceed more slowly +in this, and content themselves with what they already possess in +jewels and gold ingots, handed down from antiquity and inherited from +their ancestors. [282] This is considerable, for he must be poor and +wretched who has no gold chains, calombigas [bracelets], and earrings. + +Some placers and mines were worked at Paracali in the province of +Camarines, where there is good gold mixed with copper. This commodity +is also traded in the Ylocos, for at the rear of this province, +which borders the seacoast, are certain lofty and rugged mountains +which extend as far as Cagayan. On the slopes of these mountains, +in the interior, live many natives, as yet unsubdued, and among whom +no incursion has been made, who are called Ygolotes. These natives +possess rich mines, many of gold and silver mixed. They are wont to +dig from them only the amount necessary for their wants. They descend +to certain places to trade this gold (without completing its refining +or preparation), with the Ylocos; there they exchange it for rice, +swine, carabaos, cloth, and other things that they need. [283] The +Ylocos complete its refining and preparation, and by their medium it +is distributed throughout the country. Although an effort has been +made with these Ygolotes to discover their mines, and how they work +them, and their method of working the metal, nothing definite has +been learned, for the Ygolotes fear that the Spaniards will go to +seek them for their gold, and say that they keep the gold better in +the earth than in their houses. [284] + +There are also many gold mines and placers in the other islands, +especially among the Pintados, on the Botuan River in Mindanao, +and in Sebu, where a mine of good gold is worked, called Taribon. If +the industry and efforts of the Spaniards were to be converted into +the working of the gold, as much would be obtained from any one of +these islands as from those provinces which produce the most in the +world. But since they attend to other means of gain rather than +to this, as will be told in due time, they do not pay the proper +attention to this matter. + +In some of these islands pearl oysters are found, especially in +the Calamianes, where some have been obtained that are large and +exceedingly clear and lustrous. [285] Neither is this means of profit +utilized. In all parts, seed pearls are found in the ordinary oysters, +and there are oysters as large as a buckler. From the [shells of the] +latter the natives manufacture beautiful articles. There are also +very large sea turtles in all the islands. Their shells are utilized +by the natives, and sold as an article of commerce to the Chinese +and Portuguese, and other nations who go after them and esteem them +highly, because of the beautiful things made from them. + +On the coasts of any of these islands are found many small white +snail shells, called siguei. The natives gather them and sell them by +measure to the Siamese, Cambodians, Pantanes, and other peoples of the +mainland. It serves there as money, and those nations trade with it, +as they do with cacao-beans in Nueva España. [286] + +Carabao horns are used as merchandise in trading with China; and +deerskins and dye-wood with Japon. The natives make use of everything +in trading with those nations and derive much profit therefrom. + +In this island of Luzon, especially in the provinces of Manila, +Panpanga, Pangasinan, and Ylocos, certain earthenware jars [tibores] +are found among the natives. They are very old, of a brownish color, +and not handsome. Some are of medium size, and others are smaller, +and they have certain marks and stamps. The natives are unable to +give any explanation of where or when they got them, for now they are +not brought to the islands or made there. The Japanese seek them and +esteem them, for they have found that the root of a plant called cha +[tea]--which is drunk hot, as a great refreshment and medicine, among +the kings and lords of Japon--is preserved and keeps only in these +tibors. These are so highly valued throughout Japon, that they are +regarded as the most precious jewels of their closets and household +furniture. A tibor is worth a great sum, and the Japanese adorn them +outside with fine gold beautifully chased, and keep them in brocade +cases. Some tibors are valued and sold for two thousand taes of +eleven reals to the tae, or for less, according to the quality of +the tibor. It makes no difference if they are cracked or chipped, +for that does not hinder them from holding the tea. The natives of +these islands sell them to the Japanese for the best price possible, +and seek them carefully for this profit. However, few are found now, +because of the assiduity with which the natives have applied themselves +to that search. [287] + +At times the natives have found large pieces of ambergris on the +coasts. When they discovered that the Spaniards value it, they gathered +it, and have made profit from it. The past year of six hundred and +two, some natives found in the island of Sebu a good-sized piece of +ambergris, and when their encomendero heard of it, he took it, and +traded with them secretly for it, on the account of their tribute. It +is said that it weighed a good number of libras. Afterward he brought +it out and sold it by the ounce at a higher rate. [288] + +In the province and river of Butuan--which is pacified and assigned +to Spaniards, and is located in the island of Mindanao--the natives +practice another industry, which is very useful. As they possess +many civet cats, although smaller than those of Guinea, they make +use of the civet and trade it. This they do easily, for, when the +moon is in the crescent, they hunt the cats with nets, and capture +many of them. Then when they have obtained the civet, they loose the +cats. They also capture and cage some of them, which are sold in the +islands at very low prices. [289] + +Cotton is raised abundantly throughout the islands. It is spun and +sold in the skein to the Chinese and other nations, who come to +get it. Cloth of different patterns is also woven from it, and the +natives also trade that. Other cloths, called medriñaques, are woven +from the banana leaf. [290] + +The islands of Babuytanes [291] consist of many small islands lying +off the upper coast of the province of Cagayan. They are inhabited +by natives, whose chief industry consists in going to Cagayan, in +their tapaques, with swine, fowls, and other food, and ebony spears, +for exchange. The islands are not assigned as encomiendas, nor is +any tribute collected from them. There are no Spaniards among them, +as those natives are of less understanding and less civilized [than +the others]. Accordingly no Christians have been made among them, +and they have no justices. + +Other islands, called the Catenduanes, lie off the other head of +the island of Luzon, opposite the province of Camarines, in fourteen +degrees of north latitude, near the strait of Espiritu Santo. They +are islands densely populated with natives of good disposition, who +are all assigned to Spaniards. They possess instruction and churches, +and have an alcalde-mayor who administers justice to them. Most of +them cultivate the soil, but some are engaged in gold-washing, and +in trading between various islands, and with the mainland of Luzon, +very near those islands. [292] + +The island of Luzon has a bay thirty leguas in circumference on +its southern coast, situated about one hundred leguas from the cape +of Espiritu Santo, which is the entrance to the Capul channel. Its +entrance is narrow, and midway contains an island called Miraveles +[i.e., Corregidor] lying obliquely across it, which makes the +entrance narrow. This island is about two leguas long and one-half +legua wide. It is high land and well shaded by its many trees. It +contains a native settlement of fifty persons, and there the watchman +of the bay has his fixed abode and residence. There are channels at +both ends of the island, where one may enter the bay. The one at the +south is one-half legua wide, and has a rock in its middle called El +Fraile ["the friar"]. The one on the north is much narrower, but any +ships of any draft whatever can enter and go out by both channels. The +entire bay is of good depth, and clean, and has good anchorages in all +parts. It is eight leguas from these entrances to the colony of Manila +and the bar of the river. A large harbor is formed two leguas south +of Manila, with a point of land that shelters it. That point has a +native settlement called Cabit, [293] and it gives name to the harbor, +which is used as a port for the vessels. It is very capacious and well +sheltered from the vendavals--whether the southeast, and southwest, the +west, and west-southwest, or the north-northeast and north winds. It +has a good anchorage, with a clean and good bottom. There is a good +entrance quite near the land, more than one and one-half leguas wide, +for the ingress and egress of vessels. All the shores of this bay are +well provided with abundant fisheries, of all kinds. They are densely +inhabited by natives. Above Manila there is a province of more than +twenty leguas in extent called La Pampanga. This province possesses +many rivers and creeks that irrigate it. They all flow and empty +into the bay. This province contains many settlements of natives, and +considerable quantities of rice, fruits, fish, meat, and other foods. +[294] + +The bar of the river of Manila, which is in the same bay, near the +colony of Manila on one side and Tondo on the other, is not very deep +because of certain sand shoals on it, which change their position at +the time of the freshets and obstruct it. Consequently, although the +water is deep enough for any vessel past the bar, still, unless they +are fragatas, vireys, or other small vessels, they cannot pass the bar +to enter the river. In respect to galleys, galliots, and the vessels +from China, which draw but little water, they must enter empty, and +at high tide, and by towing. Such vessels anchor in the bay outside +the bar, and, for greater security enter the port of Cabit. + +There is another good port called Ybalon, [295] twenty leguas from +the channel of the same island of Luzon, which is sheltered from the +vendavals, and has a good entrance and anchorage. There the vessels +that enter to escape the vendaval find shelter, and wait until the +brisa returns, by which to go to Manila, eighty leguas away. + +On the coasts of Pangasinan, Ylocos, and Cagayan, there are some +ports and bars, where ships can enter and remain, such as the harbor +of Marihuma, [296] the port E1 Frayle ["the friar"], [297] that of +Bolinao, the bar of Pangasinan, that of Bigan, the bar of Camalayuga, +at the mouth of the Tajo River (which goes up two leguas to the +chief settlement of Cagayan)--besides other rivers, bars, harbors, +and shelters of less account for smaller vessels throughout the coasts +of this island. + +Quite near this large island of Luzon, many other islands, large +and small, are located; they are inhabited by the same natives as +Luzon, who have gold placers, sowed fields, and their trading. Such +are Marinduque, Tablas Island, Mazbate, Burias, Banton, Bantonillo, +and others of less importance. The nearest of them to Manila is the +island of Mindoro. It is more than eighty leguas long and about two +hundred in circumference. It has many settlements of the same natives, +and the side lying next the provinces of Balayan and Calilaya is so +near and close to the island of Luzon, that it forms a strait which +contains powerful currents and races, through which the ships going +to and from Manila enter and leave. The winds and currents there are +very strong. It is about one-half a legua wide. In that part is the +chief town of this island of Mindoro. It has a port that is called El +Varadero ["the place for laying up ships"] for large vessels. There +are also other anchorages and bars throughout this island for smaller +vessels; and many settlements and natives on all the coasts of this +island. All of the settlements abound in rice, food, and gold-placers, +and all kinds of game and timber. [298] + +The cape of Espiritu Santo, which is sighted by ships entering the +Filipinas Islands on the way from Nueva España, is in an island called +Tendaya, [299] in about thirteen degrees. Twenty leguas south after +turning this cape of Espiritu Santo lie the island of Viri, and many +others which are sighted. Through them an entrance opens to the island +of Sebu by a strait called San Juanillo, which is formed by these +islands. It is not very good or safe for the larger ships. But toward +the north after leaving this course, one reaches the island of Capul, +which forms a strait and channel of many currents and rough waves, +through which the ships enter. Before reaching the strait there is a +rock, or barren islet, called San Bernardino; this strait is formed by +the coast of the island of Luzon and that of the island of Capul. Its +channel is about one legua long and less wide. + +On leaving this strait, after having entered by it, three small islets +form a triangle. They are called the islands of Naranjos ["Oranges"], +and are lofty and inaccessible with steep rocks. Upon them ships are +wont to be driven by the powerful currents, even though they try to +escape them. These are not inhabited, but the others [Capul, Viri, +etc.] are large islands containing many settlements of natives and +all kinds of provisions and food. + +South of this district lie the islands of Biçayas, or, as they are +also called, Pintados. They are many in number, thickly populated with +natives. Those of most renown are Leite, Ybabao, [300] Camar [Samar], +Bohol, island of Negros, Sebu, Panay, Cuyo, and the Calamianes. All +the natives of these islands, both men and women, are well-featured, +of a good disposition, and of better nature, and more noble in their +actions than the inhabitants of the islands of Luzon and its vicinity. + +They differ from them in their hair, which the men wear cut in a cue, +like the ancient style in España. Their bodies are tattooed with many +designs, but the face is not touched. [301] They wear large earrings +of gold and ivory in their ears, and bracelets of the same; certain +scarfs wrapped round the head, very showy, which resemble turbans, +and knotted very gracefully and edged with gold. They wear also a +loose collarless jacket with tight sleeves, whose skirts reach half +way down the leg. These garments are fastened in front and are made +of medriñaque and colored silks. They wear no shirts or drawers, but +bahaques [i.e., breech-clouts] of many wrappings, which cover their +privy parts, when they remove their skirts and jackets. The women are +good-looking and graceful. They are very neat, and walk slowly. Their +hair is black, long, and drawn into a knot on the head. Their robes +are wrapped about the waist and fall downward. These are made of all +colors, and they wear collarless jackets of the same material. Both +men and women go naked and without any coverings, [302] and barefoot, +and with many gold chains, earrings, and wrought bracelets. + +Their weapons consist of large knives curved like cutlasses, spears, +and caraças [i.e., shields]. They employ the same kinds of boats as +the inhabitants of Luzon. They have the same occupations, products, +and means of gain as the inhabitants of all the other islands. These +Visayans are a race less inclined to agriculture, and are skilful +in navigation, and eager for war and raids for pillage and booty, +which they call mangubas. [303] This means "to go out for plunder." + +Near the principal settlement of the island of Sebu, there is a fine +port for all manner of vessels. It has a good entrance and furnishes +shelter at all times. It has a good bottom and is an excellent +anchorage. There are also other ports and bars of less importance +and consideration, as in all these islands, for smaller vessels. + +This island of Sebu is an island of more than one hundred leguas in +circumference. It has abundance of provisions, and gold mines and +placers, and is inhabited by natives. + +Beyond it lie other islands, very pleasant and well populated, +especially the island of Panay. Panay is a large island, more +than one hundred leguas in circumference, containing many native +settlements. [304] It produces considerable quantities of rice, +palm-wine, and all manner of provisions. It has flourishing and +wealthy settlements, on what is called the river of Panay. The +chief one is Oton, which has a bar and port for galleys and ships, +shipyards for building large ships, and a great amount of timber for +their construction. There are many natives, who are masters of all +kinds of shipbuilding. Near this island lies an islet eight leguas +in circumference, which is densely populated by natives who are all +carpenters. They are excellent workmen, and practice no other trade +or occupation; and, without a single tree of any size on this whole +islet, they practice this art with great ability. From there all the +islands are furnished with workmen for carpentry. The island is called +that of the Cagayanes. + +After the island of Sebu follow immediately the island of Mindanao, +an island of more than three hundred leguas in circumference, and +Joló, which is small. Lower down is the island of Borneo, a very +large island, more than five hundred leguas in circumference. All of +these islands are densely populated, although that of Borneo is not +subdued. Neither is that of Mindanao in entirety, but only the river +of Botuan, Dapitan, and the province and coast of Caragan. + +Below this island [Mindanao], before reaching that of Borneo, lie +the islands of the Calamianes. They are very numerous, and consist of +islands of various sizes, which are densely inhabited with natives; +they have some supply of provisions and engage in certain kinds +of husbandry. However the most usual occupation is that of their +navigations from island to island in pursuit of their trading and +exchange, and their fisheries; while those who live nearest the island +of Borneo are wont to go on piratical raids and pillage the natives +in other islands. + +The flow- and ebb-tides, and the high and low tides among these +islands are so diverse in them that they have no fixed rule, +either because of the powerful currents among these islands, or +by some other natural secret of the flux and reflux which the moon +causes. No definite knowledge has been arrived at in this regard, +for although the tides are highest during the opposition of the moon, +and are higher in the month of March than throughout the rest of the +year, there is so great variation in the daily tides that it causes +surprise. Some days there are two equal tides between day and night, +while other days there is but one. At other times the flow during the +day is low, and that of the night greater. They usually have no fixed +hour, for it may happen to be high-tide one day at noon, while next day +high-tide may be anticipated or postponed many hours. Or the tide of +one day may be low, and when a smaller one is expected for next day, +it may be much greater. + +The language of all the Pintados and Biçayas is one and the same, +by which they understand one another when talking, or when writing +with the letters and characters of their own which they possess. These +resemble those of the Arabs. The common manner of writing among the +natives is on leaves of trees, and on bamboo bark. Throughout the +islands the bamboo is abundant; it has huge and misshapen joints, +and lower part is a very thick and solid tree. [305] + +The language of Luzon and those islands in its vicinity differs widely +from that of the Bicayas. [306] The language of the island of Luzon +is not uniform, for the Cagayans have one language and the Ylocos +another. The Zambales have their own particular language, while the +Pampangos also have one different from the others. The inhabitants of +the province of Manila, the Tagáls, have their own language, which +is very rich and copious. By means of it one can express elegantly +whatever he wishes, and in many modes and manners. It is not difficult, +either to learn or to pronounce. + +The natives throughout the islands can write excellently with certain +characters, almost like the Greek or Arabic. These characters are +fifteen in all. Three are vowels, which are used as are our five. The +consonants number twelve, and each and all of them combine with +certain dots or commas, and so signify whatever one wishes to write, +as fluently and easily as is done with our Spanish alphabet. The method +of writing was on bamboo, but is now on paper, commencing the lines +at the right and running to the left, in the Arabic fashion. Almost +all the natives, both men and women, write in this language. There +are very few who do not write it excellently and correctly. + +This language of the province of Manila [i.e., the Tagál] extends +throughout the province of Camarines, and other islands not contiguous +to Luzon. There is but little difference in that spoken in the various +districts, except that it is spoken more elegantly in some provinces +than in others. [307] + +The edifices and houses of the natives of all these Filipinas +Islands are built in a uniform manner, as are their settlements; +for they always build them on the shores of the sea, between rivers +and creeks. The natives generally gather in districts or settlements +where they sow their rice, and possess their palm trees, nipa and +banana groves, and other trees, and implements for their fishing +and sailing. A small number inhabit the interior, and are called +tinguianes; they also seek sites on rivers and creeks, on which they +settle for the same reasons. + +The houses and dwellings of all these natives are universally set +upon stakes and arigues [i.e., columns] high above the ground. Their +rooms are small and the roofs low. They are built and tiled with wood +and bamboos, [308] and covered and roofed with nipa-palm leaves. Each +house is separate, and is not built adjoining another. In the lower +part are enclosures made by stakes and bamboos, where their fowls +and cattle are reared, and the rice pounded and cleaned. One ascends +into the houses by means of ladders that can be drawn up, which are +made from two bamboos. Above are their open batalanes [galleries] +used for household duties; the parents and [grown] children live +together. There is little adornment and finery in the houses, which +are called bahandin. [309] + +Besides these houses, which are those of the common people and those +of less importance, there are the chiefs' houses. They are built +upon trees and thick arigues, with many rooms and comforts. They are +well constructed of timber and planks, and are strong and large. They +are furnished and supplied with all that is necessary, and are much +finer and more substantial than the others. They are roofed, however, +as are the others, with the palm-leaves called nipa. These keep out +the water and the sun more than do shingles or tiles, although the +danger from fires is greater. + +The natives do not inhabit the lower part of their houses, because +they raise their fowls and cattle there, and because of the damp +and heat of the earth, and the many rats, which are enormous and +destructive both in the houses and sowed fields; and because, as +their houses are generally built on the sea shore, or on the banks of +rivers and creeks, the waters bathe the lower parts, and the latter +are consequently left open. + +There were no kings or lords throughout these islands who ruled over +them as in the manner of our kingdoms and provinces; but in every +island, and in each province of it, many chiefs were recognized by +the natives themselves. Some were more powerful than others, and +each one had his followers and subjects, by districts and families; +and these obeyed and respected the chief. Some chiefs had friendship +and communication with others, and at times wars and quarrels. [310] + +These principalities and lordships were inherited in the male +line and by succession of father and son and their descendants. If +these were lacking, then their brothers and collateral relatives +succeeded. Their duty was to rule and govern their subjects and +followers, and to assist them in their interests and necessities. What +the chiefs received from their followers was to be held by them in +great veneration and respect; and they were served in their wars and +voyages, and in their tilling, sowing, fishing, and the building of +their houses. To these duties the natives attended very promptly, +whenever summoned by their chief. They also paid the chiefs tribute +(which they called buiz), in varying quantities, in the crops that +they gathered. The descendants of such chiefs, and their relatives, +even though they did not inherit the lordship, were held in the +same respect and consideration. Such were all regarded as nobles, +and as persons exempt from the services rendered by the others, +or the plebeians, who were called timaguas. [311] The same right of +nobility and chieftainship was preserved for the women, just as for +the men. When any of these chiefs was more courageous than others +in war and upon other occasions, such a one enjoyed more followers +and men; and the others were under his leadership, even if they +were chiefs. These latter retained to themselves the lordship and +particular government of their own following, which is called barangai +among them. They had datos and other special leaders [mandadores] +who attended to the interests of the barangay. + +The superiority of these chiefs over those of their barangai was so +great that they held the latter as subjects; they treated these well +or ill, and disposed of their persons, their children, and their +possessions, at will, without any resistance, or rendering account +to anyone. For very slight annoyances and for slight occasions, they +were wont to kill and wound them, and to enslave them. It has happened +that the chiefs have made perpetual slaves of persons who have gone +by them, while bathing in the river, or who have raised their eyes +to look at them less respectfully and for other similar causes. [312] + +When some natives had suits or disputes with others over matters of +property and interest, or over personal injuries and wrongs received, +they appointed old men of the same district, to try them, the parties +being present. If they had to present proofs, they brought their +witnesses there, and the case was immediately judged according to +what was found, according to the usages of their ancestors on like +occasions; and that sentence was observed and executed without any +further objection or delay. [313] + +The natives' laws throughout the islands were made in the same manner, +and they followed the traditions and customs of their ancestors, +without anything being written. Some provinces had different customs +than others in some respects. However, they agreed in most, and in +all the islands generally the same usages were followed. [314] + +There are three conditions of persons among the natives of these +islands, and into which their government is divided: the chiefs, +of whom we have already treated; the timaguas, who are equivalent to +plebeians; and slaves, those of both chiefs and timaguas. + +The slaves were of several classes. Some were for all kinds of work +and slavery, like those which we ourselves hold. Such are called +saguiguilires; [315] they served inside the house, as did likewise the +children born of them. There are others who live in their own houses +with their families, outside the house of their lord; and come, at the +season, to aid him in his sowings and harvests, among his rowers when +he embarks, in the construction of his house when it is being built, +and to serve in his house when there are guests of distinction. These +are bound to come to their lord's house whenever he summons them, and +to serve in these offices without any pay or stipend. These slaves are +called namamahays, [316] and their children and descendants are slaves +of the same class. From these slaves--saguiguilirs and namamahays--are +issue, some of whom are whole slaves, some of whom are half slaves, +and still others one-fourth slaves. It happens thus: if either the +father or the mother was free, and they had an only child, he was +half free and half slave. If they had more than one child, they were +divided as follows: the first follows the condition of the father, +free or slave; the second that of the mother. If there were an odd +number of children, the last was half free and half slave. Those who +descended from these, if children of a free mother or father, were +only one-fourth slaves, because of being children of a free father or +mother and of a half-slave. These half slaves or one-fourth slaves, +whether saguiguilirs or namamahays, served their masters during every +other moon; and in this respect so is such condition slavery. + +In the same way, it may happen in divisions between heirs that a slave +will fall to several, and serves each one for the time that is due +him. When the slave is not wholly slave, but half or fourth, he has +the right, because of that part that is free, to compel his master to +emancipate him for a just price. This price is appraised and regulated +for persons according to the quality of their slavery, whether it be +saguiguilir or namamahay, half slave or quarter slave. But, if he is +wholly slave, the master cannot be compelled to ransom or emancipate +him for any price. + +The usual price of a sanguiguilir slave among the natives is, at most, +generally ten taes of good gold, or eighty pesos; if he is namamahay, +half of that sum. The others are in the same proportion, taking into +consideration the person and his age. + +No fixed beginning can be assigned as the origin of these kinds of +slavery among these natives, because all the slaves are natives of +the islands, and not strangers. It is thought that they were made in +their wars and quarrels. The most certain knowledge is that the most +powerful made the others slaves, and seized them for slight cause or +occasion, and many times for loans and usurious contracts which were +current among them. The interest, capital, and debt, increased so much +with delay that the borrowers became slaves. Consequently all these +slaveries have violent and unjust beginnings; and most of the suits +among the natives are over these, and they occupy the judges in the +exterior court with them, and their confessors in that of conscience. +[317] + +These slaves comprise the greatest wealth and capital of the natives +of these islands, for they are very useful to them and necessary +for the cultivation of their property. They are sold, traded, and +exchanged among them, just as any other mercantile article, from one +village to another, from one province to another, and likewise from +one island to another. Therefore, and to avoid so many suits as would +occur if these slaveries were examined, and their origin and source +ascertained, they are preserved and held as they were formerly. + +The marriages of these natives, commonly and generally were, and +are: Chiefs with women chiefs; timaguas with those of that rank; and +slaves with those of their own class. But sometimes these classes +intermarry with one another. They considered one woman, whom they +married, as the legitimate wife and the mistress of the house; +and she was styled ynasaba. [318] Those whom they kept besides her +they considered as friends. The children of the first were regarded +as legitimate and whole heirs of their parents; the children of the +others were not so regarded, and were left something by assignment, +but they did not inherit. + +The dowry was furnished by the man, being given by his parents. The +wife furnished nothing for the marriage, until she had inherited +it from her parents. The solemnity of the marriage consisted in +nothing more than the agreement between the parents and relatives of +the contracting parties, the payment of the dowry agreed upon to the +father of the bride, [319] and the assembling at the wife's parents' +house of all the relatives to eat and drink until they would fall +down. At night the man took the woman to his house and into his +power, and there she remained. These marriages were annulled and +dissolved for slight cause, with the examination and judgment of the +relatives of both parties, and of the old men, who acted as mediators +in the affairs. At such a time the man took the dowry (which they call +vigadicaya), [320] unless it happened that they separated through the +husband's fault; for then it was not returned to him, and the wife's +parents kept it. The property that they had acquired together was +divided into halves, and each one disposed of his own. If one made +any profits in which the other did not have a share or participate, +he acquired it for himself alone. + +The Indians were adopted one by another, in presence of the +relatives. The adopted person gave and delivered all his actual +possessions to the one who adopted him. Thereupon he remained +in his house and care, and had a right to inherit with the other +children. [321] + +Adulteries were not punishable corporally. If the adulterer paid the +aggrieved party the amount adjudged by the old men and agreed upon +by them, then the injury was pardoned, and the husband was appeased +and retained his honor. He would still live with his wife and there +would be no further talk about the matter. + +In inheritances all the legitimate children inherited equally from +their parents whatever property they had acquired. If there were any +movable or landed property which they had received from their parents, +such went to the nearest relatives and the collateral side of that +stock, if there were no legitimate children by an ynasaba. This was +the case either with or without a will. In the act of drawing a will, +there was no further ceremony than to have written it or to have +stated it orally before acquaintances. + +If any chief was lord of a barangai, then in that case, the eldest son +of an ynasaba succeeded him. If he died, the second son succeeded. If +there were no sons, then the daughters succeeded in the same order. If +there were no legitimate successors, the succession went to the +nearest relative belonging to the lineage and relationship of the +chief who had been the last possessor of it. + +If any native who had slave women made concubines of any of them, +and such slave woman had children, those children were free, as was +the slave. But if she had no children, she remained a slave. [322] + +These children by a slave woman, and those borne by a married woman, +were regarded as illegitimate, and did not succeed to the inheritance +with the other children, neither were the parents obliged to leave +them anything. Even if they were the sons of chiefs, they did not +succeed to the nobility or chieftainship of the parents, nor to their +privileges, but they remained and were reckoned as plebeians and in +the number and rank of the other timaguas. + +The contracts and negotiations of these natives were generally illegal, +each one paying attention to how he might better his own business +and interest. + +Loans with interest were very common and much practiced, and the +interest incurred was excessive. The debt doubled and increased all +the time while payment was delayed, until it stripped the debtor of +all his possessions, and he and his children, when all their property +was gone, became slaves. [323] + +Their customary method of trading was by bartering one thing for +another, such as food, cloth, cattle, fowls, lands, houses, fields, +slaves, fishing-grounds, and palm-trees (both nipa and wild). Sometimes +a price intervened, which was paid in gold, as agreed upon, or in metal +bells brought from China. These bells they regard as precious jewels; +they resemble large pans and are very sonorous. [324] They play upon +these at their feasts, and carry them to the war in their boats instead +of drums and other instruments. There are often delays and terms for +certain payments, and bondsmen who intervene and bind themselves, +but always with very usurious and excessive profits and interests. + +Crimes were punished by request of the aggrieved parties. Especially +were thefts punished with greater severity, the robbers being enslaved +or sometimes put to death. [325] The same was true of insulting words, +especially when spoken to chiefs. They had among themselves many +expressions and words which they regarded as the highest insult, +when said to men and women. These were pardoned less willingly and +with greater difficulty than was personal violence, such as wounding +and assaulting. [326] + +Concubinage, rape, and incest, were not regarded at all, unless +committed by a timagua on the person of a woman chief. It was +a quite ordinary practice for a married man to have lived a long +time in concubinage with the sister of his wife. Even before having +communication with his wife he could have had access for a long +time to his mother-in-law, especially if the bride were very young, +and until she were of sufficient age. This was done in sight of all +the relatives. + +Single men are called bagontaos, [327] and girls of marriageable age, +dalagas. Both classes are people of little restraint, and from early +childhood they have communication with one another, and mingle with +facility and little secrecy, and without this being regarded among +the natives as a cause for anger. Neither do the parents, brothers, +or relatives, show any anger, especially if there is any material +interest in it, and but little is sufficient with each and all. + +As long as these natives lived in their paganism, it was not known +that they had fallen into the abominable sin against nature. But after +the Spaniards had entered their country, through communication with +them--and still more, through that with the Sangleys, who have come +from China, and are much given to that vice--it has been communicated +to them somewhat, both to men and to women. In this matter it has +been necessary to take action. + +The natives of the islands of Pintados, especially the women, are very +vicious and sensual. Their perverseness has discovered lascivious +methods of communication between men and women; and there is one to +which they are accustomed from their youth. The men skilfully make +a hole in their virile member near its head, and insert therein a +serpent's head, either of metal or ivory, and fasten it with a peg of +the same material passed through the hole, so that it cannot become +unfastened. With this device, they have communication with their wives, +and are unable to withdraw until a long time after copulation. They are +very fond of this and receive much pleasure from it, so that, although +they shed a quantity of blood, and receive other harm, it is current +among them. These devices are called sagras, and there are very few +of them, because since they have become Christians, strenuous efforts +are being made to do away with these, and not consent to their use; +and consequently the practice has been checked in great part. [328] + +Herbalists and witches are common among these natives, but are not +punished or prohibited among them, so long as they do not cause any +special harm. But seldom could that be ascertained or known. + +There were also men whose business was to ravish and take away +virginity from young girls. These girls were taken to such men, and +the latter were paid for ravishing them, for the natives considered it +a hindrance and impediment if the girls were virgins when they married. + +In matters of religion, the natives proceeded more barbarously and +with greater blindness than in all the rest. For besides being pagans, +without any knowledge of the true God, they neither strove to discover +Him by way of reason, nor had any fixed belief. The devil usually +deceived them with a thousand errors and blindnesses. He appeared to +them in various horrible and frightful forms, and as fierce animals, +so that they feared him and trembled before him. They generally +worshiped him, and made images of him in the said forms. These they +kept in caves and private houses, where they offered them perfumes +and odors, and food and fruit, calling them anitos. [329] + +Others worshiped the sun and the moon, and made feasts and +drunken revels at the conjunction of those bodies. Some worshiped a +yellow-colored bird that dwells in their woods, called batala. They +generally worship and adore the crocodiles when they see them, by +kneeling down and clasping their hands, because of the harm that +they receive from those reptiles; they believe that by so doing +the crocodiles will become appeased and leave them. Their oaths, +execrations, and promises are all as above mentioned, namely, "May +buhayan eat thee, if thou dost not speak truth, or fulfil what thou +hast promised," and similar things. + +There were no temples throughout those islands, nor houses generally +used for the worship of idols; but each person possessed and +made in his house his own anitos, [330] without any fixed rite or +ceremony. They had no priests or religious to attend to religious +affairs, except certain old men and women called catalonas. These +were experienced witches and sorcerers, who kept the other people +deceived. The latter communicated to these sorcerers their desires +and needs, and the catalonas told them innumerable extravagancies and +lies. The catalonas uttered prayers and performed other ceremonies to +the idols for the sick; and they believed in omens and superstitions, +with which the devil inspired them, whereby they declared whether the +patient would recover or die. Such were their cures and methods, and +they used various kinds of divinations for all things. All this was +with so little aid, apparatus, or foundation--which God permitted, so +that the preaching of the holy gospel should find those of that region +better prepared for it, and so that those natives would confess the +truth more easily, and it would be less difficult to withdraw them +from their darkness, and the errors in which the devil kept them for +so many years. They never sacrificed human beings as is done in other +kingdoms. They believed that there was a future life where those +who had been brave and performed valiant feats would be rewarded; +while those who had done evil would be punished. But they did not +know how or where this would be. [331] + +They buried their dead in their own houses, and kept their bodies +and bones for a long time in chests. They venerated the skulls of the +dead as if they were living and present. Their funeral rites did not +consist of pomp or assemblages, beyond those of their own house--where, +after bewailing the dead, all was changed into feasting and drunken +revelry among all the relatives and friends. [332] + +A few years before the Spaniards subdued the island of Luzon, +certain natives of the island of Borneo began to go thither to trade, +especially to the settlement of Manila and Tondo; and the inhabitants +of the one island intermarried with those of the other. These Borneans +are Mahometans, and were already introducing their religion among +the natives of Luzon, and were giving them instructions, ceremonies, +and the form of observing their religion, by means of certain gazizes +[333] whom they brought with them. Already a considerable number, +and those the chiefest men, were commencing, although by piecemeal, +to become Moros, and were being circumcised [334] and taking the names +of Moros. Had the Spaniards' coming been delayed longer, that religion +would have spread throughout the island, and even through the others, +and it would have been difficult to extirpate it. The mercy of God +checked it in time; for, because of being in so early stages, it was +uprooted from the islands, and they were freed from it, that is, in all +that the Spaniards have pacified, and that are under the government of +the Filipinas. That religion has spread and extended very widely in +the other islands outside of this government, so that now almost all +of their natives are Mahometan Moros, and are ruled and instructed by +their gaçizes and other morabitos; [335] these often come to preach +to and teach them by way of the strait of Ma[la]ca and the Red Sea, +through which they navigate to reach these islands. + +The arrival of the Spaniards in these Filipinas Islands, since the +year one thousand five hundred and sixty-four, the pacification and +conversion that has been made therein, their mode of governing, and +the provisions of his Majesty during these years for their welfare, +have caused innovations in many things, such as are usual to kingdoms +and provinces that change their religion and sovereign. The foremost +has been that, besides the name of Filipinas which all the islands +took and received from the beginning of their conquest, they belong +to a new kingdom and seigniory to which his Majesty, Filipo Second, +our sovereign, gave the name of Nuevo Reyno de Castilla ["New Kingdom +of Castilla"]. By his royal concession, he made the city of Manila +capital of it, and gave to it as a special favor, among other things, +a crowned coat-of-arms which was chosen and assigned by his royal +person. This is an escutcheon divided across. In the upper part is a +castle on a red field, and in the lower a lion of gold, crowned and +rampant, holding a naked sword in its right paw. One-half of the body +is in the form of a dolphin upon the waters of the sea, to signify +that the Spaniards crossed the sea with their arms to conquer this +kingdom for the crown of Castilla. [336] + +The city of Manila was founded by the adelantado Miguel Lopez de +Legazpi, first governor of the Filipinas, in the island of Luzon. It +occupies the same site where Rajamora had his settlement and fort--as +has been related more at length--at the mouth of the river which +empties into the bay, on a point between the river and the sea. The +whole site was occupied by this new settlement, and Legazpi apportioned +it to the Spaniards in equal building-lots. It was laid out with +well-arranged streets and squares, straight and level. A sufficiently +large main square [Plaza mayor] was left, fronting which were erected +the cathedral church and municipal buildings. He left another square, +that of arms [Plaza de armas], fronting which was built the fort, as +well as the royal buildings. He gave sites for the monasteries, [337] +hospital, and chapels which were to be built, as being a city which +was to grow and increase continually--as already it has done; for, +in the course of the time that has passed, that city has flourished +as much as the best of all the cities in those regions. + +The city is completely surrounded with a stone wall, which is more +than two and one-half varas wide, and in places more than three. It +has small towers and traverses at intervals. [338] It has a fortress +of hewn stone at the point that guards the bar and the river, with a +ravelin close to the water, upon which are mounted some large pieces +of artillery. This artillery commands the sea and river, while other +pieces are mounted farther up to defend the bar, besides some other +moderate-sized field-pieces and swivel-guns. These fortifications +have their vaults for storing supplies and munitions, and a magazine +for the powder, which is well guarded and situated in the inner +part; and a copious well of fresh water. There are also quarters +for the soldiers and artillerymen, and the house of the commandant +[alcayde]. The city has been lately fortified on the land side at the +Plaza de armas, where it is entered by a strong wall and two salient +towers, defended with artillery, which command the wall and gate. This +fortress is called Santiago, and has a company of thirty soldiers +with their officers, and eight artillerymen who guard the gate and +entrance by watches--all in charge of a commandant who lives inside, +and has the guard and custody of the fort. + +There is another fortress, also of stone, in the same wall, within +culverin range, located at the end [339] of the curtain, which extends +along the shore of the bay. It is called Nuestra Señora de Guia, and +is a very large round tower. It has its own court, well, and quarters +inside, as well as the magazine, and other rooms for work. It has a +traverse extending to the beach, on which are mounted a dozen large and +moderate-sized pieces, which command the bay and sweep the wall, which +extends along the shore to the gate and to the fort of Santiago. On +the other side the fortress has a large salient tower, mounted with +four large pieces, which command the shore ahead in the direction of +the chapel of Nuestra Señora de Guia. The gate and entrance is within +the city and is guarded by a company of twenty soldiers and their +officers, six artillerymen, and one commandant and his lieutenant, +who live inside. + +On the land side, where the wall extends, there is a rampart called +Sant Andres, which mounts six pieces of artillery that command in +all directions, and some swivel-guns. Farther on is another traverse +called San Gabriel, opposite the parián of the Sangleys, with a like +amount of artillery. Both have some soldiers and an ordinary guard. + +The wall has a sufficient height, and is furnished with battlements and +turrets, built in the modern style, for its defense. It has a circuit +of about one legua, which can be made entirely on top. It has many +broad steps of the same hewn stone, at intervals inside. There are +three principal city gates on the land side, and many other posterns +opening at convenient places on the river and beach, for the service +of the city. Each and all of them are locked before nightfall by +the ordinary patrols. These carry the keys to the guard-room of the +royal buildings. In the morning when day comes, the patrols return +with the keys and open the city. [340] + +The royal arsenals front on the Plaza de armas. In them are kept and +guarded all the supplies of ammunition, food, rigging, iron, copper, +lead, artillery, arquebuses, and other things belonging to the royal +estate. They have their own officers and workmen, and are placed in +charge of the royal officials. + +Near these arsenals is located the powder-house, with its master, +workmen, and convicts, where powder is generally ground in thirty +mortars, and that which is spoiled is refined. [341] + +The building for the founding of artillery is located on a suitable +site in another part of the city. It has its molds, ovens, and tools, +founders, and workmen who work it. [342] + +The royal buildings are very beautiful and sightly, and contain many +rooms. They have many windows opening toward the sea and the Plaza +de armas. They are all built of stone and have two courts, with +upper and lower galleries raised on stout pillars. The governor and +president lives inside with his family. There is a hall for the royal +Audiencia, which is very large and stately; also a separate chapel, +a room for the royal seal, [343] and offices for the scriveners of the +Audiencia, and the government. There are also other apartments for the +royal treasury and the administration of the royal officials, while a +large porch opens on the street with two principal doors, where the +guardroom is located. There is one company of regular arquebusiers, +who come in daily with their banners to stand guard. Opposite, on the +other side of the street, is another edifice for the royal treasury +and those in charge of it. [344] + +The houses of the cabildo, located on the square, are built of +stone. They are very sightly and have handsome halls. On the ground +floor is the prison, and the court of the alcaldes-in-ordinary. [345] + +On the same square is situated the cathedral church. It is built +of hewn stone, and has three naves, and its main chapel, and choir, +with high and low seats. The choir is shut in by railings, and has +its organ, missal-stands, and other necessary things. The cathedral +has also its sacristan [346] and his apartments and offices. + +Within the city is the monastery of St. Augustine. It is very large +and has many dormitories, a refectory and kitchens. They are now +completing a church, which is one of the most sumptuous in those +districts. This convent has generally fifty religious. [347] + +The monastery of St. Dominic is inside the walls. It contains +about forty religious. It was built of stone, and was very well +constructed. It has a church, house, and all offices. It has lately +been rebuilt, and much better; for it was completely destroyed in +the burning of the city in the year six hundred and three. + +The monastery of St. Francis is farther on. It is well constructed +of stone, and its church is being rebuilt. It contains about forty +discalced religious. + +The residence [colegio] of the Society of Jesus is established near +the fortress of Nuestra Señora de Guia. It contains twenty religious +of their order, and is an excellent stone house and church. There +they study Latin, the arts, and cases of conscience. Connected with +them is a seminary and convictorio [348] for Spanish scholars, with +their rector. These students wear gowns of tawny-colored frieze with +red facings. [349] + +In another part of the city stands a handsome house, walled in, with +its stone church, called San Andres and Santa Potenciana. It is a royal +foundation, and a rectoress lives there. It has a revolving entrance +and a parlor, and the rectoress has other confidential assistants; +and there shelter is given to needy women and girls of the city, +in the form of religious retirement. Some of the girls leave the +house to be married, while others remain there permanently. It has +its own house for work, and its choir. His Majesty assists them with +a portion of their maintenance; the rest is provided by their own +industry and property. They have their own steward and their priest, +who administers the sacraments to them. [350] + +In another part is the royal hospital for Spaniards, with its +physician, apothecary, surgeons, managers, and servants. It and its +church are built of stone; and it has its sick rooms and the bed +service. In it all the Spaniards are treated. It is usually quite +full; it is under the royal patronage. His Majesty provides the most +necessary things for it. Three discalced religious of St. Francis +act there as superintendents, and they prove very advantageous for +the corporal and spiritual relief of the sick. It was burned in the +conflagration of the former year six hundred and three, and is now +being rebuilt. + +There is another charitable hospital in charge of the Confraternity of +that name. It was founded in the city of Manila by the Confraternity +of La Misericordia of Lisboa, and by the other confraternities of +India. [351] It has apostolic bulls for works of charity, such as +burying the dead, supporting the modest poor, marrying orphans, and +relieving many necessities. There the slaves of the city are treated, +and lodgings are likewise provided for poor women. + +Next to the monastery of St. Francis is located the hospital for +natives, [352] which is under royal patronage. It was founded with +alms, by a holy lay-brother of St. Francis, one Fray Joan Clemente. A +great many natives, suffering from all diseases, are treated there +with great care and attention. It has a good edifice and workrooms +built of stone. The discalced religious of St. Francis manage it; +and three priests and four lay-brothers, of exemplary life, live +there. These are the physicians, surgeons, and apothecaries of the +hospital, and are so skilful and useful, that they cause many marvelous +cures, both in medicine and in surgery. + +The streets of the city are compactly built up with houses, mostly of +stone, although some are of wood. Many are roofed with clay tiling, and +others with nipa. They are excellent edifices, lofty and spacious, and +have large rooms and many windows, and balconies, with iron gratings, +that embellish them. More are daily being built and finished. There +are about six hundred houses within the walls, and a greater number, +built of wood, in the suburbs; and all are the habitations and homes +of Spaniards. + +The streets, squares, and churches are generally filled with people +of all classes, especially Spaniards--all, both men and women, +clad and gorgeously adorned in silks. They wear many ornaments and +all kinds of fine clothes, because of the ease with which these are +obtained. Consequently this is one of the settlements most highly +praised, by the foreigners who resort to it, of all in the world, +both for the above reason, and for the great provision and abundance +of food and other necessaries for human life found there, and sold +at moderate prices. + +Manila has two drives for recreation. One is by land, along the point +called Nuestra Señora de Guia. It extends for about a legua along +the shore, and is very clean and level. Thence it passes through a +native street and settlement, called Bagunbayan, to a chapel, much +frequented by the devout, called Nuestra Señora de Guia, and continues +for a goodly distance further to a monastery and mission-house of +the Augustinians, called Mahalat. [353] + +The other drive extends through one of the city gates to a native +settlement, called Laguio, by which one may go to a chapel of San +Anton, and to a monastery and mission-house of discalced Franciscans, +a place of great devotion, near the city, called La Candelaria. [354] + +This city is the capital of the kingdom and the head of the +government of all the islands. It is the metropolis of the other +cities and settlements of the islands. In it reside the Audiencia and +Chancillería of his Majesty, and the governor and captain-general of +the islands. [355] + +Manila has a city cabildo with two alcaldes-in-ordinary, twelve +perpetual regidors, an alguaçil-mayor [i.e., chief constable], a royal +standard-bearer, the scrivener of the cabildo, and other officials. + +The archbishop of the Filipinas Islands resides in this city. He has +his metropolitan church, and all the cathedral dignitaries--canons, +racioneros, medias racioneros, [356] chaplains, and sacristans--and a +music-choir, who chant to the accompaniment of the organ and of flutes +[ministriles]. The cathedral is quite ornate and well decorated, +and the Divine offices are celebrated there with the utmost gravity +and ceremony. As suffragans the cathedral has three bishops--namely, +in the island of Sebu, and in Cagayan and Camarines. [357] + +There is a royal treasury with three royal officials--factor, +accountant, and treasurer--by whom the royal revenue of all the +islands is managed. [358] + +The vessels sailing annually to Nueva España with the merchandise and +investments of all the islands are despatched from the city of Manila; +and they return thither from Nueva España with the proceeds of this +merchandise, and the usual reënforcements. + +In the city is established the camp of the regular soldiers whom his +Majesty has had stationed in the islands. + +Several galleys are also stationed at Manila with their general and +captains, as well as other war-vessels, of deep draft, and smaller +ones built like those used by the natives, to attend to the needs of +all the islands. + +The majority of the vessels from China, Japon, Maluco, Borney, Sian, +Malaca, and India, that come to the Filipinas with their merchandise +and articles of trade, gather in the bay and river of Manila. In that +city they sell and trade for all the islands and their settlements. + +In the province [of Cagayán] of this same island of Luzon was founded +the city of Segovia, [359] during the term of Don Gonçalo Ronquillo, +the third governor. It has two hundred Spanish inhabitants who live in +wooden houses on the shore of the Tajo River, two leguas from the sea +and port of Camalayuga. There is a stone fort near the city for the +defense of it and of the river. This fort mounts some artillery, and +has its own commandant. Besides the inhabitants, there are generally +one hundred regular soldiers, arquebusiers, and their officers. They +are all in charge and under command of the alcalde-mayor of the +province, who is its military commander. + +In that city is established a bishop and his church, although at +present the latter has no dignitaries or prebendaries. [360] There +is a city cabildo consisting of two alcaldes, six regidors, and an +alguacil-mayor. The city abounds in all kinds of food and refreshment +at very cheap prices. + +The city of Caçeres was founded in the province of Camarines of the +same island of Luzon, during the term of Doctor Sande, governor of +the Filipinas. It has about one hundred Spanish inhabitants; and +has its cabildo, consisting of alcaldes, regidors, and officials. A +bishop of that province is established there and has his church, +although without dignitaries or prebendaries. A monastery of discalced +Franciscans is located there. The government and military affairs of +that province are under one alcalde-mayor and war-captain, who resides +in Caçeres. The latter is a place abounding in and furnished with all +kinds of provisions, at very low rates. It is founded on the bank of +a river, four leguas inland from the sea, and its houses are of wood. + +The fourth city is that called Santisimo Nombre de Jesus; it is located +in the island of Sebu, in the province of Bicayas or Pintados. It was +the first Spanish settlement and was founded by the adelantado Miguel +Lopez de Legazpi, the first governor. It is a fine seaport, whose water +is very clear and deep, and capable of holding many vessels. The city +has an excellent stone fort, which mounts a considerable quantity of +artillery, and which has its commandant and officers for the guard +and defense of the port and of the city. It is sufficiently garrisoned +with regulars, and is under command of the alcalde-mayor, the military +commander of the province, who lives in the city. The settlement +contains about two hundred Spanish inhabitants who live in houses +of wood. It has a cabildo, consisting of two alcaldes-in-ordinary, +eight regidors, and an alguacil-mayor and his officers. It has a +bishop and his church, like those of other cities of these islands, +without prebendaries. [361] + +The city is provided with food by, and is a station for, the ships +going from Maluco to Manila. Through his Majesty's concession they keep +there a deep-draft merchant vessel, which generally leaves its port +for Nueva España, laden with the merchandise of the products gathered +in those provinces. It has a monastery of Augustinian religious and +a seminary of the Society of Jesus. + +The town of Arevalo was founded on the island of Oton [Panay], during +the term of Don Gonçalo Ronquillo. [362] It contains about eighty +Spanish inhabitants, and is located close to the sea. It has a wooden +fort, which mounts some artillery, and a monastery of the Order of +St. Augustine; also a parish church, with its own vicar and secular +priest. This church belongs to the diocese of the Sebu bishopric. + +It has a cabildo, consisting of alcaldes, regidors, and other +officials. There is one alcalde-mayor and military leader in those +provinces. The town is well supplied with all kinds of provisions, +sold at very low rates. + +The settlement of Villa Fernandina, [363] which was founded in the +province of the Ilocos on the island of Luzon, is settled by Spaniards, +but very few of them remain there. It has a church, with its own vicar +and secular priest. Now no mention will be made of it, on account of +what has been said. The alcalde-mayor of the province resides there, +and the town is situated in the diocese of the Cagayan bishopric. + +From the earliest beginning of the conquest and pacification of +the Filipinas Islands, the preaching of the holy gospel therein +and the conversion of the natives to our holy Catholic faith were +undertaken. The first to set hand to this task were the religious +of the Order of St. Augustine, who went there with the adelantado +Legazpi in the fleet of discovery, and those of the same order who +went afterward to labor in this work, and toiled therein with great +fervor and zeal. Thus, finding the harvest in good season, they +gathered the first fruits of it, and converted and baptized many +infidels throughout the said islands. [364] + +Next to them in the fame of this conversion, the discalced religious +of the Order of St. Francis went to the islands by way of Nueva +España; then those of the Order of St. Dominic, and of the Society of +Jesus. [365] Lastly, the discalced Augustinian Recollects went. One and +all, after being established in the islands, worked in the conversion +and instruction of the natives. Consequently they have made--and +there are now in all the islands--a great number of baptized natives, +besides many others in many parts, who, for want of laborers, have been +put off, and are awaiting this blessing and priests to minister to +them. Hitherto there have been but few missions in charge of secular +priests, as not many of these have gone to the islands; and as very +few have been ordained there, for lack of students. + +The Order of St. Augustine has many missions in the islands of Pintados +and has established and occupied monasteries and various visitas. [366] +In the island of Luzon, they have those of the province of Ylocos, +some in Pangasinan, and all those of La Pampanga--a large number of +monasteries; while in the province of Manila and its vicinity they +have others, which are flourishing. + +The Order of St. Dominic has the missions of the province of Cagayan, +and others in the province of Pangasinan, where are many monasteries +and visitas. They also administer others about the city. + +The Order of St. Francis has some missions and monasteries about +Manila, all the province of Camarines and the coast opposite, and La +Laguna de Bay. These include many missions. + +The Society of Jesus has three large missions in the neighborhood +of Manila, which have many visitas. In the Pintados it has many +others on the islands of Sebu, Leite, Ybabao, Camar [Samar], Bohol, +and others near by. They have good men, who are solicitous for the +conversion of the natives. + +These four orders have produced many good results in the conversion +of these islands, as above stated; and in good sooth the people +have taken firm hold of the faith, as they are a people of so good +understanding. They have recognized the errors of their paganism +and the truths of the Christian religion; and they possess good and +well-built churches and monasteries of wood with their reredoses and +beautiful ornaments, and all the utensils, crosses, candlesticks, +and chalices of silver and gold. Many devotions are offered, and there +are many confraternities. There is assiduity in taking the sacraments +and in attendance on the Divine services; and the people are careful +to entertain and support their religious (to whom they show great +obedience and respect) by the many alms that they give them, as well +as by those that they give for the suffrages and the burial of their +dead, which they provide with all punctuality and liberality. + +At the same time that the religious undertook to teach the natives +the precepts of religion, they labored to instruct them in matters +of their own improvement, and established schools for the reading +and writing of Spanish among the boys. They taught them to serve in +the church, to sing the plain-song, and to the accompaniment of the +organ; to play the flute, to dance, and to sing; and to play the +harp, guitar, and other instruments. In this they show very great +adaptability, especially about Manila; where there are many fine +choirs of chanters and musicians composed of natives, who are skilful +and have good voices. There are many dancers, and musicians on the +other instruments which solemnize and adorn the feasts of the most +holy sacrament, and many other feasts during the year. The native +boys present dramas and comedies, both in Spanish and in their own +language, very charmingly. This is due to the care and interest of +the religious, who work tirelessly for the natives' advancement. [367] + +In these islands there is no native province or settlement which +resists conversion or does not desire it. But, as above stated, +baptism has been postponed in some districts, for lack of workers +to remain with the people, in order that they may not retrograde and +return to their idolatries. In this work, the best that is possible +is done, for the mission-fields are very large and extensive. In many +districts the religious make use, in their visitas, of certain of the +natives who are clever and well instructed, so that these may teach +the others to pray daily, instruct them in other matters touching +religion, and see that they come to mass at the central missions; and +in this way they succeed in preserving and maintaining their converts. + +Hitherto, the orders who control these missions in virtue of the +omnimodo and other apostolic concessions [368] have attended to the +conversion of the natives, administered the sacraments, looked after +the spiritual and temporal and ecclesiastical affairs of the natives, +and absolved them in cases of difficulty. But now that there are an +archbishop and bishops, this is being curtailed, and the management +of these affairs is being given to the bishops, as the archbishop's +vicars--although not to such an extent, nor has the administration +of these natives been placed in their charge, in matters of justice, +and under the inspection and superintendence of the bishops, as they +have endeavored to obtain. [369] + +The governor and royal Audiencia of Manila attend to what it is +advisable to provide and direct for the greatest accomplishment and +advancement of this conversion, and the administration of the natives +and their missions--both by causing the encomenderos to assist +the religious and churches, in the encomiendas that they enjoy, +with the stipends and necessary expenses of the missions; and by +furnishing from the royal revenues what pertains to it, which is no +less a sum. [370] They also ordain whatever else is required to be +provided and remedied for the said missions and for the advancement +of the natives. This also is attended to by the archbishop and the +bishops in what pertains to them in their duty and charge as pastors. + +The Holy Office of the Inquisition, residing in Mexico of Nueva +España, has its commissaries, servants, and helpers in Manila and +in the bishoprics of the islands, who attend to matters touching +the Holy Office. They never fail to have plenty to do there because +of the entrance of so many strangers into those districts. However, +this holy tribunal does not have jurisdiction of the causes pertaining +to the natives, as the latter are so recently converted. + +All these islands are subdued, and are governed from Manila by means +of alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, and lieutenants, each of whom rules +and administers justice in his own district and province. Appeals from +their acts and sentences go to the royal Audiencia. The governor and +captain-general provides what pertains to government and war. + +The chiefs, who formerly held the other natives in subjection, +now have no power over them in the tyrannical manner of former +days. This was not the least benefit received by these natives in +having been freed from such servitude. However, it is true that +matters touching the slavery of former days have remained on the +same footing as before. The king our sovereign has ordered by his +decrees that the honors of the chiefs be preserved to them as such; +and that the other natives recognize them and assist them with certain +of the labors that they used to give when pagans. This is done with +the lords and possessors of barangays, and those belonging to such and +such a barangay are under that chief's control. When he harvests his +rice, they go one day to help him; and the same if he builds a house, +or rebuilds one. This chief lord of a barangay collects tribute from +his adherents, and takes charge of these collections, to pay them to +the encomendero. [371] + +Besides the above, each village has a governor [372] who is elected. He +and his constables who are called vilangos [373] comprise the +usual magistracy among the natives. The governor hears civil suits +where a moderate sum is involved; in appeal, the case goes to the +corregidor or alcalde-mayor of the province. These governors are +elected annually by the votes of all the married natives of such +and such a village. The governor of Manila confirms the election, +and gives the title of governor to the one elected, and orders him to +take the residencia of the outgoing governor. [374] This governor, +in addition to the vilangos and scrivener (before whom he makes his +acts in writing, in the language of the natives of that province), +[375] holds also the chiefs--lords of barangays, and those who are +not so--under his rule and government, and, for any special service, +such as collections of tributes, and assignments of personal services, +as his datos and mandones. [376] They do not allow the chiefs to +oppress the timaguas or slaves under their control. + +The same customs observed by these natives in their paganism, are +observed by them since they have become Christians, in so far as +they are not contrary to natural law, especially as to their slavery, +successions, inheritances, adoptions, wills, and lawful trading. In +their suits, they always allege and prove the custom, and are judged +by it, according to royal decrees to that effect. In other causes +which do not involve their customs, and in criminal cases, the matter +is determined by law as among Spaniards. + +All of these islands and their natives, so far as they were pacified, +were apportioned into encomiendas from the beginning. To the royal +crown were allotted those which were chief towns and ports, and the +dwellers of the cities and towns; and also other special encomiendas +and villages in all the provinces, for the necessities and expenses +of the royal estate. All the rest was assigned to the conquerors and +settlers who have served and labored for the conquest and pacification, +and in the war. This matter is in charge of the governor, who takes +into consideration the merits and services of the claimants. [377] +In like manner the villages that become vacant are assigned. There +are many very excellent encomiendas throughout the islands, and they +offer many profits, both by the amount of their tributes and by the +nature and value of what is paid as tribute. [378] The encomienda +lasts, according to the royal laws and decrees, and by the regular +order and manner of succession to them, for two lives; but it may +be extended to a third life, by permission. After it becomes vacant, +it is again assigned and granted anew. + +The tributes paid to their encomenderos by the natives were assigned +by the first governor, Miguel Lopez de Legazpi, in the provinces of +Vicayas and Pintados, and in the islands of Luzon and its vicinity; +they were equal to the sum of eight reals annually for an entire +tribute from each tributario. The natives were to pay it in their +products--in gold, cloth, cotton, rice, bells, fowls, and whatever +else they possessed or harvested. The fixed price and value of each +article was assigned so that, when the tribute was paid in any one +of them, or in all of them, it should not exceed the value of the +eight reals. So it has continued until now, and the governors have +increased the appraisements and values of the products at different +times, as they have deemed advisable. + +The encomenderos have made great profits in collecting in kind, for, +after they acquired possession of the products, they sold them at +higher prices. By this they increased their incomes and the proceeds +of their encomiendas considerably; until a few years ago his Majesty, +by petition of the religious and the pressure that they brought to +bear on him in this matter, ordered for this region that the natives +should pay their tribute in whatever they wished--in kind or in +money--without being compelled to do otherwise. Consequently, when +they should have paid their eight reals, they would have fulfilled +their obligation. Accordingly this rule was initiated; but experience +demonstrates that, although it seemed a merciful measure, and one +favorable to the natives, it is doing them great injury. For, since +they naturally dislike to work, they do not sow, spin, dig gold, +rear fowls, or raise other food supplies, as they did before, when +they had to pay the tribute in those articles. They easily obtain, +without so much work, the peso of money which is the amount of their +tribute. Consequently it follows that the natives have less capital +and wealth, because they do not work; and the country, which was +formerly very well provided and well-supplied with all products, +is now suffering want and deprivation of them. The owners of the +encomiendas, both those of his Majesty and those of private persons +who possess them, have sustained considerable loss and reduction in +the value of the encomiendas. + +When Gomez Perez Dasmariñas was appointed governor of the Filipinas, +he brought royal decrees ordering the formation of the camp in Manila, +with an enrollment of four hundred paid soldiers, with their officers, +galleys, and other military supplies, for the defense and security +of the country. Before that time all the Spanish inhabitants had +attended to that without any pay. Then an increase of two reals to +each tributario over the eight reals was ordered. This was to be +collected by the encomenderos at the same time when they collected +the eight reals of the tribute, and was to be delivered and placed +in the royal treasury. There this amount was to be entered on an +account separate from that of the other revenue of his Majesty, and +was to be applied in the following manner: one and one-half reals for +the expenses of the said camp and war stores; and the remaining half +real for the pay of the prebendaries of the Manila church, which his +Majesty pays from his treasury, until such time as their tithes and +incomes suffice for their sustenance. [379] + +These tributes are collected from all the natives, Christians and +infidels, in their entirety--except that in those encomiendas without +instruction the encomendero does not take the fourth part of the eight +reals (which equals two reals) for himself, since that encomienda has +no instruction or expenses for it; but he takes them and deposits +them in Manila, in a fund called "the fourths." [380] The money +obtained from this source is applied to and spent in hospitals for +the natives, and in other works beneficial to them, at the option of +the governor. As fast as the encomiendas are supplied with instruction +and religious, the collection of these fourths and their expenditure +in these special works cease. + +Some provinces have taken the census of their natives; and according to +these the tributes and the assignment of the two reals are collected. + +In most of the provinces no census has been taken, and the tributes +are collected when due by the encomenderos and their collectors, +through the chiefs of their encomiendas, by means of the lists and +memoranda of former years. From them the names of the deceased and of +those who have changed their residence are erased, and the names of +those who have grown up, and of those who have recently moved into the +encomienda, are added. When any shortage is perceived in the accounts, +a new count is requested and made. + +The natives are free to move from one island to another, and from +one province to another, and pay their tribute for that year in which +they move and change their residence in the place to which they move; +and to move from a Christian village that has instruction to another +village possessing it. But, on the other hand, they may not move from +a place having instruction to one without it, nor in the same village +from one barangay to another, nor from one faction to another. In +this respect, the necessary precautions are made by the government, +and the necessary provisions by the Audiencia, so that this system +may be kept, and so that all annoyances resulting from the moving of +the settled natives of one place to another place may be avoided. + +Neither are the natives allowed to go out of their villages for +trade, except by permission of the governor, or of his alcaldes-mayor +and justices, or even of the religious, who most often have been +embarrassed by this, because of the instruction. This is done so that +the natives may not wander about aimlessly when there is no need of +it, away from their homes and settlements. + +Those natives who possess slaves pay their tributes for them if the +slaves are saguiguilirs. If the slaves are namamahays living outside +their owners' houses, they pay their own tributes, inasmuch as they +possess their own houses and means of gain. + +The Spaniards used to have slaves from these natives, whom they had +bought from them, and others whom they obtained in certain expeditions +during the conquest and pacification of the islands. This was stopped +by a brief of his Holiness [381] and by royal decrees. Consequently, +all of these slaves who were then in the possession of the Spanish, +and who were natives of these islands, in whatever manner they had +been acquired, were freed; and the Spaniards were forever prohibited +from holding them as slaves, or from capturing them for any reason, or +under pretext of war, or in any other manner. The service rendered by +these natives is in return for pay and daily wages. The other slaves +and captives that the Spaniards possess are Cafres and blacks brought +by the Portuguese by way of India, and are held in slavery justifiably, +in accordance with the provincial councils and the permissions of +the prelates and justices of those districts. + +The natives of these islands have also their personal services, which +they are obliged to render--in some parts more than in others--to the +Spaniards. These are done in different ways, and are commonly called +the polo. [382] For, where there are alcaldes-mayor and justices, they +assign and distribute certain natives by the week for the service of +their houses. They pay these servants a moderate wage, which generally +amounts to one-fourth real per day, and rice for their food. The same +is done by the religious for the mission, and for their monasteries +and churches, and for their works, and for public works. [383] + +The Indians also furnish rice, and food of all kinds, at the prices +at which they are valued and sold among the natives. These prices +are always very moderate. The datos, vilangos, and fiscals make the +division, collect, and take these supplies from the natives; and in +the same manner they supply their encomenderos when these go to make +the collections. + +The greatest service rendered by these natives is on occasions of war, +when they act as rowers and crews for the vireys and vessels that go +on the expeditions, and as pioneers for any service that arises in +the course of the war, although their pay and wages are given them. + +In the same way natives are assigned and apportioned for the king's +works, such as the building of ships, the cutting of wood, the trade +of making the rigging, [384] the work in the artillery foundry, and +the service in the royal [385] magazines; and they are paid their +stipend and daily wage. + +In other things pertaining to the service of the Spaniards and their +expeditions, works, and any other service, performed by the natives, +the service is voluntary, and paid by mutual agreement; [386] for, +as hitherto, the Spaniards have worked no mines, nor have they given +themselves to the gains to be derived from field labors, there is no +occasion for employing the natives in anything of that sort. + +Most of the Spaniards of the Filipinas Islands reside in the city +of Manila, the capital of the kingdom, and where the chief trade +and commerce is carried on. Some encomenderos live in provinces or +districts adjacent to Manila, while other Spaniards live in the +cities of Segovia, Caçeres, Santisimo Nombre de Jesus (in Sebu), +and in the town of Arevalo, where they are settled, and where most +of them have their encomiendas. + +Spaniards may not go to the Indian villages, [387] except for the +collection of the tributes when they are due; and then only the +alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, and justices. It is not permitted these +to remain continually in one settlement of their district, but they +must visit as much of it as possible. They must change their residence +and place of abode every four months to another chief village and +settlement, where all the natives may obtain the benefit of their +presence; and so that the natives may receive as slight annoyance +as possible in supporting them and in the ordinary service that they +render them. [388] + +The governor makes appointments to all offices. When the term of office +expires, the royal Aurdiencia orders the residencia of each official +to be taken, and his case is decided in accordance therewith; and +until the residencia is completed, the incumbent cannot be appointed +to any other duty or office. The governor also appoints commandants +of forts, companies, and other military officials, in all the cities, +towns, and hamlets of the islands. [389] + +Certain offices of regidors and notaries have been sold by royal decree +for one life. But the sale of these offices has been superseded, +as it is now considered that the price paid for them is of little +consideration, while the disadvantage of perpetuating the purchasers +in office by this method is greater. + +Elections of alcaldes-in-ordinary for all the Spanish towns are held +on New Year's day by the cabildo and magistracy. The residencias +of these alcaldes-in-ordinary and their cabildos are ordered by +his Majesty to be taken at the same time as that of the governor +and captain-general of the islands is taken; and they give account +of the administration of the revenues and the estates under their +care. However, the governor may take it before this, every year, +or whenever he thinks it expedient and cause the balances of their +accounts to be collected. With the governor's advice and permission +the expenses desired by the towns are made. + +The city of Manila has sufficient public funds for certain years, +through the fines imposed by its judges; in its own particular +possessions, inside and outside the city; in the reweighing of the +merchandise and the rents of all the shops and sites of the Sangleys +in the parián; and in the monopoly on playing cards. All this was +conceded to the city by his Majesty, especially for the expenses of +its fortification. [390] These revenues are spent for that purpose; for +the salaries of its officials, and those of the agents sent to España; +and for the feasts of the city, chief of which are St. Potenciana's +day, May nineteen, when the Spaniards entered and seized the city, +and the day of St. Andrew, November 30, the date on which the pirate +Limahon was conquered and driven from the city. On that day the city +officials take out the municipal standard, and to the sound of music go +to vespers and mass at the church of San Andres, where the entire city, +with the magistracy and cabildo and the royal Audiencia, assemble +with all solemnity. The above revenues are also used in receiving +the governors at their first arrival in the country, in the kings' +marriage feasts, and the births of princes, and in the honors and +funeral celebrations for the kings and princes who die. In all the +above the greatest possible display is made. + +The other cities and settlements do not possess as yet so many +sources of wealth or revenue, or the occasions on which to spend +them--although, as far as possible, they take part in them, in all +celebrations of the same kind. + +The Spaniards living in the islands are divided into five classes of +people: namely, prelates, religious, and ecclesiastical ministers, +both secular and regular; encomenderos, settlers, and conquerors; +soldiers, officers, and officials of war (both on land and sea), +and those for navigation; merchants, business men, and traders; and +his Majesty's agents for government, justice, and administration of +his royal revenue. + +The ecclesiastical prelates have already been stated, and are as +follows: The archbishop of Manila, who resides in the city, as +metropolitan, in charge of his cathedral church; he has a salary +of four thousand pesos, [391] which is paid from the royal treasury +annually. Likewise the salaries paid to the holders of the dignidades, +[392] canonries, and other prebends, and those performing other +services, are paid in the same manner. They are all under royal +patronage, and are provided in accordance with the king's orders. The +archbishop's office and jurisdiction consists of and extends to all, +both the spiritual and temporal, that is ecclesiastic, and to its +management. [393] + +The bishop of the city of Santisimo Nombre de Jesus in Sibu, that +of Segovia in Cagayan, and that of Caceres in Camarines, have the +same rights of jurisdiction and enjoy the same privileges in their +dioceses, since they are suffragans of the archbishop of Manila; +appeal from their judgments is made to the latter, and he summons and +convokes them to his provincial councils whenever necessary. They +receive each an annual salary of five hundred thousand maravedis +for their support, which is paid from the royal treasury of Manila, +besides their offerings and pontifical dues. All together it is quite +sufficient for their support, according to the convenience of things +and the cheapness of the country. At present the bishops do not possess +churches with prebendaries nor is any money set aside for that. [394] + +The regular prelates are the provincials of the four mendicant orders, +namely, St. Dominic, St. Augustine, St. Francis, the Society of +Jesus, and the discalced Augustinians. [395] Each prelate governs +his own order and visits the houses. The orders have nearly all the +missions to the natives under their charge, in whatever pertains to +the administration of the sacraments and conversion--by favor of, +and in accordance with, their privileges and the apostolic bulls, in +which until now they have maintained themselves--and in what pertains +to judicial matters, as vicars of the bishops, and through appointment +and authorization of the latter. The discalced Augustinians as yet +have no missions, as they have but recently entered the islands. + +The monasteries are supported by certain special incomes that they +possess and have acquired--especially those of the Augustinians +and those of the Society--and by help and concessions granted by +his Majesty. The Dominicans and Franciscans do not possess or allow +incomes or properties; [396] and for them, as for the other orders, +the principal source of revenue is in the alms, offerings, and aid +given by the districts where they are established and where they have +charge. This help is given by both Spaniards and natives, very piously +and generously. They are aided also by the stipend given them from +the encomiendas for the instruction that they give there. Consequently +the religious of the orders live well and with the comfort necessary. + +The first encomenderos, conquerors, and settlers of the islands, +and their issue, are honorably supported by the products of their +encomiendas, and by certain means of gain and trading interests that +they possess, as do the rest of the people. There are a great number of +them, each one of whom lives and possesses his house in the city and +settlement of Spaniards in whose province he has his encomienda. This +they do in order not to abandon their encomiendas, and thus they are +nearer the latter for their needs and for collections. + +Now but few of the first conquerors who gained the country and went +there for its conquest with the adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi +remain alive. + +The soldiers and officers of war and of naval expeditions formerly +consisted of all the dwellers and inhabitants of the islands, who +rendered military service without any pay or salary. They went on all +the expeditions and pacifications that arose, and guarded the forts +and presidios, and cities and settlements. This was their principal +exercise and occupation. They were rewarded by the governor, who +provided them with encomiendas, offices, and profits of the country +according to their merits and services. [397] + +At that time the soldiers of the islands were the best in the +Indias. They were very skilful and well-disciplined by both land +and sea, and were esteemed and respected by all those nations. They +gloried in their arms, and in acquitting themselves valiantly. + +Afterward, when Gomez Perez Das Mariñas entered upon the government of +the Filipinas, he founded the regular camp of four hundred soldiers: +the arquebusiers, with pay of six pesos per month; the musketeers, +with eight pesos; six captains, with annual pay of four hundred +and twenty pesos apiece; their alféreces, sergeants, corporals, +standard-bearers, and drummers, with pay in proportion to their +duties; one master-of-camp, with annual pay of one thousand four +hundred pesos; one sargento-mayor with captain's pay; one adjutant of +the sargento-mayor and field-captain, with monthly pay of ten pesos; +two castellans; commandants of the two fortresses of Manila, with +four hundred pesos apiece annually; their lieutenants; squads of +soldiers and artillerymen; one general of galleys, with annual pay +of eight hundred pesos; each galley one captain, with annual pay of +three hundred pesos; their boatswains, boatswains' mates, coxswains, +alguacils of the galleys, soldiers, artillerymen, master-carpenters, +riggers, sailors, conscripts, [398] galley-crews of Spanish, Sangley, +and native convicts, condemned for crimes; and, when there is lack +of convicts, good rowers are obtained from the natives for pay, +for the period of the expedition and the occasion of the voyage. [399] + +In the vessels and fleets of large vessels for the Nueva España line, +the ships that are sent carry a general, admiral, masters, boatswains, +commissaries, stewards, alguacils, sergeants of marine artillery +[condestables], artillerymen, sailors, pilots and their assistants, +common seamen, carpenters, calkers, and coopers, all in his Majesty's +pay, on the account of Nueva España, from whose royal treasury they +are paid. All that is necessary for this navigation is supplied +there. Their provisions and appointments are made by the viceroy; +and this has hitherto pertained to him, even though the ships may have +been constructed in the Filipinas. They sail thence with their cargo +of merchandise for Nueva España, and return thence to the Filipinas +with the reënforcements of soldiers and supplies, and whatever else +is necessary for the camp, besides passengers and religious, and the +money proceeding from the investments and merchandise. [400] + +After the establishment of a regular camp for guard and expeditions, +the other inhabitants, dwellers, and residents were enrolled without +pay under the banners of six captains of the Filipinas, for special +occasions requiring the defense of the city. But they were relieved +of all other duties pertaining to the troops, unless they should +offer of their own accord to go upon any expedition, or volunteer +for any special occasion, in order to acquire merits and benefits, so +that they may be given encomiendas that become vacant, and offices, +and the means of profit of the country. They are not compelled or +obliged to do this, unless they are encomenderos. Consequently all +have given themselves to trading, as there is no other occupation, +but they are not unmindful of military service. + +His Majesty prohibits all who are in his pay in the military forces +of the islands from engaging in commerce; and orders the governor +not to allow this, or permit them to export goods to Nueva España. If +the governors would observe that order, it would not be amiss. [401] + +The merchants and business men form the bulk of the residents of +the islands, because of the great amount of merchandise brought +there--outside of native products--from China, Japon, Maluco, Malaca, +Sian, Camboja, Borneo, and other districts. They invest in this +merchandise and export it annually in the vessels that sail to Nueva +España, and at times to Japon, where great profits are made from +raw silk. Thence on the return to Manila are brought the proceeds, +which hitherto have resulted in large and splendid profits. + +Through the very great increase of this trade--which was harmful +and prejudicial to the Spanish merchants who shipped goods to Peru +and Nueva España, and to the royal duties collected on the shipments +from España--and through the business men of Mexico and Peru having +become greedy of trade and commerce with the Filipinas, by means of +their agents and factors, so that the trade with España was ceasing +in great measure, and the merchants were sending to the Filipinas for +their investments great consignments of silver, which by that means +flowed yearly from his Majesty's kingdoms, to fall into the possession +of infidels: all persons of Nueva España and Peru were prohibited from +trading and engaging in commerce in the Filipinas, and from taking the +Chinese merchandise to those regions. [402] Permission was given to +the inhabitants and residents of the Filipinas that they alone might +trade in the said merchandise, and export it. They are to take these +goods themselves, or send them with persons who belong to the islands, +so that they may sell them. From the proceeds of the said merchandise, +they may not carry to the Filipinas more than five hundred thousand +pesos each year. [403] + +A considerable number of somas and junks (which are large +vessels) generally come from Great China to Manila, laden with +merchandise. Every year thirty or even forty ships are wont to come, +and although they do not come together, in the form of a trading +and war fleet, still they do come in groups with the monsoon and +settled weather, which is generally at the new moon in March. They +belong to the provinces of Canton, Chincheo, and Ucheo [Fo-Kien], +and sail from those provinces. They make their voyage to the city of +Manila in fifteen or twenty days, sell their merchandise, and return +in good season, before the vendavals set in--the end of May and a +few days of June--in order not to endanger their voyage. + +These vessels come laden with merchandise, and bring wealthy merchants +who own the ships, and servants and factors of other merchants who +remain in China. They leave China with the permission and license of +the Chinese viceroys and mandarins. The merchandise that they generally +bring and sell to the Spaniards consists of raw silk in bundles, of +the fineness of two strands [dos cabeças], and other silk of poorer +quality; fine untwisted silk, white and of all colors, wound in small +skeins; quantities of velvets, some plain, and some embroidered in +all sorts of figures, colors, and fashions--others with body of gold, +and embroidered with gold; woven stuffs and brocades, of gold and +silver upon silk of various colors and patterns; quantities of gold +and silver thread in skeins over thread and silk--but the glitter of +all the gold and silver is false, and only on paper; damasks, satins, +taffetans, gorvaranes, picotes, [404] and other cloths of all colors, +some finer and better than others; a quantity of linen made from grass, +called lençesuelo [handkerchief]; [405] and white cotton cloth of +different kinds and qualities, for all uses. They also bring musk, +benzoin, and ivory; many bed ornaments, hangings, coverlets, and +tapestries of embroidered velvet; damask and gorvaran of different +shades; tablecloths, cushions, and carpets; horse-trappings of the +same stuff, and embroidered with glass beads and seed-pearls; also +some pearls and rubies, sapphires and crystal-stones; metal basins, +copper kettles, and other copper and cast-iron pots; quantities +of all sorts of nails, sheet-iron, tin and lead; saltpetre and +gunpowder. They supply the Spaniards with wheat flour; preserves +made of orange, peach, scorzonera, [406] pear, nutmeg, and ginger, +and other fruits of China; salt pork and other salt meats; live fowls +of good breed, and very fine capons; quantities of green fruit, oranges +of all kinds; excellent chestnuts, walnuts, pears, and chicueyes [407] +(both green and dried, a delicious fruit); quantities of fine thread of +all kinds, needles, and knick-knacks; little boxes and writing-cases; +beds, tables, chairs, and gilded benches, painted in many figures and +patterns. They bring domestic buffaloes; geese that resemble swans; +horses, some mules and asses; even caged birds, some of which talk, +while others sing, and they make them play innumerable tricks. The +Chinese furnish numberless other gewgaws and ornaments of little +value and worth, which are esteemed among the Spaniards; besides a +quantity of fine crockery of all kinds; canganes, [408] sines, and +black and blue robes; tacley, which are beads of all kinds; strings +of cornelians, and other beads and precious stones of all colors; +pepper and other spices; and rarities--which, did I refer to them all, +I would never finish, nor have sufficient paper for it. + +As soon as the ship reaches the mouth of the bay of Manila, the +watchman stationed at the island of Miraveles goes out to it in a +light vessel. Having examined the ship, he puts a guard of two or three +soldiers on it, so that it may anchor upon the bar, near the city, and +to see that no one shall disembark from the vessel, or anyone enter it +from outside, until the vessel has been inspected. By the signal made +with fire by the watchman from the said island, and the advice that he +sends in all haste to the city--of what ship it is, whence it has come, +what merchandise and people it brings--before the vessel has finished +anchoring, the governor and the city generally know all about it. [409] + +When the vessel has arrived and anchored, the royal officials go to +inspect it and the register of the merchandise aboard it. At the +same time the valuation of the cargo is made according to law, of +what it is worth in Manila; for the vessel immediately pays three per +cent on everything to his Majesty. [410] After the register has been +inspected and the valuation made, then the merchandise is immediately +unloaded by another official into champans, and taken to the Parián, +or to other houses and magazines, outside of the city. There the +goods are freely sold. + +No Spaniard, Sangley, or other person is allowed to go to the ship +to buy or trade merchandise, food, or anything else. Neither is it +allowed, when the merchandise is ashore, to take it from them or +buy it with force and violence; but the trade must be free, and the +Sangleys can do what they like with their property. + +The ordinary price of the silks (both raw and woven) and the +cloths--which form the bulk of the cargo--is settled leisurely, and +by persons who understand it, both on the part of the Spaniards and +that of the Sangleys. The purchase price is paid in silver and reals, +for the Sangleys do not want gold, or any other articles, and will not +take other things to China. All the trading must be completed by the +end of the month of May, or thereabout, in order that the Sangleys +may return and the Spaniards have the goods ready to lade upon the +vessels that go to Nueva España by the end of June. However, the +larger dealers and those who have most money usually do their trading +after that time, at lower rates, and keep the merchandise until the +following year. Certain Sangleys remain in Manila with a portion of +their merchandise for the same purpose, when they have not had a good +sale for it, in order to go on selling it more leisurely. The Sangleys +are very skilful and intelligent traders, and of great coolness and +moderation, in order to carry on their business better. They are ready +to trust and accommodate freely whoever they know treats them fairly, +and does not fail in his payments to them when these are due. On +the other hand, as they are a people without religion or conscience, +and so greedy, they commit innumerable frauds and deceits in their +merchandise. The purchaser must watch them very closely, and know +them, in order not to be cheated by them. The purchasers, however, +acquit themselves by their poor payments and the debts that they incur; +and both sides generally keep the judges and Audiencia quite busy. + +Some Japanese and Portuguese merchantmen also come every year from +the port of Nangasaque in Japon, at the end of October with the north +winds, and at the end of March. They enter and anchor at Manila +in the same way. The bulk of their cargo is excellent wheat-flour +for the provisioning of Manila, and highly prized salt meats. They +also bring some fine woven silk goods of mixed colors; beautiful and +finely-decorated screens done in oil and gilt; all kinds of cutlery; +many suits of armor, spears, catans, and other weapons, all finely +wrought; writing-cases, boxes and small cases of wood, japanned +and curiously marked; other pretty gewgaws; excellent fresh pears; +barrels and casks of good salt tunny; cages of sweet-voiced larks, +called fimbaros; and other trifles. In this trading, some purchases +are also made, without royal duties being collected from those +vessels. The bulk of the merchandise is used in the country, but +some goods are exported to Nueva España. The price is generally paid +in reals, although they are not so greedy for them as the Chinese, +for there is silver in Japon. They generally bring a quantity of it +as merchandise in plates, and it is sold at moderate rates. + +These vessels return to Japon at the season of the vendavals, during +the months of June and July. They carry from Manila their purchases, +which are composed of raw Chinese silk, gold, deerskin, and brazil-wood +for their dyes. They take honey, manufactured wax, palm and Castilian +wine, civet-cats, large tibors in which to store their tea, glass, +cloth, and other curiosities from España. + +Some Portuguese vessels sail to Manila annually during the monsoon +of the vendavals, from Maluco, Malaca, and India. They take +merchandise consisting of spices--cloves, cinnamon, and pepper; +slaves, both blacks and Cafres; cotton cloth of all sorts, fine +muslins [caniquies], linens, gauzes, rambuties, and other delicate +and precious cloths; amber, and ivory; cloths edged with pita, +[411] for use as bed-covers; hangings, and rich counterpanes from +Vengala [Bengal], Cochin, and other countries; many gilt articles +and curiosities; jewels of diamonds, rubies, sapphires, topazes, +balas-rubies, and other precious stones, both set and loose; many +trinkets and ornaments from India; wine, raisins, and almonds; +delicious preserves, and other fruits brought from Portugal and +prepared in Goa; carpets and tapestries from Persia and Turquia, +made of fine silks and wools; beds, writing-cases, parlor-chairs, +and other finely-gilded furniture, made in Macao; needle-work in +colors and in white, of chain-lace and royal point lace, and other +fancy-work of great beauty and perfection. Purchases of all the above +are made in Manila, and paid in reals and gold. The vessels return +in January with the brisas, which is their favorable monsoon. They +carry to Maluco provisions of rice and wine, crockery-ware, and +other wares needed there; while to Malaca they take only the gold or +money, besides a few special trinkets and curiosities from España, +and emeralds. The royal duties are not collected from these vessels. + +A few smaller vessels also sail from Borneo, during the vendavals. They +belong to the natives of that island, and return during the first part +of the brisas. They enter the river of Manila and sell their cargoes +in their vessels. These consist of fine and well-made palm-mats, a few +slaves for the natives, sago--a certain food of theirs prepared from +the pith of palms--and tibors; large and small jars, glazed black and +very fine, which are of great service and use; and excellent camphor, +which is produced on that island. Although beautiful diamonds are found +on the opposite coast, they are not taken to Manila by those vessels, +for the Portuguese of Malaca trade for them on that coast. These +articles from Borneo are bought more largely by the natives than by +the Spaniards. The articles taken back by the Borneans are provisions +of wine and rice, cotton cloth, and other wares of the islands, +which are wanting in Borneo. + +Very seldom a few vessels sail to Manila from Sian and Camboja. They +carry some benzoin, pepper, ivory, and cotton cloth; rubies and +sapphires, badly cut and set; a few slaves; rhinoceros horns, and the +hides, hoofs, and teeth of this animal; and other goods. In return they +take the wares found in Manila. Their coming and return is between the +brisas and the vendavals, during the months of April, May, and June. + +In these classes of merchandise, and in the products of the +islands--namely, gold, cotton cloth, mendriñaque, and cakes of white +and yellow wax--do the Spaniards effect their purchases, investments, +and exports for Nueva España. They make these as is most suitable +for each person, and lade them on the vessels that are to make the +voyage. They value and register these goods, for they pay into the +royal treasury of Manila, before the voyage, the two per cent royal +duties on exports, besides the freight charges of the vessel, which +amount to forty Castilian ducados [412] per tonelada. This latter is +paid at the port of Acapulco in Nueva España, into the royal treasury +of the said port, in addition to the ten per cent duties for entrance +and first sale in Nueva España. [413] + +Inasmuch as the ships which are despatched with the said merchandise +are at his Majesty's account, and other ships cannot be sent, there +is generally too small a place in the cargo for all the purchases. For +that reason the governor divides the cargo-room among all the shippers, +according to their wealth and merits, after they have been examined +by intelligent men, appointed for that purpose. Consequently every +man knows from his share how much he can export, and only that amount +is received in the vessel; and careful and exact account is taken of +it. Trustworthy persons are appointed who are present at the lading; +and space is left for the provisions and passengers that are to go +in the vessels. When the ships are laden and ready to sail, they +are delivered to the general and the officials who have them in +charge. Then they start on their voyage at the end of the month of +June, with the first vendavals. + +This trade and commerce is so great and profitable, and easy to +control--for it only lasts three months in the year, from the +time of the arrival of the ships with their merchandise, until +those vessels that go to Nueva España take that merchandise--that +the Spaniards do not apply themselves to, or engage in, any other +industry. Consequently, there is no husbandry or field-labor worthy of +consideration. Neither do the Spaniards work the gold mines or placers, +which are numerous. They do not engage in many other industries that +they could turn to with great profit, if the Chinese trade should +fail them. That trade has been very hurtful and prejudicial in +this respect, as well as for the occupations and farm industries in +which the natives used to engage. Now the latter are abandoning and +forgetting those labors. Besides, there is the great harm and loss +resulting from the immense amount of silver that passes annually by +this way [of the trade], into the possession of infidels, which can +never, by any way, return into the possession of the Spaniards. + +His Majesty's agents for the government and justice, and the royal +officials for the management of his Majesty's revenue, are as follows: +First, the governor and captain-general of all the islands, who +is at the same time president of the royal Audiencia of Manila. He +has a salary of eight thousand pesos de minas per year for all his +offices. [414] He possesses his own body-guard of twelve halberdiers, +whose captain receives three hundred pesos per year. The governor alone +provides and regulates all that pertains to war and government, with +the advice of the auditors of the Audiencia in difficult matters. He +tries in the first instance the criminal cases of the regular soldiers, +and any appeals from his decisions go to the Audiencia. [415] The +governor appoints many alcaldes-mayor, corregidors, deputies, and +other magistrates, throughout the islands and their provinces, for +carrying on the government and justice, and for military matters. These +appointments are made before a government chief scrivener appointed +by his Majesty, who helps the governor. + +The governor likewise takes part with the royal Audiencia, as +its president, in whatever pertains to its duties. The Audiencia +consists of four auditors and one fiscal--each of whom receives an +annual salary of two thousand pesos de minas [416]--one reporter, +one court scrivener, one alguacil-mayor, with his assistants, one +governor of the prison of the court, one chancellor, one registrar, +two bailiffs, one chaplain and sacristan, one executioner, attorneys, +and receivers. The Audiencia tries all causes, civil and criminal, +taken to it from all the provinces of its district. [417] These +include the Filipinas Islands and the mainland of China, already +discovered or to be discovered. The Audiencia has the same authority +as the chancillerías of Valladolid and Granada in España. At the same +time, the Audiencia provides whatever is advisable for the proper +and systematic management of the royal exchequer. + +His Majesty's revenues in the Filipinas Islands are in charge +of and their tribunal consists of three royal officials. They are +appointed by his Majesty, and consist of a factor, an accountant, and +a treasurer. They each receive an annual salary of five hundred and +ten thousand maravedis. They have their clerk of mines, and registrars +of the royal revenues, and their executive and other officials, all +of whom reside in Manila. From that city they manage and attend to +everything pertaining to the royal revenues throughout the islands. + +His Majesty has a number of encomiendas apportioned to his royal crown +throughout the provinces of the Filipinas Islands. The tributes of +those encomiendas are collected for his royal treasury by his royal +officials and the collectors engaged for that purpose by the royal +officials. From year to year these amount to thirty thousand pesos, +after deducting costs and expenses. They collect, from one year to +another, eight thousand pesos in tributes from the Sangleys--both +Christians and infidels. [418] + +They also collect the fifth of all gold dug in the islands. By +special concession for a limited period, the tenth is collected +instead of the fifth. There is a declaration concerning it, to the +effect that the natives shall pay no fifths or other duties on the +jewels and gold inherited by them from their ancestors before his +Majesty owned the country. Sufficient measures have been taken for +the clear understanding of this concession and its investigation, +for that on which the tenth has once been paid, and the steps to +be taken in the matter. From one year to another they collect ten +thousand pesos from these fifths, for much is concealed. [419] + +The assignment of two reals from each tributario inures to the royal +treasury and is paid into it, for the pay of the soldiers and the +stipend of the prebendaries. These are collected from the encomenderos, +in proportion to, and on the account of, their tributes, and amount +annually to thirty-four thousand pesos. + +The fines and expenses of justice are committed to the care of the +treasurer of the royal revenues, and are kept in the treasury. They +amount annually to three thousand pesos. + +The three per cent duties on the Chinese merchandise of the Sangley +vessels average forty thousand pesos annually. [420] + +The two per cent duties paid by the Spaniards for exporting merchandise +to Nueva España amount annually to twenty thousand pesos. On the +merchandise and money sent from Nueva España to the Filipinas, +result eight thousand pesos more. Consequently, in these things and +in other dues of less importance that belong to the royal treasury, +his Majesty receives about one hundred and fifty thousand pesos, +or thereabout, annually in the Filipinas. [421] + +Inasmuch as this amount does not suffice for the expenses that are +incurred, the royal treasury of Nueva España sends annually to that of +the Filipinas, in addition to the above revenues, some assistance in +money--a greater or less sum, as necessity requires. For his Majesty +has thus provided for it from the proceeds of the ten per cent duties +on the Chinese merchandise that are collected at the port of Acapulco +in Nueva España. This assistance is given into the keeping of the +royal officials in Manila, and they take charge of it, with the rest +of the revenues that they manage and collect. + +From all this gross sum of his Majesty's revenue, the salaries of +the governor and royal Audiencia are paid, as well as the stipends +of prelates and ecclesiastical prebendaries, the salaries of the +magistrates, and of the royal officials and their assistants; the +pay of all the military officers and regular soldiers; his Majesty's +share of the stipends for instruction, and the building of churches +and their ornaments; the concessions and gratifications that he has +allowed to certain monasteries, and private persons; the building +of large vessels for the navigation to Nueva España, and of galleys +and other vessels for the defense of the islands; expenses for +gunpowder and ammunition; the casting of artillery, and its care; +the expense arising for expeditions and individual undertakings +in the islands, and in their defense; that of navigations to, and +negotiations with, the kingdoms in their vicinity, which are quite +common and necessary. Consequently, since his Majesty's revenues in +these islands are so limited, and his expenses so great, the royal +treasury falls short, and suffers poverty and need. [422] + +The proceeds from the ten per cent duties and the freight charges of +the ships, which are collected at Acapulco in Nueva España, on the +merchandise sent there from the Filipinas, although considerable, are +also not always sufficient for the expenses incurred in Nueva España +with the ships, soldiers, ammunition, and other supplies sent annually +to the Filipinas. These expenses are generally greatly in excess +of those duties, and the amount is made up from the royal treasury +of Mexico. Consequently, the king our sovereign derives as yet no +profit from any revenues of the Filipinas, but rather an expenditure, +by no means small, from his revenues in Nueva España. He sustains the +Filipinas only for the christianization and conversion of the natives, +and for the hopes of greater fruits in other kingdoms and provinces of +Asia, which are expected through this gateway, at God's good pleasure. + +Every year the Audiencia audits the accounts of the royal officials of +his Majesty's revenues, strikes the balances, and sends the accounts +to the tribunal of accounts in Mexico. [423] + +In the city of Manila, and in all those Spanish settlements of the +islands, reside Sangleys, who have come from Great China, besides +the merchants. They have appointed settlements and are engaged in +various trades, and go to the islands for their livelihood. Some +possess their pariáns and shops. Some engage in fishing and farming +among the natives, throughout the country; and go from one island to +another to trade, in large or small champans. [424] + +The annual vessels from Great China bring these Sangleys in great +numbers, especially to the city of Manila, for the sake of the profits +that are gained from their fares. As there is a superabundance of +population in China, and the wages and profits there are little, +they regard as of importance whatever they get in the Filipinas. + +Very great annoyances result from this; for, not only can there be +little security to the country with so many infidels, but the Sangleys +are a wicked and vicious race. Through intercourse and communication +with them, the natives improve little in Christianity and morals. And +since they come in such numbers and are so great eaters, they raise +the price of provisions, and consume them. + +It is true that the city could not be maintained or preserved without +these Sangleys; for they are the mechanics in all trades, and are +excellent workmen and work for suitable prices. But a less number of +them would suffice for this, and would avoid the inconvenience of so +many people as are usually in Manila when the ships arrive--to say +nothing of the many Chinese who go about among the islands, under +pretext of trading with the natives, and there commit innumerable +crimes and offenses. At the least, they explore all the country, the +rivers, creeks, and ports, and know them better than the Spaniards +do; and they will be of great harm and injury in case of any revolt +or hostile invasion of the islands. + +In order to remedy all the above, it was ordered that the vessels +should not bring so many people of this kind, under penalties that +are executed; that, when the vessels return to China, they take +these Sangleys back with them; that only a convenient number of +merchants remain in Manila, in the Parián, and the mechanics of +all necessary trades; and that these must have written license, +under severe penalties. In the execution of this, an auditor of the +Audiencia is engaged by special commission every year, together with +some assistants. On petition of the city cabildo, he usually allows +as many Sangleys to remain as are necessary for the service of all +trades and occupations. The rest are embarked and compelled to return +in the vessels going to China, and a great deal of force and violence +[425] is necessary to accomplish it. + +Those merchants and artisans who remained in Manila before the revolt +of the year six hundred and three had settled the Parián and its +shops. The Parián is a large enclosed alcaicería of many streets, +at some distance from the city walls. It is near the river, and its +location is called San Graviel. There they have their own governor, +who has his tribunal and prison, and his assistants; these administer +justice to them, and watch them day and night, so that they may live +in security, and not commit disorders. + +Those who cannot find room in this Parián live opposite, on the other +side of the river, where Tondo is, in two settlements called Baybay +and Minondoc. They are in charge of the alcalde-mayor of Tondo, and +under the ministry of the religious of St. Dominic, who labor for their +conversion, and for that purpose have learned the Chinese language. + +The Dominicans have two monasteries with the requisite assistants, +and a good hospital for the treatment of Sangleys. In a district +kept separate from the infidels, they have a settlement of baptized +Sangleys, with their wives, households, and families, numbering five +hundred inhabitants; and the religious are continually baptizing +others and settling them in that village. But few of them turn out +well, for they are a vile and restless race, with many vices and bad +customs. Their having become Christians is not through the desire +or wish for salvation, but for the temporal conveniences that they +have there, and because some are unable to return to China because +of debts incurred and crimes committed there. + +Each and all, both Christians and infidels, go unarmed and in their +national garb. This consists of long garments with wide sleeves, made +of blue cangan (but white for mourning, while the chief men wear them +of black and colored silks); wide drawers of the same material; half +hose of felt; very broad shoes, according to their fashion, made of +blue silk embroidered with braid--with several soles, well-sewed--and +of other stuffs. Their hair is long and very black, and they take +good care of it. They do it up on the head in a high knot, [426] +under a very close-fitting hood or coif of horsehair, which reaches +to the middle of the forehead. They wear above all a high round cap +made of the same horsehair, in different fashions, by which their +different occupations, and each man's rank, are distinguished. The +Christians differ only in that they cut their hair short, and wear +hats, as do the Spaniards. + +They are a light-complexioned people and tall of body. They have +scant beards, are very stout-limbed, and of great strength. They +are excellent workmen, and skilful in all arts and trades. They are +phlegmatic, of little courage, treacherous and cruel when opportunity +offers, and very covetous. They are heavy eaters of all kinds of meat, +fish, and fruits; but they drink sparingly, and then of hot beverages. + +They have a governor of their own race, a Christian, who has his +officials and assistants. He hears their cases in affairs of justice, +in their domestic and business affairs. Appeals from him go to the +alcalde-mayor of Tondo or of the Parián, and from all these to the +Audiencia, which also gives especial attention to this nation and +whatever pertains to it. + +No Sangley can live or own a house outside these settlements of +the Parián, and of Baybay and Minondoc. Native settlements are not +allowed in Sangley settlements, or even near them. No Sangley can go +among the islands, or as much as two leguas from the city, without +special permission. Much less can he remain in the city at night, +after the gates are shut, under penalty of death. + +There are generally some Japanese, both Christian and infidel, in +Manila. These are left by the vessels from Japon, although they are +not so numerous as the Chinese. They have their special settlement and +location outside the city, between the Sangley Parián and the suburb of +Laguio, near the monastery of La Candelaria. There they are directed +by discalced religious of St. Francis, by means of interpreters +whom the fathers keep for that purpose. They are a spirited race, +of good disposition, and brave. They wear their own costume, namely, +kimonos of colored silks and cotton, reaching half way down the leg, +and open in front; wide, short drawers; close-fitting half-boots of +leather, [427] and shoes like sandals, with the soles of well-woven +straw. They go bare-headed, and shave the top of the head as far +back as the crown. Their back hair is long, and fastened upon the +skull in a graceful knot. They carry their catans, large and small, +in the belt. They have scant beards, and are a race of noble bearing +and behavior. They employ many ceremonies and courtesies, and attach +much importance to honor and social standing. They are resolute in +any necessity or danger. + +Those who become Christians prove very good, and are very devout +and observant in their religion; for only the desire for salvation +incites them to adopt our religion, so that there are many Christians +in Japon. Accordingly they return freely, and without opposition, +to their own country. At most there are about five hundred Japanese +of this nation in Manila, for they do not go to other parts of the +islands, and such is their disposition that they return to Japon, and +do not tarry in the islands; consequently very few of them usually +remain in the islands. They are treated very cordially, as they are +a race that demand good treatment, and it is advisable to do so for +the friendly relations between the islands and Japon. [428] + +Few people come from the other nations--Sian, Camboja, Borneo, Patan, +and other islands--outside our government; and they immediately return +in their vessels. Consequently, there is nothing special to be said +of them, except that care is exercised in receiving and despatching +them well, and seeing that they return quickly to their own countries. + +Since I have told, in the short time at my disposal, the +characteristics of the Filipinas Islands, and their customs and +practices, it will not be inappropriate to discuss the navigation to +them since it is made thither from Nueva España; the return voyage, +which is not short, or without great dangers and hardships; and that +made in the eastern direction. + +When the islands were conquered in the year of one thousand five +hundred and seventy-four [sic; sc. 1564], the Spanish fleet sailed +under command of the adelantado Miguel Lopez de Legaspi, from Puerto +de la Navidad [429] situated in the South Sea, on the coast of Nueva +España, in the province and district of Xalisco and Galicia, where +resides the royal Audiencia of Guadalajara. A few later voyages +were made also from the same port, until the point for the sending +of these vessels was removed, for better and greater convenience, +to the port of Acapulco, located farther south on the same coast, +in sixteen and one-half degrees of latitude; it is eighty leguas from +Mexico, and in its district. It is an excellent port, sheltered from +all weather; and has a good entrance and good anchorages. Its vicinity +is advantageous, being better provisioned and more populous than that +of La Navidad. There a large Spanish colony has been established, +with its alcalde-mayor, and royal officials who have charge of his +Majesty's treasury; and these attend to the despatch of the vessels. + +The vessels that sail to the Filipinas, as they are despatched annually +on his Majesty's account, must necessarily leave in the certain season +of the brisas, which begin in the month of November and last until the +end of March. This navigation should not be made at any other season, +for from June the vendavals blow, and they are contrary to the voyage. + +As a rule, these ships sail and are despatched at the end of February, +or at the latest by the twentieth of March. They sail west toward the +islands of Las Velas, [430] otherwise called the Ladrones. The island +of Guan, one of them, lies in thirteen degrees of latitude. Inasmuch +as the vessels on leaving Acapulco are wont sometimes to encounter +calms, they sail south from sixteen and one-half degrees, in which +the port is situated, until they strike the brisas, which is generally +at ten or eleven degrees. By this route they sail continually before +the wind, and without changing the sails, with fresh and fair brisas, +and in other moderate weather, for one thousand eight hundred leguas, +without sighting any mainland or island. Then leaving to the south +the Barbudos and other islands, and advancing gradually to a latitude +of thirteen degrees, they sail until they sight the island of Guan; +and above it, in fourteen degrees, that of La Çarpana [Seypan]. This +voyage to those Ladrones Islands lasts generally seventy days. + +The natives of those islands, who go naked, and are a very robust +and barbarous race, go out to sea to meet the ships as soon as they +discover them, at a distance of four to six leguas, with many vessels; +these are one-masted, and are very slender and light. These vessels +have a counterpoise of bamboo to leeward, and their sails are made +of palm-leaves and are lateen-sails. Two or three men go in each one +with oars and paddles. They carry loads of flying-fish, dorados, +[431] cocoa-nuts, bananas, sweet potatoes, bamboos full of water, +and certain mats; and when they reach the ships, they trade these for +iron from the hoops of casks, and bundles of nails, which they use +in their industries, and in the building of their ships. Since some +Spaniards and religious have lived among them, because of Spanish +ships being wrecked or obliged to take refuge there, they come more +freely to our ships and enter them. + +Our ships sail between the two islands of Guan and Çarpana toward the +Filipinas and the cape of Espiritu Santo, a distance of three hundred +leguas farther on, in the latitude of about thirteen degrees. This +distance is made in ten or twelve days with the brisas; but it may +happen, if the ships sail somewhat late, that they encounter vendavals, +which endanger their navigation, and they enter the islands after +great trouble and stormy weather. + +From the cape of Espiritu Santo, the ships enter the strait of Capul +at the islands of Mazbate and Burias; thence they sail to Marinduque +and the coast of Calilaya, the strait of Mindoro, the shoals of +Tuley, and the mouth of Manila Bay. Thence, they go to the port of +Cabit. This is a voyage of one hundred leguas from the entrance to +the islands and is made in one week. This is the end of the voyage, +which is good and generally without storms, if made in the proper time. + +These vessels now make the return voyage from the Filipinas to Nueva +España with great difficulty and danger, for the course is a long one +and there are many storms and various temperatures. The ships depart, +on this account, very well supplied with provisions, and suitably +equipped. Each one sails alone, hoisting as much sail as possible, +and one does not wait for the other, nor do they sight one another +during the voyage. + +They leave the bay and port of Cabit at the first setting-in of +the vendavals, between the same islands and by the same straits, +by the twentieth of June and later. As they set out amid showers, +and are among islands, they sail with difficulty until they leave +the channel at Capul. Once in the open sea, they catch the vendaval, +and voyage east, making more progress when they reach the latitude +of fourteen or fifteen degrees. + +Then the brisa starts. This wind is the ordinary one in the South Sea, +especially in low latitudes. Since it is a head wind, the course is +changed, and the bow is pointed betwen the north and east, as much +as the wind will allow. With this they reach a higher latitude, and +the ship is kept in this course until the vendaval returns. Then, +by means of it, the ship again takes an eastern course in that +latitude where it happens to be, and keeps that direction as long +as that wind lasts. When the vendaval dies, the ship takes the best +course that the winds allow, by the winds then blowing between north +and east. If the wind is so contrary that it is north or northwest, +so that the ship cannot take that course, the other course is taken +so that they may continue to maintain their voyage without losing +time. At four hundred leguas from the islands they sight certain +volcanoes and ridges of the islands of Ladrones, which run north as +far as twenty-four degrees. [432] Among these they generally encounter +severe storms and whirl-winds. At thirty-four degrees is the cape of +Sestos, [433] at the northern head of Japon, six hundred leguas from +the Filipinas. They sail among other islands, which are rarely seen, +in thirty-eight degrees, encountering the same dangers and storms, +and in a cold climate, in the neighborhood of the islands Rica de +Oro ["rich in gold"] and Rica de Plata ["rich in silver"], which are +but seldom seen. [434] After passing them the sea and open expanse +of water is immense, and the ship can run free in any weather. This +gulf is traversed for many leguas with such winds as are encountered, +until a latitude of forty-two degrees is reached, toward the coast of +Nueva España. They seek the winds that generally prevail at so high a +latitude, which are usually northwest. After a long voyage the coast +of Nueva España is sighted, and from Cape Mendoçino (which lies in +forty-two and one-half degrees) the coast extends nine hundred leguas +to the port of Acapulco, which lies in sixteen and one-half degrees. + +When the ships near the coast, which they generally sight betwen forty +and thirty-six degrees, the cold is very severe, and the people suffer +and die. Three hundred leguas before reaching land, signs of it are +seen, by certain aguas malas, [435] as large as the hand, round and +violet colored, with a crest in the middle like a lateen sail, which +are called caravelas ["caravels"]. This sign lasts until the ship is +one hundred leguas from land; and then are discovered certain fish, +with half the body in the form of a dog; [436] these frolic with +one another near the ship. After these perrillos ["little dogs"] are +seen the porras ["knobsticks"], which are certain very long, hollow +shoots of a yellow herb with a ball at the top, and which float on the +water. At thirty leguas from the coast are seen many great bunches of +grass which are carried down to the sea by the great rivers of the +country. These grasses are called balsas ["rafts or floats"]. Also +many perrillos are seen, and, in turn, all the various signs. Then +the coast is discovered, and it is very high and clear land. Without +losing sight of land, the ship coasts along it with the northwest, +north-northwest, and north winds, which generally prevail on that +coast, blowing by day toward the land, and by night toward the sea +again. With the decrease of the latitude and the entrance into a +warm climate the island of Cenizas [ashes] is seen, and afterward +that of Cedros [cedars]. Thence one sails until the cape of San Lucas +is sighted, which is the entrance of [the gulf of] California. From +that one traverses the eighty leguas intervening to the islands of +Las Marias and the cape of Corrientes ["currents"], which is on the +other side of California in Val de Vanderas ["valley of banners"], +and the provinces of Chametla. Thence one passes the coast of Colima, +Sacatul, Los Motines ["the mutinies"], and Ciguatanejo, and enters the +port of Acapulco--without having made a way-station or touched land +from the channel of Capul in the Filipinas throughout the voyage. The +voyage usually lasts five months or thereabout, but often six and +even more. [437] + +By way of India, one may sail from the Filipinas to España, by making +the voyage to Malaca, and thence to Cochin and Goa, a distance of +one thousand two hundred leguas. This voyage must be made with the +brisas. From Goa one sails by way of India to the cape of Buena +Esperança [Good Hope], and to the Terceras [i.e., Azores] Islands, +and thence to Portugal and the port of Lisboa. This is a very long +and dangerous voyage, as is experienced by the Portuguese who make +it every year. From India they usually send letters and despatches to +España by way of the Bermejo ["Red"] Sea, by means of Indians. These +send them through Arabia to Alexandria, and thence by sea to Venecia +[Venice] and thence to España. + +A galleon bound for Portugal sails and is despatched from the fort of +Malaca, in certain years, by the open sea, without touching at India +or on its coasts. It reaches Lisboa much more quickly than do the Goa +vessels. It generally sails on the fifth of January, and does not leave +later than that; nor does it usually anticipate that date. However, +not any of these voyages are practiced by the Castilians--who are +prohibited from making them--except the one made by way of Nueva +España, both going and coming, as above described. And although the +effort has been made, no better or shorter course has been found by +way of the South Sea. [438] + +Laus Deo + + + + +NOTES + +[1] Cea is a small town situated in the old kingdom of Léon, on a +river of the same name. It was a seat of a chateau and a duchy. The +name of the first duke of Lerma was Francisco Gomez de Sandoval y +Rojas. Hume's Spain (Cambridge, 1898), mentions one of his sons as +duke of Cea, who is probably the Cristoval Gomez de Sandoval y Rojas +of Morga's dedication. + +[2] The facts of Doctor Antonio de Morga's life are meager. He must +have been born in Sevilla, as his birth register is said to exist in +the cathedral of that city. He sailed from Acapulco for the Philippines +in 1595 in charge of the vessels sent with reënforcements that year. He +remained there eight years, during which time he was continually in +office. In 1598, upon the reëstablishment of the Manila Audiencia he +was appointed senior auditor. In 1600 he took charge of the operations +against the Dutch and commanded in the naval battle with them. He left +the islands July 10, 1603, in charge of the ships sailing that year +to Mexico. After that period he served in the Mexico Audiencia; and +as late as 1616 was president of the Quito Audiencia, as appears from +a manuscript in the British Museum. His book circulated, at least, +in part, in manuscript before being published. Torrubía mentions a +manuscript called Descubrimiento, conquista, pacificación y población +de ias Islas Philipinas, which was dated 1607, and dedicated to +"his Catholic Majesty, King Don Phelipe III, our sovereign." Morga +combined the three functions of historian, politician, and soldier, +and his character is many sided and complex. He is spoken of in high +terms as an historian, and Rizal, as well as Blumentritt, exalts him +above all other historians of the Philippines. + +[3] Throughout this work, all notes taken entire or condensed from +José Rizal's edition of Sucesos de las Islas Filipinas por el Doctor +Antonio de Morga (Paris, 1890), will be signed Rizal, unless Rizal +is given as authority for the note or a portion of it in the body of +the note. Similarly those notes taken or condensed from Lord Henry +E. J. Stanley's translation of Morga, The Philippine Islands.... by +Antonio de Morga (Hakluyt Soc. ed., London, 1868), will be signed +Stanley, unless Stanley is elsewhere given as authority as above. + +Dr. José Rizal, the Filipino patriot, was born in 1861 at Calamba in +Luzón, of pure Tagál stock, although some say that it was mixed with +Chinese blood. Through the advice of Father Leontio, a Tagál priest, +he was sent to Manila to the Jesuit institution Ateneo Municipal--where +he was the pupil of Rev. Pablo Pastells, now of Barcelona. His family +name was Mercado, but at the advice of his brother, who had become +involved in the liberal movement, he took that of Rizal. After taking +his degree at Manila, he studied in Spain, France, and Germany. He +founded the Liga Filipina, whose principal tenet was "Expulsion of +the friars and the confiscation of their property," and which was +the basis of the revolutionary society of the Sons of the Nation. On +Rizal's return to Manila, after several years of travel, in 1892, +he was arrested and exiled to Dapitan. In 1895, he was allowed to +volunteer for hospital service in Cuba, but was arrested in Barcelona, +because of the breaking out of the Filipino insurrection, and sent +back to Manila, where he was shot on December 30, 1896, by native +soldiers. Besides being a skilled physician, Dr. Rizal was a poet, +novelist, and sculptor, and had exhibited in the salon. His first novel +Noli me tangere appeared in Berlin in 1887, and was, as Dr. T. H. Pardo +de Tavera remarks, the first book to treat of Filipino manners and +customs in a true and friendly spirit. It was put under the ban by +the Church. Its sequel El Filibusterismo appeared in 1891. + +Sir Henry Edward John Stanley, third Baron of Alderley, and second +Baron Eddisbury of Sinnington, a member of the peerage of the United +Kingdom, and a baronet, died on December 10, 1903, at the age of +seventy-six. He was married in 1862 to Fabia, daughter of Señor Don +Santiago Federico San Roman of Sevilla, but had no issue. He spent +many years in the East, having been first attaché at Constantinople +and Secretary of Legation at Athens. He embraced the Mahometan +religion and was buried by its rites privately by Ridjag Effendi, +Imaum of the Turkish embassy. + +[4] Charles chose as his motto Plus ultra, being led thereto by the +recent world discoveries and the extension of Spanish dominions. This +motto is seen on his coins, medals, and other works. + +[5] Perhaps Morga alludes to Argensola, who published his Historia +de la conquista de las Molucas this same year of 1609.--Rizal. + +[6] This was the second establishment of the Audiencia, in 1598. + +[7] The term "proprietary governor" refers to the regularly appointed +(hence governor in his own right) royal representative who governed the +islands; all others were governors ad interim, and were appointed in +different manners at different periods. The choice of governors showed +a gradual political evolution. In the earliest period, the successor +in case of death or removal was fixed by the king or the Audiencia of +Mexico (e.g., in the case of Legazpi). Some governors (e.g., Gomez +Perez Dasmariñas) were allowed to name their own successor. After +the establishment of the Audiencia, the choice fell upon the senior +auditor. The latest development was the appointment of a segundo +cabo, or second head (about the equivalent of lieutenant-governor), +who took the office ad interim in case of the governor's death or +removal, or a vacancy arising from any other cause. + +[8] Morga may refer to accounts of the battle with Oliver van +Noordt, or the manuscripts of Juan de Plasencia, Martin de Rada, +and others.--Rizal. + +[9] Magalhães and Serrano died on the same day. Argensola commenting on +this fact says: "At this time his friend Serrano was going to India; +and although in different parts, the two navigators died on the same +day, almost under like circumstances." + +[10] This is too strong a statement, and Morga's knowledge is inexact, +as Magalhães had sailed the eastern seas while in the service of the +Portuguese monarch. + +[11] Argensola (Conquistas de las Islas Malucas, Madrid, 1609) +mentions the expedition sent out by the bishop of Plasencia, Don +Gutierre de Vargas. + +[12] An error for 1542. + +[13] Urdaneta received Felipe II's order to accompany the expedition +while in Mexico.--Rizal. + +See VOL. II of this series for Urdaneta's connection with this +expedition. + +[14] See abstract of these instructions, VOL. II, pp. 89-100. + +[15] Called Villa de San Miguel at first, according to San +Agustín.--Rizal. + +[16] Ruy Lopez de Villalobos, not Legazpi, first gave the name +Filipinas to the archipelago. + +[17] Rizal identifies Rajamora with Soliman, and says that he was +called Rajamora or Rahang murã in opposition to Rajamatanda or Rahang +matanda, signifying, as Isabelo de los Reyes y Florentino partially +points out in an article entitled "Los Regulos de Manila," pp. 87-111 +of Artículos varios (Manila, 1887), the young raja and the old raja. In +the above article, the latter seeks to identify Rajamora or Soliman +with the Raxobago of San Agustín, and declares that Rajamatanda and +Lacandola are identical. The confusion existing in later writers +regarding these names is lacking in Morga, and Rizal's conjecture +appears correct. + +[18] Arigues comes from the Tagál word haligi, which are stout wooden +posts, used to support the frames of buildings. The word is in quite +common use in the Philippines among the Spanish speaking people. It +is sometimes used to denote simply a column.--Rizal (in part). + +[19] This was the date of Legazpi's arrival at Manila and not of the +assault, which occurred in 1570.--Rizal. + +Goiti took possession of Manila for the king, June 6, 1570. See +various documents in VOL. III of this series. + +[20] The inhabitants of Sebu aided the Spaniards on this expedition, +and consequently were exempted from tribute for a considerable +period.--Rizal. + +[21] Rizal conjectures that this is a typographical error and should +read de Bisayas ò de los Pintados, i.e., Bisayas or Los Pintados. + +[22] The Tagáls called it Maynila.--Rizal. + +For the meaning of this name, see VOL. III, p. 148, note 41. + +[23] Rather it was his grandson Salcedo. This hero, called the Hernán +Córtes of the Filipinas, was truly the intelligent arm of Legazpi. By +his prudence, his fine qualities, his talent, and personal worth, +the sympathies of the Filipinos were captured, and they submitted +to their enemies. He inclined them to peace and friendship with the +Spaniards. He likewise saved Manila from Limahon. He died at the age +of twenty-seven, and is the only one to our knowledge who named the +Indians as his heirs to a large portion of his possessions, namely +his encomienda of Bigan. (San Agustín).--Rizal. + +See also VOL. III, p. 73, note 21. + +[24] "He assigned the tribute that the natives were to pay to their +encomenderos," says San Agustín. "This was one piece of cotton cloth, +in the provinces where cloth was woven, of the value of four reals; +two fanégas of rice; and one fowl. This was to be given once each +year. Those who did not possess cloth were to give its value in kind +of another product of their own harvest in that town; and where there +was no rice harvested, they were to give two reals, and one-half real +for the fowl, estimated in money."--Rizal. + +[25] Legazpi dies August 20, 1572. + +[26] "One thousand five hundred friendly Indians from the islands +of Zebu, Bohol, Leyte, and Panay, besides the many other Indians +of service, for use as pioneers and boat-crews, accompanied the +Spaniards..." Lacandola and his sons and relatives, besides two hundred +Bissayans and many other Indians who were enrolled in Pangasinan, +aided them. (San Agustín).--Rizal. + +[27] According to San Agustín, more than one thousand five hundred +Indian bowmen from the provinces of Pangasinan, Cagayan, and Pintados +accompanied this expedition. Its apparent motive was to place on the +throne Sirela, or Malaela, as Colin calls him, who had been dethroned +by his brother.--Rizal. + +See the relation of this expedition in VOL. IV, pp. 148-303. + +[28] This expedition did not succeed because of the development +of the disease beriberi among the Spanish forces, from which more +than four-fifths of the soldiers died. More than one thousand five +hundred of the most warlike natives, mostly from Cagayan and Pampanga, +accompanied the expedition.--Rizal. + +[29] By making use of the strife among the natives themselves, because +of the rivalry of two brothers, as is recounted by San Agustín.--Rizal. + +[30] His name was Zaizufa.--Rizal. + +La Concepción, vol. ii, p. 33, gives the founding of the city of Nueva +Segovia as the resultant effect of this Japanese pirate. He says: +"He [i.e., Joan Pablos de Carrion] found a brave and intrepid Japanese +pirate in possession of the port, who was intending to conquer it and +subdue the country. He attacked the pirate boldly, conquered him, +and frustrated his lofty designs. For greater security he founded +the city of Nueva Segovia, and fortified it with a presidio." + +[31] Captain Ribera was the first envoy from the Philippines to confer +with the king on the needs of the country.--Rizal. + +See VOL. V of this series, pp. 207-209, for his complaints against +the governor. + +[32] The fire caught from the candles placed about the catafalque of +Governor Gonzalo Ronquillo.--Rizal. + +[33] This Pedro Sarmiento was probably the one who accompanied Fathers +Rada and Marin, and Miguel Loarca to China in 1575; see this series, +VOL. IV, p. 46, and VOL. VI, p. 116. The celebrated mathematician and +navigator, Pedro Sarmiento de Gamboa doubtless belonged to a different +branch of the same family. The latter was born in Alcahl de Henares, +in 1532, and died toward the end of the century. Entering the Spanish +army he went to America, perhaps in 1555. As early as 1557 he sailed +in the south seas, and being led to the belief of undiscovered islands +there, several times proposed expeditions for their discovery to the +viceroy of Peru. He was captain of Mendaña's ship in the expedition +that discovered the Solomon Islands. Shortly after, at the instance of +the viceroy, Francisco de Toledo, he visited Cuzco, and wrote a full +description of that country. He was the first to study the ancient +history and institutions of the Incas in detail. When Drake made his +memorable expedition into the South Sea, Sarmiento was sent in his +pursuit, and he wrote a detailed account of the Strait of Magellan and +his voyage through it. He later founded a Spanish colony in the strait, +but it was a failure, and was known afterward as Famine Port. He was +a prisoner, both in England and France, being ransomed by Felipe II +from the latter country. In navigation he was ahead of his times, +as his writings attest. He was persecuted for many years by the Holy +Inquisition on various charges. See Lord Amherst's Discovery of the +Solomon Islands (Hakluyt Soc. ed., London, 1901), vol. i, pp. 83-94; +and Clements R. Markham's Narratives of the voyages of Pedro Sarmiento +de Gamboa (Hakluyt Soc. ed., 1895). Argensola gives (Conquistas de +las islas Malucas), some account of Sarmiento's expedition to the +strait in pursuit of Drake. He seems (pp. 167-168) when speaking of +the incident in our text to confuse these two men. An excellent atlas +containing fourteen illuminated and colored maps is also attributed to +Sarmiento the navigator, number five being a map of India, including +the Moluccas and the Philippines. + +[34] See letter by Juan de Moron, VOL. VI, of this series, pp. 275-278. + +[35] It was divulged by a Filipino woman, the wife of a soldier +(Sinibaldo de Mas).--Rizal. + +[36] Thomas Cavendish or Candish. He is named by various authors as +Escandesch, Cande, Eschadesch, Embleg, and Vimble.--Rizal. See also +appendix A. + +[37] This memorable expedition of Sir Francis Drake left Plymouth +November 15, 1577, but an accident caused their return to the same +port, whence they again sailed on the thirteenth of December. After +various fortunes the Strait of Magellan was reached on August 17, +1578. They coasted along the western part of South America, where a +valuable prize was taken. At the island of Canno "wee espyed a shippe, +and set sayle after her, and tooke her, and found in her two Pilots +and a Spanish Gouernour, going for the Ilands of the Philippinás: +Wee searched the shippe, and tooke some of her Merchandizes, and +so let her goe." Thence they voyaged to the Moluccas, which were +reached November 14. Next day they anchored at Yerrenate, where they +were welcomed. The voyage was continued through the islands, around +the Cape of Good Hope, and thence to England, where they arrived +November 3, 1580. See Purchas: His Pilgrims (London, 1625), i, book +ii, ch. iii, pp. 46-57. For accounts of the life and voyages of Drake, +see also, Purchas: ut supra, v, book vii, ch. v, pp. 1391-1398; Bry: +Collectiones peregrinationum (Francofurti, 1625), ser. i, vol. iii, +pars viii, pp. 3-34; Francis Fletcher; The World encompassed by Sir +Francis Drake (London, 1635); Knox: New Collection of voyages and +travels (London, 1767), iii, pp. 1-27; John Barrow: Life, voyages, +and exploits of Admiral Sir Francis Drake (John Murray, Albemarle St., +1843); Thomas Maynarde: Sir Francis Drake, his voyage 1595 (Hakluyt +Soc. ed., London, 1849); W. S. W. Vaux: The world encompassed by Sir +Francis Drake (Hakluyt Soc. ed., London, 1854). + +[38] See VOL. VI of this series for various documents concerning +Father Alonso Sanchez's mission to Spain and Rome. + +[39] San Agustín says that these walls were twelve thousand eight +hundred and forty-three geometrical feet in extent, and that they +were built without expense to the royal treasury.--Rizal. + +[40] See references to this expedition, VOL. VIII, pp. 242, 250, 251; +and VOL. XIV. + +[41] This emperor, also called Hideyosi, had been a stable boy, +called Hasiba.--Rizal. + +See VOL. X, p. 25, note I, and p. 171, note 19; also Trans. Asiatic +Soc. (Yokohama), vols. vi, viii, ix, and xi. + +[42] See VOL. VIII of this series, pp. 260-267. + +[43] San Agustín [as does Argensola] says there were two hundred and +fifty Chinese.--Rizal. + +[44] Marikaban.--Rizal. + +[45] The original is ballesteras, defined in the old dictionaries as +that part of the galley where the soldiers fought. + +[46] A sort of knife or saber used in the Orient. + +[47] This lack and defect are felt even now [1890] after three +centuries.--Rizal. + +[48] Cho-da-mukha, in Siamese the place of meeting of the chief +mandarins, i.e., the capital.--Stanley. + +[49] Phra-Unkar. Phra or Pra is the title given to the kings of Siam +and Camboja.--Rizal. + +[50] Si-yuthia, or the seat of the kings.--Stanley. + +[51] Id est, the supercargo, in Chinese.--Stanley. + +[52] Father Alonso Ximenez or Jimenez took the Dominican habit in +the Salamanca convent. His best years were passed in the missions of +Guatemala. He was one of the first Dominicans to respond to the call +for missionaries for the Dominican province in the Philippines, leaving +for that purpose the Salamanca convent, whither he had retired. His +first mission was on the river of Bataan. A severe illness compelled +him to go to the Manila convent, where he was later elected prior, +and then provincial of the entire Dominican field of the islands, +being the second to hold that office. He later engaged in the two +disastrous expeditions as mentioned in our text, and died December 31, +1598. See Reseña biográfica. + +[53] Lantchang or Lanxang is the name of an ancient city in the north +of Cambodia. (Pallegoix's Dictionary).--Stanley. + +[54] Rizal says: "There exists at this point a certain confusion in the +order, easy, however, to note and correct. We believe that the author +must have said 'Vencidas algunas dificultades, para la falida, por +auer ydo a efte tiempo, de Camboja a Lanchan, en los Laos vn mádarin +llamado Ocuña de Chu, con diez paroes, etc.;'" whereas the book reads +the same as the above to "Camboja," and then proceeds "a los Laos, +vn mádarin llamado Ocuña de Chu, Alanchan con diez paroes." We have +accordingly translated in accordance with this correction. Stanley +translates the passage as follows: "Some difficulties as to setting +out from Alanchan having been overcome, by the arrival at this time in +Laos from Cambodia of a mandarin named Ocuñia de Chu, with ten prahus, +etc." In the above we follow the orthography of the original. + +[55] The river Me-Kong.--Rizal. + +[56] Laksamana, a general or admiral in Malay.--Stanley. + +[57] Chow Phya is a title in Siam and Cambodia.--Rizal. + +[58] That is, his son or other heir was to inherit the title. + +[59] Rizal conjectures that this word is a transformation of the +Tagál word, lampitaw, a small boat still used in the Philippines. + +[60] We follow Stanley's translation. He derives the word çacatal +[zacatal] from zacate, or sacate, signifying "reed," "hay," or other +similar growths, zacatal thus being a "place of reeds" or a "thicket." + +[61] From kalasag, a shield.--Rizal. + +[62] Argensola says that this native, named Ubal, had made a feast +two days before, at which he had promised to kill the Spanish +commander.--Rizal. + +[63] Perhaps the arquebuses of the soldiers who had been killed in +the combat with Figueroa, for although culverins and other styles +of artillery were used in these islands, arquebuses were doubtless +unknown.--Rizal. + +[64] These considerations might apply to the present [1890] campaigns +in Mindanao.--Rizal. + +[65] Argensola says that Cachil is probably derived from the Arabic +Katil, which signifies "valiant soldier." "In the Malucas they honor +their nobles with this title as with Mosiur in Francia, which means +a trifle more than Don in España." See also VOL. X, p. 61, note 6. + +[66] The Solomon Islands (Islas de Salomon) were first discovered in +1568 by Alvaro de Mendaña de Neyra while on an expedition to discover +the supposed southern continent between Asia and America. Various +reasons are alleged for the name of this group: one that Mendaña +called them thus because of their natural richness; another that +King Solomon obtained wood and other materials there for his temple; +and the third and most probable that they were called after one of +the men of the fleet. As narrated in our text, the expedition of 1595 +failed to rediscover the islands. They remained completely lost, and +were even expunged from the maps until their rediscovery by Carteret +in 1767. The discoverers and explorers Bougainville, Surville, +Shortland, Manning, d'Entrecasteaux, Butler, and Williamson, made +discoveries and explorations in the same century. In 1845, they were +visited by d'Urville. H.B. Guppy made extensive geological studies +there in 1882. The French Marist fathers went there first in 1845, +but were forced, in 1848, to abandon that field until 1861. They were +the least known of all the Pacific and South Sea islands. They extend +a distance of over 600 miles, and lie approximately between 4º 30'-12º +south latitude and 154º 40'-162º 30' east longitude. They lie southeast +of New Britain and northwest of New Hebrides. The larger islands are: +Bougainville, Choiseul, Santa Isabel, Guadalconar, Malaita, and San +Cristobal, and are generally mountainous, and volcanic in origin, +containing indeed several active volcanoes. The smaller islands are +generally volcanic and show traces of coral limestone. The climate is +unhealthful, and one of the rainiest in the world. They are extremely +fertile and contain excellent water. The inhabitants are of the Malay +race and were formerly cannibals. They form parts of the British and +German possessions. See Lord Amherst: Discovery of the Solomon Islands +(London, Hakluyt Soc. ed., 1901); H. B. Guppy: The Solomon Islands +(London, 1887); Justo Zaragoza: Historia del descubrimiento australes +(Madrid, 1876). + +[67] These places are all to be found on the old maps. Paita or Payta +is shown just above or below five degrees south latitude. Callao was +properly the port of Lima. + +[68] Called by the natives Fatuhiwa, situated in 10º 40' south +latitude, and west longitude 138º 15', one of the Marquesas group +belonging to France.--Rizal. + +[69] According to Captain Cook, cited by Wallace, these islanders +surpassed all other nations in the harmony of their proportions and +the regularity of their features. The stature of the men is from 175 +to 183 cm.--Rizal. + +[70] The three islands are identified as Motane (probably), Hiwaoa, +Tahuata or Tanata; the channel as the strait of Bordelais; and the +"good port" as Vaitahu (Madre de Dios) (?).--Rizal. + +[71] The breadfruit, which grows on the tree artocarpus incisa. It +is called rima in Spanish, the name by which it was perhaps known +throughout Polynesia.--Rizal. + +In the Bissayan Islands this tree was called coló. It reaches a height +of about sixty feet. Its bark exudes a gummy sap, that is used for +snaring birds. For want of areca, the bark is also used by the Indians +as a substitute. The wood is yellow, and is used for making canoes, +and in the construction of houses. See Delgado's Historia General, +and Blanco's Flora de Filipinas. + +[72] Probably the Pukapuka group or Union Islands.--Rizal. + +[73] Perhaps Sophia Island, which is about this distance from +Lima.--Rizal. + +[74] Nitendi.--Rizal. + +[75] The small islets may have been the Taumako Islands; the shoals, +Matema, and the "island of no great size," Vanikoro.--Rizal. + +[76] Called kilitis in the Philippines, but we are not aware that +indigo is made of it.--Rizal. + +Delgado (Historia, Manila, 1892) describes the wild amaranths which he +calls quiletes (an American word, according to Blanco) doubtless the +plant indicated in the text. The native generic name is haroma. There +are numerous varieties, all edible. + +[77] This word is untranslated by Stanley. Rizal conjectures that +it may come from the Tagál word sagã or jequiriti. But it may be a +misprint for the Spanish sagu or sagui, "sago." + +[78] Pingré's translation of the Descubrimiento de las Islas de Salomon +says, p. 41: "On the 17th October there was a total eclipse of the +moon: this luminary, on rising above the horizon, was already totally +eclipsed. Mendaña, by his will, which he signed with difficulty, named +as lady governor of the fleet his wife Doña Isabella de Barreto." And +in a note, he [i.e., Pingré] says that he calculated this eclipse by +the tables of Halley: the immersion must have happened at Paris at +19 hours 6 minutes, and the moon had already been risen since 5 or 6 +minutes; so that the isle of Sta. Cruz would be at least 13h. 2m. west +of Paris, which would make it 184 degrees 30 minutes longitude, or +at most 190 degrees, allowing for the Spaniards not having perceived +the eclipse before sunset.--Stanley. + +[79] Probably Ponape.--Rizal. + +[80] The Descubrimiento de las Islas de Salomon says: "The frigate +was found cast away on the coast with all the crew dead. The galliot +touched at Mindanao, in 10 degrees, where the crew landed on the +islet of Camaniguin; and while wandering on the shore, and dying of +hunger, met with some Indians, who conducted them to a hospital of +the Jesuits. The corregidor of the place sent five men of this ship +prisoners to Manila, upon the complaint of their captain, whom they +had wished to hang. He wrote to Don Antonio de Morga the following +letter: 'A Spanish galliot has arrived here, commanded by a captain, +who is as strange a man as the things which he relates. He pretends +to have belonged to the expedition of General Don Alvaro de Mendaña, +who left Peru for the Solomon isles, and that the fleet consisted +of four ships. You will perhaps have the means of knowing what the +fact is.' The soldiers who were prisoners declared that the galliot +had separated from the general only because the captain had chosen +to follow another route."--Stanley. + +[81] Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera in his Historia del descubrimiento de +las regiones australes (Madrid, 1876), identifies this bay with the +present Harbor of Laguán.--Rizal. + +[82] Lord Stanley translates the above passage, which reads in the +original "que por quede della razon (si acaso Dios dispusiese de +mi persona, o aya otra qualquiera ocasion; que yo, o la que lleuo +faltemos), aya luz della," etc., as "that an account may remain +(if perchance God should dispose of my life, or anything else +should arise, or I or she that I take with me should be missing), +and that it may give light," etc. Rizal points out that the words +"o la que lleuo faltemos" do not refer to Doña Isabel de Barreto, +but to a similar relation of the voyage that Quiros carried with +him. We have accordingly adopted the latter's rendering, which is by +far more probable. + +[83] On the island of Shikoku.--Rizal. + +[84] From the Japanese funé, boat. This may be etymologically +equivalent to the English word funny, a kind of small boat. + +[85] Lord Stanley connects this word, which he translates "monks," +with the Nembuds Koo. These, according to Engelbert Kaëmpfer, historian +and physician at the Dutch embassy in Japan, and who lived from 1651 to +1716, are devout fraternities who chant the Namanda, the abbreviation +of "Nama Amida Budsu" ("Great Amida help us"). The Dai-Nembudzsui +are persons especially devoted to Amida's worship. Rizal however +refutes this, and derives Nambaji from the Japanese word Nambanjin, +signifying "dweller of the barbaric south," as the missionaries came +from the south. + +[86] See note 85, ante, p. 119. + +[87] The Spanish word is dojicos, which is etymologically the same +as the French dogiques. This latter term is defined in The Jesuit +Relations (Cleveland, 1896-1901), xxvii, p. 311, note 1, as a name +given, in foreign missions, to those natives who instruct their +countrymen. They officiated in the absence of the priests. + +[88] Fushimi, Osaka, and Sakai.--Rizal. + +[89] See VOL. X, p. 171, note 19. + +[90] Santa Ines publishes a translation of the same sentence that +varies somewhat in phraseology from the above, but which has the +same sense. It is dated however: "the first year of Quercho, on +the twentieth day of the eleventh moon." J.J. Rein (Japan, London, +1884) publishes a version different from either, which is as follows: +"Taikô--sama. I have condemned these people to death, because they +have come from the Philippine Islands, have given themselves out +as ambassadors, which they are not, and because they have dwelt +in my country without my permission, and proclaimed the law of the +Christians against my command. My will is that they be crucified at +Nagasaki." For the persecutions in this and succeeding administrations, +see Rein, ut supra. + +[91] Santa Ines gives the names and order of the crucifixion of +religious and converts, twenty-six in all. They were crucified in a row +stretching east and west as follows: ten Japanese converts, the six +Franciscans, three Jesuits, and seven Japanese converts, with about +four paces between each two. The Japanese served the Franciscans in +various religious and secular capacities. The six Franciscans were: +Francisco Blanco, of Monte Rey, Galicia; Francisco de San Miguel, +lay-brother, of Parrilla, in the Valladolid bishopric; Gonzalo +Garcia, lay-brother, of Bazain, East India, son of a Portuguese +father and a native woman; Felipe de Jesús, or de las Casas, of +Mexico; Martín de la Ascension, theological lecturer, of Beasaín, +in the province of Guipuzcoa; and Pedro Bautista, of San Esteban, in +the Avila bishopric. The Jesuits were, at least two of them, Japanese, +and were not above the rank of brother or teacher. Five Franciscans of +the eleven in Japan escaped crucifixion, namely, Agustín Rodríguez, +Bartolomé Ruiz, Marcelo de Rivadeneira, Jerónimo de Jesús, and Juan +Pobre. The first three were forced to leave Japan in a Portuguese +vessel sailing to India. + +[92] The Lequios Islands are identified by Rizal as the Riukiu or +Lu-Tschu Islands. J. J. Rein (Japan, London, 1884) says that they form +the second division of the modern Japanese empire, and lie between +the thirtieth and twenty-fourth parallels, or between Japan proper +and Formosa. They are called also the Loochoo Islands. + +[93] See Stanley, appendix v, pp. 398-402, and Rizal, note 4, p. 82, +for extracts and abstracts of a document written by Father Alexander +Valignano, visitor of the Society of Jesus in Japan, dated October 9, +1598. This document states that three Jesuits were crucified by mistake +with the others. The document is polemical in tone, and explains on +natural grounds what the Franciscans considered and published as +miraculous. The above letter to Morga is published by Santa Ines, +ii, p. 364. + +[94] Santa Ines publishes a letter from this religious to another +religious of the same order. From this letter it appears that he +later went to Macan, whence he returned to Manila. + +[95] Called Alderete in Argensola, doubtless an error of the +copyist.--Rizal. + +[96] The same king wrote a letter of almost the same purport to Father +Alonso Ximenez, which is reproduced by Aduarte.--Rizal. + +[97] Diego Aduarte, whose book Historia de la Provincia del Santo +Rosario (Manila, 1640), will appear later in this series. + +[98] Morga's own account of this, ante, says distinctly that there +were two vessels and that Bias Ruiz had entered the river ahead of +Diego Belloso. Hernando de los Rios Coronel, however, explains this +in his Relacion of 1621, by stating that one of the two vessels had +been wrecked on the Cambodian coast. + +[99] The original is en la puente, which translated is "on the +bridge." We have regarded it as a misprint for en el puerto, "in +the port." + +[100] This kingdom has disappeared. The ancient Ciampa, Tsiampa, +or Zampa, was, according to certain Jesuit historians, the most +powerful kingdom of Indochina. Its dominions extended from the banks +of the Menam to the gulf of Ton-King. In some maps of the sixteenth +century we have seen it reduced to the region now called Mois, and in +others in the north of the present Cochinchina, while in later maps +it disappears entirely. Probably the present Sieng-pang is the only +city remaining of all its past antiquity.--Rizal. + +[101] That is, his mother and grandmother. + +[102] From which to conquer the country and the king gradually, +for the latter was too credulous and confiding.--Rizal. + +[103] Rizal misprints Malaca. + +[104] Stanley thinks that this should read "since the war was +not considered a just one;" but Rizal thinks this Blas Ruiz's own +declaration, in order that he might claim his share of the booty taken, +which he could not do if the war were unjust and the booty considered +as a robbery. + +[105] Aduarte says: "The matter was opposed by many difficulties +and the great resistance of influential persons in the community, +but as it was to be done without expense to the royal treasury, +all were overcome."--Rizal. + +La Concepción says, vol. iii, p. 234, that the royal officials did +not exercise the requisite care in the fitting of Luis Dasmariñas's +vessels, as the expedition was not to their taste. + +[106] A Chinese vessel, lighter and swifter than the junk, using oars +and sails. + +[107] Aduarte says that the fleet left the bay on September 17.--Rizal. + +La Concepción gives the same date, and adds that Dasmariñas took in +his vessel, the flagship, Father Ximinez, while Aduarte sailed in +the almiranta. The complement of men, sailors and soldiers was only +one hundred and fifty. Aduarte left the expedition by command of the +Dominican superior after the almiranta had put in to refit at Nueva +Segovia, "as he [i.e., the superior] did not appear very favorable to +such extraordinary undertakings." He returned with aid to Dasmariñas, +sailing from Manila September 6, almost a year after the original +expedition had sailed. + +[108] The island of Corregidor, also called Mirabilis.--Rizal. + +[109] The almiranta was wrecked because of striking some shoals, +while pursuing a Chinese craft with piratical intent. The Spanish ship +opened in two places and the crew were thrown into the sea. Some were +rescued and arrested by the Chinese authorities.--Rizal. + +La Concepción says that the majority of the Spaniards determined to +pursue and capture the Chinese vessel contrary to the advice of the +pilot and a few others, and were consequently led into the shoals. + +[110] This man became a religious later. We present his famous relation +of 1621 in a later volume of this series. Hernando de los Rios was +accompanied by Aduarte on his mission. + +[111] It has been impossible to verify this citation. Of the four +generally known histories of the Indias written at the time of Los +Rios Coronel's letter, that of Las Casas only contains chapters of the +magnitude cited, and those chapters do not treat of the demarcation +question. Gonzalez Fernandez de Oviedo y Valdés: Historia general +y natural de las Indias (Madrid, Imprenta de la Real Academia de +la Historia, 1851), edited by Amador de los Rios, discusses the +demarcation in book ii, ch. viii, pp. 32, 33, and book xxi, ch. ii, +pp. 117, 118; Bartolomé de las Casas: Historia de las Indias (Madrid, +1875), edited by Marquis de la Fuensanta del Valle (vols. 62-66 of +Documentos inéditos para la historia de España), in book i, ch. lxxix, +pp. 485, 486; Antonio de Herrera: Historia general de los Indios +occidentalis (Madrid, 1601), in vol. i, ch. iiii, pp. 50-53, and ch. x, +pp. 62-64; Joseph de Acosta: Historia de las Indias (first published in +Spanish in Sevilla in 1590) does not discuss the matter. Neither is the +reference to Giovanni Pietro Maffei's Historiarum Indicarum (Coloniae +Agrippinae, 1590), where the demarcation is slightly mentioned. + +[112] Costa in the original, misprinted cosa in Rizal. + +[113] From the context, one would suppose that Los Rios Coronel wrote +Jesuita instead of Theatino. + +[114] Undoubtedly the famous Father Mateo Ricci, called Li-Ma-Teou and +Si-Thaí by the Chinese. He was born in Macerata in 1552, and died in +Pekin in 1610. He was one of the greatest Chinese scholars of Europe, +and wrote a number of works in Chinese, which were highly esteemed +and appreciated by the Chinese themselves. He extended Christianity +in the celestial empire more than anyone else, by his tolerance and +keen diplomacy, by composing with great skill what he could not combat +openly. This excited the wrath of the Dominicans, and gave rise to +many controversies....Father Ricci was the associate of the famous +Father Alessandro Valignani.--Rizal. + +[115] The latitude of Toledo is 39º 52'; Nankin [Lanquien] 32º; +and Pekin [Paquien] 39º 58'. + +[116] The pico is a measure of weight. Gregorio Sancianco y Goson +(El Progreso de Filipinas, Madrid, 1881) gives its table thus: 1 +pico = 10 chinantes = 100 cates = 1 tael, 6 décimas = 137 libras, 5 +décimas = 62 kilógramos, 262 gramos, 1 tael = 22 adarmes = 39 gramos, +60 céntimos. The pico is not a fixed weight. In Manila its equivalent +has been fixed at 137 libras, 6 décimas. In the ports of China and +Singapore the English have adopted the following equivalents: 1 pico += 133 1/3 English pounds; 1 pico in Manila is equal to 140 English +pounds; and 1 English pico equals 131.4 Castilian pounds. + +[117] Certain shells found in the Philippines, and used as money in +Siam, where they are called sigay. + +[118] Father Juan Maldonado de San Pedro Mártir was born in Alcalá +de Guadaira in the province of Sevilla. After a course in the +humanities and philosophy, he went to Salamanca University to study +canonical law. He made his profession at the Dominican convent in +Valladolid, where he lived in great austerity. He was one of the +first to respond to the call of Father Juán Crisóstomo for workers +in the Philippines. He was associated with Father Benavides in the +Chinese mission, but was unable to learn the language because of +other duties. He was later sent to Pangasinan, where, in 1588, he +was appointed vicar of Gabón (now Calasiao). He was definitor in the +Manila chapter in 1592, by which he was appointed vicar of Abucay, +in the Bataan district. Shortly after he was again appointed to the +Chinese work, and learned the language thoroughly. In 1596, while on +the unfortunate voyage to Camboja, Father Alonso Jimenez appointed him +vicar-general, but he resigned from this, as well as from the office +of commissary-general of the Holy Office, which he was the first to +hold in the islands. In 1598 he was appointed lecturer on theology, +and in November of the same year went to Camboja. His death occurred +within sight of Cochinchina, December 22, 1598, and he was buried in +Pulocatouan. He was confessor to Luis Dasmariñas. (Reseña Biográfica, +Manila, 1891.) + +[119] Rizal misprints guardia de sus personas que podian, as guardia +de sus personas que pedian. + +[120] This happened afterward and was a constant menace to the +Spaniards, as many letters, reports, and books attest. + +[121] This was the first piratical expedition made against the +Spaniards by the inhabitants of the southern islands.--Rizal. + +Barrantes (Guerras Piraticas) wrongly dates the abandonment of La +Caldera and the incursion of the Moros 1590. Continuing he says: +"The following year they repeated the expedition so that the Indians +retired to the densest parts of the forests, where it cost considerable +trouble to induce them to become quiet. For a woman, who proclaimed +herself a sibyl or prophetess, preached to them that they should not +obey the Spaniards any longer, for the latter had allied themselves +with the Moros to exterminate all the Pintados." + +[122] From the Malay tingi, a mountain.--Rizal. + +[123] The island of Guimarás, southeast of Panay, and separated from +it by the strait of Iloilo. + +[124] Neither Stanley nor Rizal throws any light on this word. The +Spanish dictionaries likewise fail to explain it, as does also +a limited examination of Malay and Tagál dictionaries. Three +conjectures are open: 1. A derivative of tifatas, a species of +mollusk--hence a conch; 2. A Malay or Tagál word for either a wind or +other instrument--the Malay words for "to blow," "to sound a musical +instrument," being tiyup and tiyupkân; 3. A misprint for the Spanish +pifas--a possible shorthand form of pifanos--signifying fifes. + +[125] J. J. Rein (Japan, London, 1884) say that the son of Taicosama or +Hideyoshi was called Hideyosi, and was born in 1592. He was recognized +by Taicosama as his son, but Taicosama was generally believed not to +have been his father. The Yeyasudono of Morga was Tokugawa Iyeyasu, +lord of the Kuwantô, who was called Gieiaso by the Jesuits. He was +already united by marriage to Taicosama. The men appointed with +Iyeyasu to act as governors were Asano Nagamasa, Ishida, Mitsunari, +Masuda Nagamori, Nagatsuka Masaïye, and Masuda Geni. Iyeyasu, the +Daifusama of our text, tried to exterminate Christianity throughout the +empire. He established the feudal system that ruled Japan for three +centuries, dividing society into five classes, he himself being the +most powerful vassal of the mikado. He framed a set of laws, known +by his name, that were in force for three centuries. Their basis was +certain doctrines of Confucius that recognized the family as the basis +of the state. Iyeyasu was a true statesman, an attractive personage, +and a peace-loving man. He was revered after death under the name +of Gongensama. See also Trans. Asiatic Soc. (Yokohama), vol. iii, +part ii, p. 118, "The Legacy of Iyeyasu." + +[126] A manuscript in the British Museum, Dutch Memorable Embassies, +says that he died September 16, 1598, at the age of sixty-four, after +reigning fifteen years. The regent is there called Ongoschio.--Stanley. + +[127] Recueil des voyages (Amsterdam, 1725) ii, pp. 94-95 divides +Japanese society into five classes: those having power and authority +over others, called tones, though their power may be dissimilar; +priests or bonzes; petty nobility and bourgeoisie; mechanics and +sailors; and laborers. + +[128] This battle was fought at Sekigahara, a little village on the +Nakasendo, in October, 1600. Some firearms and cannon were used but +the old-fashioned spears and swords predominated in this battle, which +was fought fiercely all day. (Murray: Story of Japan, New York, 1894). + +[129] John Calleway, of London, a musician, as stated in van Noordt's +account.--Stanley. + +[130] See appendix B, end of this volume, for résumé of Dutch +expeditions to the East Indies. + +[131] Cuckara, the ladle formerly used to charge cannon which used +no cartridge, but the loose powder from the barrel. + +[132] The count of Essex, who in command of an English squadron +captured the city of Cadiz in 1596. He sacked the city and killed +many of the inhabitants, leaving the city in ruins. Drake in 1587 +had burned several vessels in the same harbor. + +[133] Called "San Antonio" above. + +[134] Portuguese, above. + +[135] The present port of Mariveles, as is seen from Colin's +map.--Rizal. + +[136] Juan Francisco Valdés was preacher in the convent of Santo Niño +de Cebú in 1599, and was a missionary in Caruyan from 1600 until +1606. He died in 1617. Juan Gutiérrez was assistant in the council +[discreto] of the general chapter of his order of 1591. He returned +to Manila after three years and was definitor and minister of Tondo +in 1596, and of Parañaque 1602-1603. After that he returned to Rome +a second time as definitor-general, whence he went to Mexico, where +he exercised the duties of procurator in 1608. See Pérez's Catalogo. + +[137] Perhaps "in the direction of the island Del Fraile" is meant +here, since no port of that name is known.--Rizal. + +The expression occurs, however, in at least one other contemporaneous +document. + +[138] Now Punta de Fuego [i.e., Fire Promontory].--Rizal. + +[139] The Dutch account of this combat says that their flagship carried +fifty-three men before the fight, of whom only five were killed and +twenty-six wounded.--Rizal. + +[140] This is perhaps the brother of Fernando de los Rios Coronel, +mentioned in his letter to Morga, ante, p. 180. + +[141] This is the present Nasugbú, which is located in the present +province of Batangas, a short distance below Punta de Fuego or Fire +Promontory, on the west coast of Luzón. + +[142] The governor appears to have ordered this execution of his own +authority, without trial or the intervention of the Audiencia. Since +the independence of Holland was not recognized by Spain until 1609, +it is likely that these men were executed as rebels. If the ground was +that they were pirates, the Dutchmen's own account of their burning +villages, etc., where there were no Spaniards, is more damaging to +themselves than the statements of Morga, and enough to make them out +to have been hostes humani generis.--Stanley. + +[143] Van Noordt was not wrecked, as will be seen later in +this work. He returned to Holland after many misfortunes and +adventures.--Rizal. + +The Sunda is the strait between the islands of Sumatra and Java. + +[144] Hernando de los Rios Coronel in his Memorial y Relacion +attributes both the loss of these two vessels and also that of the +"San Felipe" to Don Francisco Tello's indolence. "For this same reason +other vessels were lost afterward--one called 'Santa Margarita,' which +was wrecked in the Ladrones, another, called 'San Gerónimo,' wrecked +in the Catanduanes, near the channel of those islands, and a third +which sailed from Cibú, called 'Jesus Maria.'" But the last-named, +which sailed during Pedro de Acuña's administration, was not wrecked, +as claimed by the above author.--Rizal. + +[145] Port of Baras (?).--Rizal. + +[146] Kachil Kota. Kachil is the title of the nobles. Kota or Kutà +signifies fortress.--Rizal. + +[147] Leonardo y Argensola (Conquesta de las Molucas, Madrid, 1609, +pp. 262, 263), reproduces this letter translated into Spanish. + +[148] These considerations were very narrow, and contrary to the +international obligations of mutual assistance incurred by the Spanish +by their trading with Japan; such treatment of Japan furnished that +country with an additional motive for secluding itself and declining +relations, the benefits of which were so one-sided: however, the +Spaniards themselves may have felt this only nine years later, for, +according to the Dutch Memorable Embassies, part i, p. 163, a large +Spanish ship, commanded by Don Rodrigo de Riduera, came from Mexico +to Wormgouw, near Yeddo, in August of 1611; these Spaniards were +requesting permission from the Japanese emperor to sound the Japanese +ports, because the Manila ships were frequently lost on the voyage +to New Spain, for want of knowledge of those ports. "Moreover, these +same Spaniards requested permission to build ships in Japan, because, +both in New Spain and in the Philippines, there was a scarcity of +timber fit for ships, and also of good workmen." In the Philippines +there was no scarcity of timber, so that the statement to that effect +was either an error of the Dutch author, or a pretext on the part of +the Spaniards.--Stanley. + +[149] The Dominican Francisco Morales was born at Madrid, October +14, 1567. He professed at the Valladolid convent, where he became +lecturer on philosophy. In the same convent he fulfilled various +duties until 1602, in which year it was determined to send him to +Japan as vicar-general. With other missionaries he was driven from +the kingdom of Satzuma in 1609. Father Morales worked, however, in +the capital until the persecution of 1614, when he remained hidden +in the country. He was arrested March 15, 1619. A week after he +was conducted, with other priests, to the island of Juquinoxima, +distant three leagues from Nagasaki. In August they were removed to +the prison of Ormura. On September 21, 1622, they were taken again +to Nagasaki, where they were executed next day. He was beautified by +order of the pope. He wrote La relación del glorioso martirio de los +BB. Alonso Navarrete y Hernando Ayala de San José, a quarto of thirty +pages. (Reseña Biográfica, Manila, 1891.) + +[150] The Augustinian Diego de Guevara was born in the town of +Baeza, in the province of Jaén, of a noble family. He took the +habit in Salamanca. He arrived at Manila in 1593 with twenty-four +other religious of his order. In May, 1595, he was chosen sub-prior +and procurator of Manila, and in June definitor and discreto [i.e., +assistant in the council] to the general chapter. He was wrecked at +Japan while on his way to attend the chapter at Rome, however, and +returned to Manila with Father Juan Tamayo, his companion. After the +Chinese insurrection in Manila in 1603, he was sent to Spain, which +he reached by way of Rome. He remained for three years in San Felipe +el Real, but was again sent (1610) to the islands, as visitor of the +Augustinian province. From 1616-1621 he was bishop of Nueva Cáceres, +dying in the latter year. He was the author of various Actas, which +have been used extensively by the province. (Catálogo de los Agustinos, +Manila, 1901.) + +[151] Santa Inés mentions this religious as one of those sent back +to Manila by way of a Portuguese vessel about to sail to Portuguese +India, at the time of the persecution. + +[152] Probably the Sibukaw.--Rizal. This tree--also spelled +sibucao--grows to a height of twelve or fifteen feet. Its flowers +grow in clusters, their calyx having five sepals. The pod is woody +and ensiform and contains three or four seeds, separated by spongy +partition-walls. The wood is so hard that nails are made of it, while +it is used as a medicine. It is a great article of commerce as a dye, +because of the beautiful red color that it yields. + +[153] The Philippines then exported silk to Japan, whence today comes +the best silk.--Rizal. + +[154] These must be the precious ancient china jars that are even +yet found in the Philippines. They are dark gray in color, and are +esteemed most highly by the Chinese and Japanese.--Rizal. + +[155] From this point the Rizal edition lacks to the word and in +the second sentence following. The original reads: "que hizieron su +camino por tierra. Entre tanto, se padecian en la nao muchas molestias, +de los Iapones que auia en el puerto." + +[156] The word in the original is cabria, which signifies literally +the sheers or machine for raising a temporary mast. It is evidently +used here for the mast itself. + +[157] Perhaps to perform the hara-kiri, which was an ancient custom +among the Japanese, and consisted in the criminal's making an incision +in his abdomen, and then afterward sinking the knife in his bosom, +or above the clavicle, in order to run it through the heart. Then +the victim's head was cut off with a stroke of the sword.--Rizal. + +[158] Andrea Furtado de Mendoza began his military career at the +age of sixteen, when he accompanied King Sebastian on his ill-fated +expedition to Morocco. A year or two later he went to India and +became famous by his relief of Barcelor. He had charge of many arduous +posts and achieved many military and naval successes. He opposed the +Dutch attempts of Matelief at Malacca. In 1609, he was elected as +thirty-seventh Portuguese governor of India, and filled the office +with great credit to himself and country. (Voyage of Pyrard de Laval, +Hakluyt Society ed., London, 1888, part i, vol. ii, p. 267, note 3.) + +[159] The accounts of voyages made for the Dutch East India Company +(Recueil des voyages, Amsterdam, 1725) mention a town Jaffanapatan +in Ceylon, evidently the Jabanapatan of our text. + +[160] Hernando de los Rios attributed to these wars of the Moluccas the +reason why the Philippines were at first more costly than profitable to +the king, in spite of the immense sacrifices of the inhabitants in the +almost gratuitous construction of galleons, in their equipment, etc.; +and in spite of the tribute, duty, and other imposts and taxes. These +Molucca expeditions, so costly to the Philippines, depopulated the +islands and depleted the treasury, without profiting the country at +all, for they lost forever and shortly what had been won there so +arduously. It is also true that the preservation of the Philippines +for Spain must be attributed to the Moluccas, and one of the powerful +arguments presented to Felipe II as to the advisability of sustaining +those islands was for the possession of the rich spice islands.--Rizal. + +[161] Argensola says that the following things were also sent for +this expedition: "300 blankets from Ilocos, 700 varas of wool from +Castilla, 100 sail-needles, and 30 jars of oil; while the whole cost +of the fleet amounted to 22,260 pesos per month." The expedition, +which was profitless, lasted six months.--Rizal. + +[162] See VOLS. XII and XII for documents concerning the coming of +these mandarins, and the subsequent Chinese insurrection. + +[163] Ignacio or Iñigo de Santa Maria, of the Dominican convent of +Salamanca, on arriving at the Philippines, was sent to Cagayan. He +was later elected prior of the Manila convent, and then definitor. In +1603 he went to Camboja as superior of that mission. Returning thence +for more workers that same year, he died at sea. (Reseña Biográfica, +Manila, 1891.) + +[164] Diego de Soria was born in Yébenes, in the province and +diocese of Toledo, and took the Dominican habit in Ocaña. Showing +signs of a great preacher he was sent to the College of Santo Tomás +in Alcalá de Henares. Thence he went to Manila in 1587 and was one +of the founders of the Dominican convent in Manila, of which he was +vicar-president until June 10, 1588, when he was chosen its prior in +the first provincial chapter of the Philippine province. In 1591 he +was sent to Pangasinan, where he remained until 1595, whence he was +sent to Cagayan at the instance of Luis Perez Dasmariñas. In 1596, +after many successes in Cagayan, he was recalled to Manila as prior of +the convent for the second time. Shortly after he was sent to Spain +and Rome as procurator. He refused the nomination to the bishopric +of Nueva Cáceres, but was compelled to accept that of Nueva Segovia, +and reached the islands somewhat later. In 1608 he was in Vigan, +his residence. He died in 1613 and was buried in the parish church of +Vigan. In 1627 his remains were removed to the Dominican convent at +Lallo-c, in accordance with his wishes. (Reseña Biográfica, Manila, +1891.) + +[165] Buzeta and Bravo say that Baltasar Covarrubias was appointed +to the bishopric in 1604, at which time he entered upon his duties; +but that he died in 1607 without having been consecrated. + +[166] Copied and condensed from Purchas: His Pilgrimes (London, 1625), +book ii, chap. iiii, pp. 55-71, "the third circumnavigation of the +globe." For other accounts of Candish, see Purchas: ut supra, iv, +book vi, chap. vi, pp. 1192-1201, and chap. vii, pp. 1210-1242; Bry: +Collectiones peregrinationum (Francofurti, 1625), ser. i, vol. iii, +pars viii, pp. 35-59; Pieter van der Aa: Zee en landreysen (Leyden, +1706) xx deel, pp. 1-64; and Hakluyt's Voyages (Goldsmid ed., +Edinburgh, 1890), xvi, pp. 1-84. + +[167] The area of England and Wales is 58,186 sq. mi., that of +Scotland, with its 787 islands, 30,417 (mainland 26,000) sq. mi., +and that of Luzón, about 41,000 sq. mi. + +[168] See also VOL. XI of this series. + +[169] Oliver van Noordt was the first Dutch circumnavigator. For +an account of the fight with the Spanish from the side of the Dutch, +see Stanley's translation of Morga, pp. 173-187. + +[170] "L'Amsterdam ... avoit été amené à Manille avec 51 morts à son +bord ... que le yacht le Faucon en avoit 34 ... que le Faucon avoit +été aussí emmené avec 22 morts." + +[171] Spanish accounts, some of which will be published later in this +series, relate Spielberg's bombardment of Iloilo, and his defeat, +after disembarking by Diego Quinones in 1616; while he was later +completely defeated by Juan Ronquillo at Playa Honda, in 1617. + +[172] Following in a translation of the title-page of the other +edition of Morga's work, which shows that a second edition of the +Sucesos was published in the same year as was the first. A reduced +facsimile of this title-page--from the facsimile reproduction in +the Zaragoza edition (Madrid, 1887)--forms the frontispiece to the +present volume. It reads thus: "Events in the Philipinas Islands: +addressed to Don Christoval Gomez de Sandoval y Rojas, duke de Cea, +by Doctor Antonio de Morga, alcalde of criminal causes in the royal +Audiencia of Nueva España, and consultor for the Holy Office of the +Inquisition. At Mexico in the Indias, in the year 1609." In the lower +left-hand corner of the engraved title appears the engraver's name: +"Samuel Estradanus, of Antwerp, made this." + +[173] The month is omitted in the text.--Stanley. + +[174] Fray Diego Bermeo, a native of Toledo, became a Franciscan +friar; and in 1580 went to Mexico, and three years later to the +Philippines. After spending many years as a missionary in Luzón and +Mindoro, he was elected provincial of his order in the islands (in +1599, and again in 1608). Going to Japan as commissary provincial--in +1603, according to Morga, but 1604 as given by Huerta (Estado, +p. 446)--he was obliged by severe illness to return to Manila; he +died there on December 12, 1609. + +[175] Luis Sotelo, belonging to an illustrious family of Sevilla, +made his profession as a Franciscan in 1594. Joining the Philippine +mission, he reached the islands in 1600; and he spent the next two +years in ministering to the Japanese near Manila, and in the study of +their language. In 1600 he went to Japan, where he zealously engaged +in missionary labors. Ten years later, he was sentenced to death for +preaching the Christian religion; but was freed from this danger by +Mazamune, king of Boxu, who sent the Franciscan as his ambassador to +Rome and Madrid. Returning from this mission, Sotelo arrived in the +Philippines in 1618, and four years later resumed his missionary +labors in Japan. In 1622 he was again imprisoned for preaching, +and was confined at Omura for two years, during which time he wrote +several works, in both the Spanish and Japanese languages. Sotelo was +finally burned at the stake in Omura, August 25, 1624. See Huerta's +Estado, pp. 392-394. + +[176] The present towns of San Nicolás, San Fernando, etc., lying +between Binondo and the sea.--Rizal. + +[177] This remark of Morga can be applied to many other insurrections +that occurred later--not only of Chinese, but also of natives--and +probably even to many others which, in the course of time, will be +contrived.--Rizal. + +[178] These devices, of which certain persons always avail themselves +to cause a country to rebel, are the most efficacious to bring such +movements to a head. "If thou wishest thy neighbor's dog to become mad, +publish that it is mad," says an old refrain.--Rizal. + +[179] This is the famous Eng-Kang of the histories of +Filipinas.--Rizal. + +[180] The Rizal edition of Morga omits the last part of this +sentence, the original of which is "entre vnos esteros y cienagas, +lugar escondido." + +[181] "The Chinese killed father Fray Bernardo de Santo Catalina, +agent of the holy office, of the order of St. Dominic ... They attacked +Quiapo, and after killing about twenty people, set fire to it. Among +these they burned alive a woman of rank, and a boy."--Rizal. This +citation is made from Leonardo de Argensola's Conquistas de las Molucas +(Madrid, 1609), a synopsis of which will follow Morga's work. + +[182] We are unaware of the exact location of this settlement of +Laguio. It is probably the present village of Kiapo, which agrees +with the text and is mentioned by Argensola. Nevertheless, from the +description of this settlement given by Morga (post, chapter viii) +and Chirino, it can be inferred that Laguio was located on the present +site of the suburb of La Concepción. In fact, there is even a street +called Laguio between Malate and La Ermita.--Rizal. + +[183] "Fine helmets were found broken in with clubs... About thirty +also escaped (among whom was Father Farfan), who were enabled to do so +because of being in the rear, and lightly armed" (Argensola).--Rizal. + +[184] Argensola says that the Chinese killed many peaceful merchants in +the parián, while others hanged themselves of their own accord. Among +these Argensola mentions General Hontay and the rich Chican--according +to the relation of Fray Juan Pobre, because the latter had refused +to place the famous Eng-Kang at the head of the movement.--Rizal. + +[185] "And they tried to persuade the natives to unite with them; +but the latter refused, and on the contrary killed as many of the +Sangleys as they caught" (Argensola).--Rizal. + +[186] Argensola says that "four thousand Pampangos, armed in the +custom of their country, with bows and arrows, half-pikes, shields, +and long broad daggers," were sent by the alcalde of Pampanga to the +relief of Manila, which now needed soldiers.--Rizal. + +[187] In this struggle many cruelties were committed and many quiet +and friendly Chinese killed. Don Pedro de Acuña, who could not +prevent or stifle this terrible insurrection in its beginnings, also +contributed to the horrible butcheries that ensued. "Accordingly +many Spaniards and natives went to hunt the disbanded Sangleys, +at Don Pedro's order." Hernando de Avalos, alcalde of La Pampanga, +seized more than 400 pacific Sangleys, "and leading them to an estuary, +manacled two and two, delivered them to certain Japanese, who killed +them. Father Fray Diego de Guevara of the order of St. Augustine, prior +of Manila, who made this relation, preached to the Sangleys first, +but only five abandoned their idolatry." ... Would he not have done +better to preach to Alcalde Avalos, and to remind him that he was a +man? The Spanish historians say that the Japanese and Filipinos showed +themselves cruel in the killing of the Chinese. It is quite probable, +considering the rancor and hate with which they were regarded. But +their commanders contributed to it also by their example. It is said +that more than 23,000 Chinese were killed. "Some assert that the number +of Sangleys killed was greater, but in order that the illegality +committed in allowing so many to enter the country contrary to the +royal prohibitions might not be known, the officials covered up or +diminished the number of those who perished" (Argensola).--Rizal. + +[188] The coming of the Spaniards to the Filipinas, and their +government, together with the immigration of the Chinese, killed the +industry and agriculture of the country. The terrible competition +of the Chinese with any individual of another race is well known, +for which reason the United States and Australia refuse to admit +them. The indolence, then, of the inhabitants of the Filipinas, is +derived from the lack of foresight of the government. Argensola says +the same thing, and could not have copied Morga, since their works +were published in the same year, in countries very distant from one +another, and the two contain wide differences.--Rizal. + +The Chinese question has always been of great importance in the +Philippines. The dislike of the Filipino for the Chinese seemed +instinctive and was deep-rooted. The subject of the Chinese immigration +to the islands has served for special legislation on many occasions +in Spain, but they have nevertheless persisted in their trading and +occupations therein. See Stanley's edition of Morga, appendix II, +pp. 363-368; and Los Chinos en Filipinos (Manila, 1886). + +[189] This should be six hundred and four.--Rizal. + +[190] Nueva España.--Rizal. + +[191] This archbishop seems to have been a principal cause of the +disturbance and massacre of the Chinese, by taking a leading part in +exciting suspicion against them.--Stanley. + +[192] The Arab travelers of the ninth century mention that eunuchs +were employed in China, especially for the collection of the revenue, +and that they were called thoucam.--Stanley. + +[193] "In earlier times a barrier, which ran from Osaka to the +border of Yamato and Omi, separated the thirty-three western from the +thirty-three eastern provinces. The former were collectively entitled +Kuwansei (pronounce Kánsé), i.e., westward of the Gate; the latter +Kuwantô (pronounce Kántô), i.e., eastward of the Gate. Later, however, +when under the Tokugawa régime the passes leading to the plain in which +Yedo, the new capital of Shôgune, grew up were carefully guarded; +by the Gate (Kuwan) was understood the great guard on the Hakone +Pass, and Kuwantô or Kuwantô-Hashiu, the eight provinces east of it: +Sagami, Musashi, Kôtsuke, Shimotsuke, Hitachi, Shimosa, Katsusa, +and Awa." Thus defined by Rein, in his Japan, p. II, Cf. Griffis, +Mikado's Empire, p. 68, note. + +[194] A flat-bottomed boat, capable of carrying heavy loads. + +[195] Pedro Alvares de Abreu.--Rizal. + +[196] According to Argensola, who gives a succinct relation of this +expedition, the number engaged in it were as follows: Spaniards +and their officers, 1,423; Pampangos and Tagáls (without their +chiefs), 344; idem, for maritime and military service, 620; rowers, +649; Indian chiefs, 5; total 3,041. But he adds that all those +of the fleet, exclusive of the general's household and followers, +numbered 3,095. Probably the 54 lacking in the above number were the +Portuguese under command of Abreu and Camelo, although Argensola +does not mention Portuguese soldiers.... The names of the Indian +chiefs attending the expedition at their own cost were: Don Guillermo +(Palaot), master-of-camp; and Captains Don Francisco Palaot, Don Juan +Lit, Don Luis Lont, and Don Agustin Lont. These must have behaved +exceedingly well, for after the assault on Ternate, Argensola says: +"Not a person of consideration among the Spaniards or the Indians +remained unwounded."--Rizal. + +[197] Said Dini Baraka ja.--Rizal. + +[198] Combés (Mindanao, Retana's ed., cols. 73, 74) describes the +bagacay as a small, slender reed, hardened in fire and sharp-pointed; +it is hurled by a Moro at an enemy with unerring skill, and sometimes +five are discharged in one volley. He narrates surprising instances of +the efficacy of this weapon, and says that "there is none more cruel, +at close range." + +[199] Stanley translates this "flat-boats." Retana and Pastells +(Combés's Mindanao, col. 787) derive this word from Chinese chun, +"a boat," and regard the joanga (juanga) as a small junk. + +[200] "The soldiers, having entered the city, gave themselves +universally to violence and pillage. Don Pedro had issued a +proclamation conceding that all of the enemy captured within those +four days, should be slaves" (Argensola). During the sack, which +Don Pedro was unable to restrain, neither children nor young girls +were spared. One girl was killed because two soldiers disputed for +her.--Rizal. + +[201] "The prince's name was Sulamp Gariolano. This step was contrary +to the advice of Queen Celicaya" (Argensola).--Rizal. + +[202] Sangajy, a Malay title (Marsden).--Stanley. + +[203] The Jesuit Father Luis Fernández, Gallinato, and Esquivel +made negotiations with the king for this exile, and Father Colin +attributes its good outcome to the cleverness of the former. What was +then believed to be prudent resulted afterward as an impolitic measure, +and bore very fatal consequences; for it aroused the hostility of all +the Molucas, even that of their allies, and made the Spanish name +as odious as was the Portuguese. The priest Hernando de los Rios, +Bokemeyer, and other historians, moreover, accuse Don Pedro de Acuña +of bad faith in this; but, strictly judged, we believe that they do +so without foundation. Don Pedro in his passport assured the lives of +the king and prince, but not their liberty. Doubtless a trifle more +generosity would have made the conqueror greater, and the odium of +the Spanish name less, while it would have assured Spanish domination +of that archipelago. The unfortunate king never returned to his own +country. Hernando de los Rios says that during Don Pedro de Acuña's +life he was well treated, but that during the administration of Don +Juan de Silva "I have seen him in a poor lodging where all the rain +fell on him, and they were starving him to death." He is described by +Argensola as of "robust proportions, and his limbs are well formed. His +neck and much of his breast are bare. His flesh is of a cloudy color, +rather black than gray. The features of his face are like those of an +European. His eyes are large and full, and he seems to dart sparks +from them. His large eyelashes, his thick bristling beard, and his +mustaches add to his fierceness. He always wears his campilan, dagger, +and kris, both with hilts in the form of gilded serpents' heads." This +description was taken from a picture sent to Spain.--Rizal. + +[204] Other disturbances occurred also, because of Don Pedro's enemies +having spread the news that the expedition had been destroyed, and +most of those making it killed. "This report, having come to the ears +of the Indians, was so harmful that they began to mutiny, especially +in the provinces of Camarines and Pintados. The friars who instructed +them could already do, nothing with them, for they asked why, since +the inhabitants of the Malucos were victorious, should they be subject +to the Spaniards, who did not defend them from the Moros. They said +that the Moros would plunder them daily with the help of Ternate, +and that it would be worse henceforth" (Argensola).--Rizal. + +La Concepción states (Hist. de Philipinas, iv, p. 103) that these +Japanese were settled in Dilao; and that the immediate cause of their +mutiny was the killing of a Japanese by a Spaniard, in a quarrel. + +[205] The authors of this poisoning were then known in Manila, +and according to Argensola were those envious of the governor. "But +although they were known as such, so that the suspicion of the crowd +makes them the authors of the poisoning we shall repress their names +... for all are now dead" (Argensola).--Rizal. + +Cf. La Concepción (Hist. de Philipinas, iv, pp. 105, 106); he ascribes +the report of Acuña's poisoning to the physicians, who sought thus +to shield their own ignorance of his disease. + +[206] These were the results of having taken the king and his chiefs, +who had entrusted themselves to Don Pedro de Acuña, prisoners to +Manila, the king of Tidore, the ally of España, had already found +means to break the alliance. The governors appointed by the captive +king refused to have anything to do with the Spaniards. Fear was +rampant in all parts, and the spirit of vengeance was aroused. "When +his vassals saw the ill-treatment that the Spaniards inflicted on +their king, they hated us so much that they acquired an equal liking +for our enemies. (Her. de los Rios)." Don Pedro lacked the chief +characteristic of Legazpi.--Rizal. + +[207] This relation forms an appendix to Theodore de Bry's Ninth +part of America (Frankfort, 1601), and was printed by Matthew Becker +(Frankfort, 1602). The copper plates are different from those of the +Dutch edition of the relation.--Stanley. + +The plates representing Oliver van Noordt's fleet, presented +in the preceding volume, are taken from tome xvi of Theodore de +Bry's Peregrinationes (first ed.), by courtesy of the Boston Public +Library. The title-page of the relation reads in part: "Description +dv penible voyage faict entovr de l'univers ou globe terrestre, par +Sr. Olivier dv Nort d'Avtrecht, ... Le tout translaté du Flamand en +Franchois, . . . Imprimé a Amsterdame. Ches Cornille Claessz fur l'Eau +au Livre a Escrire, l'An 1602." This relation was reprinted in 1610, +and numerous editions have appeared since. + +[208] One of the Canary Islands. + +[209] This anchor was given him by a Japanese captain, in Manila Bay, +on December 3, 1600.--Stanley. + +[210] What we now call Java used to be called Java major, and the +island of Bali was Java minor.--Stanley. + +[Note: Inasmuch as Morga enters somewhat largely into the ancient +customs of the Tagáls and other Filipino peoples in the present +chapter, and as some of Rizal's notes indicative of the ancient culture +of those peoples are incorporated in notes that follow, we deem it +advisable to invite attention to Lord Stanley's remarks in the preface +to his translation of Morga (p. vii), and Pardo de Tavera's comment +in his Biblioteca Filipina (Washington, 1903), p. 276. Stanley says: +"The inhabitants of the Philippines previous to the Spanish settlement +were not like the inhabitants of the great Indian Peninsula, people +with a civilization as that of their conquerors. Excepting that they +possessed the art of writing, and an alphabet of their own, they do +not appear to have differed in any way from the Dayaks of Borneo as +described by Mr. Boyle in his recent book of adventures amongst that +people. Indeed there is almost a coincidence of verbal expressions in +the descriptions he and De Morga give of the social customs, habits, +and superstitions of the two peoples they are describing; though many +of these coincidences are such as are incidental to life in similar +circumstances, there are enough to lead one to suppose a community of +origin of the inhabitants of Borneo and Luzon." Pardo de Tavera says +after quoting the first part of the above: "Lord Stanley's opinion is +dispassionate and not at all at variance with historical truth." The +same author says also that Blumentritt's prologue and Rizal's notes +in the latter's edition of Morga have so aroused the indignation of +the Spaniards that several have even attacked Morga.] + +[211] More exactly from 25º 40' north latitude to 12º south latitude, +if we are to include Formosa in the group, which is inhabited likewise +by the same race.--Rizal. + +[212] We confess our ignorance with respect to the origin of this +belief of Morga, which, as one can observe, was not his belief in +the beginning of the first chapter. Already from the time of Diodorus +Siculus (first century B. C.), Europe received information of these +islands by one Iamboule, a Greek, who went to them (to Sumatra at +least), and who wrote afterward the relation of his voyage. He gave +therein detailed information of the number of the islands, of their +inhabitants, of their writing, navigation, etc. Ptolemy mentions +three islands in his geography, which are called Sindæ in the Latin +text. They are inhabited by the Aginnatai. Mercator interprets those +islands as Celebes, Gilolo, and Amboina. Ptolemy also mentions the +island Agathou Daimonos (Borneo), five Baroussai (Mindanao, Leite, +Sebu, etc.), three Sabadeibai (the Java group--Iabadiou) and ten +Masniolai where a large loadstone was found. Colin surmises that +these are the Manilas.--Rizal. + +Colin (Labor Evangelica, Madrid, 1663) discusses the discovery and +naming of the Philippines. He quotes Ptolemy's passage that speaks +of islands called the Maniolas, whence many suppose came the name +Manilas, sometimes given to the islands. But as pointed out in a +letter dated March 14, 1904, by James A. LeRoy, Spanish writers have +wasted more time on the question than it merits. Mr. LeRoy probably +conjectures rightly that many old Chinese and Japanese documents will +be found to contain matter relating to the Philippines prior to the +Spanish conquest. + +[213] It is very difficult now to determine exactly which is this +island of Tendaya, called Isla Filipina for some years. According to +Father Urdaneta's relations, this island was far to the east of the +group, past the meridian of Maluco. Mercator locates it in Panay, +and Colin in Leyte, between Abuyog and Cabalían--contrary to the +opinion of others, who locate it in Ibabao, or south of Samar. But +according to other documents of that period, there is no island by +that name, but a chief called Tendaya, lord of a village situated in +that district; and, as the Spaniards did not understand the Indians +well at that time, many contradictions thus arose in the relations of +that period. We see that, in Legazpi's expedition, while the Spaniards +talked of islands, the Indians talked of a man, etc. After looking +for Tandaya for ten days they had to continue without finding it +"and we passed on without seeing Tandaya or Abuyo." It appears, +nevertheless, that the Spaniards continued to give this name to the +southwestern part of Samar, calling the southeastern part Ibabao or +Zibabao and the northern part of the same island Samar.--Rizal. + +[214] Sugbú, in the dialect of the country.--Rizal. + +[215] Morga considers the rainy season as winter, and the rest of +the year as summer. However this is not very exact, for at Manila, +in December, January, and February, the thermometer is lower than +in the months of August and September. Consequently, in its seasons +it is like those of España and those of all the rest of the northern +hemisphere.--Rizal. + +[216] The ancient traditions made Sumatra the original home of the +Filipino Indians. These traditions, as well as the mythology and +genealogies mentioned by the ancient historians, were entirely lost, +thanks to the zeal of the religious in rooting out every national pagan +or idolatrous record. With respect to the ethnology of the Filipinas, +see Professor Blumentritt's very interesting work, Versuch einer +Etnographie der Philippinen (Gotha, Justus Perthes, 1882).--Rizal. + +[217] This passage contradicts the opinion referred to in Boyle's +Adventures among the Dyaks of Borneo, respecting the ignorance of the +Dyaks in the use of the bow, which seems to imply that other South +Sea islanders are supposed to share this ignorance. These aboriginal +savages of Manila resemble the Pakatans of Borneo in their mode of +life.--Stanley. + +[218] We do not know the origin of this word, which does not seem to +be derived from China. If we may make a conjecture, we will say that +perhaps a poor phonetic transcription has made chinina from the word +tininã (from tinã) which in Tagál signifies teñido ["dyed stuff"], +the name of this article of clothing, generally of but one color +throughout. The chiefs wore these garments of a red color, which made, +according to Colin, "of fine gauze from India."--Rizal. + +[219] Bahag "a richly dyed cloth, generally edged with gold" among +the chiefs.--Rizal. + +[220] "They wrapped it in different ways, now in the Moro style, like +a turban without the top part, now twisted and turned in the manner +of the crown of a hat. Those who esteemed themselves valiant let the +ends of the cloth, elaborately embroidered, fall down the back to the +buttocks. In the color of the cloth, they showed their chieftaincy, and +the device of their undertakings and prowess. No one was allowed to use +the red potong until he had killed at least one man. And in order to +wear them edged with certain edgings, which were regarded as a crown, +they must have killed seven men" (Colin). Even now any Indian is seen +to wear the balindang in the manner of the putong. Putong signifies +in Tagál, "to crown" or "to wrap anything around the head."--Rizal. + +[221] This is the reading of the original (cera hilada). It seems more +probable that this should read "spun silk," and that Morga's amanuensis +misunderstood seda ("silk") as cera ("wax"), or else it is a misprint. + +[222] "They also have strings of bits of ivory" (Colin).--Rizal. + +[223] "The last complement of the gala dress was, in the manner of our +sashes, a richly dyed shawl crossed at the shoulder and fastened under +the arm" (even today the men wear the lambong or mourning garment +in this manner) "which was very usual with them. The Bisayans, in +place of this, wore robes or loose garments, well made and collarless, +reaching to the instep, and embroidered in colors. All their costume, +in fact, was in the Moorish manner, and was truly elegant and rich; +and even today they consider it so" (Colin).--Rizal. + +[224] This manner of headdress, and the long robe of the Visayans, +have an analogy with the Japanese coiffure and kimono.--Rizal. + +[225] Barõ.--Rizal. + +[226] A tree (Entada purseta) which grows in most of the provinces +of the Philippines. It contains a sort of filament, from which is +extracted a soapy foam, which is much used for washing clothes. This +foam is also used to precipitate the gold in the sand of rivers. Rizal +says the most common use is that described above. + +[227] This custon still exists.--Rizal. + +[228] This custom exists also among the married women of Japan, +as a sign of their chastity. It is now falling into disuse.--Rizal. + +[229] The Filipinos were careful not to bathe at the hour of +the siesta, after eating, during the first two days of a cold, +when they have the herpes, and some women during the period of +menstruation.--Rizal. + +[230] This work, although not laborious, is generally performed +now by the men, while the women do only the actual cleaning of the +rice.--Rizal. + +[231] This custom is still to be seen in some parts.--Rizal. + +[232] A name given it by the Spaniards. Its Tagál name is +kanin.--Rizal. + +[233] The fish mentioned by Morga is not tainted, but is the +bagoong.--Rizal. + +[234] A term applied to certain plants (Atmaranthus, Celosia, etc.) of +which the leaves are boiled and eaten. + +[235] From the Tagál tubã, meaning sap or juice.--Rizal. + +[236] The Filipinos have reformed in this respect, due perhaps to the +wine-monopoly. Colin says that those intoxicated by this wine were +seldom disagreeable or dangerous, but rather more witty and sprightly; +nor did they show any ill effects from drinking it.--Rizal. + +[237] This weapon has been lost, and even its name is gone. A proof +of the decline into which the present Filipinos have fallen is the +comparison of the weapons that they manufacture now, with those +described to us by the historians. The hilts of the talibones now +are not of gold or ivory, nor are their scabbards of horn, nor are +they admirably wrought.--Rizal. + +Balarao, dagger, is a Vissayan word.--Stanley. + +[238] The only other people who now practice head-hunting are the +Mentenegrins.--Stanley. + +[239] A Tagál word meaning oar.--Stanley. + +[240] A common device among barbarous or semi-civilized peoples, +and even among boatmen in general. These songs often contain many +interesting and important bits of history, as well as of legendary +lore. + +[241] Karang, signifying awnings.--Rizal and Stanley. + +[242] The Filipinos, like the inhabitants of the Marianas--who are no +less skilful and dexterous in navigation--far from progressing, have +retrograded; since, although boats are now built in the islands, +we might assert that they are all after European models. The +boats that held one hundred rowers to a side and thirty soldiers +have disappeared. The country that once, with primitive methods, +built ships of about 2,000 toneladas, today [1890] has to go to +foreign ports, as Hong-Kong, to give the gold wrenched from the poor, +in exchange for unserviceable cruisers. The rivers are blocked up, +and navigation in the interior of the islands is perishing, thanks to +the obstacles created by a timid and mistrusting system of government; +and there scarcely remains in the memory anything but the name of all +that naval architecture. It has vanished, without modern improvements +having come to replace it in such proportion as, during the past +centuries, has occurred in adjacent countries....--Rizal. + +[243] It seems that some species of trees disappeared or became +very scarce because of the excessive ship-building that took place +later. One of them is the betis.--Rizal. + +Blanco states (Flora, ed. 1845, p. 281) that the betis (Azaola betis) +was common in Pampanga and other regions. + +Delgado describes the various species of trees in the Philippines +in the first six treatises of the first part of the fourth book of +Historia general de Filipinas (Manila, 1892). He mentions by name more +than seventy trees grown on the level plains and near the shores; +more than forty fruit-trees; more than twenty-five species grown in +the mountains; sixteen that actually grow in the water; and many kinds +of palms. See also Gazetteer of the Philippine Islands (Washington, +1902), pp. 85-95, and Buzeta and Bravo's Diccionario (Madrid, 1850), +i, pp. 29-36. + +[244] Sanctor is called santol (Sandoricum indicum--Cavanilles), in +Delgado (ut supra, note 71). The tree resembles a walnut-tree. Its +leaves are rounded and as large as the palm of the hand, and are +dark green in color. Excellent preserves are made from the fruit, +which was also eaten raw by the Indians. The leaves of the tree have +medicinal properties and were used as poultices. Mabolo (Diospyros +discolor--Willd.) signifies in Tagál a thing or fruit enclosed in +a soft covering. The tree is not very high. The leaves are large, +and incline to a red color when old. The fruit is red and as large +as a medium-sized quince, and has several large stones. The inside of +the fruit is white, and is sweet and firm, and fragrant, but not very +digestible. The wood resembles ebony, is very lustrous, and is esteemed +for its solidity and hardness. The nanca [nangka, nangca; translated +by Stanley, jack-fruit] (Artocarpus integrifolia--Willd.), was taken +to the Philippines from India, where it was called yaca. The tree +is large and wide-spreading, and has long narrow leaves. It bears +fruit not only on the branches, but on the trunk and roots. The +fruit is gathered when ripe, at which time it exhales an aromatic +odor. On opening it a yellowish or whitish meat is found, which +is not edible. But in this are found certain yellow stones, with a +little kernel inside resembling a large bean; this is sweet, like +the date, but has a much stronger odor. It is indigestible, and when +eaten should be well masticated. The shells are used in cooking and +resemble chestnuts. The wood is yellow, solid, and especially useful +in making certain musical instruments. Buzeta and Bravo (Diccionario, +i, p. 35) say that there are more than fifty-seven species of bananas +in the Philippines. + +[245] Pilê (Canarium commune--Linn.). Delgado (ut supra) says that this +was one of the most notable and useful fruits of the islands. It was +generally confined to mountainous regions and grew wild. The natives +used the fruit and extracted a white pitch from the tree. The fruit +has a strong, hard shell. The fruit itself resembles an almond, both +in shape and taste, although it is larger. The tree is very high, +straight, and wide-spreading. Its leaves are larger than those of +the almond-tree. + +[246] Delgado (ut supra) describes the tree (Cedrela +toona--Roxb.) called calanta in Tagál, and lanipga in Visayan. The tree +is fragrant and has wood of a reddish color. It was used for making +the hulls of vessels, because of its strength and lightness. The same +author describes also the asana (Pterocarpus indicus--Willd.) or as it +is called in the Visayas, naga or narra--as an aromatic tree, of which +there are two varieties, male and female. The wood of the male tree is +pinkish, while that of the female tree is inclined to white. They both +grow to a great size and are used for work requiring large timber. The +wood has good durable qualities and is very impervious to water, for +which reason it was largely used as supports for the houses. Water +in which pieces of the wood were placed, or the water that stood in +vessels made of this wood, had a medicinal value in dropsy and other +diseases. In the provinces of Albay and Camarines the natives made +curiously-shaped drinking vessels from this wood. + +[247] So many cattle were raised that Father Gaspar de San Agustin, +when speaking of Dumangas, says: "In this convent we have a large ranch +for the larger cattle, of so many cows that they have at times numbered +more than thirty, thousand ... and likewise this ranch contains many +fine horses."--Rizal. + +[248] To the flesh of this fowl, called in Tagál ulikbâ, are attributed +medicinal virtues.--Rizal. + +[249] These animals now [1890] exist in the islands, but are held in +small esteem.--Rizal. + +[250] See chapter on the mammals of the islands, in Report of +U. S. Philippine Commission, 1900, iii, pp. 307-312. At its end is the +statement that but one species of monkey is known, and one other is +reported, to exist in the Philippines; and that "the various other +species of monkey which have been assigned to the Philippines by +different authors are myths pure and simple." + +[251] Camalote, for gamalote, a plant like maize, with a leaf a yard +long and an inch wide. This plant grows to a height of two yards +and a half, and when green serves for food for horses (Caballero's +Dictionary, Madrid, 1856).--Stanley. + +At that time the name for zacate (hay).--Rizal. + +[252] In Japanese fimbari, larks (Medhurst's Japanese +Vocabulary).--Stanley. + +[253] Pogos, from the Tagál pugô.--Rizal. + +Delgado (ut supra) describes the pogos as certain small gray birds, +very similar to the sparrows in Spain. They are very greedy, and if +undisturbed would totally destroy the rice-fields. Their scientific +name is Excalfactoria chinensis (Linn.). + +[254] Stanley conjectures that this word is a misprint for maynelas, +a diminutive of maina, a talking bird. Delgado (ut supra) describes +a bird called maya (Munia jagori--Cab.; Ploceus baya--Blyth.; and +Ploceus hypoxantha--Tand.), which resembles the pogo, being smaller +and of a cinnamon color, which pipes and has an agreeable song. + +[255] Stanley translates this as "wild ducks." Delgado (ut supra) +describes a bird called lapay (Dendrocygna vagans--Eyton.), as similar +to the duck in body, but with larger feet, which always lives in the +water, and whose flesh is edible. + +[256] For descriptions of the birds in the Philippines, see Delgado +(ut supra) book v, part i, 1st treatise, pp. 813-853; Report of +U.S. Philippine Commission, 1900, iii, pp. 312-316; and Gazetteer of +the Philippine Islands (Washington, 1902), pp. 170, 171. There are +more than five hundred and ninety species of birds in the islands, of +which three hundred and twenty-five are peculiar to the archipelago, +and largely land birds. There are thirty-five varieties of doves and +pigeons, all edible. + +[257] There are now domestic rabbits, and plenty of peacocks.--Rizal. + +[258] Doubtless the python, which is often domesticated in the +Philippines. See VOL. XII, p. 259, note 73. + +[259] La Gironiére (Twenty Years in the Philippines--trans. from +French, London, 1853) describes an interesting fight with a huge +crocodile near his settlement of Jala-Jala. The natives begged for +the flesh in order to dry it and use it as a specific against asthma, +as they believed that any asthmatic person who lived on the flesh for +a certain time would be infallibly cured. Another native wished the +fat as an antidote for rheumatic pain. The head of this huge reptile +was presented to an American, who in turn presented it to the Boston +Museum. Unfortunately La Gironiére's picturesque descriptions must +often be taken with a grain of salt. For some information regarding +the reptiles of the islands see Report of U.S. Philippine Commission,, +1900, iii, pp. 317-319. + +[260] Unless we are mistaken, there is a fish in the Filipinas called +Pámpano.--Rizal. + +[261] For catalogue and scientific description of the mollusks +of the Philippines, see the work of Joaquín González Hidalgo--now +(1904) in course of publication by the Real Academia de Ciencias +of Madrid--Estudios preliminares sobre la fauna malacológica de las +Islas Filipinas. + +[262] The Río Grande.--Rizal. + +[263] No fish is known answering to this description.--Stanley. + +[264] The island of Talim.--Rizal. + +[265] Retana thinks (Zúñiga, ii, p. 545*) that this device was +introduced among the Filipinos by the Borneans. + +[266] A species of fishing-net. Stanley's conjecture is wrong. + +[267] Esparavel is a round fishing-net, which is jerked along by +the fisher through rivers and shallow places. Barredera is a net of +which the meshes are closer and tighter than those of common nets, +so that the smallest fish may not escape it. + +[268] Cf. methods of fishing of North American Indians, Jesuit +Relations, vi, pp. 309-311, liv, pp. 131, 306-307. + +[269] A species of fish in the Mediterranean, about three pulgadas +[inches] long. Its color is silver, lightly specked with black. + +[270] The fish now called lawlaw is the dry, salted sardine. The +author evidently alludes to the tawilis of Batangas, or to the dilis, +which is still smaller, and is used as a staple by the natives.--Rizal. + +For information regarding the fishes of the Philippines, see Delgado +(ut supra), book v, part iv, pp. 909-943; Gazetteer of the Philippine +Islands (ut supra), pp. 171-172; and (with description of methods of +fishing) Report of U. S. Philippine Commission, 1900, iii, pp. 319-324. + +[271] Pahõ. A species of very small mango from one and one-half +to five centimeters in its longer diameter. It has a soft pit, and +exhales a strong pitchy odor.--Rizal. + +[272] A Spanish word signifying a cryptogamous plant; perhaps referring +to some species of mushroom. + +[273] In Tagál this is kasubhã. It comes from the Sanskrit kasumbha, +or Malay kasumba (Pardo de Tavera's El Sanscrito en la lengua +tagalog).--Rizal. + +This plant is the safflower or bastard saffron (Certhamus tinctorius); +its flowers are used in making a red dye. + +[274] Not a tree, but a climber. The plants are cultivated by +training them about some canes planted in the middle of certain +little channels which serve to convey irrigation to the plant twice +each day. A plantation of betel--or ikmó, as the Tagáls call it--much +resembles a German hop-garden.--Rizal. + +[275] This fruit is not that of the betel or buyo, but of the bonga +(Tagál buñga), or areca palm.--Rizal. + +[276] Not quicklime, but well slaked lime.--Rizal. + +Rizal misprints un poco de cal viva for vn poluc de cal viua. + +[277] The original word is marcada. Rizal is probably correct in +regarding it as a misprint for mascada, chewed. + +[278] It is not clear who call these caskets by that name. I +imagine it to be the Spanish name, properly spelt buxeta. The king +of Calicut's betel box is called buxen in the Barcelona MS. of the +Malabar coasts.--Stanley. + +[279] See VOL. IV, p. 222, note 31; also Delgado (ut supra), +pp. 667-669. Delgado says that bonga signifies fruit. + +[280] Tagál, tukõ.--Rizal. + +[281] This word in the original is visitandolas; Rizal makes it +irritandolas (shaking or irritating them), but there are not sufficient +grounds for the change. + +[282] The Indians, upon seeing that wealth excited the rapacity of +the encomenderos and soldiers, abandoned the working of the mines, +and the religious historians assert that they counseled them to a +similar action in order to free them from annoyances. Nevertheless, +according to Colin (who was "informed by well-disposed natives") +more than 100,000 pesos of gold annually, conservatively stated, +was taken from the mines during his time, after eighty years of +abandonment. According to "a manuscript of a grave person who had +lived long in these islands" the first tribute of the two provinces +of Ilocos and Pangasinan alone amounted to 109,500 pesos. A single +encomendero, in 1587, sent 3,000 taheles of gold in the "Santa Ana," +which was captured by Cavendish.--Rizal. + +[283] This was prohibited later.--Rizal. + +[284] See VOL. XIV, pp. 301-304. + +According to Hernando de los Rios the province of Pangasinan was said +to contain a quantity of gold, and that Guido de Labazaris sent some +soldiers to search for it; but they returned in a sickly state and +suppressed all knowledge of the mines in order not to be sent back +there. The Dominican monks also suppressed all knowledge of the mines +on account of the tyranny of which gold had been the cause in the +West Indies.--Stanley. + +[285] Pearl-fishing is still carried on along the coasts of Mindanao +and Palawan, and in the Sulu archipelago. In the latter region pearls +are very abundant and often valuable; the fisheries there are under +the control of the sultan of Sulu, who rents them, appropriating for +himself the largest pearls. + +[286] Probably the cowry (Cypræa moneta). Crawfurd states +(Dict. Ind. Islands, p. 117) that in the Asiatic archipelago this +shell is found only on the shores of the Sulu group, and that it +"seems never to have been used for money among the Indian Islanders +as it has immemorially been by the Hindus." + +[287] Jagor, Travels in the Philippines (Eng. trans., London, 1875), +devotes a portion of his chapter xv to these jars. He mentions the +great prices paid by the Japanese for these vessels. On p. 164, occurs +a translation of the above paragraph, but it has been mistranslated +in two places. Stanley cites the similar jars found among the Dyaks +of Borneo--the best called gusih--which were valued at from $1,500 to +$3,000, while the second grade were sold for $400. That they are very +ancient is proved by one found among other remains of probably the +copper age. From the fact that they have been found in Cambodia, Siam, +Cochinchina, and the Philippines, Rizal conjectures that the peoples +of these countries may have had a common center of civilization at +one time. + +[288] "Not many years ago," says Colin (1663), "a large piece [of +ambergris] was found in the island of Joló, that weighed more than +eight arrobas, of the best kind, namely, the gray."--Rizal. + +[289] This industry must now be forgotten, for it is never heard +of.--Rizal. + +[290] Perhaps Morga alludes to the sinamay, which was woven from abaká, +or filament of the plant Musa textilis. The abaká is taken from the +trunk and not the leaf.--Rizal. + +[291] This name seems to be Malay, Babu-utan, wild swine.--Stanley. + +[292] The men of these islands were excellent carpenters and +ship-builders. "They make many very light vessels, which they take +through the vicinity for sale in a very curious manner. They build +a large vessel, undecked, without iron nail or any fastening. Then, +according to the measure of its hull, they make another vessel that +fits into it. Within that they put a second and a third. Thus a large +biroco contains ten or twelve vessels, called biroco, virey, barangay, +and binitan." These natives were "tattooed, and were excellent rowers +and sailors; and although they are upset often, they never drown." The +women are very masculine. "They do not drink from the rivers, although +the water is very clear, because it gives them nausea.... The women's +costumes are chaste and pretty, for they wear petticoats in the +Bisayan manner, of fine medriñaque, and lamboncillos, which resemble +close-fitting sayuelos [i.e., woolen shifts worn by certain classes +of religious]. They wear long robes of the same fine medriñaque. They +gather the hair, which is neatly combed, into a knot, on top of the +head, and place a rose in it. On their forehead they wear a band of +very fine wrought gold, two fingers wide. It is very neatly worked and +on the side encircling the head it is covered with colored taffeta. In +each ear they wear three gold earrings, one in the place where Spanish +women wear them, and two higher up. On their feet they wear certain +coverings of thin brass, which sound when they walk." (The citations +herein are from Colin.) These islands have also retrograded.--Rizal. + +[293] Cavite derives its name from the Tagál word cavit, a creek, +or bend, or hook, for such is its form.--Stanley. + +[294] This province had decreased so greatly in population and +agriculture, a half century later, that Gaspar de San Agustin said: +"Now it no longer has the population of the past, because of the +insurrection of that province, when Don Sabiniano Manrique de Lara +was governor of these islands, and because of the incessant cutting +of the timber for the building of his Majesty's ships, which prevents +them from cultivating their extremely fertile plain." Later, when +speaking of Guagua or Wawà, he says: "This town was formerly very +wealthy because of its many chiefs, and because of the abundant +harvests gathered in its spacious plains, which are now submerged by +the water of the sea."--Rizal. + +[295] Now the port of Sorsogón.--Rizal. + +[296] Now the port of Mariveles (?).--Rizal. + +[297] Subik (?).--Rizal. + +[298] Mindoro is at present [1890] so depopulated that the minister of +the Colonies, in order to remedy this result of Spanish colonization, +wishes to send there the worst desperadoes of the peninsula, to see +if great criminals will make good colonists and farmers. All things +considered, given the condition of those who go, it is indubitable +that the race that succeeds must know how to defend itself and live, +so that the island may not be depopulated again.--Rizal. + +[299] Samar. This proves contrary to the opinion of Colin, who places +Tendaya in Leite.--Rizal. + +[300] Southeastern part of Samar.--Rizal. + +[301] Colin says, however, that they did tattoo the chins and +about the eyes [barbas y cejas]. The same author states also that +the tattooing was done little by little and not all at once. "The +children were not tattooed, but the women tattooed one hand and +part of the other. In this island of Manila the Ilocos also tattooed +themselves, although not so much as did the Visayans." The Negritos, +Igorrotes, and other independent tribes of the Filipinas still tattoo +themselves. The Christians have forgotten the practice. The Filipinas +used only the black color, thus differing from the Japanese, who +employ different colors, as red and blue, and carry the art to a +rare perfection. In other islands of the Pacific, the women tattoo +themselves almost as much as the men. Dr. Wilhelm Joest's Tätowiren +Narbenzeichnen und Körperbemahlen (Berlin, 1887) treats the matter +very succinctly.--Rizal. + +[302] This is a confused statement, after what just precedes it and +according to the evidence of Father Chirino (see VOL. XII, chapter +vii). Morga must mean that they wore no cloak or covering when they +went outside the house, as did the Tagáls (both men and women), +who used a kind of cape.--Rizal. [This is the sense in which Stanley +understood and translated this passage.] + +[303] Gûbat, grove, field, in Tagál. Mangubat [so printed in the text +of Rizal's edition] signifies in Tagál "to go hunting, or to the wood," +or even "to fight."--Rizal. + +[304] "At the arrival of the Spaniards at this island (Panay)" says +San Agustín, "it was said to have more than 50,000 families. But +they decreased greatly ... and at present it has about 14,000 +tributarios--6,000 apportioned to the crown, and 8,000 to individual +encomenderos." They had many gold-mines, and obtained gold by +washing the sand in the Panay River; "but instigated by the outrages +received from the alcaldes-mayor," says the same historian, "they +have ceased to dig it, preferring to live in poverty than to endure +such troubles."--Rizal. + +[305] This entire paragraph is omitted in the Rizal edition. In the +original it is as follows: + +La Lengua de todos, los Pintados y Bicayas, es vna mesma, por do se +entienden, hablando y escriuiendo, en letras y caratores que tienen +particulares, que semejan á los Arabigos, y su comun escribir entre +los naturales, es en hojas de arboles, y en cañas, sobre la corteza; +que en todas las islas ay muchas, de disforme grueso los cañutos, +y el pie es vn arbol muy grueso y maciço. + +[306] This difference is no greater than that between the Spanish, +Portuguese, and Italian.--Rizal. + +[307] See Chirino (Relacion de las islas Filipinas) VOL. XII, chapters +xv-xvii. His remarks, those of Morga, and those of other historians +argue a considerable amount of culture among the Filipino peoples prior +to the Spanish conquest. A variety of opinions have been expressed +as to the direction of the writing. Chirino, San Antonio, Zúñiga, +and Le Gentil, say that it was vertical, beginning at the top. Colin, +Ezguerra, and Marche assert that it was vertical but in the opposite +direction. Colin says that the horizontal form was adopted after +the arrival of the Spaniards. Mas declares that it was horizontal +and from left to right, basing his arguments upon certain documents +in the Augustinian archives in Manila. The eminent Filipino scholar, +Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera has treated the subject in a work entitled +"Contribucion para el estudio de los antiguos alfabetos filipinos" +(Losana, 1884). See Rizal's notes on p. 291 of his edition of Morga. + +[308] This portion of this sentence is omitted in Stanley. + +[309] Báhay is "house" in Tagál; pamamáhay is that which is in the +interior and the house. Bahandin may be a misprint for bahayín, +an obsolete derivative.--Rizal. + +[310] Cf. this and following sections with Loarca's relation, VOL. V, +of this series; and with Plasencia's account, VOL. VII, pp. 173-196. + +[311] Timawá.--Rizal. + +[312] The condition of these slaves was not always a melancholy +one. Argensola says that they ate at the same table with their masters, +and married into their families. The histories fail to record the +assassination for motives of vengeance of any master or chief by +the natives, as they do of encomenderos. After the conquest the evil +deepened. The Spaniards made slaves without these pretexts, and without +those enslaved being Indians of their jurisdiction--going moreover, +to take them away from their own villages and islands. Fernando de los +Rios Coronel, in his memorial to the king (Madrid, 1621) pp. 24-25, +speaks in scathing terms of the cruelties inflicted on the natives +in the construction of ships during the governorship of Juan de +Silva. A letter from Felipe II to Bishop Domingo de Salazar shows +the awful tyranny exercised by the encomenderos upon the natives, +whose condition was worse than that of slaves.--Rizal. + +[313] For remarks on the customs formerly observed by the natives of +Pampanga in their suits, see appendix to this volume. + +[314] This fundamental agreement of laws, and this general uniformity, +prove that the mutual relations of the islands were widespread, and the +bonds of friendship more frequent than were wars and quarrels. There +may have existed a confederation, since we know from the first +Spaniards that the chief of Manila was commander-in-chief of the +sultan of Borneo. In addition, documents of the twelfth century that +exist testify the same thing.--Rizal. + +[315] This word must be sagigilid in its Tagál form. The root gílid +signifies in Tagál, "margin," "strand," or "shore." The reduplication +of the first syllable, if tonic, signifies active future action. If +not tonic and the suffix an be added, it denotes the place where the +action of the verb is frequently executed. The preposition sa indicates +place, time, reference. The atonic reduplication may also signify +plurality, in which case the singular noun would be sagílid, i.e., +"at the margin," or "the last"--that is, the slave. Timawá signifies +now in Tagál, "in peace, in quietness, tranquil, free," etc. Maginoo, +from the root ginoo, "dignity," is now the title of the chiefs; and +the chief's reunion is styled kaginoóhan. Colin says, nevertheless, +that the Chiefs used the title gat or lakan, and the women dayang. The +title of mama applied now to men, corresponds to "uncle," "Señor," +"Monsieur," "Mr.," etc.; and the title al of women to the feminine +titles corresponding to these.--Rizal. + +[316] Namamahay (from bahay, "house"), "he who lives in his own +house." This class of slaves, if they may be so called, exists even +yet. They are called kasamá (because of being now the laborers of +a capitalist or farmer), bataan ("servant," or "domestic"), kampon, +tao, etc. + +[317] This class of slavery still exists [1890] in many districts, +especially in the province of Batangas; but it must be admitted that +their condition is quite different from that of the slave in Greece or +Rome, or that of the negro, and even of those made slaves formerly by +the Spaniards. Thanks to their social condition and to their number in +that time, the Spanish domination met very little resistance, while +the Filipino chiefs easily lost their independence and liberty. The +people, accustomed to the yoke, did not defend the chiefs from +the invader, nor attempt to struggle for liberties that they never +enjoyed. For the people, it was only a change of masters. The nobles, +accustomed to tyrannize by force, had to accept the foreign tyranny, +when it showed itself stronger than their own. Not encountering love +or elevated feelings in the enslaved mass, they found themselves +without force or power.--Rizal. + +[318] Inasawa, or more correctly asawa (consort).--Rizal. + +[319] This dowry, if one may call it so, represented to the parents +an indemnity for the care and vigilance that they had exercised in +their daughter's education. The Filipina woman, never being a burden +to any one (either to her parents or to her husband), but quite the +contrary, represents a value, whose loss to the possessor must be +substituted.... The Tagál wife is free, and treated with consideration; +she trades and contracts, almost always with the approbation of her +husband, who consults her in all his acts. She takes care of the money, +and educates the children, half of whom belong to her...--Rizal. + +[320] Bigay-káya, "to give what one can," "a voluntary offering, +a present of good will" ... This bigay-káya devolved entire to +the married couple, according to Colin, if the son-in-law was +obedient to his parents-in-law; if not, it was divided among all the +heirs. "Besides the dowry, the chiefs used to give certain gifts to +the parents and relatives, and even to the slaves, which were great +or less according to the rank of the one married." (Colin).--Rizal. + +[321] This good custom still exists, ... although it is gradually +passing away.--Rizal. + +[322] Such is the law throughout most parts of Asia; in Siam the +woman becomes free without having children. It is only in America that +fathers could and did sell their own children into slavery.--Stanley. + +[323] This condition of affairs and the collection of usury is true +still [1890]. Morga's words prove true not only of the Indian, but also +of the mestizos, the Spaniards, and even of various religious. So far +has it gone that the government itself not only permits it, but also +exacts the capital and even the person to pay the debts of others, +as happens with the cabeza de barangay [head of a barangay].--Rizal. + +[324] The tam-tam and the pum-piang are still used.--Rizal. + +[325] The early Filipinos had a great horror of theft, and even the +most anti-Filipino historian could not accuse them of being a thievish +race. Today, however, they have lost their horror of that crime. One +of the old Filipino methods of investigating theft was as follows: +"If the crime was proved, but not the criminal, if more than one was +suspected ... each suspect was first obliged to place a bundle of +cloth, leaves, or whatever he wished on a pile, in which the thing +stolen might be hidden. Upon the completion of this investigation +if the stolen property was found in the pile, the suit ceased." The +Filipinos also practiced customs very similar to the "judgments of +God" of the middle ages, such as putting suspected persons, by pairs, +under the water and adjudging guilty him who first emerged.--Rizal. + +[326] The Filipino today prefers a beating to scoldings or +insults.--Rizal. + +[327] From bago, new, and tao, man: he who has become a man.--Rizal. + +[328] In speaking of a similar custom in Australia, Eyre (Central +Australia, i, p. 213), says: "This extraordinary and inexplicable +custom must have a great tendency to prevent the rapid increase of +the population."--Stanley. [Stanley does not translate this paragraph +of the text.] + +[329] It appears that the natives called anito a tutelary genius, +either of the family, or extraneous to it. Now, with their new +religious ideas, the Tagáls apply the term anito to any superstition, +false worship, idol, etc.--Rizal. + +[330] Others besides Morga mention oratories in caves, where the idols +were kept, and where aromatics were burned in small brasiers. Chirino +found small temples in Taitay adjoining the principal houses. [See +VOL. XII. of this series, chapter xxi.] It appears that temples were +never dedicated to bathala maykapal, nor was sacrifice ever offered +him. The temples dedicated to the anito were called ulañgo.--Rizal. + +[331] San Agustín says that hell was called solad, and paradise, +kalualhatian (a name still in existence), and in poetical language, +ulugan. The blest abodes of the inhabitants of Panay were in the +mountain of Madias.--Rizal. + +[332] Cf. the "wake" of the Celtic and Gaelic peasants. Cf. also the +North-American Indian burial ceremonies, and reverence paid to the +dead, in Jesuit Relations, i, p. 215; ii, pp. 21, 149; viii, p. 21; +x, pp. 169, 247, 283-285, 293; xiii, 259; xxi, 199; xxiii, 31; lxv, +141; etc. + +In the Filipino burials, there were mourners who composed panegyrics +in honor of the dead, like those made today. "To the sound of this +sad music the corpse was washed, and perfumed with storax, gum-resin, +or other perfumes made from tree gums, which are found in all these +woods. Then the corpse was shrouded, being wrapped in more or less +cloth according to the rank of the deceased. The bodies of the more +wealthy were anointed and embalmed in the manner of the Hebrews, +with aromatic liquors, which preserved them from decay.... The +burial-place of the poor was in pits dug in the ground under their +own houses. After the bodies of the rich and powerful were kept and +bewailed for three days, they were placed in a chest or coffin of +incorruptible wood, adorned with rich jewels, and with small sheets +of gold in the mouth and over the eyes. The coffin was all in one +piece, and the lid was so adjusted that no air could enter. Because +of these precautions the bodies have been found after many years, +still uncorrupted. These coffins were deposited in one of three +places, according to the inclination and arrangement of the deceased, +either on top of the house among the treasures ... or underneath it, +but raised from the ground; or in the ground itself, in an open hole +surrounded with a small railing ... nearby they were wont to place +another box filled with the best clothes of the deceased; and at +meal-time they set various articles of food there in dishes. Beside +the men were laid their weapons, and beside the women their looms or +other implements of work" (Colin).--Rizal. + +[333] Kasis. This is another instance of the misapplication of this +Arabic term, which means exclusively a Christian priest.--Stanley. + +[334] This custom has not fallen into disuse among the Filipinos, +even among the Catholics.--Rizal. + +Lieutenant Charles Norton Barney, of the medical department of the +U. S. Army, has an article in Journal of the Association of Military +Surgeons for September, 1903, on "Circumcision and Flagellation +among the Filipinos." In regard to circumcision he states that +it "is a very ancient custom among the Philippine indios, and so +generalized that at least seventy or eighty per cent of males in the +Tagál country have undergone the operation." Those uncircumcised at +the age of puberty are taunted by their fellows, and such are called +"suput," a word formerly meaning "constricted" or "tight," but now +being extended to mean "one who cannot easily gain entrance in sexual +intercourse." The "operation has no religious significance," nor is +it done for cleanliness, "but from custom and disinclination to be +ridiculed," probably [as Morga proves] having been learned from the +Moros. The friars were unable to check the custom. Among the Tagáls +the operation is called "tuli," and the method of circumcising is +described at length. The author derives his information from a mestizo +and a full-blooded native. The custom is mentioned by Foreman. + +[335] Appellation given to their ecclesiastical sages by Mahometans. + +[336] See the king's decree granting this coat-of-arms, in VOL. IX, +pp. 211-215, with two representations of the coat-of-arms. + +[337] Convents occupy almost one-third part of the walled city.--Rizal. + +[338] The walls did not even have any moats then; these were dug after +the English invasion of 1762. The walls were also rearranged at that +time, and perfected with the lapse of time and the needs that arose +in the city.--Rizal. + +[339] Rizal misprints al cabo del lienço as al campo del lienzo. + +[340] Now [1890] the gates of the city are open all night, and in +certain periods, passage along the streets and through the walls is +allowed at all hours.--Rizal. + +[341] This powder-mill has several times changed its site. It was +afterward near Maalat on the seashore, and then was moved to Nagtahá, +on the bank of the Pasig.--Rizal. + +[342] Probably on the same site where the great Tagál cannon-foundry +had formerly stood, which was burned and destroyed by the Spaniards +at their first arrival in Manila. San Agustin declares the Tagál +foundry to have been as large as that at Málaga.--Rizal. + +[343] The Rizal edition omits the words, muy grande y autorizada, +capilla aparte, camara del sello real. + +[344] The treasury building. The governor's palace was destroyed +in 1863.--Rizal. + +[345] The Audiencia and cabildo buildings were also destroyed, but +the latter has been rebuilt.--Rizal. + +[346] The Rizal edition misprints sacristan as sacristías. + +[347] This is the largest convent in Manila.--Rizal. + +[348] Among the Jesuits, that part of a college where the pensioners +or boarders live and receive their instruction. + +[349] This college of San José was founded in 1601, although the royal +decree for it had been conceded in 1585. The number of collegiates to +enter was thirteen, among whom was a nephew of Francisco Tello and +a son of Dr. Morga. From its inception Latin was taught there. In +a suit with the College of Santo Tomás, the Jesuits obtained a +favorable decision; and it was recognized as the older institution, +and given the preference in public acts. The historians say that at +its inauguration the students wore bonnets covered with diamonds and +pearls. At present [1890] this college, after having moved from house +to house, has become a school of pharmacy attached to Santo Tomás, +and directed by the Dominican rector.--Rizal. + +[350] After many varying fortunes, this institution has wholly +disappeared.--Rizal. + +[351] The Confraternity of Mercy [Hermandad de la Misericordia] +was founded in 1594, by an ecclesiastic named Juan Fernández de +León.--Rizal. + +[352] San Juan de Dios [St. John of God].--Rizal. + +[353] Better, Maalat. The Spaniards pronounced this later +Malate. There lived the chief Tagáls after they were deprived of +their houses in Manila, among whom were the families of Raja Matanda +and Raja Soliman. San Augustín says that even in his day many of the +ancient nobility dwelt there, and that they where very urbane and +cultured. "The Men hold various positions in Manila, and certain +occupations in some of the local public functions. The women make +excellent lace, in which they are so skilfull that the Dutch women +cannot surpass them." This is still true of the women.--Rizal. + +[354] Now the town of Paco.--Rizal. + +[355] Recopilación de leyes, lib. ii, tit. xv, ley xi, defines the +district of the Audiencia and states certain perogatives of the +governor and auditors as follows: "In the city of Manila, in the +island of Luzon, capital of the Felipinas, shall reside our royal +Audiencia and Chancillería, with a president who shall be governor and +captain-general, four auditors, who shall also be alcaldes of criminal +cases, one fiscal, one alguacil-mayor, one lieutenant of the grand +chancillor, and the other ministers and officials necessary. It shall +have as its district the said island of Luzon, and all the rest of the +Filipinas, the archipelago of China and its mainland as yet discovered +and to be discovered. We order the governor and captain-general of +the said islands and provinces and president of the royal Audiencia +in them, to hold personal charge in peace and war of the superior +government of all the district of the said Audiencia, and to make +the provisions and concessions in our royal name, which in accordance +with the laws of this Recopilación and of these kingdoms of Castilla, +and with the instructions and powers that he shall get from us, he +should and can make. In things and matters of importance that arise in +the government, the said president governor shall discuss them with +the auditors of the said Audiencia, so that they, after consulting, +may give him their opinion. He, after hearing them, shall take what +course is most advisable to the service of God and to ours, and the +peace and quiet of that province and community." Felipe II, Aranjuez, +May 5, 1583; Toledo, May 25, 1596, in ordinance of the Audiencia; +Felipe IV in this Recopilación. + +[356] The original is canongias, raciones, y medias raciones, +which literally refers to the office or prebend instead of the +individual. We retain the above terms as expressing the persons who +held these prebends. + +[357] Literaly, the original translates "in the islands of Sebu, +Cagayan, and Camerines." + +[358] This is so changed now [1890] and the employees so increased in +number, that the annual expenses amount to more than 2,000,000 pesos, +while the intendant's salary is 12,000 pesos.--Rizal. + +[359] This city has disapeared from the map and from the earth. An +inconsiderable town named Lal-ló occupies its site. It is still +[1890], however, named as the appointment of the bishopric of Bigan, +the actual residence of the bishop.--Rizal. + +[360] An attempt was made to supply the lack of prebends in the +cathedral cities of the Philippines by the following law: "Inasmuch +as the bishops of the churches of Nueva Cáceres, Nueva Segovia, +and of the Name of Jesus of the Filipinas Islands should have men +to assist them in the pontifical acts, and the bishops should have +all the propriety possible in their churches, and divine worship +more reverence; and inasmuch as there are no tithes with which a +few prebendaries can be sustained in the churches: therefore our +governor of those islands shall appoint to each of the said churches +two ecclesiastics of good life and example, who shall aid and assist +the bishop in the pontifical acts, and in all else relating to divine +worship. He shall assign them a certain modest sum for their support +from our royal treasury, so that with that they may for the present +serve the churches, until there be more opportunity for endowing them +with prebendaries and providing other necessary things." Felipe III, +San Lorenzo, October 5, 1606. Recopilación de leyes, lib. i, tit. vi, +ley xviii. + +[361] The Rizal edition omits a considerable portion of this +paragraph. The omission is as follows: para guarda del puerto, y +defensa de la ciudad, con bastante guarnicion de soldados de paga, a +orden del alcalde mayor, capitan a guerra de la prouincia que reside +en la ciudad. Sera la poblazon, de dozientos vezinos Españoles, +con casas de madera, tiene Cabildo, de dos alcaldes ordinarios, +ocho rejidores, alguazil mayor y sus oficiales. + +[362] Now [1890] of slight importance. Of its former grandeur there +remain only 1,000 inhabitants, with a parochial house, a justice's +house, a prison, and a primary school.--Rizal. + +[363] Vigan or Bigan.--Rizal. + +[364] Legazpi also had two secular priests, Juan de Vivero and Juan +de Villanueva, who had part in the first conversions.--Rizal. + +[365] The Jesuits preceded the Dominicans seven years as missionaries +to the Filipinas. The first Jesuits came over with Domingo de Salazar, +the first bishop, and his Dominican associate.--Rizal. + +[366] Visita: here meaning a district which has no resident missionary, +but is visited by religious from some mission station, on which the +visita is therefore dependent. + +[367] Cf. with the musical ability of the Filipinos that displayed +by the North American Indians, as described in The Jesuit Relations, +vols. vi, p. 183; xviii, p. 161; xxiii, p. 213; xxvii, p. 117; xxxi, +p. 219; xxxviii, pp. 259, 263; etc. + +[368] Chirino (chapter vii) mentions the apportionment, by the +king, of distinct districts to the different orders. The Augustinian +authorities in Mexico granted permission to those of their order going +to the Philippines to establish themselves wherever they wished in +the islands (see VOL. II, pp. 161-168), and the latter exercised the +omnimodo [i.e., entire] ecclesiastical authority, as conceded by the +popes, until the arrival of the Franciscans in 1577. Papal concessions +probably marked out the districts as apportioned by the king. + +[369] Morga refers, with his characteristic prudence, to the great +question of diocesan visits, which commenced with Fray Domingo +de Salazar, and which could not be ended until 1775, in the time +of Anda--thanks to the energy of the latter and the courage of +Archbishop Don Basilio Sancho de Santa Justa y Rufina, when after +great disturbances they succeeded in subjecting the regular curas to +the inspection of the bishops. Morga, however, shows that he did not +approve the claims of the religious to independence, but does not +dare to state so distinctly.--Rizal. + +[370] The Augustinians received also one-fourth part of the tribute +from the villages while they were building churches; and 200 pesos +fuertes [i.e., ten-real pieces] and 200 cavans [the cavan equals 25 +gantas, or 137 Spanish libras] of cleaned rice for four religious +who heard confessions during Lent. Fifty cavans of cleaned rice per +person seems to us too much. It results that each friar consumes 12 +1/2 libras of rice or 27 chupas [the chupa is 1/8 ganta or 3 litros] +daily, thirteen times as much as any Indian.--Rizal. + +[371] Recopilación de leyes, lib. vi, tit. vii, ley xvi, contains the +following in regard to the native chiefs: "It is not right that the +Indian chiefs of Filipinas be in a worse condition after conversion; +rather should they have such treatment that would gain their affection +and keep them loyal, so that with the spiritual blessings that God +has communicated to them by calling them to His true knowledge, +the temporal blessings may be joined, and they may live contentedly +and comfortably. Therefore, we order the governors of those islands +to show them good treatment and entrust them, in our name, with the +government of the Indians, of whom they were formerly the lords. In +all else the governors shall see that the chiefs are benefited justly, +and the Indians shall pay them something as a recognition, as they did +during the period of their paganism, provided it be without prejudice +to the tributes that are to be paid us, or prejudicial to that which +pertains to their encomenderos." Felipe II, Madrid, June 11, 1594. + +[372] The gobernadorcillo ["little or petty governor"]. + +[373] Bilangõ signifies today in Tagál "the act of imprisoning," +and bilanguan "the prison."--Rizal. + +[374] For good expositions of local government in modern times, see +Bowring, Visit to the Philippine Isles (London, 1859), pp. 87-93; +and Montero y Vidal, Archipiélago Filipino (Madrid, 1886), pp. 162-168. + +[375] These are now [1890] made in Spanish.--Rizal. + +[376] Names of petty officers: the former the name of an +officer in oriental countries; the second signifying one who +commands. Dr. T. H. Pardo de Tavera (Costumbres de los Tagalos, +Madrid, 1892, p. 10, note 1) says the word dato is now unused by the +Tagáls. Datu or datuls primitively signified "grandfather," or "head +of the family," which was equivalent to the head of the barangay. This +name is used in Mindanao and Joló to designate certain chiefs. + +[377] A later law in Recopilación de leyes (lib. vi, tit. viii, ley +xi) regulates the encomienda--giving power as follows: "The governor +and captain-general of Filipinas shall apportion the encomiendas, +in accordance with the regulations to worthy persons, without having +other respect than to the service of God our Lord, and our service, +the welfare of the public cause, and the remuneration of the most +deserving. Within sixty days, reckoned from the time that he shall +have heard of the vacancy, he shall be obliged to apportion them. If +he does not do so, the right to apportion them shall devolve upon +and pertain to our royal Audiencia of those islands, and we order +the Audiencia to apportion them, paying heed to the laws, within six +days, and to avail itself of the edicts and diligences issued by the +governor without other new ones. In case the governor shall not have +issued edicts and diligences, the Audiencia shall issue them and make +the provision within twenty days." Felipe III, Madrid, June 4, 1620. + +[378] The rapidity with which many of these encomenderos amassed +great wealth in a few years is known, and that they left colossal +fortunes at their death. Some were not satisfied with the tributes +and with what they demanded, but made false measures, and balances +that weighed twice as much as was indicated. They often exacted the +tributes in certain products only, and appraised the same at what +value they wished.--Rizal. + +[379] A law in Recopilación de leyes (lib. vi, tit. v, ley lxv) +cites the above provision and confirms it anew: "In order to provide +instruction for certain villages of the Filipinas Islands, which did +not enjoy it, or if they had it, it was not sufficient, it was resolved +to increase the tribute, which was formerly eight reals, or its value, +per peso, to the proportion of ten Castilian reals apiece. It was +ordered that the increased amount be placed in our royal treasury, +and one-half real of it be applied to paying the obligations which had +to be met in regard to the tithes, while the one and one-half reals +would remain to pay those soldiers there and for other purposes; +in consideration of the fact that the funds necessary to send out +religious, who are employed in the preaching of the holy gospel, +are supplied from our royal treasury, and that the encomenderos were +obliged to pay for the ordinary instruction from the eight reals, +and the part of the building of churches that fell to their share, +while the Indians had the choice of paying all the tribute in money +or in products, or in both. Thus was it enacted and voted. We order +no innovation to be made in this regard, in consideration of the +welfare and conservation of those provinces and their natives, and +so that the choice of paying in money shall not occasion any lack of +products and cause sterility." Felipe II, San Lorenzo, August 1589; +Felipe III, Zamora, February 16, 1602. + +[380] The following law regulates supervision of the accounts of this +fund: "Inasmuch as, when any encomienda of the Filipinas Islands +happens to be without instruction, the fourth part of the tribute +collected by the encomendero is deposited in a box with three keys, in +order that it may be converted into benefices for the Indians; and as +it is advisable that that ordinance be executed sensibly and properly, +and that we should know the amount of it and how it is apportioned: +therefore, we order our presidents, the governors of the Filipinas +Islands, that whenever they deem it advisable to examine the account, +they shall appoint for that purpose one of the officials of our royal +treasury of those islands--the one most suitable for it--who shall +examine them. The fiscal of our royal Audiencia shall investigate +them before they are finished; and shall ask and see that they +are executed with the care that the matter requires in regard to +their items, charges, articles, and balances, and whatever else is +advisable. He shall advise our president and governor of it all, so +that he may assist him in what may be necessary, and advise us of the +result." Felipe III, Madrid, June 4, 1620, in Recopilación de leyes, +lib. i, tit. xiii, ley xiv. + +[381] The bull here referred to was issued by Gregory XIV, and dated +April 18, 1591. The seventh section reads as follows: "Finally, +since, as we have learned, our very dear son in Christ, Philip, +Catholic King of the Spains, on account of the many deceits wont to +be practised therein, has forbidden any Spaniard in the aforesaid +Philippine Islands to dare to take, or have, or hold any slaves, +or servants, even by right of just and unjust war, or of purchase, +or by whatsoever other title, or pretext; although some, despite the +edict, or mandate, of King Philip himself, still keep the same slaves +in their power: therefore in order that, as is befitting to reason +and equity, the Indians themselves may freely and safely without +any fear of bondage come and go to their Christian doctrinas, and to +their own homes and possessions, we order and command all and singular +the persons living in the same islands, of whatsoever state, degree, +condition, order, and rank they may be, in virtue of holy obedience and +under pain of excommunication, on the publication of these presents, +in accordance with the edict, or mandate of the said King Philip, +to release wholly free, without deceit and guile, whatsoever Indian +slaves and servants they may have, or hold; nor ever for the future +in any manner to take or keep captives, or servants."--[Translated +from the original by REV. T. C. MIDDLETON, O.S.A.] + +[382] This [1890] has disappeared from legislation, although the +personal services for España are still continued, and are fifteen +days.--Rizal. + +[383] Recopilación de leyes, lib. vi, tit. xii, ley xii, treating of +personal services, reads as follows: "The religious and the ministers +of the instruction, and the alcaldes-mayor of the Filipinas Islands +have a weekly repartimiento of Indians which they call tanores, so +that the Indians may serve them without pay; and besides the villages +contribute to them the fish necessary to them on Fridays, which is +against reason and justice. We order the governor and captain-general, +the Audiencia, and any other of our justices, to stop and not allow +this personal service and contribution, so that the villages shall +in no manner perform it, and we declare the villages free from any +obligation that they have or may have." This law is dated Madrid, +March 17, 1608. + +[384] Taal was one of the villages where the most rigging was made +for the royal ships.--Rizal. + +[385] This word reales is omitted in the Rizal edition. + +[386] A comparatively early law (Recopilación de leyes, lib. vi, +tit. i, ley xv), prohibits the forcible removal of the natives for +expeditions of conquest from one island to another. It is as follows: +"We order that the Indians in the Filipinas Islands be not taken +from one island to another forcibly in order to make incursions, and +against their will, unless it be under very necessary circumstances, +and paying them for their work and trouble. They shall be well treated +and receive no injury." Felipe II, Madrid, November 7, 1574. + +[387] In Java also the Dutch restrict Europeans from roaming about +the country; this is a good regulation for the protection of the +inhabitants.--Stanley. + +[388] Stanley praises these regulations; Rizal deplores them, as +keeping the men in authority out of touch with the people. + +[389] Recopilación de leyes, lib. iv, tit. x, ley vii, has the +following law, dated Madrid, March 17, 1608: "The governor and +captain-general of Filipinas shall for the present appoint the +magistracy [regimiento] of the city of Manila, choosing persons who +shall prove to be suitable for the office and zealous for the service +of God our Lord, and for ours; and he shall not remove them without +our special order." + +[390] Many royal decrees related to playing cards. The monopoly +ceased to exist perhaps before the government monopoly on betel was +initiated.--Rizal (in part). + +[391] In 1890 he received 12,000 pesos.--Rizal. + +[392] The prebend, in Spanish cathedrals, superior to a canonry. + +The following laws (xvi and xvii, respectively) as to the appointments +of vacant prebends, are found in Recopilación de leyes, lib. i, +tit. vi. + +"Because of the great distance from these kingdoms to the Filipinas +Islands and the inconvenience that might result from the prebends +falling vacant without any provision being made until we present those +who shall take them, we order the governor and captain-general of the +said islands that, when dignidades, canonries, and other prebends in +the metropolitan church become vacant, he shall present other persons +of the sufficiency and characteristics required, so that they may +serve in place of their predecessors, until we provide persons for +them. They shall receive the stipend that their predecessors shall have +received. The governor shall observe the rules made by the laws of this +titulo in his presentations." Felipe II, Guadalupe, March 26, 1580. + +"We order our governors of the Filipinas Islands, and charge the +archbishops of Manila, that when any prebends of that church become +vacant, they send us three nominations for each one, instead of one +only, with very minute advice of their sufficiency, learning, degrees, +and all other qualities that are found in those proposed, so that +after examination, we may appoint the one most suitable." Felipe III, +Lerma, June 28, 1608. + +[393] In 1890 the Filipinas were paying 36,670 pesos annually for +one dean, four dignitarios, five canons, four racioneros, four +medio-racioneros, and other inferior helpers, including the choir, +a total of twenty-six individuals; 3,330 pesos annually is to be +added for sacristans, singers, and orchestra.--Rizal. + +[394] Their salary amounted to from 750 to 1,000 pesos. Now [1890] +the salary of each bishop is 6,000 pesos, with two father assistants +at 100 to 150 pesos per month.--Rizal. + +[395] Thus in original, but it is carelessly worded; for the Society +of Jesus is not one of the mendicant orders. + +[396] All of the orders held property and had regular means of revenue, +later; while the Dominicans held enormous property in both the islands +and at Hong Kong.--Rizal. + +[397] The following law is from Recopilación de leyes (lib. iii, +tit. x, ley xiv): "The governor and captain-general of the Filipinas +Islands shall be careful to reward the soldiers who shall have +served us there, and their sons, with the posts and emoluments at +his disposal, in accordance with the ordinances, and [he shall do it] +with all fairness, so that they may have some remuneration. He shall +keep in toto the laws relating to this." Felipe III, Lerma, July 23, +1605; Madrid, December 19, 1618. + +[398] Consejeles: men sent to service by order of a municipal council. + +[399] The pay of various of the above officers and men in 1890 was as +follows: Filipino infantrymen, 4 pesos per month; Spanish artillerymen, +13-15 pesos, plus some céntimos, per month; Filipino artillerymen, +4 pesos, plus some céntimos, per month; captains, 1,500-1,800 pesos +per year; alféreces, 975-1,050 pesos per year; first sergeants, +European, 318-360 pesos per year--native, 180 pesos per year; +second sergeants, European, 248.06-307.50 pesos per year--native, +156 pesos per year; first corporals, European, 189.56-202 pesos per +year--native, 84 pesos per year; second corporals, European, 174-192 +pesos per year--native corporals, 72 pesos per year; the segundo cabo +[lieutenant-commander], 12,000 pesos per year; sargento-mayor de +plaza (now lieutenant-colonel), 225 pesos per month; vice-admiral +[contra-almirante, general de galeras], 16,392 pesos per year; +frigate and ship captains, 2,700-5,760 pesos per year, according to +their duties and grades.--Rizal. + +The following laws from Recopilación de leyes regulate the pay of the +soldiers and some of the officers, and impose certain restrictions +on the soldiers, and provide for certain appointments: "Each soldier +established in the Filipinas Islands shall be paid eight pesos per +month, each captain, fifty, each alférez, twenty, and each sergeant, +ten. The governor and captain-general of the said islands shall +give all the men of the companies thirty ducados to each company of +additional pay, as is done in other districts, providing the additional +pay of each one does not exceed ten pesos per year. We order that all +be well paid. When the governor shall provide any of the captains, +officers, or soldiers with an encomienda, or other post, he shall +not allow him to draw pay. While they draw pay they shall not be +allowed to trade or traffic, so that that occupation may not divert +or distract them from their proper exercise and employment of war. For +the same reason, no pay shall be granted to any soldier who serves any +other person, whomsoever he be." Felipe II, Añover, August 9, 1589, +clause 34 of his instructions; Felipe III, Ventosilla, November 4, +1606; lib. iii, tit. x, ley xiii. + +"We order that when the post of general of artillery of the Filipinas +Islands becomes vacant, either by the death or promotion of its +occupant, or for any other cause, the governor and captain-general +shall not fill it without first notifying us and without our special +order for it. We permit him to appoint a captain of artillery and a +sargento-mayor, and he may assign each of them thirty pesos' pay. We +approve the increase of two pesos in the pay of the musketeers. It +is our will that the pay of the governor's captain of the guard be +increased five pesos, in addition to his fifteen pesos, and that +a like sum be granted to the commandants of forts when they have a +captain of infantry." Felipe II, clause of letter, Madrid, June 11, +1594; Felipe IV, Madrid, January 30, 1631; lib. iii, tit. v, ley iii. + +[400] A definite law, as is shown in Recopilación de leyes, +lib. iii. tit. iv, ley xiii, charged the viceroys of Nueva España +to send help to the Philippines. The law is as follows: "We charge +and order the viceroys of Nueva España to aid the governor and +captain-general of Filipinas on all occasions that arise, with very +special care, promptness, and diligence, with whatever the latter +shall request; and with the men, arms, ammunition, and money, that +he deems necessary for the conservation of those islands, salaries +[the original is sueldos, perhaps a misprint for suelos, signifying +'provinces' or 'districts'], presidios, and whatever else is under +his charge." Felipe III, Aranjuez, May 25, 1607. + +The two following laws impose certain restrictions on the +reënforcements sent to the Philippines from Nueva España: + +"One of the captains who shall raise men in Nueva España as +reënforcements for the Filipinas Islands, shall act as their agent +to the port of Acapulco. There he shall deliver them to the general, +or commander of the ships about to sail; but no captain shall take +passage or go to the islands with the men of his company." Felipe III, +Zamora, February 16, 1602; lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xvi. + +"Among the men sent by the viceroy, who shall go as a reënforcement +from Nueva España to Filipinas, he shall not allow, under any +circumstances, or admit, any mestizos or mulattoes, because of +the annoyances that have been experienced from them." Felipe III, +Valladolid, August 30, 1608; lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xv. + +[401] See ante, note 227, the citation of the law from Recopilación +de leyes, lib. iii, tit. x, ley xiii. + +[402] See VOL. XII ("Various documents relating to commerce"), +pp. 57-75. + +Bañuelos y Carrillo, in his relation to the king, says: "That the +inhabitants of the Manilas should be allowed to export as many +boat-loads as possible of the country's produce--such as wax, gold, +perfumes, ivory, and cotton cloth [lampotes]--which they must buy +from the natives of the country, who would thus be hindered from +selling them to the Dutch. In this way we would make those peoples +friendly, and supply Nueva España with their merchandise; and the +money taken to Manila would not leave that city. ... Your Majesty +should consider that one and one-half millions in gold go to China +annually." This commerce was advantageous to the Celestial empire +alone and to certain individuals of Manila. It was fatal to España, +and harmful to the islands, whose industry was gradually perishing +like that of the metropolis.--Rizal. + +[403] See in VOL. VIII, pp. 316-318, a royal decree enforcing these +prohibitions under severe penalties. + +[404] Coarse stuff made of goat's hair, or a glossy silk stuff; +probably the latter is intended in the text. Gorvoran or gorgoran is +a sort of silk grogram. + +[405] This fabric is now called Piña. It is made from threads +stripped from fibers of the leaf of that plant or fruit, and which +are never longer than half a yard. It cannot be woven at all times, +as extreme heat or humidity affects the fiber. The machinery employed +is of wood, unmixed with any metal, and of rude construction. This +fabric is stronger than any other of equal fineness, and its color is +unaffected by time or washing. The pieces are generally only 1 1/2 feet +wide: the price varies from 1.s. 4d. to 2s. 6d. per yard. Piña of a +yard wide is from six reals to a dollar (of eight reals) a yard. All +the joinings of the threads are of knots made by the fingers. It is +fabricated solely by native Indians in many parts of the Philippines, +but especially in Ilo-Ilo. The use of this stuff is extensive, and +the value is estimated at 500,000 dollars or £120,000; the value of +the annual export of it to Europe for dresses, handkerchiefs, collars, +scarfs, and wristbands, which are beautifully embroidered at Manila, +is estimated at 20,000 dollars annually. (Mr. Consul Farren, January +21, 1851).--Stanley. + +In order to obtain the fiber of this plant, the fruit is first cut, +so that the leaf may become as long and broad as possible. When +the leaves are well developed they are torn off, and scraped with a +sharp instrument to separate the fleshy part and leave the fiber; +this is washed, dried in the sun, combed out, and classed in four +grades according to its fineness. The cloth has a peculiar softness +and delicacy; and it is said that that made formerly (one or two +centuries ago) was much finer than that made now. + +[406] Scorzonera is a genus of composite plants, of numerous +species; the leaves or roots of many are used as vegetables or +salads. S. tuberosa and other Eastern species have edible roots. + +[407] Delgado (ut supra) says that this fruit (Diospyros kaki, +Linn.) was brought by the Chinese traders, and called Xi-cu in their +language, whence is derived the word chiquey. It is a beautiful scarlet +fruit, although there is another species of a yellow color. Both are +sweet and pleasant to the taste. Some of the yellow variety were +grown in the Visayas, but Delgado says the tree is not indigenous +to the islands. The fruit is shaped like an acorn but is about as +large as a lemon. The peel is soft and the interior like honey, and +it contains several seeds. The tree is wide-spreading but not very +tall. The leaves are small and almost round. D. kaki is the Chinese +or Japanese persimmon; D. virginiana is the American persimmon. From +other species is obtained the valuable wood called ebony. + +[408] This must be the cloth and not the porcelain of Kaga, which +even today is so highly esteemed.--Rizal. + +[409] With very slight differences, this custom and ceremony is +continued to the present [1890].--Rizal. + +[410] "A three per cent duty was imposed in the Filipinas on +merchandise, for the payment of the troops. We order that part of the +law to be observed, but that pertaining to the other things paid from +those duties to be repealed." Añover, August 9, 1589. (Ley xxii.) + +"We ordain that the Chinese, Japanese, Siamese, Borneans, and all other +foreigners, who go to the ports of the Filipinas Islands, pay no duty +on food, supplies, and materials that they take to those islands, +and that this law be kept in the form in w, hich it may have been +introduced, and not otherwise." Añover, August 9, 1589. (Ley xxiv.) + +"On the Chinese merchandise and that from other countries, shipped to +Nueva España by way of Filipinas, an impost ad valorem tax of ten per +cent shall be collected, based on their value in the ports and regions +where the goods shall be discharged. This tax shall be imposed mildly +according to the rule, and shall be a tax additional to that usually +paid on departure both from the said Filipinas Islands and from the +provinces of Nueva España, to any other places where they may and +shall be taken." El Pardo, November 1, 1591. (Ley xxi.) + +"We order that the duty of three per cent collected in the Filipinas +Islands on the merchandise taken thither by the Chinese be increased by +another three per cent." El Pardo, November 20, 1606. (Ley xxiii.) The +above laws are from Recopilación de leyes, lib. viii, tit. xv. + +[411] The agave (Agave americana; the maguey of Mexico) is found in +the Philippines, and is called pita, but Delgado and Blanco think +that it was not indigenous there. Its fibers were used in former +times for making the native textile called nipis, manufactured in the +Visayas. As used in the text, pita means, apparently, some braid or +other ornament of agave fibers. + +[412] The ducado of Castilla was worth slightly more than two +pesos.--Rizal. + +[413] These imposts and fetters, which the products of the country +did not escape, are still [1890] in force, so that foreign markets +must be sought, since the markets of the mother-country offer no +greater advantages. According to a document of 1640, this commerce +netted the government 350,000 pesos annually.--Rizal. + +[414] The salary is now [1890] 40,000 pesos.--Rizal. + +[415] Recopilación de leyes (lib. iv, tit. i, ley v) outlines the +governor's and Audiencia's power in regard to conquests by private +individuals, as follows: "We grant permission to the governor and +president of the Filipinas Islands and its Audiencia to make contracts +for new explorations and conquests [pacificaciones] with persons, +who are willing to covenant to do it at their own expense and not at +that of our royal treasury; and to give them the titles of captains +and masters-of-camp, but not those of adelantados [i.e., governors] +and marshals. Those contracts and agreements such men may execute, with +the concurrence of the Audiencia, until we approve them, provided that +they observe the laws enacted for war, conquest, and exploration, so +straitly, that for any negligence, the terms of their contract will be +observed, and those who exceed the contract shall incur the penalties +imposed; also provided the parties shall receive our confirmation +within a brief period assigned by the governor." Felipe II, Guadalupe, +April 1, 1580; Toledo, May 25, 1596, a clause of instructions. + +[416] There are eight auditors now [1890], and their salary +has increased to 4,700 pesos, while that of the fiscal is 5,500 +pesos.--Rizal. + +[417] Recopilación de leyes, lib. v, tit. xv, ley xxviii, contains +the following on suits arising from residencias, dated Lerma, June +23, 1608: "Suits brought during the residencia against governors, +captains-general, presidents, auditors, and fiscals of our Audiencia +of Manila, and against any other officials, both civil and criminal, +shall pass in appeal and be concluded in that Audiencia, if they do +not exceed one thousand pesos of the current money." + +[418] The tributes of the Indians in the Filipinas amount to more +than 4,000,000 pesos now [1890]; and from the Chinese are derived +225,000 pesos.--Rizal. + +[419] Now since there is no exploitation of gold mines, and since +the Indians have no jewels that would justify this tenth or fifth, +the Spaniards substitute for this the imposts upon property, which +amount to 105,400 pesos, and that upon industry, which amounts to +1,433,200 pesos. In 1640, the revenue from the above source [fifths or +tenths] had decreased so greatly, that only 750 pesos were collected +annually.--Rizal. + +[420] Import duties now [1890] amount to 1,700,000 pesos.--Rizal. + +[421] Export duties now [1890] amount to 285,000 pesos.--Rizal. + +[422] According to Hernando de los Rios, the Filipinas Islands could +have been self-sustaining from the beginning from their own products, +had it not been for the expeditions and adventurous conquests in the +Moluccas, Camboja, etc. ... In the governorship of Don Juan de Silva, +the treasury owed, for the war in the Moluccas, more than 2,000,000 +pesos to the Indians, besides what it must have owed to the inhabitants +of Manila.--Rizal. + +[423] This excellent custom has entirely perished.--Rizal. + +"The president of our royal Audiencia of Filipinas and one auditor +of that body, shall, at the beginning of each year, examine the +accounts of our royal officials, and shall finish their examination +within the two months of January and February. On finishing their +examination they shall send a copy of them to our council for the +reason contained in the following law. Should the examination not be +finished in the said time, our officials shall receive no salary. The +auditor who shall assist in examining the accounts shall receive as +a compensation the twenty-five thousand maravedis that are ordained; +but he shall receive that amount only in that year that he shall send +the said accounts concluded to our council." Ordinance 97, Toledo, +May 15, 1596. (Ley ix.) + +"For the accounts of our royal treasury, which must be furnished in +the usual form by our officials of the Filipinas Islands annually, +during the administration of their duties, the officials shall +deliver for inventory all the books and orders pertaining to those +accounts, and all that shall be requested from them and that shall +be necessary. They shall continue the course of their administration +[of their duties] with new and similar books. These accounts shall be +concluded before the governor of those islands, and the auditor whom +the Audiencia and the fiscal of that body may appoint. In case of the +finding of any doubts and remarks it is our will that the auditor and +governor resolve and determine them, so that they may be concluded and +finished. And inasmuch as the factor and overseer must give account of +certain things in kind and products of great weight and tediousness, +we order that that account be examined every three years, and that +the concluding and settling of the doubts and remarks shall be made +in the form declared. And we order that when the said accounts of +the said islands are completed and the net balances struck, they +shall be sent to our Council of the Indias, so that the accountants +of its accounts may revise and make additions to them according to +the manner of the accountancy." Valladolid, January 25, 1605. (Ley x.) + +The above two laws are taken from Recopilación de leyes, lib. viii, +tit. xxix. + +[424] The Chinese engaged in agriculture and fishing now [1890] +are very few.--Rizal. + +[425] The Rizal edition misprints fuerça è premio as fuerza á premio. + +[426] The custom of shaving the head, now prevalent among the Chinese, +was imposed upon them by their Tartar conquerors. + +[427] A kind of stocking called tabi.--Rizal. + +[428] The following law was issued at Segovia July 4, 1609, and +appears in Recopilación de leyes, lib. iii, tit. iv, ley xviii: +"The governor and captain-general of the Filipinas Islands shall +ever strive to maintain friendly relations, peace, and quiet, with +the emperor of Japon. He shall avail himself, for that purpose, of +the most prudent and advisable means, as long as conditions permit; +and he shall not risk the reputation of our arms and state in those +seas and among oriental nations." + +[429] This port (established before 1540) was in Colima, Mexico, +near the present Manzanillo. It was plundered and burned by the +English adventurer Thomas Candish, on August 24-25, 1587. + +[430] Thus named because seamen and voyagers noticed especially +the lateen sails of the light vessels used by the natives of the +Marianas.--Rizal. + +[431] A marine fish (Sparus auratus), thus named because it has spots +of golden-yellow color. + +[432] A chart of the Indian Ocean, by L. S. de la Rochette +(pub. London, 1803, by W. Faden, geographer to the king) shows three +volcanoes in about 25º north latitude, and but a few degrees north +of the Ladrones. One of them is called "La Desconocida, or Third +Volcano," and the following is added: "The Manilla ships always try +to make this Volcano." + +[433] A group of islands called Shidsi To, lying in 34º 20'.--Rizal. + +[434] "Thirty-eight degrees" is probably an error for "twenty-eight +degrees," and these islands [the first ones mentioned in the above +sentence] would be the Mounin-Sima Islands, lying between 26º 35' +and 27º 45'; and Lot's Wife in 29º 51', and Crespo, in 32º 46', which +[latter] are supposed by the Univers Pittoresque to be the Roca de Oro +[rock of gold] and the Roca de Plata of the ancient maps.--Stanley. + +For these latter islands, see VOL. XIV, p. 272, note 45. + +[435] A fungous substance that grows in the sea, and contains signs +of life. + +[436] Probably the dogfish, a species of shark. + +[437] Most of these places can be identified on the old maps of +the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries, and most of the names +are retained today. The island of Cedros is shown on a map of 1556 +(Ramusio: Vniversale della parte del mondo nvovamente ritrovata). The +island of Cenizas is shown, on the old maps, in about 32º, and Cedros +in about 29º. The Marias or Tres Marias Islands are Maria Madre, +Maria Magdalena, and Maria Cleofas. Cape Corrientes is south of +La Valle de Banderas and Chametla. Socatul is called Socatula and +Zocatula. An English map of 1626, engraved by Abraham Goos, shows +the town of Ciguatlan, north of Aquapulco, which may be the same as +Morga's Ciguatanejo. Los Motines cannot be identified. + +[438] Acosta in his History of the Indies (Hakluyt Soc. edition, +London, 1880) says of the courses between the Philippines and New +Spain: "The like discourse is of the Navigation made into the South +sea, going from New Spaine or Peru to the Philippines or China, and +returning from the Philippines or China to New Spaine, the which is +easie, for that they saile alwaies from East to West neere the line, +where they finde the Easterly windes to blow in their poope. In the +yeere 1584, there went a shippe from Callao in Lima to the Philippines, +which sailed 2000 and 700 leagues without sight of land, and the +first it discovered was the Iland of Lusson, where they tooke port, +having performed their voiage in two moneths, without want of winde or +any torment, and their course was almost continually vnder the line; +. . . The returne is like vnto the voiage from the Indies vnto Spaine, +for those which returne from the Philippines or China to Mexico, +to the end they may recover the Westerne windes, they mount a great +height, vntill they come right against the Ilands of Iappon, and, +discovering the Caliphornes, they returne by the coast of New Spaine +to the port of Acapulco." + + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of History of the Philippine Islands Vols +1 and 2, by Antonio de Morga + +*** END OF THE PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK HISTORY OF THE PHILIPPINE *** + +This file should be named 7001-8.txt or 7001-8.zip + +This eBook was produced by Jeroen Hellingman + +Project Gutenberg eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the US +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we usually do not +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +We are now trying to release all our eBooks one year in advance +of the official release dates, leaving time for better editing. +Please be encouraged to tell us about any error or corrections, +even years after the official publication date. + +Please note neither this listing nor its contents are final til +midnight of the last day of the month of any such announcement. +The official release date of all Project Gutenberg eBooks is at +Midnight, Central Time, of the last day of the stated month. A +preliminary version may often be posted for suggestion, comment +and editing by those who wish to do so. + +Most people start at our Web sites at: +https://gutenberg.org or +http://promo.net/pg + +These Web sites include award-winning information about Project +Gutenberg, including how to donate, how to help produce our new +eBooks, and how to subscribe to our email newsletter (free!). + + +Those of you who want to download any eBook before announcement +can get to them as follows, and just download by date. This is +also a good way to get them instantly upon announcement, as the +indexes our cataloguers produce obviously take a while after an +announcement goes out in the Project Gutenberg Newsletter. + +http://www.ibiblio.org/gutenberg/etext03 or +ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/docs/books/gutenberg/etext03 + +Or /etext02, 01, 00, 99, 98, 97, 96, 95, 94, 93, 92, 92, 91 or 90 + +Just search by the first five letters of the filename you want, +as it appears in our Newsletters. + + +Information about Project Gutenberg (one page) + +We produce about two million dollars for each hour we work. The +time it takes us, a rather conservative estimate, is fifty hours +to get any eBook selected, entered, proofread, edited, copyright +searched and analyzed, the copyright letters written, etc. Our +projected audience is one hundred million readers. If the value +per text is nominally estimated at one dollar then we produce $2 +million dollars per hour in 2002 as we release over 100 new text +files per month: 1240 more eBooks in 2001 for a total of 4000+ +We are already on our way to trying for 2000 more eBooks in 2002 +If they reach just 1-2% of the world's population then the total +will reach over half a trillion eBooks given away by year's end. + +The Goal of Project Gutenberg is to Give Away 1 Trillion eBooks! +This is ten thousand titles each to one hundred million readers, +which is only about 4% of the present number of computer users. + +Here is the briefest record of our progress (* means estimated): + +eBooks Year Month + + 1 1971 July + 10 1991 January + 100 1994 January + 1000 1997 August + 1500 1998 October + 2000 1999 December + 2500 2000 December + 3000 2001 November + 4000 2001 October/November + 6000 2002 December* + 9000 2003 November* +10000 2004 January* + + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been created +to secure a future for Project Gutenberg into the next millennium. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +As of February, 2002, contributions are being solicited from people +and organizations in: Alabama, Alaska, Arkansas, Connecticut, +Delaware, District of Columbia, Florida, Georgia, Hawaii, Illinois, +Indiana, Iowa, Kansas, Kentucky, Louisiana, Maine, Massachusetts, +Michigan, Mississippi, Missouri, Montana, Nebraska, Nevada, New +Hampshire, New Jersey, New Mexico, New York, North Carolina, Ohio, +Oklahoma, Oregon, Pennsylvania, Rhode Island, South Carolina, South +Dakota, Tennessee, Texas, Utah, Vermont, Virginia, Washington, West +Virginia, Wisconsin, and Wyoming. + +We have filed in all 50 states now, but these are the only ones +that have responded. + +As the requirements for other states are met, additions to this list +will be made and fund raising will begin in the additional states. +Please feel free to ask to check the status of your state. + +In answer to various questions we have received on this: + +We are constantly working on finishing the paperwork to legally +request donations in all 50 states. If your state is not listed and +you would like to know if we have added it since the list you have, +just ask. + +While we cannot solicit donations from people in states where we are +not yet registered, we know of no prohibition against accepting +donations from donors in these states who approach us with an offer to +donate. + +International donations are accepted, but we don't know ANYTHING about +how to make them tax-deductible, or even if they CAN be made +deductible, and don't have the staff to handle it even if there are +ways. + +Donations by check or money order may be sent to: + +Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +PMB 113 +1739 University Ave. +Oxford, MS 38655-4109 + +Contact us if you want to arrange for a wire transfer or payment +method other than by check or money order. + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation has been approved by +the US Internal Revenue Service as a 501(c)(3) organization with EIN +[Employee Identification Number] 64-622154. Donations are +tax-deductible to the maximum extent permitted by law. As fund-raising +requirements for other states are met, additions to this list will be +made and fund-raising will begin in the additional states. + +We need your donations more than ever! + +You can get up to date donation information online at: + +https://www.gutenberg.org/donation.html + + +*** + +If you can't reach Project Gutenberg, +you can always email directly to: + +Michael S. Hart <hart@pobox.com> + +Prof. Hart will answer or forward your message. + +We would prefer to send you information by email. + + +**The Legal Small Print** + + +(Three Pages) + +***START**THE SMALL PRINT!**FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS**START*** +Why is this "Small Print!" statement here? You know: lawyers. +They tell us you might sue us if there is something wrong with +your copy of this eBook, even if you got it for free from +someone other than us, and even if what's wrong is not our +fault. So, among other things, this "Small Print!" statement +disclaims most of our liability to you. It also tells you how +you may distribute copies of this eBook if you want to. + +*BEFORE!* YOU USE OR READ THIS EBOOK +By using or reading any part of this PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm +eBook, you indicate that you understand, agree to and accept +this "Small Print!" statement. If you do not, you can receive +a refund of the money (if any) you paid for this eBook by +sending a request within 30 days of receiving it to the person +you got it from. If you received this eBook on a physical +medium (such as a disk), you must return it with your request. + +ABOUT PROJECT GUTENBERG-TM EBOOKS +This PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook, like most PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBooks, +is a "public domain" work distributed by Professor Michael S. Hart +through the Project Gutenberg Association (the "Project"). +Among other things, this means that no one owns a United States copyright +on or for this work, so the Project (and you!) can copy and +distribute it in the United States without permission and +without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, set forth +below, apply if you wish to copy and distribute this eBook +under the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark. + +Please do not use the "PROJECT GUTENBERG" trademark to market +any commercial products without permission. + +To create these eBooks, the Project expends considerable +efforts to identify, transcribe and proofread public domain +works. Despite these efforts, the Project's eBooks and any +medium they may be on may contain "Defects". Among other +things, Defects may take the form of incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other +intellectual property infringement, a defective or damaged +disk or other eBook medium, a computer virus, or computer +codes that damage or cannot be read by your equipment. + +LIMITED WARRANTY; DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES +But for the "Right of Replacement or Refund" described below, +[1] Michael Hart and the Foundation (and any other party you may +receive this eBook from as a PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm eBook) disclaims +all liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including +legal fees, and [2] YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE OR +UNDER STRICT LIABILITY, OR FOR BREACH OF WARRANTY OR CONTRACT, +INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE +OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE +POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. + +If you discover a Defect in this eBook within 90 days of +receiving it, you can receive a refund of the money (if any) +you paid for it by sending an explanatory note within that +time to the person you received it from. If you received it +on a physical medium, you must return it with your note, and +such person may choose to alternatively give you a replacement +copy. If you received it electronically, such person may +choose to alternatively give you a second opportunity to +receive it electronically. + +THIS EBOOK IS OTHERWISE PROVIDED TO YOU "AS-IS". NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, ARE MADE TO YOU AS +TO THE EBOOK OR ANY MEDIUM IT MAY BE ON, INCLUDING BUT NOT +LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A +PARTICULAR PURPOSE. + +Some states do not allow disclaimers of implied warranties or +the exclusion or limitation of consequential damages, so the +above disclaimers and exclusions may not apply to you, and you +may have other legal rights. + +INDEMNITY +You will indemnify and hold Michael Hart, the Foundation, +and its trustees and agents, and any volunteers associated +with the production and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm +texts harmless, from all liability, cost and expense, including +legal fees, that arise directly or indirectly from any of the +following that you do or cause: [1] distribution of this eBook, +[2] alteration, modification, or addition to the eBook, +or [3] any Defect. + +DISTRIBUTION UNDER "PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm" +You may distribute copies of this eBook electronically, or by +disk, book or any other medium if you either delete this +"Small Print!" and all other references to Project Gutenberg, +or: + +[1] Only give exact copies of it. Among other things, this + requires that you do not remove, alter or modify the + eBook or this "small print!" statement. You may however, + if you wish, distribute this eBook in machine readable + binary, compressed, mark-up, or proprietary form, + including any form resulting from conversion by word + processing or hypertext software, but only so long as + *EITHER*: + + [*] The eBook, when displayed, is clearly readable, and + does *not* contain characters other than those + intended by the author of the work, although tilde + (~), asterisk (*) and underline (_) characters may + be used to convey punctuation intended by the + author, and additional characters may be used to + indicate hypertext links; OR + + [*] The eBook may be readily converted by the reader at + no expense into plain ASCII, EBCDIC or equivalent + form by the program that displays the eBook (as is + the case, for instance, with most word processors); + OR + + [*] You provide, or agree to also provide on request at + no additional cost, fee or expense, a copy of the + eBook in its original plain ASCII form (or in EBCDIC + or other equivalent proprietary form). + +[2] Honor the eBook refund and replacement provisions of this + "Small Print!" statement. + +[3] Pay a trademark license fee to the Foundation of 20% of the + gross profits you derive calculated using the method you + already use to calculate your applicable taxes. If you + don't derive profits, no royalty is due. Royalties are + payable to "Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation" + the 60 days following each date you prepare (or were + legally required to prepare) your annual (or equivalent + periodic) tax return. Please contact us beforehand to + let us know your plans and to work out the details. + +WHAT IF YOU *WANT* TO SEND MONEY EVEN IF YOU DON'T HAVE TO? +Project Gutenberg is dedicated to increasing the number of +public domain and licensed works that can be freely distributed +in machine readable form. + +The Project gratefully accepts contributions of money, time, +public domain materials, or royalty free copyright licenses. +Money should be paid to the: +"Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +If you are interested in contributing scanning equipment or +software or other items, please contact Michael Hart at: +hart@pobox.com + +[Portions of this eBook's header and trailer may be reprinted only +when distributed free of all fees. Copyright (C) 2001, 2002 by +Michael S. Hart. Project Gutenberg is a TradeMark and may not be +used in any sales of Project Gutenberg eBooks or other materials be +they hardware or software or any other related product without +express permission.] + +*END THE SMALL PRINT! FOR PUBLIC DOMAIN EBOOKS*Ver.02/11/02*END* + diff --git a/7001-8.zip b/7001-8.zip Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..8289924 --- /dev/null +++ b/7001-8.zip diff --git a/LICENSE.txt b/LICENSE.txt new file mode 100644 index 0000000..6312041 --- /dev/null +++ b/LICENSE.txt @@ -0,0 +1,11 @@ +This eBook, including all associated images, markup, improvements, +metadata, and any other content or labor, has been confirmed to be +in the PUBLIC DOMAIN IN THE UNITED STATES. + +Procedures for determining public domain status are described in +the "Copyright How-To" at https://www.gutenberg.org. + +No investigation has been made concerning possible copyrights in +jurisdictions other than the United States. Anyone seeking to utilize +this eBook outside of the United States should confirm copyright +status under the laws that apply to them. diff --git a/README.md b/README.md new file mode 100644 index 0000000..2f37ede --- /dev/null +++ b/README.md @@ -0,0 +1,2 @@ +Project Gutenberg (https://www.gutenberg.org) public repository for +eBook #7001 (https://www.gutenberg.org/ebooks/7001) |